Konica Copier 7145-7222-7228-7235 Parts & Service

SERVICE MANUAL
Models
7145/7222/7228/7235
APRIL 2004
CSM-7145/7222/7228/7235
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A., INC.
manuals4you.com
7145/7222/7228/7235
SERVICE MANUAL
APRIL 2004
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
I OUTLINE
CONTENTS
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13
List of major differences between the 7145, 7235, 7228 and 7222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
List of options corresponding to the 7145/7235/7228/7222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
OUTLINE
1. OUTLINE OF SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
A.
Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
B.
C.
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Copy paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
D.
E.
Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
F.
G.
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
3. CENTER CROSS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

4. DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
4.1
4.2
Drum drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Cleaning/Developer agitation drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
4.3
4.4
Fixing/Paper exit section/IT-101/RU-101 drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Developing drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
4.5
Paper feed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

4.5.1
4.5.2
Drive from paper feed motor to loop clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Tray 1 drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
4.5.3
4.5.4
Tray 2 drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Bypass feed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
4.5.5 Registration clutch drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

4.6 ADU drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
4.7
4.8
Scanner drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Toner supply drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
manuals4you.com
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
II UNIT EXPLANATION
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
CONTENTS
II
UNIT EXPLANATION
I OUTLINE
1. SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.1
1.2
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
II UNIT EXPLANATION
1.2.1
Initial operation when power is turned on and shading correction reading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
1.2.2
Original reading mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
1.2.3
Original read control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
1.2.4
APS control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
1.2.5
AE control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
1.2.6
Image processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2. WRITE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.1 Image writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.2.2 Write control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

3. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.1
3.2
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
3.2.1 Image formation timing (when copying two sheets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

4. DEVELOPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
4.1
4.2
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
4.2.1
4.2.2
Developing control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Control of toner density in the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
5. TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

5.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
5.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
5.2.1 Toner supply control when the toner level in the toner supply section gets reduced . . . . . 2-18
5.2.2 Toner supply control when toner density in the developing unit gets reduced . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
6. PAPER FEED UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
6.1
6.2
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
6.2.1
6.2.2
Tray up drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Paper feed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
6.2.3
6.2.4
Remaining paper detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Paper size detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
7. FIXING UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

7.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
7.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
7.2.1 Fixing temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
7.2.2 Cleaning web control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

8. ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
8.1
8.2
Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
8.2.1
8.2.2
Switching control of the paper exit/ADU conveyance path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

ADU conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
8.2.3
Paper reverse control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

ii
CONTENTS
9. INTERFACE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
10.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

11. OTHER CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
11.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
I OUTLINE
9.1
10. NETWORK SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
11.2 Components operated when the power switch is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

11.2.1 Components operated when the SW1 (Main power switch) is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
11.3.2 Fan operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

11.4 Operation unit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
11.4.1 Composition of operation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
11.5 Counter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
11.5.1 Counter composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
11.5.2 Counter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
III DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERNAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1 Replacing the ozone filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.2 Replacing the filter cover assembly and suction filter/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
2. DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
2.1
2.2
Removing and reinstalling the motor units (main, fixing, feed, developing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Replacing the registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
2.3
2.4
Replacing the loop clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Removing the ribbon cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
2.5 Reinstalling the ribbon cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

3. SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.1
3.2
Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Adjusting the angle of the operation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3
3.4
Removing the operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Removing the platen glass/slit glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.5
3.6
Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Replacing the exposure lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.7
3.8
Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Removing the optics wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.9 Installing the optics wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

4. WRITE UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
4.1 Removing and reinstalling the write unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
5. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
5.1
5.2
Removing and reinstalling the drum unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Removing and reinstalling the charging corona unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
5.3
5.4
Removing and reinstalling the charge control plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Replacing the charging wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
5.5
5.6
Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Removing and reinstalling the separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
iii
manuals4you.com
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
11.3.1 Composition of the cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
II UNIT EXPLANATION
11.2.2 Components operated when the SW2 (Sub power switch) is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
11.3 Fan control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
CONTENTS
5.7
Removing and reinstalling the transfer and separation corona unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
5.8
Replacing the transfer and separation wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
I OUTLINE
6. DEVELOPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

6.1
Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
6.2
6.3
Removing and reinstalling the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Replacing the developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
II UNIT EXPLANATION
7. TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

7.1
Removing and reinstalling the toner bottle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
7.2
Removing and reinstalling the toner supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
7.3
Removing and reinstalling the cleaning blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
8. PAPER FEED UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

8.1
Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
8.2
8.3
Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Replacing the paper feed rubber and the feed rubber (tray 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
8.4
Replacing the double feed prevention rubber (tray 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
8.5
8.6
Replacing the paper feed rubber and the feed rubber (tray 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Replacing the double feed prevention rubber (tray 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
9.1
9.2
Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Replacing the fixing heater lamps/1, /2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
9.3
9.4
Removing and reinstalling the fixing claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Replacing the fixing web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
9.5
Removing and reinstalling the fixing heat roller, fixing pressure roller,
heat insulating sleeve/A, /B, fixing idling gear/B, fixing bearing/U, /L,
fixing heater lamp/1, /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
9.6
9.7
Removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64

Removing and reinstalling the Fuse mounting plate assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
manuals4you.com
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8.7 Cleaning the paper dust removing brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

9. FIXING UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
iv
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND

CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions DANGER, WARNING, and
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
CAUTION is defined
When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier.

:Prohibition when using the copier.
:Direction when using the copier.
General precaution
Electric hazard
High temperature
General prohibition
Do not touch with wet hand
Do not disassemble
General instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
S-1
manuals4you.com
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1]
MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical
aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For
this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT
Using parts not specified by KMBT
S-2
[2]
CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Konica Minolta brand copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of
injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order
to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1.Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet

Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
kw
If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to
observe the following precautions:
a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket
on the rear panel of the copier.
Secure the cord with a fixture properly.
b.
If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
S-3
manuals4you.com

Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.
Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.
WARNING: Ground Lead

Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-4

Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)
2.Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: Nonoperational Handling

When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity

Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat
source such as a heater.
A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.
Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:
Temperature: 10C to 30C
Humidity: 10% to 80% (no dew condensation)
Avoid other environments as much as possible.
CAUTION: Ventilation
Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette
smoke, or ammonia gas.
Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems
and image faults.
S-5
manuals4you.com
The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to
install the copier in a level and sturdy place.
Constant vibration will cause problems.
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.
Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from
the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
S-6

Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the
copier.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.
(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)
Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make
sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.
Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7
manuals4you.com

After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
S-8
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
[3]
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency
measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried
out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site
checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in Serious Accident
Report/Follow-up Procedures.
[4]
CONCLUSION
1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration.
Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer
engineer.
2. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must
verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
S-9
manuals4you.com
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS
[2]
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits

to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious acci-
overheating prevention circuit
dents.
[1]
Overall protection circuit
[2]
L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamp/1, /2) overheat-
L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamp/1, /2)
DCPS
TS
RL1
ing prevention circuit
them in order to prevent servicing errors that may
L3
TH1
impair their functions.
[1]
RL1
TH2
the service engineer with a renewed awareness of
L2
CB
These safety circuits are described below to provide
Control
section
AC driver
section
FCB
CBR1
1.
The output voltage from TH1, TH2 (fixing tem-
DCPS
perature sensor/1, /2) is read by the CPU. If

this voltage is abnormal, L2 (fixing heater
CBR2
1.
Protection by software
lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2) and RL1

(main relay) are turned OFF.
Protection by CBR1 and CBR2 (circuit

breaker/1, /2)
CAUTION:
The RL1 function must not be deactivated
CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instanta-
under any circumstances.
neously when an excessive current flows due

to a short in the AC line.
CAUTION:
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not
be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
manuals4you.com

2.
Protection by the hardware circuit

The output voltages from TH1, TH2 (fixing temperature sensor/1, /2) are compared with the
abnormality judgment reference value in the
comparator circuit. If the output voltage from
TH1 or TH2 exceeds the reference value, L2
(fixing heater lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2)
and RL1 (main relay) are turned OFF in hardware means.
CAUTION:
Periodically check the TH1, TH2 face
contacting the roller, and replace TH2 if
any abnormality is detected.
3.
Protection by TS (thermostat)
When the fixing heat roller exceeds the specified value, TSs (thermostats) are turned OFF,
thus interrupting the power to L2 (fixing heater
lamp/1), and L3 (fixing heater lamp/2) directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor
in place of TS1 and TS2.
S-12
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns
and electric shock.
[1]
Main body
1.
Right side
<7145>
CAUTION
The fixing unit is very hot.
To avoid getting burned
DO NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION
This area generates
high voltage.
If touched, electrical
shock may occur.
DO NOT TOUCH!
(Inside of the main

body front door)
CAUTION
(Inside of the main
body right side door)
The roller shaft on the inside

of the cover is very hot.
To avoid getting burned DO
NOT TOUCH.
If the cover comes off, return
it to its original position.
7322sf001e
CAUTION
You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any caution label to keep yourself away from.
Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot
be read, contact our Service Office.
S-13
manuals4you.com

<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf002e
CAUTION
S-14

2.
Front side
<7145>
7322sf003e
CAUTION
S-15
manuals4you.com

<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf004e
CAUTION
S-16

3.
Rear/Left side (7235/7228/7222 only)
7322sf005e
CAUTION
S-17
manuals4you.com

4.
Scanner section
<7145>
7322sf006
CAUTION
S-18

<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf007e
CAUTION
S-19
manuals4you.com
[2]
FS-113
CAUTION
This area is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
(Inside of the Finisher)
CAUTION
To avoid injury, DO NOT put your hand on the top
of the printed sheets. Be sure to hold both sides
of the printed sheets when removing them, and
DO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets
while the primary (main) tray goes up.
[3]
FS-113 Finisher
7322sf009
FS-114
FS-114 Finisher
7322sf010
CAUTION
S-20
List of major differences between the 7145, 7235, 7228 and 7222
Classification
Warmup time
First copy out time
(8.5x11)
Continuous copy
speed (8.5x11)
7145
7235
7228
Less than
Less than
Less than
3.8 sec.
4.3 sec.
45 sheets/min.
35 sheets/min.
Specifications
22 sheets/min.
Optional
Standard
Paper exit tray
Machine dimensions
(with DF and DB)
Optional
Standard
23.2in (W)
x
23.4in (D)
x
23.4in (W) x 25.8in (D) x 44.6in (H)
42.6in (H)
Maintenance
Once every
Toner
Exclusively
for 7145
Materials
Exclusively
for 7145
Flywheel
Once every 100,000 copies
120,000 copies
Developer
Drum
Drive section
28 sheets/min.
Standard
ADU
Scanner
section
Less than 4.9 sec.
320MB
memory
Write section
Reason
Less than 19 sec.
30 sec.
Maximum E-RDH
DF
7222
Exclusively for 7235/7228/7222

Exclusively for
7235 (Common
to 7135)
Exclusively
Exclusively for 7228/7222

(Common to 7022/7120/7135)
for 7145
f 103mm
f 132mm
Developing sleeve
drive
Developing
motor
Main motor
Vibration insulator
Not provided
Provided
Not provided
Scanner drive board
Provided
Not provided
Laser
2 beams
1 beam
Number of rotations
of polygon motor
Polygon cooling
Change of
specifications
27,165rpm
38,976rpm
Not provided
Provided
manuals4you.com
33,070rpm
Not provided
Change of
CPM
Change of
specifications
ADU/Paper
exit section
Fixing
section
Classification
7145
7235
Exclusively
Fixing unit
Provided
Not provided
ADU drive board
Not provided
Provided
Developing motor
Provided
Not provided
Control
Electrical parts
ADU motor
Provided
Fixing cooling fan
Provided
Internal cooling fan/2
Provided
Polygon cooling fan
Not provided
Not provided
Not provided
Provided
Not provided
ADU gate solenoid
Provided
ADU sensor
Provided
Timing sensor/U
Provided
Not provided
Timing sensor/L
Provided
Not provided
Overall control
Exclusively
for 7145
Image control
Exclusively
for 7235
om
ou.c
y
4
s
l
a
nu
ma
2
7222
Reason
for 7145
Decurler roller
7228
Exclusively
for 7228
Exclusively
for 7222
Change of
specifications
List of options corresponding to the 7145/7235/7228/7222

Optional
RADF
Finisher
7145
7235
7228
DF-318
Standard
Not corresponding
DF-320
Not corresponding
Corresponding
Corresponding
Not corresponding
FS-112
FT-107
7222
FS-113
RU-101
FS-114
Corresponding
BK-114
PK-114
SK-114
Paper exit tray
ET-101
Inner tray
IT-101
Desk
DK-110
DB
DB-211
Corresponding
Corresponding*1
Corresponding
Not corresponding
Corresponding
DB-411
LCT
Corresponding
LT-203
ADU
AD-307
Post script
PS-344
Corresponding
Standard
Not corresponding
PS-346
Not corresponding
Corresponding
Printer
controller
IP-432
Corresponding
Not corresponding
IP-424
Not corresponding
Corresponding
FAX controll
board
FK-102 Type-A
Corresponding
Not corresponding
FK-103
Not corresponding
Corresponding
2 lines
FL-102
Corresponding
Not corresponding
expansion kit
FL-103
Not corresponding
Corresponding
Hard disk
HD-103 Type-A
Total counter
Corresponding
Standard
Corresponding
Key counter
*1
Corresponding
A paper exit tray is provided as standard equipment that is different from ET-101. When ET-101 is provided, it is integrated into the main body as seen from the point of design.
manuals4you.com
Blank Page
OUTLINE OF SYSTEM
OUTLINE
I OUTLINE
1. OUTLINE OF SYSTEM
[16]
[15] [14]
[19]
[10]
[13]
[12]
[1]
[18]
[11]
[9]
[8]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[17]
[2]
7322ma1001
1-1
manuals4you.com
I OUTLINE
OUTLINE OF SYSTEM
RADF (DF-318: 7145 provided as a standard equipment)
[1]
[2]
Main body
LCT (LT-203)
[10]
[3]
LCT DB (DB-411)
[11]
Paper exit tray (ET-101)*1
[4]
2-Tray DB (DB-211)
[12]
Finisher (FS-114)
[5]
Conveyance unit (RU-101)
[13]
Additional tray (BK-114)
[6]
Finisher (FS-113)
[14]
Punch kit (PK-114)
[7]
Inner tray (IT-101)
[15]
Crease unit (included in SK-114)
[8]
Finisher tray (FT-107: FS-112)
[16]
Saddle unit (SK-114)
[9]
Finisher (FS-112: 7145 only)
[17]
Desk (DK-110: 7235/7228/7222 only)
[18]
ADU (provided as a standard equipment)
[19]
Platen cover (CV-109: 7235/7228/7222 only)
*1
(DF-320: 7235/7228/7222)
As a standard equipment, the 7235/7228/7222 are provided with a paper exit tray that is different from
the one with which the ET-101 is equipped.
[7]
[6] [5]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[4]
[3]
7145ma1020
[1]
Postscript (PS-344: 7145)
[6]
Hard disk (HD-103 Type-A)
(PS-346: 7235/7228/7222)
Printer controller (IP-432: 7145)
[7]
[2]
Total counter
(7145 provided as standard equipment)
[3]
2 line expansion kit (shipments only to the
(IP-424: 7235/7228/7222)
(In the case of the 7235/7228/7222, shipments only to the United States are pro-
United States and

Oceania)
[8]
vided with the total counter.)

Key counter
(FL-102:FK-102 Type-A)
[9]
Expansion memory for the printer controller
(FL-103:FK-103)
(Not displayed here. For details, see the

Service Manual of the controller.)
[4]
Fax control board(FK-102 Type-A: 7145)

(FK-103: 7235/7228/7222)
[5]
E-RDH expansion memory (MU-404: 64MB/MU-405: 128MB)
1-2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Type:
Semi-console type (7145)
Copying method:
Indirect electrostatic method
Original table:
Fixed
Original alignment:
Photosensitive material:
Left rear standard

OPC
I OUTLINE
A. Type
Desk-top type (7235/7228/7222)
Sensitizing method:
Laser writing
Paper feed trays:
Two trays (500 sheets x 2, 80g/m2 or 20lbs)

Multisheet bypass tray (50 sheets, 80g/m2)
DB-211 (500 sheets x 2, 80g/m2 or 20lbs) *1
DB-411 (1500 sheets, 80g/m2 or 20lbs) *1
LT-203 (2000 sheets, 80g/m2 or 20lbs) *1
*1
Optional
B. Functions
Original:
Sheet, book, solid object (Thickness: up to 1.2in. Weight: up to 15lbs)
Maximum original size:

Copy size (for metric area):
A3, or 11 x 17
Tray 1:
Tray 2:
B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, F4
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, F4
Bypass tray:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, B6R, 8.5 x 11R (7145 only),
8.5 x 11 (except the 7145), F4 (except the 7145)
ADU:
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 14, 5.5
x 8.5R, F4
Copy size (for inch area):

Tray 1:
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, F4, B4R (7145 only), A4, A4R,
Tray 2:
B5, A5R
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, F4, A3, A4, A4R, A5R
Bypass tray:
ADU:
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, A4

11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, A3, B4 (7145 only), A4,
A4R, B5, A5R, F4
Magnification:
Fixed magnification (for metric area):
x 1.00, x 1.41, x 1.22, x 1.15, x 0.86, x 0.82, x 0.71
Fixed magnification (for inch area):
x 1.00, x 2.00, x 1.55, x 1.29, x 0.77, x 0.65, x 0.50
Special ratio:
Zoom magnification:
Three kinds
x 0.25 to x 4.00 (at 1% step)
Vertical magnification:
Horizontal magnification:
x 0.25 to x 4.00 (at 1% step)

x 0.25 to x 4.00 (at 1% step)
1-3
manuals4you.com
Warm-up time:
Less than 30 sec. (7145)
(at temperature of 68F,
Less than 19 sec. (7235/7228/7222)
I OUTLINE
at rated voltage)
First copy out time:
Less than 3.8 sec. (7145)

Less than 4.3 sec. (7235)
Less than 4.9 sec. (7228/7222)
* platen mode, manual density, life size, tray 1, paper exit with face down,
A4 or 8.5 x 11
Continuous copy speed:
45 copies/min. (7145)
(A4 or 8.5 x 11,
in memory copy)
Continuous copy count:

No. of sheets loadable
on the paper exit tray:
Copy density selection:
Resolution:
Scan:
Write:
ERDH memory *1:
Interface section:
Network section:
Up to 999
Up to 100 (8.5x11)
AE, manual (9 steps), arbitrary density (2 modes)
600 dpi x 600 dpi
600 dpi x 600 dpi
Standard 64MB, Maximum 320MB
Serial port (USB TypeB), Serial port (RS-232C), RJ45 Ethernet connector,
Parallel port (IEEE1284 (Compatible, Nible, ECP))
Ethernet frame type:
IEEE 802.3/802.3/Ethernet II/
Connecting type:
Corresponding protocol:
Corresponding OS:
IEEE 802.3 SNAP

10 Base-T/100 Base-TX
TCP/IP (BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP,
SNMP, HTTP, SMTP, POP3, FTP, IPP),
IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (EtherTalk),
Novell NetWare (3.x, 4.x, 5.x), Microsoft
Windows 95/98/Me, Microsoft Windows
NT4.0/2000/XP, Mac OS8.x and later,
Mac OS10.2.5
Automatic discrimination
Multi-protocol:
Corresponding printing method: Peer-to-Peer (TCP/IP), LPD/LPR (TCP/

IP), PServer (IPX/SPX), RPrinter (IPX,
*1
General purpose utility:
SPX), AppleTalk (EtherTalk)

Web
browser
(Internet
Status indicator LED:
Netscape Navigator)
Green LED and orange LED, one for
Explorer,
each
Since the standard 64MB memory is packaged on the board, it is not possible to replace it with a new
one.
Only one slot is provided for expansion. It can be installed with MU-404 (64MB), MU-405 (128MB), or
256MB (commercially available).
For 256MB (commercially available), be sure to use those of make and model No. specified separately.
1-4
Original:
Konica standard chart
Density:
Manual 5
Mode:
Character/photograph
Memory capacity:
Job:
64MB (provided only as standard)

Job in mode with page memory not used
C. Copy Paper
Plain paper:
60g/m2 or 17lbs to 105g/m2 or 28lbs, high-quality paper
Special paper *1
Label paper, OHP film, blueprint-master paper, 50g/m2 or 13lbs to 59g/m2

or 16lbs high-quality paper (thin), 106g/m2 or 28lbs to 130g/m2 or 35lbs
high-quality paper (thick1), 131g/m2 or 35lbs to 160g/m2 or 43lbs highquality paper (thick2 *2)
*1
With bypass feed method, paper should be fed one sheet at a time. Double sided copy not allowed.
*2
Only bypass feed.
D. Machine Data
Power source:
230VAC 14% to 10.6% 50Hz/60Hz

120VAC 14% to 6% 60Hz
Power consumption:
Weight:
Maximum 1500W or less (fully optional)

Approximately 183lbs (with DF provided)
Dimensions:
7145: 23.2in (W) x 23.4in (D) x 42.6in (H) (with DF + DB)

7235/7228/7222: 23.4in (W) x 25.8in (D) x 44.6in (H) (with DF + DB)
E. Maintenance
Maintenance:
Once every 120,000 copies (7145)

Once every 100,000 copies (7235/7228/7222)
F. Consumables
Developer:
Exclusively for 7145
Toner:

Exclusively for 7145
Exclusively for 7235 (Common to 7135)
Exclusively for 7228/7222 (Common to 7022/7120/7130)
Drum:
Exclusively for 7145 ( 60)

Exclusively for 7235/7228/7222 ( 60)
1-5
manuals4you.com
I OUTLINE
Number of originals to be stored:More than 140 sheets under the following conditions:
I OUTLINE
G. Operating Environment
Temperature:
10C to 30C (50F to 86F)
Humidity:
10% RH to 80% RH
Note:
The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
1-6
CENTER CROSS SECTION
[18]
[19]
I OUTLINE
3. CENTER CROSS SECTION

[20]
[17]
[16]
[1]
[2]
[15]
[3]
[4]
[14]
[5]
[6]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[7]
[8]
[10]
[9]
7322ma1002
[1]
Fixing unit
[10]
DB
[2]
[3]
Drum unit
Separation corona unit
[11]
[12]
Developing unit
Tray 2
[4]
Transfer corona unit
[13]
Tray 1
[5]
[6]
ADU unit
Bypass tray
[7]
Paper feed path for making a double-sided

copy (DB unprovided)
[16]
[17]
Toner bottle
Scanner unit
[8]
Paper feed path for making a double-sided

copy (DB provided)
[18]
[19]
V-mirror unit
Exposure unit
[9]
DB paper feed path
[20]
CCD unit
[14] Charging corona unit

[15] Cleaning/toner recycling unit
1-7
manuals4you.com
DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM
I OUTLINE
4. DRIVE SYSTEM DIAGRAM

4.1
Drum Drive
[1]
[2]
[1]
4.2
M1 (Main motor)
[2]
Drum drive shaft
Cleaning/Developer Agitation Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
M1 (Main motor)
[2]
Cleaning/toner recycling unit drive
[3]
1-8
Developer agitation drive
Fixing/Paper Exit Section/IT-101/RU-101 Drive

[5]
[4]
I OUTLINE
4.3
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
IT-101
M11 (Fixing motor)
[3]
Fixing unit drive
4.4
[4]
[5]
Paper exit drive

Drive coupling for IT-101 and RU-101
Developing Drive
In the case of the 7145
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Developing sleeve
[3]
M3 (Developing motor)
[2]
Developing unit
[4]
Drum drive shaft
1-9
manuals4you.com

In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
I OUTLINE
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
7322ma1003
[1]
M1 (Main motor)
[3]
Developing unit
[2]
Developing sleeve
[4]
Drum drive shaft
4.5
4.5.1
Paper Feed Drive

Drive from paper feed motor to loop clutch
[1]
[2]
[1]
MC2 (Loop clutch)
[2]
1-10
M9 (Paper feed motor)

Tray 1 drive
[4]
[5]
I OUTLINE
4.5.2
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
SD1 (1st paper feed solenoid/U)
[4]
Driven when SD1
[2]
[3]
Conveyance roller
MC2 (Loop clutch)
[5]
(1st paper feed solenoid/U) is on.

Feed roller
4.5.3
Tray 2 drive
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
MC2 (Loop clutch)
[2]
[3]
Feed roller
SD2 (1st paper feed solenoid/L)
[4]
Driven when SD2
[5]
(1st paper feed solenoid/L) is on.

Conveyance roller
1-11
manuals4you.com

Bypass feed drive
I OUTLINE
4.5.4
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
MC2 (Loop clutch)
[3]
SD3 (Bypass solenoid)
[2]
Conveyance roller
[4]
[5]
Driven when SD3 (Bypass solenoid) is on.

Paper feed roller
[2]
MC1 (Registration clutch)
4.5.5
Registration clutch drive
[2]
[1]
[1]
1-12
ADU Drive
[9]
[8]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
M1 (Main motor)
Timing belt
[5]
[6]
ADU roller
ADU conveyance roller/2
[3]
[4]

M6 (ADU motor)
[7]
[8]
Decurler roller
[9]
M11 (Fixing motor)
1-13
manuals4you.com
I OUTLINE
4.6
I OUTLINE
4.7
Scanner Drive
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Optical wire/R
Optical wire/F
[3]
V-mirror unit
[4]
[5]
1-14
Exposure unit
M2 (Scanner motor)
Toner Supply Drive

I OUTLINE
4.8
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
Toner agitation plate
[4]
M4 (Toner supply motor 1)
[2]
[3]
Toner conveyance screw

SD9 (Toner solenoid)
[5]
1-15
manuals4you.com
I OUTLINE
Blank page
1-16
SCANNER SECTION
II
UNIT EXPLANATION
1. SCANNER SECTION
1.1
Composition
7235/7228/7222
[8]
[9] [10]
[11]
[12]
CB
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[7]
7145
SCDB
CB
SCB
[6]
[5]
[4]
Symbol
Name
[1]
INV1 (Exposure lamp inverter)
[3]
[2]
[1]
7322ma2001e
Function or method
L1 (Exposure lamp) turn on
[2]
[3]
PS17 (APS sensor)

ADB (A/D converter board)
Detection of original size in the direction of sub-scanning

Digital conversion of analog signal
[4]
[5]
CCD unit
Exposure unit
Photoelectric conversion of read image (600dpi)

Image reading
Light source slit exposure
Scan speed
Forward: 230mm/sec. (in 1:1 magnification)
Backward: 383mm/sec.
[6]
Optical wire
Transmission of driving force from M2 to the exposure unit and

the V-mirror unit (front and rear)
[7]
[8]
V-mirror unit
PS14 (Scanner HP sensor)
Reflection of reading light (2nd and 3rd mirrors)

Exposure unit HP detection
[9]
L1 (Exposure lamp)
Light source for reading image,

Xenon lamp
[10]
L1INVB (Power supply board

for exposure lamp)
Relay board for INV1 (Exposure lamp inverter) and L1 (Exposure lamp)
[11]
M2 (Scanner motor)
Driving of the optical wire used to move the exposure unit and
the V-mirror unit
[12]
PS15 (APS timing sensor)
Three-phase step motor

RADF open/close detection
2-1
manuals4you.com
SCANNER SECTION
1.2
1.2.1
Operation
Initial operation when power is turned on and shading correction reading
When the SW2 (Sub power switch) comes on, the exposure unit starts a home position search. At this
time, the exposure unit uses the white reference plate attached on the back side of the original pressing
board for shading correction. However, two places on the white reference plate are read for correction.
The search procedure differs depending on whether the PS14 (Scanner HP sensor) is on or off while the
II UNIT EXPLANATION
SW2 is on.
A. Home position search when the PS14 is turned on
[4] [3] [2]
[1]
7322ma2015
[1]
Exposure unit standby position
[3]
Shading correction position 1
[2]
PS14
[4]
B. Home position search when PS14 is turned off
[4] [3] [2]
[1]
manuals4you.com
7322ma2016
[1]
[3]
[2]
PS14
[4]
1.2.2
Original reading mode
The following two modes are available for original reading; platen mode and DF mode. In platen mode, the
exposure unit moves as necessary to scan the original for reading. In DF mode, the RADF side moves the
original while the exposure unit stays fixed in a specified position (DF reading position).
2-2
SCANNER SECTION
A. Exposure unit movement in platen mode
In platen mode, the scan sequence depends on the copy density selection (either AE or manual).
(1) In manual density copy:
[5]
[4] [3] [2] [6]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
PS14
[4]
[5]
Position at which the approach run of the
[6]
exposure unit is started

Position at which the reading of an image
II UNIT EXPLANATION
7322ma2017
is started
Note:
When the tray 1 is selected manually, but not in APS, the shading operation is not executed.
(2) In AE copy:
[6]
[5] [4] [3] [7]
[1]
[2]
7322ma2018
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
AE scanning range
PS14
[6]
Position at which the approach run of the

exposure unit is started
[4]
[7]
Position at which the reading of an image

is started
B. Exposure unit movement in DF mode
[5]
[4] [3] [2]
[1]
7322ma2019
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
PS14
[5]
DF reading position
2-3
manuals4you.com
SCANNER SECTION
1.2.3
Original read control
The light from the exposure lamp reflects back from the original, passes through a lens, and hits the CCD
sensor. The CCD sensor generates an electric signal (analog signal) corresponding to the light intensity.
Then, according to the instruction from the SCB (System control board), the ADB (A/D conversion board)
converts this signal into a digital signal.
A. Original read timing
II UNIT EXPLANATION
(1) Platen mode, when the manual density is being set
[2]
M2 (Scanner motor)
[5]
F
R
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
START button (ON)
[4]
Position at which reading of the original starts
[2]
Exposure lamp (forward)
[5]
Exposure scanning (backward)
[3]
Position to which the exposure unit starts
(2) Platen mode, when the AE density is being set
[2]
M2 (Scanner motor)
[5]
[6]
[8]
F
R
[1] [3]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[1]
START button (ON)
[5]
AE scanning (backward)
[2]
[3]
AE scanning (forward)
Position to which the exposure unit starts
[6]
[7]
Exposure lamp (forward)

Position at which reading of the original
[4]
Position at which reading of the AE density

started
[8]
starts
Exposure scanning (backward)
2-4
SCANNER SECTION
B. Original read timing (DF mode) *1
[2]
M2 (Scanner motor)
[4]
F
R

R 250mm/s
(Original feed motor)
II UNIT EXPLANATION
M301
F 230mm/s
460mm/s
F 230mm/s
M302
(Original conveyance motor)
460mm/s
[3]
PS308 (Original registration sensor)
[5]
[1]
[6]
[1]
START button (ON)
[4]
Exposure conveyance
[2]
DF reading position
[5]
Position at which reading of the original starts.
[3]
Position to which the original has been
[6]
Starting point from the DF reading position
conveyed in the specified distance.

*1
to the home position (exposure unit).
In the DF mode, the operation when the manual density setting and the AE density setting is the same.
1.2.4
APS control
The APS control is carried out at close detection of the RADF, and controlled by the CB (Main body control
board), based on signals from the PS17 (APS sensor) and the CCD sensor. (For APS control by the
RADF, see DF service manual.)
A. APS operation
The PS17 (APS sensor) detects the original size in the sub scanning direction, while the CCD sensor
detects the original size in the main scanning direction.
B. Relationship between each of the sensors and the original size
Original size
CCD sensor
(Length of detection: mm)
PS17
(ON/OFF)
A3
297
ON
11 x 17
279.4
ON
B4
257
ON
2-5
manuals4you.com
SCANNER SECTION
II UNIT EXPLANATION
Original size
*1
CCD sensor
PS17
(Length of detection: mm)
(ON/OFF)
8.5 x 14 *1
215.9
ON
8.5 x 11R
215.9
Metric system: ON
Inch system: OFF
A4R
210
Metric system: ON
Inch system: OFF
A4
297
OFF
8.5 x 11
279.4
OFF
B5R
257
OFF
A5R
210
OFF
B5
182
OFF
A5
148
OFF
5.5 x 8.5
139.7
OFF
B6
128
OFF
Postcard
102
OFF
8.5 x 14 cannot be distinguished from 8.5 x 11R, and is detected as 8.5 x 11R.
C. APS detection timing
(1) Platen mode (when the RADF is closed)
[1]
[2]
PS17 (APS sensor)

PS303 (DF open/close sensor)
[1]
1st original size detection
[2]
2nd original size detection
[2]
START button (ON)
(2) Platen mode (when the RADF is open)
[1]
PS17 (APS sensor)
[2]
[1]
Original size detection
2-6
SCANNER SECTION
1.2.5
AE control
During AE scan, the CCD sensor provided on the ADB (A/D conversion board) reads the density level of
the original. The CPU on the SCB (System control board) process the data and, based on the results,
selects the correction curve that will best reproduce the original.
A. AE sampling range
(1) While in platen copying
Based on the original size recognized in the APS or out-of-original erasure mode, the range excepting
10mm in front and in rear.
Sub-scanning direction
The range of 30mm from the leading edge of the original. However, the range excepting L/100mm in
left and right when the length of the original is L mm.
[3]
10 mm
[1]
[2]
10 mm
L mm
100
L mm
100
30 mm
L mm
[1]
Original
[2]
Leading edge of original
[3]
2-7
manuals4you.com
AE sampling range
II UNIT EXPLANATION
Main scanning direction
SCANNER SECTION
(2) While in DF copying
Main scanning direction
Based on the original size recognized in the APS, the range excepting 20mm in front and in rear.
Sub-scanning direction
The range between 1.5mm and 2.9mm from the leading edge of the original.
[3]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
20 mm
[1]
[2]
20 mm
1.5 mm
1.4 mm
2.9 mm
[1]
[2]
1.2.6
Original
Leading edge of original
[3]
AE sampling range
Image processing
A. AOC (Automatic offset control)

The analog offset voltage for the CCD sensor output is automatically adjusted by IC on the ADB (A/D
conversion board) so that this level becomes the lower limit for the A/D converter.
B. AGC (Automatic gain control)
The analog amplification for the CCD sensor output is automatically adjusted so that the CCD sensor
output level in the shading white correction becomes the upper limit for the A/D converter.
C. Shading correction
(1) Types of the shading correction
White correction
Black correction
(2) Execution timing

At SW2 (Sub power switch) ON
At the start of scan job
D. Other image processing

(1) Brightness/density conversion
(2) Text/dot pattern judgement
(3) Filtering
(4) Magnification change processing
(5) Error diffusion processing
(6) Data compression/elongation processing
2-8
WRITE UNIT
2. WRITE UNIT
Composition
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8] [9] [10]
[11]
[1]
SCB
II UNIT EXPLANATION
2.1
CB
7235 only
FM7
[2]
[4]
Symbol
Name
[3]
7322ma2002
Function or method
[1]
[2]
Index lens
INDEX (Index sensor board)
Converging of laser beams reflected from the index mirror

Control of the laser write position in the main scanning direction
[3]
Polygon mirror
Laser beam scanning

Hexahedron, 27,165rpm (7145) /38,976rpm (7235) /
[4]
M5 (Polygon motor)
Polygon mirror drive

DC brushless motor, PLL control
[5]
LDB (LD drive board)
Laser emission drive

1-chip/2-beam system, 15mW 780mm (7145)
[6]
Collimator lens
[7]
[8]
Cylindrical lens 1
Index mirror
Correction of the laser path against error in the angle of the polygon mirror
[9]
[10]
f lens
Cylindrical lens 2
Unified laser scanning speed against the laser irradiation surface on the drum
Correction of the laser path against error in the angle of the polygon mirror
Dust-proof glass
Polygon cooling fan
Preventive measure for keeping the interior of the write unit clean
Cooling of the M5 (Polygon motor)
33,071rpm (7228/7222)
[11]
FM7*1
*1
1-chip/1-beam system, 5mW 780mm (Except the 7145)

Making diffused laser beam parallel
Reflection of laser beam upon the INDEX (Index senror board)
7235 only
2-9
manuals4you.com
WRITE UNIT
2.2
Operation
2.2.1
Image writing
The image data from the CCD sensor is converted into digital form by the ADB (A/D conversion board),
and its image processing is then carried out on the SCB (System control board). Based on the processed
image data, the image is written onto the drum by the laser beam output from the LDB (LD drive board).
II UNIT EXPLANATION
2.2.2
Write control
A. Dot diameter adjustment

The sensor on the toner control sensor board detects the patch image density on the drum, and the
LDB (LD drive board) controls the quantity of laser beam so that its output value becomes the specified value.
(1) Timing for execution
a. While in copying
b.
Executed once for every 20 copies added up. However, when 20 copies are added up in the middle of
the job, the execution is made at the time of completion of the job.
Anytime other than while in copying
While in the L inspection

When the drum counter is reset
When the sub power is turned on. However, this is subject to the settings 6 and 7 of the DIPSW16 in
the 25 mode.
B. APC (Automatic power control)

The LDB (LD drive board) monitors the laser output value for every one scan, and maintains the laser
beam quantity at the fixed level by driving the laser so that it becomes the output value set for the dot
diameter adjustment.
C. Write timing
The SCB (System control board) uses a laser detection signal from the INDEX (Index sensor board) to
determine the starting point for laser writing for every one scan in the drum shaft direction.
2-10
DRUM UNIT
3. DRUM UNIT
3.1
Composition
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[6]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
SD7
M1
CB
HV
[5]
Symbol
[4]
[3]
[2]
Name
[1]
TCSB
Function or method
[1]
TSL
Separation support
(Transfer synchronization lamp) LED
[2]
Transfer corona unit
Transfer of toner from the drum to paper

DC positive corona discharge *1
Wire discharge: Tungsten wire with oxide film ( 0.06mm)
With manual wire cleaning mechanism provided
[3]
Paper entrance guide plate
Constant current DC output range: 0 to 350 A

Conveyance guide for paper supplied
High voltage applied to prevent toner adhesion: -500VDC
(constant voltage)
[4]
Drum
Image formation base

OPC drum ( 60mm)
[5]
Developing unit
Formation of a toner image on the drum

(See 4. Developing unit.)
[6]
Charging corona unit
Application of electric charge on the drum surface

DC corona discharge (Scotron)
Wire discharge: Gold-plated skin-pass tungsten wire
( 0.06mm)
Constant current DC output range: -320 to -1000 A
Grid bias: Charging control plate
Constant current DC output range: -450 to -1090V
2-11
manuals4you.com
DRUM UNIT
Symbol
Name
Function or method
[7]
PCL
(Pre-charging exposure lamp)
Erasure of potential on the drum surface

LED
[8]
Cleaning/recycle section
Cleaning and collection of toner on the drum
[9]
Separation claw
Support for the separation of paper from the drum
Separation corona unit
Pressure/release method by SD7 (Separation claw solenoid)

Separation of transferred paper from the drum
(See 5. Toner supply/cleaning/recycle section.)
[10]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
AC/DC corona discharge *1

Wire discharge: Tungsten wire with oxide film ( 0.06mm)
Constant current AC output range: 1.5 to 5.0kV
SD7
Separation claw solenoid
Constant current DC output range: 0 to -300A

Separation claw pressure/release
M1
Main motor
24VDC drive
Driving of the drum, cleaning/recycling section
HV
High voltage power

High voltage power supply to the charging corona, transfer
corona, separation corona, paper entrance guide plate and
developing bias
TCSB
Toner control sensor board
Method to increase voltage by inverter from 24VDC

Detection of the patch image density on the drum
Detection of temperature around the drum
*1
Control is made so that an output value becomes a little higher for a thick paper and a little lower for a
thin paper as compared with a plain paper.
Note for the transfer/separation corona
Caution:
A copy should not be made when the ADU door is open with the interlock forcibly turned on. Otherwise, the contact (spring) of the ADU door develops high voltage and you may get an electric
shock.
2-12
DRUM UNIT
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
ADU door
[3]
Transfer/separation corona unit
[2]
Contact
[4]
HV (High voltage unit)
3.2
3.2.1
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[4]
Operation
Image formation timing (when copying two sheets)
A. In the case of the 7145

M1 (Main motor)
PS1 (Registration sensor)
PCL (Pre-charging exposure lamp)
HV (Charging corona)
HV (Developing bias)
HV (Transfer corona)
HV (Separation corona)
HV (Paper entrance guide plate)
TSL (Transfer synchronization lamp)
DS7 (Separation claw solenoid)
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor)
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
START button (ON)

Varies depending on the type of paper.
[3]
[3]
7322ma2020
Driving of the separation claw to prevent

the trailing edge of paper from getting
stained.
2-13
manuals4you.com
DRUM UNIT
B. In the case of the 7235/7228/7222
M1 (Main motor)

II UNIT EXPLANATION
HV (Transfer corona)
DS7 (Separation claw solenoid)
[3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
START button (ON)

Varies depending on the type of paper.
[3]
2-14
7322ma2012
Varies depending on the environment in

which it is installed.
DEVELOPING UNIT
4. DEVELOPING UNIT
4.1
Composition
7235/7228/7222
M1
[4]
[5]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
CB
7145
M1
M3
CB
HV
[3]
Symbol
[1]
[2]
[2]
[1]
7322ma2003e
Name
TDS (Toner density sensor)
Function or method
Detection of toner density in the developing unit
Developing sleeve
L detection method
Coveyance of developing materials by magnetic force to the
drum surface
Two-component developing method (developing materials:
Toner + Carrier)
Developing bias voltage applied
[3]
Developing regulation plate
Constant voltage DC output range: -350 to -830V

Regulation of the spiking amount of developing materials on
the developing sleeve
Regulation plate method
[4]
Agitator screw
[5]
Agitator wheel
Agitation of developer and conveyance of developing materials

to the agitator wheel
Agitator wheel method
Agitation of developer and conveyance of developing materials
to the developing sleeve
4-vane wheel method
M1
M3*1
*1
Main motor
Developing motor
Driving of the agitating turbine, the agitating screw and the

developing sleeve (except the 7145)
Driving of the developing sleeve
7145 only
2-15
manuals4you.com
DEVELOPING UNIT
4.2
4.2.1
Operation
Developing control
For details of each operation timing of developing, see 3. Drum section.
II UNIT EXPLANATION
4.2.2
Control of toner density in the developing unit
The TDS (Toner density sensor) uses the L detection method (detection of permeability in developing
materials) to detect the toner density of developing materials. The value thus obtained is compared with
the standard value of the toner density for the L detection adjustment that is recorded in the PCU contained in the CB (Main body control board) to see if toner should be supplied or not. (For details of toner
supply, see 5. Toner supply/cleaning/recycling section.)
2-16
TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT
5. TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT

5.1
Composition
[4]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1]
M10
[2]
CB
SD9
M4
Symbol
[1]
Name
Toner collection sheet
[3]
Function or method
Collection of toner separated by the cleaning blade from the drum
surface
Rotating collection method
[2]
Cleaning blade
Drun cleaning
Drum contact/separation method
[3]
Toner conveyance screw
Agitation of toner and conveyance of toner to the developing unit

Screw method
[4]
TLD (Toner level sensor)
Detection of the toner level in the toner supply unit (Detected

when the residual quantity of toner gets to about 30g.)
[5]
[6]
Toner bottle
Piezo element method

Toner supply (bottle capacity: 676g)
Toner supply paddle
Toner bottle rotation method

Conveyance of toner from the toner bottle to the toner supply unit
Fixed method (Since the toner bottle rotates, this serves as the
toner introduction section.)
[7]
Toner agitation plate
Agitation of toner supplied from the toner bottle and the cleaning/
recycle section, and conveyance of the toner to the toner conveyance screw
Screw method
[8]
Collected toner conveyance

screw
Conveyance of toner from the cleaning section to the toner supply

unit
Screw method
2-17
manuals4you.com
II UNIT EXPLANATION
M1

Symbol
Name
Function or method
[9]
PS5 (Toner bottle sensor)
Detection of the setting of the toner bottle
M1
Main motor
Driving of the toner collection sheet and the collected toner con-
Photosensor
veyance screw
II UNIT EXPLANATION

M4
Toner supply motor 1
Driving of the toner conveyance screw and the toner agitator plate
Stepping motor
M10
Toner bottle
Stepping motor
SD9
Toner solenoid
Transmission of driving force from the M4 (Toner supply motor) to

the toner conveyance screw
24VDC drive
5.2
5.2.1
Operation
Toner supply control when the toner level in the toner supply section gets reduced
A. Toner supply operation:

When toner in the toner supply unit is running short, the TLD (Toner level sensor) turns on. This
causes the M10 (Toner supply motor 2) to turn on to rotate the toner bottle and replenish toner to the
toner supply unit. When toner has been supplied, the TLD turns off to monitor the toner level.
B. Operation when toner is not supplied:
When the TLD (Toner level sensor) has been kept turned on for the specified period of time, it is considered that no toner remains in the toner bottle and a message is displayed on the operation LCD.
C. Toner level detection timing:
The TLD (Toner level sensor) detects at all times the toner level during copy operation.
2-18

5.2.2
Toner supply control when toner density in the developing unit gets reduced
A. When power is on:

The TDS (Toner density sensor) detects the toner density in the developing unit the specified period of
time after the SW2 (Sub power switch) is turned on. When the value thus detected at this time is
below the initial density recorded in the CPU contained in the CB (Main body control board), the M4
B. While in copy operation:

While in copy operation, the TDS (Toner density sensor) monitors the toner density. Using the output
voltage of the TDS to turn on the SD9 (Toner solenoid), the M4 (Toner supply motor 1) determines the
time required for toner supply.
TDS output voltage
Time required for toner supply
2.01V or less
2.02 to 2.08V
0 sec.
0.10 sec.
2.09 to 2.16V
2.17 to 2.23V
0.20 sec.
0.30 sec.
2.24 to 2.31V
2.32 to 2.39V
0.40 sec.
0.50 sec.
2.40V or more
0.70 sec.
2-19
manuals4you.com
II UNIT EXPLANATION
(Toner supply motor 1) and the SD9 (Toner solenoid) are turned on to start to replenish toner up to the
specified level of density.
PAPER FEED UNIT
6. PAPER FEED UNIT

6.1
Composition
[18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25]
[26] [27]
SD1
MC2
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[17]
M9
[1]
SD3
[2]
[16]
CB
[15]
[14]
[13]
SD2
PFDB/U
PFDB/L
[12] [11] [10]

Symbol
[9]
[8] [7] [6] [5]
Name
[4] [3]
Function or method
[1]
VRI (Bypass tray paper size
Detection of paper size in the direction of the width of the by-
[2]
sensor VR)
PS20
pass tray
Detection of paper size in the direction of the length of the by-
[3]
(Bypass tray paper size sensor)

PS13
pass tray
Detection of the presence of bypass feed paper
(Bypass tray no paper sensor)

Double feed prevention roller
Double feed prevention of paper, Torque limiter
Conveyance roller
PS22 (Timing sensor/L)
Paper conveyance
Detection of tray 2 paper conveyance condition
[7]
[8]

M8 (Tray motor/L)

Tray 2 paper liftup plate drive, DC motor
[9]
[10]
Feed roller
PS12 (Tray set sensor/L)
1st paper feed power transmission

Tray 2 detection and remaining paper detection
[11]
[12]
PS10 (Upper limit sensor/L)

PS11 (No paper sensor/L)
Tray 2 paper upper limit detection

Detection of the presence of tray 2 paper
[13]
[14]
Paper feed roller

M7 (Tray motor/U)
Tray 2 paper feed

Tray 1 paper liftup plate drive, DC motor
[4]
[5]
[6]*1
*1
2
7145/7235/7228 only
2-20
PAPER FEED UNIT

Name
Function or method
[15]
PS9 (Tray set sensor/U)
[16]
PS8 (No paper sensor/U)
Detection of the presence of tray 1 paper
[17]
[18]
PS7 (Upper limit sensor/U)

Paper feed roller
Tray 1 paper upper limit detection

Tray 1 paper feed
[19]
Feed roller
PS21 (Timing sensor/U)

Detection of tray 1 paper conveyance condition
[22]
Conveyance roller
Paper conveyance
[23]
Detection of the paper passage for the Registration roller rota-
[20]
[21]*1
Tray 1 detection and remaining paper detection
tion ON/OFF
[24]
Registration roller
Paper conveyance
[25]
[26]
Conveyance roller
Feed roller
Paper conveyance
Bypass tray paper feed
[27]
M9
Paper feed roller

Paper feed motor
Paper feed
Paper feed system drive, DC brushless PLL control
MC2
SD1
Loop clutch
1st paper feed solenoid/U

Tray 1 paper feed power transmission
SD2
SD3
1st paper feed solenoid/L

Bypass solenoid
Tray 2 paper feed power transmission

Bypass tray paper feed power transmission
Paper feed detection board/U

Paper feed detection board/L
Tray 1 paper size detection

Tray 2 paper size detection
PFDB/U
PFDB/L
CB
Main body control board
*1
7145/7235/7228 only
6.2
6.2.1
Overall control
Operation
Tray up drive control
Since the operation is the same for both the tray 1 and the tray 2, the explanation is given of the tray 1.
When the paper feed tray is set, the PS9 (Tray set sensor/U) detects the tray with the M7 (Tray motor/U)
turned on. This causes the paper up/down plate in the tray to go up. When the PS7 (Upper limit sensor/U)
detects the paper upper limit, the M7 is turned off. When the sheets of paper get reduced as they are being
fed through, the PS7 detects no remaining paper. At this time, the M7 is kept turned on until it detects the
paper upper limit again, and paper is raised up to the specified level at all times.
When the tray is removed, its coupling with the drive section is disconnected to let the paper up/down plate
go down by its own weight.
When papar is supplied by the bypass feed method and the SD3 (Bypass solenoid) turns on after the M9
(Paper feed motor) turns on, the bypass plate goes up to raise paper.
2-21
manuals4you.com
II UNIT EXPLANATION
Symbol
PAPER FEED UNIT

6.2.2
Paper feed control
The following shows the timing of paper feed by the tray 1. The timing of paper feed is basically the same
for both the tray 2 and the bypass tray, and the actual paper feed in each case starts when the SD2 (1st
paper feed solenoid/L) or the SD3 (Bypass solenoid) turns on respectively.
[1]
II UNIT EXPLANATION

PS21 (Timing sensor/U)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
[1]
6.2.3
START button (ON)
Remaining paper detection control
Since the operation is the same for both the tray 1 and the tray 2, the explanation is given of the tray 1
only.
The remaining paper quantity is detected by the PS9 (Tray set sensor/U). As the remaining paper is getting reduced, the actuator provided on the rear side of the tray starts to ratate gradually as shown in the
drawing. The PS9 turns on and off each time it passes through a slit. The remaining paper quantity is
detected by counting the number of ON/OFF's after the installation of the tray.
0 count: Full 1 count: Medium 2 counts: Low
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
Rotating direction when the paper up/down
[3]
Slit 1
[2]
plate is going up.

[4]
[5]
Slit 2
Actuator
2-22
PAPER FEED UNIT

6.2.4
Paper size detection
The paper size in the tray is detected by the CB (Main body control board), using signals sent from the
PFDB/U (Paper feed detection board/U) and the PFDB/L (Paper feed detection board/L).
The paper size in the tray is set by the SW1 of the PFDB/U and the PFDB/L, and the CB detects a switch
signal according to the position of the SW1. The table below shows the relationship between the switch
signal and the paper size.
Paper size
Switch signal
Tray 1
Tray 2
8.5 x 14
11 x 17
B5
B5
B4
B4
A5R
A5R
A4
A4
A4R
A4R
F4
A3
5.5 x 8.5R
F4
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11R
8.5 x 11R
SIZE A
SIZE B
SIZE C
SIZE D
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
For inch area

Paper size
Switch signal
Tray 1
Tray 2
8.5 x 14
11 x 17
B5R
A5R
B4
A4
A5R
A4R
A4
A3
A4R
F4
F4
5.5 x 8.5R
5.5 x 8.5R
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11R
8.5 x 11R
8.5 x 14
SIZE A
SIZE B
SIZE C
SIZE D
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
2-23
manuals4you.com
II UNIT EXPLANATION
For metric area
FIXING UNIT
7. FIXING UNIT
7.1
Composition
[13]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[12]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[1]
[2]
[3]
DCPS
[4]
FCB
CB
M11
SD4
[5]
[8]
Symbol
Name
[1]
Fixing pressure roller
[2]
Fixing heat roller
[7]
[6]
Function or method
Fixing of toner by pressure
Silicon rubber + PFA tube
Toner fixing by means of heat
Aluminum + PFA coating
Temperature setting:
Idling: 376 to 369F
While in copy operation - Other than when feeding paper by the
by-pass tray in the single sided copy mode: 381F
While in copy operation - When feeding paper by the bypass tray
in the single sided copy mode (by selecting the type of paper)
Thick paper mode 1: 381 + 50F
Thick paper mode 2: 381 + 50F
Thin paper: 381 - 50F (Except the 7145)
Other than the above: 381F
Copying - 381 - 41F, when a double sided copy is being made.
Low power mode: 185F (can be changed in the 25 mode)
2-24
FIXING UNIT
Symbol
[3]
Name
Function or method
TH2 (Fixing temperature
Detection of temperature at the edge (front side) of the fixing heating
sensor/2)
roller
Contact type
TH1 (Fixing temperature
Detection of temperature at the center of the fixing heating roller
sensor/1)
Contact type
[5]
Cleaning web
Cleaning of the fixing heat roller
[6]
Fixing cleaning roller
Tension pressure on the cleaning web

Spring pressure
[7]
TS (Thermostat)
Protection of the fixing heat roller against high temperature abnormality (about 428F)
[4]
[8]
L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2)
Contact type
Heating of the fixing heat roller (Sub)
[9]
AC drive
Heating of the fixing heat roller (Main)
[10]
Fixing guide
AC drive
Paper conveyance guide, pressure/release of the fixing pressure
[11]
roller
Detection of paper at the fixing unit exit
[12]
Neutralizing brush
Photosensor + actuator
Neutralizing of paper that is exited
Fixing claw
Neutralizing by means of a brush

Separation of paper from the fixing heat roller
Fixing motor
Spring pressure type (6 pcs.)

Driving of the fixing heat roller and the ADU conveyance roller/1
Cleaning web solenoid

Driving of the cleaning web
Fixing control board
24V drive
Prevention of noise leak in the drive power for L3 (Fixing heater lamp
[13]
M11
SD4
FCB
/2)
220V system only
2-25
manuals4you.com
II UNIT EXPLANATION
Web wind-up method
FIXING UNIT
7.2
7.2.1
Operation
Fixing temperature control
The CB (Main body control board) uses the TH1 (Fixing temperature sensor/1) and the TH2 (Fixing temperature sensor/2) to detect the temperature of the fixing heating roller, and turns on and off the L2 (Fixing
heater lamp/1) and the L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2) separately through the DCPS (DC power source) to
maintain both the TH1 and the TH2 at the specified temperature.
II UNIT EXPLANATION
A. Warm-up
The CB (Main body control board) turns on the fixing heater lamp circuit within the DCPS (DC power
source) immediately after the SW2 turns on, and keeps the L2 (Fixing heater lamp/1) and L3 the (Fixing heater lamp/2) turned on until the fixing heat roller reaches the specified temperature.
Once warm-up has completed, the CB switches the L2 and the L3 on and off so that the fixing heat
roller can be maintained to the set temperature for idling.
7.2.2
Warm-up time: 30 seconds or less (at the room temperature of 68F) (7145)
Warm-up time: 19 seconds or less (at the room temperature of 68F) (7235/7228/7222)
Cleaning web control
For each output of paper, the cleaning web is let off to be wound up.
The SD4 (Cleaning web solenoid) turns on based on the output of the PS2, causing the cleaning web to be
driven to start a wind-up operation.

SD4 (Cleaning web solenoid)
[1]
[1]
[2]
START button (ON)
[2]
2-26
100 msec
ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION
8. ADU/PAPER EXIT SECTION

8.1
Composition
[9]
[10]
M11
[1]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[2]
SD5
[3]
[4]
CB
M9
[5]
7145
M6
[6]
7235/7228/7222
CB
ADUDB
M6
[7]
[8]
7322ma2004e
Symbol
Name
[1]
Detection of paper at the fixing unit exit

[2]
ADU unit (ADU door)
Paper conveyance while in double sided copy

Jam removal while in double sided copy
[3]
Paper conveyance through the ADU entrance

Motor drive
[4]
Decurler roller (7145)

Conveyance roller (7235/
Paper conveyance through the ADU intermediate section and the correction of paper curling (7145)
7228/7222)
Paper conveyance through the ADU intermediate section (7235/7228/

7222)
[5]
[6]
Function or method
Motor drive
Paper conveyance through the ADU intermediate section
Switching sheet
Motor drive
Switching of conveyance path at the paper reverse section
Switching by means of the elasticity of the PET sheet
2-27
manuals4you.com

Symbol
Name
Function or method
Paper conveyance through the ADU exit and switching of the conveyance direction
[7]
ADU roller
[8]
PS4 (ADU sensor)
Detection of paper at the ADU exit
[9]
Paper exit roller
Paper exit
Motor drive
Motor drive
[10]
Switching guide
Switching of the paper exit path at the fixing unit exit
II UNIT EXPLANATION
Solenoid drive
ADUDB ADU drive board
Driving of the M6 (ADU motor)
*1
M6
M9
ADU motor
Driving of the ADU motor
Paper feed motor
Stepping motor
Driving of the decurler roller (7145 only) and the ADU conveyance
rollers/2
SD5
ADU gate solenoid
Pressure and release of the switching guide

24VDC drive
M11
Fixing motor
Driving of the paper exit roller

*1
Except the 7145
2-28
8.2
8.2.1
Operation
Switching control of the paper exit/ADU conveyance path
A. Straight paper exit path

The straight paper exit path is applicable when a single side is copied as well as after the back side
copy of paper is completed in the double sided copy mode.
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
Switching guide (SD5 OFF)
[5]
[2]
[3]

ADU conveyance driven roller/1
[6]
[7]
Fixing heat roller

Paper exit driven roller
[4]
[8]
Paper exit drive roller
2-29
manuals4you.com
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[8]

B. ADU conveyance path
The ADU conveyance path is applicable after the front side copy is completed in the double sided
copy mode.
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[8]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[5]
Fixing heat roller
[2]
[3]

[6]
[7]
Switching guide (SD5 ON)

[4]
[8]
Paper exit drive roller
C. Straight paper exit operation (single sided 3 copies)

SD5 (ADU gate solenoid)
M1 (Main motor)
M11 (Fixing motor)
[1]
[1]
1st paper exit
2-30

D. ADU conveyance operation (double sided 3 copies)
MC2 (Loop clutch)

M1 (Main motor)
[1]
[1]
8.2.2
[2]
1st paper exit for the front side
[2]
7322ma2005
1st paper exit for the back side
ADU conveyance control
When a sheet of paper, the front of which has been printed in the double sided mode is conveyed to the
ADU unit, it is further conveyed to the ADU roller by the decurler roller (7145) or conveyance roller (except
the 7145) and the ADU conveyance rollers/2 which are in turn driven by the M9 (Paper feed motor).
2-31
manuals4you.com
II UNIT EXPLANATION
M11 (Fixing motor)

8.2.3
Paper reverse control
A. Paper reverse path

(1) When conveying paper
When a sheet of paper is conveyed from the ADU conveyance roller/2, it is further conveyed to the
ADU roller by pushing the switching sheet open.
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[9]
[1]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]

ADU driven roller
[6]
[7]
ADU roller
Switching sheet
[3]
[4]
Conveyance path when DB is provided

DB
[8]
[9]
PS4 (ADU sensor)

[5]
Conveyance path when DB is not provided
2-32
7322ma2006

(2) When paper reverse
Paper that has been conveyed is sent back by means of the reverse rotation of the ADU roller. At this
time, the switching sheet uses its own elastic power to block the conveyance path to the ADU conveyance roller/2, and the paper is conveyed to the loop roller of the tray 2. As a result, the paper is turned
inside out to be copied on the back side after passing through the same route as that for the paper
sent from the tray 2.
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
7322ma2007
[1]
[2]
Loop roller
PS4 (ADU sensor)
[5]
[6]
DB
ADU roller
[3]
[4]
Switching sheet
ADU driven roller
[7]
B. Paper reverse operation (7145)
PS4 (ADU sensor)

M6 (ADU motor)
F 600mm/s
230mm/s
R 230mm/s
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
Start of 1st paper conveyance

Start of revere operation of 1st paper
[4]
[5]
Start of reverse operation of 2nd paper

Start of 3rd paper conveyance
[3]
Start of 2nd paper conveyance
[6]
Start of reverse operation of 3rd paper
2-33
manuals4you.com

C. Paper reverse operation (7235/7228/7222)
PS4 (ADU sensor)

M6 (ADU motor)
F 600mm/s
*1
R *1
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
7322ma2013
*1
165mm/s (7235)
140mm/s (7228/7222)
[1]
Start of 1st paper conveyance
[4]
Start of reverse operation of 2nd paper
[2]
[3]
Start of revere operation of 1st paper

Start of 2nd paper conveyance
[5]
[6]
Start of 3rd paper conveyance

Start of reverse operation of 3rd paper
2-34
INTERFACE SECTION
9. INTERFACE SECTION
9.1
Composition
[1]
II UNIT EXPLANATION
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
7322ma2008
Symbol
Name
Function or method
[1]
Serial port (USB TypeB)
For ISW of copier/FAX, For serial output of the printer

Ver. 1.1
[2]
Serial port (RS-232C)
For KRDS communication

D-SUB 9-pin connector
[3]
[4]
RJ45 Ethernet port

Parallel port
Port for network

For ISW of copier/FAX/printer
(IEEE1284 (Compatible,
Nible, ECP))
For parallel output of the printer

36-pin parallel interface
2-35
manuals4you.com
NETWORK SECTION
10. NETWORK SECTION

10.1 Composition
Item
II UNIT EXPLANATION
TCP/IP service
Function name
Function
Purpose
Arp
Obtain IP address
Remarks
BootP
Obtain IP address
DHCP
Obtain IP address
DNS
Settle IP address
FTP Client
Scan to FTP
FTP Server
Scan to Box
IPP
LPD/LPR
{
{
Print
Print
Support Ver. 1.0

Default port number = 9100
Raw Socket
Print
SMTP
Scan to Email
POP
POP before SMTP
{
{
For POP before SMTP

Authorization of SMTP
HTTP 1.1
server access
WebUtility
SNMP v1
(SNMP over TCP)
MIB access
SNMP v1
MIB access
(SNMP over IPX)
Netware service
Telnet
SLP
X
X
Bindery
NDS (including simul-
{
{
Print
Print
taneous support of
Bindery)
PServer mode
RPrinter/NPrinter mode
NDPS (Gateway)
PCONSOLE /NWADMIN, interchangeable
Frame Type (802.3, 802.3, 802.3 SNAP,
{
Print
MAC frame corresponding
Ethernet II)
AppleTalk service
EtherTalk PAP
Print
MS Network service
SMB over NetBEUI
Print
2-36
Corresponding in general
purpose Gateway
OTHER CONTROLS
11. OTHER CONTROLS

11.1 Parts Energized When the Main Power Switch is OFF
SW1
CBR1
NF
DCPS
CBR2
AC(N)
The follwing components are powered regardless of whether the SW1 (Main power switch) is on or off,
provided that the power cord remains plugged in.
A. CBR 1 and CBR 2 (Circuit breakers/1 and /2)
The circuit breakers serve to protect internal components against damage from short circuit. If current
exceeds the specified value, the circuit breaker(s) will go off, cutting the power to the system.
B. NF (Noise filter)
This filter reduces noises that enter through the power line.
C. DCPS (DC power source)
This supplies power to each unit, and also controls the ON/OFF state of the fixing heater lamp.
2-37
manuals4you.com
II UNIT EXPLANATION
AC(H)
OTHER CONTROLS
11.2 Components Operated When the Power Switch is ON

11.2.1 Components operated when the SW1 (Main power switch) is on
+12VDC
+12VDC
-12VDC
-12VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
SW1
+12VDC
II UNIT EXPLANATION
-12VDC
+5VDC
+12VDC
-12VDC
SCB
+24VDC
DCPS
+5VDC
PTC
(OPTION)
OB
SGND
+5VDC
SUB_SW
SW2
PSW2B
FK-102/FL-102
(OPTION)
IP-432
(OPTION)
7322ma2009
Setting the SW1 (Main power switch) to the ON position supplies AC power to the DCPS (DC power
source) which in turn supplies +12DVC, -12VDC, and +5DVC to the SCB (System control board). The
DCPS also supplies +5DVC to the OB (Operation board) through the SCB.
When the PTC (Internal heater) is provided as an option for service parts, according to the setting of the
25 mode DIP SW16-2, +24VDC is supplied to the PTC (Heater) from the DCPS (DC power source).
If options such as a printer controller (IP-432) and/or fax control board (FK-102 Type A/FL-102) are
installed, +12VDC, -12VDC and +5VDC are also supplied to these options through the SCB (System control board).
In the automatic start-up mode, the same operation is made consecutively as when the SW2 (Sub power
switch) is turned on according to the discretion of the SCB (System control board).
2-38
OTHER CONTROLS
+12VDC
+5VDC
+5VDC
OB
SW1
+12VDC
+5VDC
+12VDC
+5VDC
SCB
+24VDC
DCPS
SGND
+5VDC
SUB_SW
SW2
PSW2B
FK-103/FL-103
(OPTION)
IP-424
(OPTION)
PTC
(OPTION)
7322ma2021
Setting the SW1 (Main power switch) to the ON position supplies AC power to the DCPS (DC power
source) which in turn supplies +12DVC and +5DVC to the SCB (System control board). The DCPS also
supplies +5DVC to the OB (Operation board) through the SCB.
When the PTC (Internal heater) is provided as an option for service parts, according to the setting of the
25 mode DIP SW16-2, +24VDC is supplied to the PTC (Heater) from the DCPS (DC power source).
If options such as a printer controller (IP-424) and/or fax control board (FK-103/FL-103) are installed,
+12VDC and +5VDC are also supplied to these options through the SCB (System control board). However, when the LAN cables are not connected with none of these options provided, a part of the section
within the SCB (System control board) is not supplied with +5 VDC.
In the automatic start-up mode, the same operation is made consecutively as when the SW2 (Sub power
switch) is turned on according to the discretion of the SCB (System control board).
11.2.2
Components operated when the SW2 (Sub power switch) is on
The SW2 (Sub power switch) is located on the PSW2B (Power SW2 board). Upon the SW2 on, an ON signal is sent from the SW2 to the SCB (System control board) through the OB (Operation board). As a result,
the SCB sends a control signal to the DCPS (DC power source), thus causing the DCPS to supply
+12VDC, -12VDC (7145 only) and +5VDC to all of the boards and options, including the CB (Main body
control board).
The SCB (System control board) then sends to the DCPS (DC power source) a control signal that causes
the DCPS to generate +24VDC. This 24VDC power is supplied to all of the drive boards and options.
2-39
manuals4you.com
II UNIT EXPLANATION
+12VDC
OTHER CONTROLS
11.3 Fan Control

11.3.1
Composition of the cooling fan
II UNIT EXPLANATION
DCPS
FM1
CB
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM7
Symbol
Name
FM1
DC power supply cooling fan
Function or method
Cooling of the DCPS (DC power source)
FM2*1
FM3
Preventing the ends of the fixing roller from getting overheated

Prevention of internal dew condensation, removal of internal
Fixing cooling fan

Internal dehumidifying fan/1
ozone, and prevention against internal temperature getting too

high
FM4
FM5

Developing suction fan
Cooling of the drum unit, the write unit and their surroundings
Prevention against scattering of toner around the developing unit
FM6
Prevention of internal dew condensation, removal of internal

ozone, and prevention against internal temperature getting too
FM7*2
high
Cooling of the interior of the developing unit
FM7*3
Polygon cooling fan
Cooling of the M5 (Polygon motor)
*1
*2
7145/7235 only
7145 only
*3
7235 only
2-40
OTHER CONTROLS
11.3.2
Fan operation
A. Operation of fans other than FM4 (Internal cooling fan/1)
[1]
M1 (Main motor)
M3 (Developing motor)*2
II UNIT EXPLANATION
FM1 (DC power source fan)

FM2 (Fixing cooling fan)*1
FM3 (Internal dehumidifying fan/1)
FM5 (Developing suction fan)
FM7 (Internal cooling fan/2)*3
FM7 (Polygon cooling fan)*4
7322ma2014
[1]
*1
START button (ON)

Operation for a small sized paper (such as B5R, A5R, B6R, postcard, 5.5 x 8.5R, 16KR). For paper
sizes other than these small ones, the fan turns on when the TH2 (Fixing temperature sensor/2)
detects a temperature above 417F, and turns off when it gets below 408F
*2
7145 only
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222, the operation of the fan, that is based on whether the M3 (Developing motor) turns ON or OFF while in the 7145, is based on whether the M1 (Main motor) turns ON or
OFF.
*3
*4
7145 only
7235 only
B. Operation of FM4 (Internal cooling fan/1)
(1) ON/OFF timing
The FM4 (Internal cooling fan/1) is turned on when the machine-inside temperature sensor provided
on the TCSB (Toner control sensor board) detects a temperature of 109F, and turned off when the
temperature gets below 105F.
(2) Abnormality detection
The internal temperature sensor installed on the TCSB (Toner control sensor board) detects a temperature of 136F, error code F22-1 is displayed on the operation unit and the machine is stopped.
2-41
manuals4you.com
OTHER CONTROLS
11.4 Operation Unit Control

11.4.1
Composition of operation unit
SW2
SGND
SUB_SW
II UNIT EXPLANATION
PSW2B
LCD
LCDB
INV2
PAKB
SCB
OB
SP
(OPTION)
Symbol
Name
SW2
Sub power switch
Function or method
Power switch for the operating section
PSW2B Power SW2 board
Does not function when the SW1 (Main power switch) is off.
LED packaging to display the on/off status of the SW1 (Main
LCD
power switch)
Use to display various information
LCDB
INV2
Display board
Display inverter
Backlight for the LCD

Inverter used to drive the LCD (Display board)
PAKB
Panel key board
Touch switch board used to directly select items displayed on the

LCD
SP
Speaker
When an optional fax control board is installed, a monitor sound

on the line while a call is being made.
OB
Operation board
Used to control the PSW2B (Power SW2 board), the LCD (Display board), the INV2 (Display inverter) and the PAKB (Panel key
LCD
board), and also used to control the LED inside the OB and the
ten-key
2-42
OTHER CONTROLS
11.5 Counter Control

11.5.1
Counter composition
SCB
OB
7235/7228/7222
II UNIT EXPLANATION
7145
TC
(OPTION)
TC
CB
KC
(OPTION)
PS2
7322ma2011e
Symbol
Name
OB
Operation board
TC
Function or method
Displays the number of copies by means of the LED.
Total counter
KC
(7145 provided as a standard equipment)
Displays the total number of copies.

This is a mechanical counter driven by an electric signal.
(7235/7228/7222 optional)
Key counter (optional)
A counter used to make copying unavailable after the

specified number of copies is counted
This is a mechanical counter driven by an electric signal.
PS2
Fixing exit sensor
Detects paper at the fixing exit. This information

becomes a control signal source for each counter.
11.5.2
Counter operation
This machine uses the following two software counters to count the number of copies. However, the content of the number display counter on the OB (Operation board) may differ depending on the operating
condition of the machine.
A. Paper feed counter
This counter increments when the 1st paper feed for the next copy comes ON.
B. Paper exit counter
This counter increments when the PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) goes ON OFF.
C. Number display counter on the OB (Operation board)
Normal operation
Jam
Indicator shows a count from the paper feed counter. Indicator shows a count from the paper exit counter.
2-43
manuals4you.com
II UNIT EXPLANATION
OTHER CONTROLS
Blank page
2-44
EXTERNAL SECTION
III DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Caution:
Make sure the power cord of the copier is
unplugged from the power outlet before disassembly or assembly.
1. EXTERNAL SECTION
1.1
Replacing the Ozone Filter
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle

Ozone filter: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
Ozone filter: Every 200,000 copies (7235/7228/
7222)
1. Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the scanner exterior/R [2].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
B. Procedure
[1]
Note:
If an unusual noise is emitted when you open or
close the bypass tray, clean the ADU door rib [3]
with alcohol.
[1]
[2]
[3]
2. Remove the ozone filter [1].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
Note:
When installing the ozone filter, take care not to
break it.
[1]
3-1
manuals4you.com
EXTERNAL SECTION
1.2
Replacing the Filter Cover

Assembly & Suction Filter/A

Suction filter/A: Every 120,000 copies (7145)
Suction filter/A: Every 100,000 copies (7235/
7228/7222)
Filter cover assembly: Every 120,000 copies
(7145)
Filter cover assembly: Every 100,000 copies
(7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1], then remove the filter
cover assembly [2].
2. Remove the suction filter /A [3].
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
steps in reverse.
Note:
When installing the suction filter/A, be sure to
install it so that the white filter face is turned to the
inside of the main body.
[3]
[2]
Note:
[1]
When an elevator tray unit is fitted, perform the

following to access the filter section.
While pressing [1], lift up [2], and pull out the elevator tray unit and the horizontal conveyance unit.
Do not remove the finisher.
To remove the finisher, see [III. DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY] of the finisher section.
[2]
3-2
7145ma3130
DRIVE SECTION
2. DRIVE SECTION
2.1
Removing and Reinstalling

the Motor Units (Main, Fixing, Feed, Developing)
Caution:
Be sure to remove the drum unit from the
main body before removing or reinstalling
the main motor unit. If the drum unit is in
place at this time, the drum will rotate when
you install or remove the drum rotating plate,
resulting in possible damage to the cleaning
blade.
the main body.

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the cord
[6]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
A. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit and drum unit from
cover/B [2].
3. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the cord
cover/A [4].
4. Remove the 9 screws [5], and remove the rear
[5]
cover [6].
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
7322ma3001
5. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the rear

cover/R [2], the rear cover/L [3].
[5]
6. Remove the 3 screws [4], and remove the wirebundle guide plate [5].
[4] [3]
[1]
[1]
[2]
3-3
manuals4you.com
DRIVE SECTION
7. Remove the 15 screws [1], and remove the
[4]
board cover/D [2] (7145 only).

8. Remove the 13 screws [3], and remove the
board cover/A [4].
[1]
[1]
[3]
9. Remove the various wiring connectors from the
SCB (System control board) [1].
[2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
Be very careful when handling the ribbon cable
connector from the SCB (System control board).
[1]
See 2.4 Removing the ribbon cable and 2.5

Installing the ribbon cable.
[2] [3]
10. Remove the 12 screws [2] (7145) or the 11
[2]
screws [3] (7235/7228/7222), and remove the

system control board unit [4].
[2] [3]
[2] [3]
11. Disconnect the connectors from each motor unit

[1].
12. Remove the 4 screws [2], then remove each
motor unit [3], [4] (7145 only), [5].
steps in reverse.
[4]
[2] [1]
[3]
[2]
7322ma3002
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[1]
3-4
[5]
7322ma3003
DRIVE SECTION
2.2
Replacing the Registration

Clutch
Caution:
Be sure to remove the drum unit from the
main body before carry out the following procedure. If the drum unit is in place at this
time, the drum will rotate when you install or
remove the drum rotating plate, resulting in
possible damage to the cleaning blade.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the system control board unit.
[2]
For removal procedure, see 2.1 Removing and

reinstalling the motor units (main, fixing, feed,
developing).
2. Remove the set screw [1], and remove the drum
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
rotating plate [2].
[1]
3. Remove the clutch connector [1].
[3]
4. Remove the E-ring [2]. Pull the registration

clutch [3] toward you and rotate it to remove.
[1]
[2]
3-5
manuals4you.com
DRIVE SECTION
[3]
steps in reverse.
[2]
Note:
When installing the registration clutch [1], be sure
to set the groove of the clutch detent in the stopper [3].
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.3
Replacing the Loop Clutch
A. Procedure
developing).
2. Remove the wire bundle from the clamp on the
conveyance drive panel [1].
3. Remove the 2 E-rings [2], 3 screws [3] and 2
[1]
[3]
bearing [4] , and remove the conveyance drive

panel [1]. (Do not remove the rotation prevention screws on the clutch.)
[4]
manuals4you.com
[2]
4. Remove the E-ring [1], then remove the gear [2]
and the connector [3], remove the gear [4] at the
front, and then remove the clutch [5].
steps in reverse.
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
3-6
[2]
DRIVE SECTION
2.4
Removing the Ribbon Cable
A. Procedure
1. Move the lock lever [1] forward to release the
lock, then pull out the ribbon cable [2].
[1]
3-7
manuals4you.com
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
DRIVE SECTION
2.5
Reinstalling the Ribbon Cable
A. Procedure
1. Move the lock lever [1] forward, then insert the
ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector while
[2]
ensuring that the conductive face of the ribbon
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
cable [3] is positioned on the opposite side of

the lock lever.
[1]
2. Push back the lock lever [1] to lock the ribbon

cable [2].
[2]
[1]
3-8
[3]
SCANNER SECTION
3. SCANNER SECTION
3.1
Screws That Must Not be

Removed
Note:
The paint-locked screws [1] must not be
[1]
removed. Be sure that you do not remove these

screws.
[1]
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
3-9
manuals4you.com
7322ma3004
SCANNER SECTION
3.2
Adjusting the Angle of the

Operation Unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the 2 screws [1].
2. Remove the operating section stopper [2].
3. Remove the 2 screws [3] for each position. And
then install the angle adjustment member [4] in
the specified position.
The angle adjustment member corresponds to 7
[1]
[3]
degrees for the right position and to 15 degrees

for the left position. However, this is not used for
[4]
the setting of 33 degrees.

4. Change the installation direction of the operat-
[5]
ing section stopper [2] and set it at the position
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
for 7 or 15 degrees. However, this is not used

for the setting of 33 degrees.
Note:
The angle of the operation unit can be adjusted at
the following 3 stages: However, the setting at 33
degrees is available only when combined with the
paper exit tray.
5. Install the operating section stopper [2].
6. Fasten the operation unit [5] with the 2 screws
[1].
[1]
[4]
[2]
3-10
[3]
SCANNER SECTION
3.3
Removing the Operating Unit
A. Procedure
1. Open the ADU door [1].
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the screw [2] and remove the right side

cover /F [3].
3. Remove the 2 angle adjusting screws [1], and
[2]
remove the operating section stopper [3] while

lifting up the operating section [2].
[1]
3-11
manuals4you.com
[3]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3]
SCANNER SECTION
4. Loosen the 2 screws [1] and remove the front
[2]
cover [2] and the front door [3].
[1]
[3]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. Remove the connector [1].
[1]
3-12
SCANNER SECTION
6. Remove the 3 screws [1], and remove the oper-
[2]
ating section [2] by pulling it out to this side.

steps in reverse.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
3-13
manuals4you.com
SCANNER SECTION
3.4
Removing the Platen Glass/

Slit Glass
When removing the platen glass, execute only the

steps 1, 3, 7, 8 and 9 in the following procedure. For
the slit glass, execute all of the steps 1 to 9.
A. Procedure
1. Open the RADF.
[1]
2. Remove the operation unit.
[2]
3. Remove the 4 screws [1] and remove the scan-
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
ner exterior/R [2].
[1]
4. Remove the 4 screws [1] and remove the scanner exterior/L [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
3-14
SCANNER SECTION
5. Remove the 7 screws [1] and remove the scan-
[1]
ner exterior/F [2].
[1]
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
[1]
3-15
manuals4you.com
SCANNER SECTION
6. Remove the 2 screws [1] of the slit glass
[1]
pressure plate and remove the slit glass [2].
[5]
7. Loosen the screw [3] and slide the glass pressure

plate [4] to the paper feed side.
8. Lift up once the platen glass [5]. And then slide it
to the paper feed side to remove it.
Note:
Be careful not to stain the white reference plate
attached to the back of the scale plate [6] provided on the paper feed side of the platen glass
[5].
When the white reference plate gets smudged,
wipe it thoroughly with a clean cloth.
[2]
[6]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

steps in reverse.
Note:
When installing the platen glass [5], be sure to
fasten it securely while pressing the glass pressure
plate [4] to the platen glass [5].
The slit glass is distinguished between the front
and the rear. Be sure to set the slit glass [2] so
that a black dot on its side comes in the rear right
side when you see the 7145 from the front side.
When attaching the slit glass holding plate with
the 2 screws [1], tighten these screws while
pressing the slit glass [2] onto the original glass
[5] side.
3-16
[3]
[4]
SCANNER SECTION
3.5

the CCD Unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the platen glass.
2. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the photo
[3]
[2]
[5]
[1]
sensor fastener [2].

3. Remove the 8 screws [3], and remove the lens
[6]
light blocking cover [4].

4. Remove the 3 screws [5], and remove the ribbon cable cover [6].
[4]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[5]
[3]
5. Remove the ribbon cable [2] from the ADB (A/D
[3]
conversion board) [1].

Note:
Be careful to avoid damage to the ribbon cable
[4]
[3]
[1]
when removing it. When reinstalling it, be sure

that it is securely in place.
6. Remove the 4 screws [3], and remove the CCD
unit [4].
[2]
7145ma3052
steps in reverse.
Note:
Be sure to perform image adjustment after installing the CCD unit. (See I Adjustment section.)
3-17
manuals4you.com
SCANNER SECTION
3.6
Replacing Exposure Lamp
Caution:
Do not touch the exposure lamp's lamp area
with bare hands.
A. Procedure
[2]
1. Remove the RADF.
[1]
For removing procedure, see the DF service

manual.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the read

cover/R [2].
[1]
4. Shift the exposure unit [1] to the center of the
main body frame.
[2]
[3]
5. Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the auxiliary reflecting mirror [3].
[1]
6. Remove the 1 connector [1] and 2 screws [2].

Tilt and remove the exposure lamp [3].
steps in reverse.
3-18
[3]
[2]
[1]
SCANNER SECTION
3.7

the Exposure Unit
A. Removal procedure
1. Remove the RADF.
[5]

3. Remove the scanner cover/R.
[2]
[1]
4. Shift the exposure unit [1] to the center of the
[6]
main body frame.
[4]
5. The exposure unit [1] is fixed in place by set

screws fastened to the exposure unit mount fittings/F [3], /R [4] (1 screw in each fitting).
Remove the 2 screws [2].
6. Tilt and slide the exposure unit [1] to remove it
from the frame.
[3]
B. Installation procedure
1. Fit the exposure unit into the main body.
2. Insert the front exposure unit mount fitting/F [2],
/R [3] into the corresponding slits in the expo-
[4]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
7. Disconnect the exposure lamp [5] connector [6].
[1]
sure unit.
3. Shift the V mirror unit [4] to the exit side.
Through the front, insert the two optics unit positioning jig [5] so that they are at the installation
location for the exposure unit. Pass the jig [5]
through the V mirror unit [4] to fasten it in place.
Position the exposure unit [1] by pushing it
against the frame on the right side of the unit.
Note:
Be sure to the use optics unit positioning jig when
reinstalling the exposure unit.
4. Fasten the exposure unit mount fittings/F, /R
into place (1 screw in each fitting).
5. Remove the optics unit positioning jig.
6. Finish installation by reversing the sequence of
the removal procedure.
3-19
manuals4you.com
[5]
[3]
[2]
SCANNER SECTION
3.8
Removing the Optics Wire
A. Procedure
1. Remove the RADF.
[2]

3. Remove the scanner cover/R.
4. Shift the V mirror unit [1] to the paper exit side.
[1]
[4]
Through the front, insert the optics unit position-
[5]
ing jig so that it is at the V mirror attachment

location. Pass the jig through the V mirror unit
[1] to fasten the it in place.
5. Remove the exposure unit [2].
6. Detach the nuts [5] and washers [6] from the
ends of the optical wires/F [3], /R [4], and
remove the wires/F [3], /R [4].
7. Remove the screws [7] holding the two drive
pulley [8] bearings in place (two screws on each
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[8]
[5]
[9]
pulley), and remove the bearings [9].

8. Remove the optical wires/F [3], /R [4] from the
drive pulleys.
3-20
[7]
[3]
[6]
[6]
SCANNER SECTION
3.9
Installing the Optics Wire
A. Procedure
1. Loosen the set screw of the drive pulley [1] on
one side so that the drive pulley can rotate
[8]
2. Fit the metal ball [3] (midway along each optical

wire [2]) into the mount opening on the drive pulley [1]. Starting from this position, wind 6 times
[4] around the outside and 5 times [5] around
the inside.
[6]
[2]
[3]
[8]
Use the F exposure unit mount fitting (the fitting
[6]
[3]
The end with the metal ball [7] at the tip winds
around the inside of the pulley shaft [8].
Wind so that the two ends of the wire come off
[1] [4] [5]
the top of the pulley.

3. After winding the wires [1], fasten them in place
[7]
[8]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
with the F printed on it) at the front, and use the

R fitting at the rear.
[5] [4] [1]
[7]
freely against the pulley shaft.
(with tape [6], etc.) so that they cannot come off.
[2]
[3]
Note:
When winding wire around pulleys, be sure that
the winds are close. Be careful to avoid overlap.
When changing the wire, be sure to use the
optics unit positioning jig.
4. On the metal ball [1] side, pass the optical wire
[1]
[2] so that it passes under the V mirror unit [3],

through the paper exit side pulley [4], and
through the inside pulley [5] on the V mirror unit.
Hook the end of the wire onto the notch [6] on
[8]
[4]
[3] [2]
[6]
the frame.
5. On the right side, pass the wire so that it passes
[2]
[5]
through the right side pulley [7], passes over the

pulley [8] on the outside of the V mirror unit, and
passes under the V mirror unit. Fasten the end
to the right side frame with the nut [9] and
[7]
[4]
[5]
washer [10].
[8]
3-21
manuals4you.com
[10]
[9]
SCANNER SECTION
6. Position the V-mirror unit by using the optics unit
positioning jig.
7. After temporary fastening, use a spring balancer
to apply 1.3 ~ 1.7kg of tension to the front and
rear optical wires in the arrow direction, then
fully tighten the nuts [1].
[1]
8. Fasten the set screw of the drive pulley which

has been loosened.
9. Using the optics unit positioning jig to install the
exposure unit.
10. Remove the optics unit positioning jig.
11. Slide the exposure unit two or three times to
make sure that it works correctly.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
3-22
[1]
WRITE UNIT
4. WRITE UNIT
4.1

the Write Unit
Warning:
Never supply power while the write unit is
out of its proper installed position.
Do not open the cover of the write unit while
power is being supplied. Shining of the laser
beam on the eye may cause blindness.
Note:
When removing the write unit, take care to avoid
touching with the write mirror and the dust proof
glass. (Touching these
scratches and smudges.)
areas
may
leave
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
When installing the write unit, confirm that the

PET sheet at the end is seated correctly in the
duct.
After turning the main power switch OFF, wait at
least two minutes before removing the write unit.
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door and remove the developing
unit and the drum unit.
[6]
2. Remove the exit tray.

3. Remove the front door.
[1]
4. Remove the main body cover/FR [1], the main

body cover/FL [2], the side cover/R [3], the filter cover assembly [4], the main body cover/U
[5] and the main body assist cover [6].
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
3-23
manuals4you.com
WRITE UNIT
5. Remove the write cleaning knob [2] from the
dust proof glass cleaning rod [1] and then puch
the rod [1] to inside of main body.
[1]
6. Remove the 11 screws [1], and remove the write
cover [2].
[2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
7. Remove the two write unit mount pieces [2]

(each is held in place by screw [1]).
[2]
[1]
3-24
[2]
WRITE UNIT
8. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1] .
9. Remove the air duct [2].

screws), and remove the write unit [4] by pulling
[4]
[3]
10. Remove the 3 screws [3] (SEMS II: long
[1]
it to the paper exit side.

Note:
When removing the write unit, take care to avoid
touching with the write mirror and the dust proof
glass.
[2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3]
[1]
[1]
3-25
manuals4you.com
[2]
[4]
7322ma3005
WRITE UNIT
steps in reverse.
Note:
Reinstall the write unit while inserting the front
edge of the cooling air guide sheet [1] into the
specified position.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
3-26
DRUM UNIT
5. DRUM UNIT
5.1

the Drum Unit

Drum unit: Every 720,000 copies (7145)
Drum unit: Every 600,000 copies (7235/7228/
7222)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit.
[2]
2. Open the ADU door [1], and open the conveyance unit [2].
[1]
3. Loosen the screw [3], and gently pull the drum

unit [4] out toward you until it stops. Then tilt it
slightly and remove it.
When removing the drum unit, be sure to hold it

at both ends to prevent a possible deformation of
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
[3]
the drum unit.

After removing the drum unit, close the drum
[4]
cover and store the unit in a dark place.

During removal and reinstallation work, never
rotate the drum in the wrong direction (in the
direction opposite to the direction it moves during
[5]
normal copying). Rotating the drum in the reverse

direction may cause scratches to the cleaning
blade.
When removing the drum unit, do not place your
hand on the separation claw unit [5].
steps in reverse.
3-27
manuals4you.com
DRUM UNIT
5.2

the Charging Corona Unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
2. Set the unit so the drum is to the top.
[5]
3. Remove the cleaning rod's [1] shaft stopper fitting [2], and pull out the cleaning rod [1].
[7]
[4]
4. Disconnect the connector [3] from the drum unit.

5. Remove the 2 screws [4] (7235/7228/7222
[6]
only).
6. Remove the back side (rear side) of the charging corona unit [5] in the arrow-marked direction
[6] and remove it by sliding in the arrow-marked
direction [7].
steps in reverse.
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
7322ma3006
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
Be careful not to bend excessively the charging
corona pressure spring.
5.3

the Charge Control Plate
A. Procedure
2. Remove the charging corona unit. Move the
[2]
charging cleaning block to its home position (at

the rear side).
3. Remove the 2 charge control springs [1], and
remove the charge control plate [2].
4. To clean: tap lightly with a cloth soaked in drum
cleaner, then use a blower brush to remove
remaining debris.
steps in reverse.
Note:
When reinstalling, be sure to set the charge control plate so that the spring held end is toward the
front of the charging corona unit.
3-28
[1]
DRUM UNIT
5.4
Replacing the Charging Wire
A. Procedure
[2]
2. Remove the charging corona unit. Move the
[4]
charging cleaning block to its home position (at
[1]
the rear side).

3. Remove the charge control plate.
4. Remove the 2 charging covers (charging cover/F
[1], and charging cover/R [2]).
[3]
5. In the case of the 7145

Remove the 2 springs [3], and remove the 2
charging wires [4].
Remove the 2 springs [3], and remove the 1
charging wire [4].
6. To install the replacement wire: first fasten the
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
rear end of the wire to the unit, then pass the

wire through the charging cleaning block and fix
it in place with the spring. Then complete the
installation by reversing the steps above.
5.5

the Drum

Drum: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
Drum: Every 200,000 copies (7235/7228/7222)
B. Removing procedure
2. Remove the charging corona unit from the drum
unit.
[1]
[2]
[3]
3. Remove the screw [1] and the fixing material [2],

and pull out the drum shaft [3].
When the drum shaft is hard to pull out, knock
lightly at the rear end of the drum shaft.
3-29
manuals4you.com
DRUM UNIT
4. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the drum
bearing [2].
5. Remove the 2 semicircular seal blocks [3] (one
[3]
on each end of the drum).

6. To remove the drum, lift it up and out from the
front side.
[1]
Note:
Take care to avoid scratching the drum's light
sensitive areas and the cleaning blade. Do not
touch these areas with bare hands.
When removing or installing, never allow the
drum to bump against the plate-metal part of the
cleaning blade.
If you are going to place the drum in storage, be
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
sure to place a cover on the drum (to cut off light

to it) and store it in a dark place.
When removing the drum unit, do not place your
hand on the separation claw unit.
3-30
[2]
DRUM UNIT
C. Installing procedure
Note:
Be sure that the toner collection sheet makes
contact with the entire span of the drum, with no
gaps.
1. Coat the entire surface of the drum with setting
powder.
[5]
2. Fit the long convex end [2] of the drum [1] into
the rear side of the unit, then set the drum down
(one at each end of the drum).
[3]
3. Reattach the drum bearing [4]. Fasten it into

place with the 2 set screws [5].
[4]
4. Insert the drum shaft and fasten the hold-down
[2]
member [4] with a screw. Be sure to attach the

hold-down member securely as shown in the
[1]
drawing right.
NG
[4]
OK
[4]
[4]
3-31
manuals4you.com
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
into the unit. Reattach the two seal blocks [3]
[3]
DRUM UNIT
5. Using the jig [1] included on the drum unit cover,
rotate the drum clockwise and confirm that there
are no gaps in the setting powder coat, and that
the toner collection sheet and cleaning blade
are smooth, etc.
Note:
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Before installing the drum and cleaning blade

(regardless of whether new or used), be sure to
coat these with setting powder. Apply the powder
around the entire drum, and on both sides of the
blade.
If you have coated setting powder onto the drum:
Before installing the drum unit back into the main
body, use an alcohol-soaked cloth to remove
stray powder from the sensor surface on the
toner control sensor board. This is necessary to
ensure that accurate toner density readings are
obtained.
Be sure that the drum is oriented correctly before
installing it. The drum should be positioned so
that the convex end of the longer section comes
at the back.
After installing a new drum, be sure to reset the
drum-related counters in the 36 mode.
3-32
[1]
DRUM UNIT
5.6

the Separation Claw
A. Procedure
2. Remove the drum from the drum unit.
[2]
[3]
3. Disconnect the relay connector [1].
[1]
4. Remove the separation rock spring [2].

5. Remove the 2 positioning screws [3], the 2 col-
[4]
lars [4] and the 2 spacer [5], and then remove
[5]
the separation claw unit [6].

Note:
While removing or installing the claw, be careful
[6]
to avoid damage to the drum.

6. Pull out the separation fulcrum shaft [2] while
[3]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
pressing down the claw [1] and remove the 2

separation claws [3].
steps in reverse.
Note:
When installing the claw, be sure that it is correctly oriented and positioned.
[2]
Do not touch the cleaning blade or the drum's

light sensitive areas with bare hands.
[1]
3-33
manuals4you.com
DRUM UNIT
5.7

the Transfer and Separation
Corona Unit

Transfer corona unit: Every 480,000 copies
(7145)
Transfer corona unit: Every 400,000 copies
(7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Open the ADU door.
[2]
2. Pull the conveyance unit [1] toward you to open.

3. Push the rear catch of the transfer/separation
corona unit [2], then remove the unit.
steps in reverse.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note:
When installing the Transfer/Separation corona
unit, be sure that the cleaning material is in home
position at the rear side.
[1]
5.8
Replacing the Transfer and

Separation Wires
Note:
Do not remove the screw that must not be
removed [2] of the paper entrance guide plate [1].
[1]
[2]
3-34
DRUM UNIT
A. Procedure
1. Remove the transfer and separation corona unit
from the main body.
[2]
2. Use a tweezers to remove the hook [1] from the

transfer and separation corona unit. Then
remove the plunging prevention plate [2].
[1]
3. Remove the spark arrestor plates/F [1], /R [2].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
[1]
4. Move the cleaning block to home position, and

remove the top covers [1] from the cleaning
[1]
[4]
block.
5. Remove the spring [2] from each wire, and
remove the wires [3].
[2]
Note:
When removing the wire, be careful that the wire
holding rubber that is in touch with the V-shaped
rack [4] does not get lost.
steps in reverse.
Note:
When installing the wire, be sure that the cleaning
block is in home position at the right side. Stretch
the wire so that it fits into the V holders [4].
3-35
manuals4you.com
[3]
[4]
DEVELOPING UNIT
6. DEVELOPING UNIT
6.1
Screws That Must Not be

Removed
Note:
The 4 screws [1] right must not be removed or
adjusted in the field. Please do not interfere with
[1]
these screws.
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
6.2

the Developing Unit

Developing unit: Every 720,000 copies (7145)
Developing unit: Every 600,000 copies (7235/
7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Loosen the screw [2].
3. Pull the developing unit [3] outward to remove.
4. To reinstall: fit the rails on the bottom of the
[1]
developing unit onto the grooves on the main

body, and slide the unit into place.
[2]
[3]
3-36
DEVELOPING UNIT
6.3
Replacing the Developer

Developer: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
Developer: Every 200,000 copies (7235/7228/
7222)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
2. Release the hooks [1]. Lift the developing unit
[2]
cover [2], and remove it.
3. Tilt the developing unit so that the agitator

screws [1] are toward the bottom, and rotate the
[1]
agitator input gear [2] counterclockwise as necessary to discharge all developer from within the
developing unit and from the developing sleeve
[3].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[2]
[3]
4. Wipe away any toner remaining on the developing regulator plate [4].
[4]
5. Pour new developer evenly over the agitator
screws [1].
[1]
Note:
When carrying out replacement, take care to prevent dirt and debris from entering the system.
6. Rotate the agitator input gear [2] 1 counterclockwise so that the developer moves into the inside
of the developing unit.
[2]
Note:
After installing new developer, do not turn the
developer-input gear or agitator input gear in the
clockwise (reverse) direction.
3-37
manuals4you.com
DEVELOPING UNIT
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as necessary to load all of
the developer.
[2]
8. Rotate the developing input gear counterclockwise and check the bristle height along the
entire surface of the developing sleeve.
9. Reinstall the developing cover while hooking the
cover onto the projection [1]. Be careful to keep
the cover clear of the scatter prevention sheet
[2].
Note:
After replacing developer, carry out L detection
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
adjustment before making copies.
3-38
[1]
7. TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT

7.1

the Toner Bottle
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door [1], and then open the toner
supply cover [2].
2. Pull the toner bottle [3] slightly out, and turn it
[1]
clockwise so that the upper part of the cartridge

aligns with the cutout.
3. Withdraw the toner bottle [3].
steps in reverse.
7.2
[3]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]

the Toner Supply Unit
A. Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit and developing unit.
2. Remove the toner bottle.
[3]
3. Remove the rear cover.

[2]
developing).
5. Remove the drum rotating plate.
6. Remove the 4 connectors [1].
7. Remove the 4 screws [2], and remove the toner
supply unit [3] by pulling it toward you.
steps in reverse.
3-39
manuals4you.com
[1]
7.3

the Cleaning Blade

Cleaning blade (Cleaning blade assembly):
Every 240,000 copies (7145)
Cleaning blade (Cleaning blade assembly):
Every 200,000 copies (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
2. Remove the drum from the drum unit.
3. Remove the 2 screws [1] , and remove the fitting
[2] (suppressor piece) holding the cleaning
blade in place.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
[1]
4. Remove the cleaning blade [1].
Note:
Be careful of the cleaning blade edge. Do not
touch the edge with bare hands, and take care to
avoid scratching it.
[1]
o
u.c
y
ls4
u
an
m
2
3-40

steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
Note:
When installing the cleaning blade [1], install so
that the unit's transparent sheet [2] is oriented as
shown in the diagram.
Before installing the drum and cleaning blade
(regardless of whether new or used), be sure to
coat these with setting powder. Apply the powder
around the entire drum, and on both sides of the
blade.
If you have coated setting powder onto the drum:
Before installing the drum unit rear into the main
body, use an drum cleaner cloth to remove stray
ensure that accurate toner density readings are

obtained.
3-41
manuals4you.com
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
powder from the sensor surface on the TCSB

(Toner control sensor board). This is necessary to
PAPER FEED UNIT
8. PAPER FEED UNIT

8.1
Replacing the Paper Feed

Roller and the Feed Roller
(Bypass)

Paper feed roller: Every 360,000 copies (Once
for every 100,000 copies for actual durable
count) (7145)
Paper feed roller: Every 300,000 copies (Once
count) (7235/7228/7222)
Feed roller: Every 360,000 copies (Once for
every 100,000 copies for actual durable count)
(7145)
Feed roller: Every 300,000 copies (Once for
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

(7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Open the bypass tray.
2. Remove the 3 screws [1] and remove the plate
[2]
[2].
[1]
3. Remove the 2 screws [1], then
bypass sensor.
remove the
[2]
3-42
[1]
PAPER FEED UNIT

4. Remove the stop ring [1] and the bearing [2].
[4]
5. Remove the 2 screws [3]. Then slide the bypass
[5]
feed roller unit [4] to the left side and remove it

from the bypass drive shaft [5].
[1]
[3]
[2]
6. Remove the paper feed roller [1].

7. Remove the 2 stop rings [2] .
[2]
8. Pull out the bypass conveyance shaft [3], and

remove the feed roller [4].
[4]
[1]
Note:
When reinstalling rollers, pay attention to their ori-
[3]
entation.
[2]
3-43
manuals4you.com
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
steps in reverse.
PAPER FEED UNIT
8.2
Replacing the Double Feed

Prevention Roller

Double feed prevention roller: Every 360,000
copies (Once for every 100,000 copies for actual
durable count) (7145)
Double feed prevention roller: Every 300,000
durable count) (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
1. Carry out the steps 1 through to 5 in 8.1
Replacing the paper feed roller and feed roller
[2]
(bypass).
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. Remove the 2 screws [1], and remove the bypass double feed prevention roller unit [2].
3. Remove the 2 springs [1], the two stop rings [2]

and the E ring [3].
4. Pull out the shaft [4] to the side where there is
no E ring provided, and remove the bypass
[1]
[4]
[6]
[5]
reverse roller [5] and the roller [6].

[1]
steps in reverse.
Note:
When reinstalling double feed prevention roller
[5], pay attention to their orientation.
[1]
[3]
[2]
7145ma3006
3-44
PAPER FEED UNIT
8.3

Rubber and the Feed Rubber
(Tray 1)

Paper feed rubber: Every 480,000 copies (Once
count) (7145)
count) (7235/7228/7222)
Feed rubber: Every 480,000 copies (Once for
(7145)
B. Procedure
1. Open the ADU door, and then open the conveyance unit.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

(7235/7228/7222)
[1]
[2]
2. Remove the developing unit, the drum unit and

the fixing unit.
3. Slide the upper tray 1 [1] out. Remove the 2
screws [2] holding the tray in place, and take the
tray 1 [1] off.
4. Remove the paper feed roller cover [3] in the
[2]
direction of arrow [2] while pushing it in the

direction of arrow [1].
[1]
[3]
3-45
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED UNIT

5. Remove the 2 stop rings [1] and the bearing [2].
[3]
6. Remove the feed shaft [5] from the rocking shaft
[5]
[4] while raising the shaft on the left side of the

paper feed roller unit [3], and remove the paper
feed roller unit [3].
[4]
[1]
7. Remove the collar [1] and pull out the feed shaft
[2].
[2]
[8]
[1]
[7]
8. Remove the feed rubber [4] from the feed roller
[6]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3].
9. Remove the stop ring [5] and pull out the paper
[2]
feed shaft [6].

10. Remove the paper feed rubber [8] from the
paper feed roller [7].
[1]
[9] [5]
steps in reverse.
[4]
Note:
Be sure to install the feed rubber [4] so that the
paint mark [9] is turned in the direction as shown
in the illustration.
Install the paper feed roller unit so that the hook
of the paper feed roller unit comes above the
paper feed roller unit release arm.
3-46
[3]
[11]
[10]
PAPER FEED UNIT
8.4

Prevention Rubber (Tray 1)

Double feed prevention rubber: Every 480,000
durable count) (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
[1]
holding the tray in place, and take the tray 1 [1]
[2]
off.
3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the plate [2].

4. Remove the screw [3].
5. With the claws [4] on both ends sandwiched
III DIS./ASSEMBLY

2. Slide the tray 1 [1] out. Remove the 2 screws [2]
[5]
[4]
[1]
from the inside of the main body, remove the

double feed prevention roller unit [5].
[2]
[3]
6. Pull out the lever click shaft [1] while pushing
the lever section [2] of the lever click shaft [1].
7. Remove the double feed prevention rubber [4]
[4]
[5]
[3]
from the double feed prevention roller [3].
[2]
[1]
3-47
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED UNIT

[1]
steps in reverse.
Note:
[3]
Be sure to install the double feed prevention rubber so that the paint mark [5] above is turned in
the direction as shown in the illustration.
When installing the double feed prevention roller
unit [1] to the main body, be sure to align the
[2]
upper section of the claw [2] with the center (the

longest scale) of the marking [3] stamped on the
main body frame for leveling.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8.5

Rubber and the Feed Rubber
(Tray 2)

count) (7145)
count) (7235/7228/7222)
(7145)
(7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the plate [2].
[1]
[2]
3-48
PAPER FEED UNIT

3. Remove the 2 stop rings [1] and the bearing [2]
[4]
on this side, and remove the paper feed roller
[3]
unit [4] by sliding the bearing [3] on the rear side

to the rear.
[1]
[1]
[2]
4. Remove the collar [1] and pull out the feed shaft
[2].
5. Remove the feed rubber [4] from the feed roller
[8]
[7]
[2]
feed shaft [6].

7. Remove the paper feed rubber [8] from the
paper feed roller [7].
[1]
[9] [5]
steps in reverse.
[4]
Note:
Be sure to install the feed rubber [4] so that the
paint mark [9] is turned in the direction as shown
in the illustration.
Install the paper feed roller unit so that the hook
of the paper feed roller unit comes above the
paper feed roller unit release arm.
3-49
manuals4you.com
[3]
[11]
[10]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[6]
[3].
6. Remove the stop ring [5] and pull out the paper
PAPER FEED UNIT
8.6

Prevention Rubber (Tray 2)

durable count) (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
2. Slide the tray 2 [1] out. Remove the 2 screws [2]
[1]
holding the tray in place, and take the tray 2 [1]

off.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
3. Open the guide plate [1], and remove the set
[3]
screw [2].
4. With the claws [3] on both ends sandwiched
from the inside of the main body, remove the
double feed prevention roller unit [4].
[1]
manuals4you.com
[2]
[3]
5. While pressing on the lever [2] on the lever click

shaft [1], pull out the lever click shaft [1].
[4]
[5]
[4]
6. Remove the double feed prevention rubber [4]

from the roller [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
3-50
PAPER FEED UNIT

[1]
steps in reverse.
Note:
[3]
Be sure to install the double feed prevention rubber so that the paint mark [5] above is turned in
the direction as shown in the illustration.
When installing the double feed prevention roller
unit [1] to the main body, be sure to align the
[2]
upper section of the claw [2] with the center (the

longest scale) of the marking [3] stamped on the
main body frame for leveling.
Cleaning the Paper

Removing Brush
Dust
1. Open the ADU door, and then open the conveyance unit.
[3]
[1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
8.7
2. Remove the developing unit and the drum unit.

3. Release the catch of the claw [3] while lifting up
slightly the lower section on this side [2] of the
paper dust removing brush [1], and remove the
paper dust removing brush [1] in the arrowmarked direction.
[2]
Note:
Do not bend the metal plate of the paper dust
removing brush [1].
4. Clean the PET sheet [1] and the plastic part [2]
using a cleaning pad and a blower brush.
[1]
[2]
A. Installation procedure
1. Insert the paper dust removing brush [1] from
the rear side [2], and confirm that the hole [3] in
the brush [1] is engaged with the claw [4].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
3-51
manuals4you.com
FIXING UNIT
9. FIXING UNIT
9.1

the Fixing Unit
Caution:
The fixing unit remains extremely hot immediately after power is switched OFF. To avoid
injury from burns, do not begin work until the
fixing unit has cooled down sufficiently.
When installing the fixing unit, be sure to
firmly tighten the unit's 2 set screws.
A. Procedure
1. Open the ADU door [1] and the conveyance unit
[2], and loosen the 2 screws [4] holding the fixing unit [3] in place.
[4]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. Pull the fixing unit out toward you and remove it.
[2]
Note:
Do not touch the areas shown in the diagram right
when attaching or removing the fixing unit.
Observe care, as force applied to the fixing claw
and paper exit guide may result in the rollers
being scratched.
steps in reverse.
3-52
[3]
[1]
FIXING UNIT
9.2
Replacing the Fixing Heater

Lamp/1 and Lamp/2
Caution:
Do not touch the lamp area with bare hands.

Fixing heater lamp/1: Every 480,000 copies
(7145 only)
(7145 only)
B. Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit from the main body.
2. Remove the screws [1], and remove the 2 cov-
[2]
[1]
ers/F [2], /R [3].
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[3]
3. Detach the faston terminal [1] at the rear of each
lamp.
Note:
The marking B is stamped on the hole of the
lamp support piece for the L3 (Fixing heater lamp
/3) [2].
[1]
[2]
3-53
manuals4you.com
FIXING UNIT
4. Detach the faston terminal [1] at the front of
[1]
each lamp.
5. Remove the 2 screws [2], and remove the lamp
support piece/F [3].
[3]
6. Keeping all cord faston terminal wiring straight,

pull each fixing heater lamp/1 [4], /2 [5] toward
[2]
you to remove.
steps in reverse.
Note:
When installing, be sure that manufacturer's mark
is mounted on the front side.
Do not allow the heater lamps to make contact
[5]
with the inside of the roller.

Install so that the main lamp is at the top, and the
sub lamp is at the bottom.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Heater cords are color-coded as follows.

Color Positions
Lamp
Main
Sub
JAPAN
U.S.A.
[4]
EUROPE
OTHERS
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
White White Red Red Blue Blue
White Black Red Black Blue Black
When installing the faston terminal on the drive

gear side, be sure that the installation position is
correct.
3-54
FIXING UNIT
9.3

the Fixing Claw

Fixing claw: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
Fixing claw: Every 200,000 copies (7235/7228/
7222)
B. Procedure
[4]
2. Remove the 2 covers/F, /R.

3. Open the fixing guide [1].
4. Remove the 2 set screws [2], and remove the
fixing paper exit board/U [3].
[3]
5. Remove the 3 screws [4] from the fixing paper
[5]
exit board/U, and remove the fixing claw unit [5].
[2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[2]
6. Unhook the spring [1] of the fixing claw unit, and

remove the fixing claw [2].
[2]
steps in reverse.
Note:
When installing the fixing claw, be sure that it is
oriented correctly.
Be sure that the claw is securely attached to the
claw spring.
When installing the fixing paper exit board/U to
the fixing unit, be careful not to damage the fixing
roller with the fixing claw.
[1]
3-55
manuals4you.com
FIXING UNIT
9.4
Replacing the Fixing Web

Fixing web (Fixing cleaner assembly) : Every
240,000 copies (7145)
Fixing web (Fixing cleaner assembly) : Every
200,000 copies (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
2. Remove the front cover and the rear cover of
[1]
the fixing unit.

3. Remove the fixing paper exit board/U.
4. Remove the 6 screws [1] and remove the fixing
[2]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
web [2].
[1]
3-56
FIXING UNIT
steps in reverse.
[2]
[3]
Note:
When replacing the fixing web, be sure to rotate
the web drive gear [5] to wind up the edge in blue
line [1] of the fixing web until it comes between 0
and 10mm from the nip section [4] of the fixing
[4]
heating roller [2] and the fixing cleaning roller [3].

On this occasion, be sure to check the web winding shaft [6] if it is also rotating.
[1]
[6]
3-57
manuals4you.com
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[5]
FIXING UNIT
When installing the fixing claw unit, be careful
that the edge of the fixing claw pressing spring [1]
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
does not run on the web case.
OK
[1]
NG
3-58
FIXING UNIT
9.5
Removing/Reinstalling
the
Fixing Heat Roller, Fixing
Pressure Roller, Heat Insulating Sleeve/A, /B, Fixing
Idling gear /B, Fixing Bearing
/U, /L, Heater Lamp/1, /2

Fixing heat roller: Every 120,000 copies (7145)
Fixing heat roller: Every 200,000 copies (7235/
7228/7222)
Fixing pressure roller: Every 120,000 copies
(7145)
Fixing pressure roller: Every 200,000 copies
(7235/7228/7222)
Heat insulating sleeve/A: Every 120,000 copies
(7145)
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
Heat insulating sleeve/A: Every 200,000 copies

(7235/7228/7222)
Heat insulating sleeve/B: Every 120,000 copies
(7145)
Heat insulating sleeve/B: Every 200,000 copies
(7235/7228/7222)
Fixing idling gear/B: Every 120,000 copies
(7145)
Fixing idling gear/B: Every 200,000 copies
(7235/7228/7222)
Fixing bearing /U: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
Fixing bearing/U: Every 200,000 copies (7235/
7228/7222)
Fixing bearing/L: Every 240,000 copies (7145)
Fixing bearing/L: Every 200,000 copies (7235/
7228/7222)
(7145 only)
(7145 only)
3-59
manuals4you.com
FIXING UNIT
B. Procedure
[2]
2. Remove the fixing claw unit.

3. Remove the fixing web.
4. Remove the two fixing heater lamps.
[3]
[1]
5. Remove the 2 screws [2] and 2 collars [3] for the

connector [1] that was connected to the faston
terminal. Remove the connector [1].
6. Remove the 2 screws [4], and remove the lamp
support piece/R [5].
[5]
[4]
7. Open the fixing guide [1] to release the pres-
[1]
sure.
8. Remove the C-ring [3] at the rear of the heat
roller [2], and then remove the gear [4] and heat
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
insulating sleeve/A [5], /B [6].
[5]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[4]
[6]
9. Remove another C-ring [1], then remove the
[2]
heat insulating sleeve A [2] (the sleeve toward

the front).
10. Remove the 2 fixing bearings/U [4] (one at the
front, one at the rear) from the fixing unit.
11. Remove the fixing heat roller [3].
[1]
[3]
Note:
When the installation, be sure that heat insulating
sleeves A and B are oriented and positioned correctly.
When replacing the heating insulating sleve/A [5],
apply solvest 240 [7] to the inside and outside
surfaces of the heat insulation sleeve/A [5] and
then install it.
3-60
[4]
FIXING UNIT
12. After removing the fixing pressure roller [1],
remove the E-ring at both sides and then
[3]
remove the 2 fixing bearings/U [2].
[2]
13. In the case of the 7145

Remove the E-ring, and then remove the fixing
idling gear/B [4] and gear [3].
Note:
[1]
When replacing the fixing idling gear/B [4], clean
[4]
the gear shaft with a drum cleaner.
[2]

Remove a screw [1] and then remove the shaft
fixing plate caulking [2].
[2]
7145ma3106
[3]
Remove the fixing idling gear/B [3] from the
Note:
When replacing the fixing idling gear/B [3] with a
[4]
new one, clean the shaft section of the shaft fixing

plate caulking [2] with drum cleaner.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
shaft section of shaft fixing plate caulking [2].
[1]
steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
3-61
manuals4you.com
7322ma3007
FIXING UNIT
Note:
When returning the fixing web in use, be sure to
rotate the web drive gear [2] until the original web
winding shaft [1] starts to turn.
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[2]
When returning the wiring harness, be sure to

hook the wiring harness securely on the wiring
harness holder section [1] so that it does not
interfere with the web operation lever [2].
[1]
3-62
[2]
FIXING UNIT
OK
[1]
NG
3-63
manuals4you.com
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING UNIT
9.6

the Fixing Temperature Sensors
Caution:
After installing the fixing temperature sensors:
Make sure that the wire bundles are not in
contact with the fixing heat roller.
Make sure that the sensors them-selves (the
sensor areas) are in contact with the fixing
heat roller.

Fixing sensor assembly: Every 480,000 copies
(7145)
Fixing sensor assembly: Every 400,000 copies
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
(7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
[4]

[5]
[6]
[4]
4. Remove the connector [1].

5. Remove the 3 screws [2], and remove the fixing
web mounting piece [3].
6. Remove the 2 screws [4], and remove the fixing
sensor assembly [5].
steps in reverse.
Note:
The fixing sensor assembly [7] is made up of the
TH1 (fixing temperature sensor/1) and the TH2
[1]
(fixing temperature sensor/2). Since the TH1 and

the TH2 have been adjusted at the time of their
assembling, avoid surely loosening the screws.
Make sure that the sensors are in contact with the
heat roller.
3-64
[7]
[2]
[3]
FIXING UNIT
rotate the web drive gear until the original web
winding shaft [1] starts to turn.
[1]
OK
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
NG
3-65
manuals4you.com
FIXING UNIT
9.7

the Fuse Mounting Plate
Assembly
Caution:
This is an important safety part. (P/N:SP000110) Be sure to observe the following cautions and steps when removing or reinstalling.
Caution:
After installing the thermostat:
Make sure that the wire bundle is not in contact with the fixing heat roller.
Make sure that the thermostat itself is in con-
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
tact with the fixing heat roller.

Fuse mounting plate assembly: Every 480,000
copies (7145)
Fuse mounting plate assembly: Every 400,000
copies (7235/7228/7222)
B. Procedure
[2]
[1]

4. Remove the heat roller.
5. Remove the fixing web mounting piece.
6. Detach the thermostat [1] 2 Faston terminals [2].
7. Remove the 2 screws [3], and remove the Fuse
[3]
mounting plate assembly [4].

[4]
steps in reverse.
Note:
When installing the fuse mounting plate assembly, with the base plate sandwiched between the
units sheet materials, fasten it with the screw
while attaching it to the bottom side.
When connecting the Faston terminals of the
thermostat [1], be careful not to deform the plate
spring section. Be careful not to mix up the front
with the back of the Faston terminal.
3-66
FIXING UNIT
rotate the web drive gear until the original web
winding shaft [1] starts to turn after the assembling.
[1]
OK
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
NG
3-67
manuals4you.com
III DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING UNIT
Blank page
3-68
SERVICE MANUAL
Models
7145/7222/7228/7235
Service Section
APRIL 2004
manuals4you.com
7145/7222/7228/7235
SERVICE MANUAL
APRIL 2004
manuals4you.com
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of the possible hazards to an inexperienced
person servicing this equipment, as well as the risk of
damage to the equipment, Konica Minolta Business
Solutions U.S.A., Inc. strongly recommends that all
servicing be performed by Konica Minolta-trained service technicians only.
Changes may have been made to this equipment to
improve its performance after this service manual was
printed. Accordingly, Konica Minolta Business Solutions
U.S.A., Inc., makes no representations or warranties,
either expressed or implied, that the information contained in this service manual is complete or accurate. It
is understood that the user of this manual must assume
all risks or personal injury and/or damage to the equipment while servicing the equipment for which this service manual is intended.
Corporate Publications Department
2004, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A. , INC.

All rights reserved.
Printed in U.S.A.
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
I ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13
II ISW
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11
ADJUSTMENT
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

4. CE PASSWORD SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
5. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
5.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
6. CHECKING BY THE COUNTER KEY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
6.1 Checking method of the counter key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
III SERVICE
1.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
7.3.1
7.3.2
PM count reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Entering PM count start date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
7.3.3
7.3.4
Setting of PM cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

Counter clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31

Copy count for each part to be replaced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
7.5.1
7.5.2
Copy count by parts to be replaced (fixed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37

Copy count by parts to be replaced (Named; arbitrarily) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
7.6
7.7
Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41

Setting phone number of the service center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
7.8
Setting the serial number/the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

7.8.1 Setting the serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
7.9
7.8.2 Setting the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43

Displaying the ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
7.10 KRDS setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43

7.11 ISW setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
7.12 Root counter display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
7.13 Setting date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
7.14 Tray size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
i
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
7. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
7.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
CONTENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
8. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
8.1
Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
8.2
Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
8.3
L detection adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
8.4
8.5
Toner density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

Dot diameter adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
8.6
LD1 offset adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
8.7
LD2 offset adjustment (7145 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
II ISW
8.8
8.9
Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

8.8.1
Vertical/Horizontal magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
8.8.2
Restart timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
8.8.3
Paper feed loop amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
8.8.4
8.8.5
Leading edge original erasure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
8.8.6
Image read point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
8.8.7 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59

Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
8.9.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60

8.10 Test pattern output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
III SERVICE
8.11 Test pattern density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65

8.12 Image quality adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
8.12.1 RADF scanning density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
8.12.2 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
8.13 List print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
8.14 Counter clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
8.15 Adjustment of RADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
8.15.1 Vertical magnification adjustment in RADF system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
IV DIAGRAMS
8.15.2 Adjustment of restart timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69

8.15.3 Paper feed loop adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
8.15.4 Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
8.15.5 RADF scanning density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.15.6 RADF image read point adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.16 FNS adjustment (FS-112 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71
8.17 FNS adjustment (FS-114 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
8.17.1 Fold & Stitch position adjustment (SK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
8.17.2 Fold position adjustment (SK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
8.17.3 Punch position adjustment (PK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
8.17.4 Punch loop adjustment (PK-114) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
9. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
9.1
9.2
47 mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76

RADF original size detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
9.3
9.4
Bypass size detection adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77

Action for mounting when reinstalling the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
9.5
9.6
Input check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78

Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
10. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89

10.1 RADF height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
ii
CONTENTS
10.3 RADF original skew adjustment (front side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91

10.4 RADF original skew adjustment (back side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-92
10.5 DB-411 paper-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-94
10.6 DB-411 tray tilt adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-95
10.7 LT tray tilt adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
10.8 FS-113 Output Check Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98
I ADJUSTMENT
10.2 RADF distortion adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90
10.9 Lengthwise position adjustment of punch hole of FS-113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103

10.10Adjustment of FS-113 Solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104
10.11FS-113 Timing Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
10.13Adjustment of FS-113 Elevator Tray Overload Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
10.14Staple Position Adjustment of FS-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
10.15Adjustment of the Installation Position of the Shutter Drive Gear of FS-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
II ISW
10.12FS-113 Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106
10.16Punch Hole Deviance Adjustment of FS-114 (PK-114). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110

10.17Fold Angle Adjustment of SK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
10.18Staple Angle Adjustment of SK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
ISW
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2. SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. USB ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
III SERVICE
II
III SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1.1 7145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.2
7235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
7228/7222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

1.2.1 7145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
1.2.2
1.2.3
7235/7228/7222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
DF-318/320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
1.2.4
1.2.5
DB-211/411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
LT-203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
1.2.6
1.2.7
FS-112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
FS-113/RU-101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
1.2.8
1.2.9
FS-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
PK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
1.2.10 SK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

1.2.11 BK-114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
1.3
Periodic check items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

1.3.1 7145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
1.3.2
1.3.3
7235/7228/7222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
DF-318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
1.3.4
DF-320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
iii
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
1.1
CONTENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
1.3.5
1.4
1.5
DB-211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
1.3.6
DB-411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
1.3.7
LT-203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
1.3.8
FS-112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Important maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2. 1 PM PARTS KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

3. SERVICE MATERIALS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
IV DIAGRAMS
III SERVICE
II ISW
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

1.1
1.2
Main body parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

DF-318/320 parts layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
1.3
DB-211 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
1.4
1.5
DB-411 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

LT-203 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
1.6
1.7
FS-112 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

RU-101 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
1.8 IT-101 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
2.1
2.2
Main body connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

DF-318/320 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
2.3
2.4
DB-211 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

DB-411 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
2.5
2.6
LT-203 connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

FS-112 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
IV DIAGRAMS
2.7 RU-101 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

3. JAM CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.1 Error code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.2
4.3
About abnormal units isolation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

L detection error code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.4 Network section status indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

5. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
5.1
5.2
7145 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

7235/7228/7222 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
5.3
5.4
7145 ADU timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

7235/7228/7222 ADU timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
5.5
5.6
DF-318/DF-320 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

DB-211/DB-411 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
5.7
5.8
LT-203 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

FS-112 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
5.9 FS-113 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

5.10 FS-114 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
5.11 SK-114 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
6. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
3
iv
CONTENTS
DF-318/320 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
6.2
DB-211/411 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
6.3
LT-203 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
6.4
FS-112 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
6.5
6.6
RU-101 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99

FS-113 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
6.7
SK-114 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
I ADJUSTMENT
6.1
7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-1

7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7235/7228/7222 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-6

7.7
7.8
7.9

FS-114 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix-11
IV DIAGRAMS
III SERVICE
7.1
7.2
II ISW
7. APPENDIX
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
III SERVICE
II ISW
I ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
Blank page
vi

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to
the copier, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that
all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed.
Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service
Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical
training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND

CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions DANGER, WARNING, and
as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
CAUTION is defined
When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance,
etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier.

:Prohibition when using the copier.
:Direction when using the copier.
General precaution
Electric hazard
High temperature
General prohibition
Do not touch with wet hand
Do not disassemble
General instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
S-1
manuals4you.com
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1]
MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY

KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical
aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For
this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be
Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be
Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by KMBT
Using parts not specified by KMBT
S-2
[2]
CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Konica Minolta brand copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of
injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order
to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1.Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet

Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
kw
If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load
must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet.

Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the
risk of fire.
Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is
damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power
cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric shock.
When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to
observe the following precautions:
a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket
on the rear panel of the copier.
Secure the cord with a fixture properly.
b.
If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plugs on both ends) specified by KMBT.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk
of fire.
Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and
so on.
S-3
manuals4you.com

Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in
fire.
Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.
Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long
extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may
result.

Check whether the copier is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric
shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the
following points:
a. Ground terminal of wall outlet
b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-4

Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected.
Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed
below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock:
a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.)
b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.)
c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case
of lightning.)
d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.)
2.Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile
materials that may catch fire.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: Nonoperational Handling

When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.),
switch it off and unplug the power cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity

Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat
source such as a heater.
A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists.
Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind.
Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows:
Temperature: 10C to 30C
Humidity: 10% to 80% (no dew condensation)
Avoid other environments as much as possible.
Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette
smoke, or ammonia gas.
Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems
and image faults.
S-5
manuals4you.com
The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be
harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the
room.
a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to
install the copier in a level and sturdy place.
Constant vibration will cause problems.
Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a
injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service
manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the
prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do
not make any adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a
risk of injury or fire exists.
Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from
the copier and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock
exists.
The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.

Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check
with the copier powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external
cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be
caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
S-6

Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.

Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the
copier.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.
Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable.
(Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts)
Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and
sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make
sure that the power cord has been disconnected.
Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write
unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the
method specified by local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7
manuals4you.com

After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and
fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the
interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be
injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper
jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or
other pointed parts.
Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were
removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not
to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with
eyes, etc. It may be stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately.
When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.
S-8
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are
highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants
on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated.
Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any
liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off.
When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
[3]
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency
measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried
out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site
checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in Serious Accident
Report/Follow-up Procedures.
[4]
CONCLUSION
1. Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration.
Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer
engineer.
2. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must
verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
S-9
manuals4you.com
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented
regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation
Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS
[2]
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in seri-
overheating prevention circuit
ous accidents.
[1]
[2]
L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamp/1, /2) overheat-
L2 and L3 (fixing heater lamp/1, /2)
DCPS
TS
RL1
ing prevention circuit
them in order to prevent servicing errors that may
L3
TH1
impair their functions.
[1]
RL1
TH2
the service engineer with a renewed awareness of
L2
CB
These safety circuits are described below to provide
Control
section
AC driver
section
FCB
CBR1
1.
The output voltage from TH1, TH2 (fixing tem-
DCPS
perature sensor/1, /2) is read by the CPU. If

this voltage is abnormal, L2 (fixing heater
CBR2
1.
Protection by software
lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2) and RL1

(main relay) are turned OFF.
Protection by CBR1 and CBR2 (circuit

breaker/1, /2)
CAUTION:
CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instanta-
neously when an excessive current flows due

to a short in the AC line.
CAUTION:
The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not
be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
manuals4you.com

2.
Protection by the hardware circuit

The output voltages from TH1, TH2 (fixing temperature sensor/1, /2) are compared with the
abnormality judgment reference value in the
comparator circuit. If the output voltage from
TH1 or TH2 exceeds the reference value, L2
(fixing heater lamp/1), L3 (fixing heater lamp/2)
and RL1 (main relay) are turned OFF in hardware means.
CAUTION:
Periodically check the TH1, TH2 face
contacting the roller, and replace TH2 if
any abnormality is detected.
3.
Protection by TS (thermostat)
When the fixing heat roller exceeds the specified value, TSs (thermostats) are turned OFF,
thus interrupting the power to L2 (fixing heater
lamp/1), and L3 (fixing heater lamp/2) directly.
CAUTION:
Do not use any other electrical conductor
in place of TS1 and TS2.
S-12
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns
and electric shock.
[1]
Main body
1.
Right side
<7145>
CAUTION
The fixing unit is very hot.
To avoid getting burned
DO NOT TOUCH.
CAUTION
This area generates
high voltage.
If touched, electrical
shock may occur.
DO NOT TOUCH!
(Inside of the main

body front door)
CAUTION
(Inside of the main
body right side door)
The roller shaft on the inside

of the cover is very hot.
To avoid getting burned DO
NOT TOUCH.
If the cover comes off, return
it to its original position.
7322sf001e
CAUTION
S-13
manuals4you.com

<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf002e
CAUTION
S-14

2.
Front side
<7145>
7322sf003e
CAUTION
S-15
manuals4you.com

<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf004e
CAUTION
S-16

3.
Rear/Left side (7235/7228/7222 only)
7322sf005e
CAUTION
S-17
manuals4you.com

4.
Scanner section
<7145>
7322sf006
CAUTION
manuals4you.com
S-18

<7235/7228/7222>
7322sf007e
CAUTION
S-19
manuals4you.com
[2]
FS-113
CAUTION
This area is very hot.
To avoid getting
burned DO NOT
TOUCH.
(Inside of the Finisher)
CAUTION
To avoid injury, DO NOT put your hand on the top
of the printed sheets. Be sure to hold both sides
of the printed sheets when removing them, and
DO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets
while the primary (main) tray goes up.
[3]
FS-113 Finisher
7322sf009
FS-114
FS-114 Finisher
7322sf010
CAUTION
S-20
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION
ADJUSTMENT
B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site service

Be sure to pay due attention to the following
1. HOW TO USE THE

ADJUSTMENT SECTION
1.1
when repairing the machine.

1. Only one side of the AC power line is disconnected when the main power of this machine is
turned off. Always unplug the machine before
Composition
This section details adjusting items and procedures.
beginning work. If absolutely necessary to work

with the power on, exercise care to avoid being
caught in the scanning rear of the exposure unit.
A. Checking before starting work

Use this section for making adjustments and as
2. Special care should be taken when handling the
a checklist before implementing corrective

measures in the field.
fixing unit since it operates at extremely high

temperatures.
3. The developing unit is surrounded by a strong
1. Does the power supply meet the requirements?

2. Is the power supply properly grounded?
3. Is the machine sharing its power source with
another high current consumption machine that
draws large currents intermittently? (e.g. an elevator, air conditioner, or other source of electrical consumption)
4. Is the installation environment suitable?
The machine must be installed in a wellventilated place free from high temperature, high
humidity and direct sunlight.
The machine must be installed on a level
floor.
magnetic field. Keep watches and metering

equipment away from it.
4. Avoid scarring the drum with tools or similar
objects.
5. Do not touch IC pins with your bare hands.
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN
REPLACING PARTS
Adjustments (including checks) and settings are not
only required when a defective copy image occurs,
but also after replacing or reinstalling certain parts.
5. Does the cause of a defective image lie in the

original itself?
[How to use the tables]

The following items are used in the tables through-
6. Is the density adjusting control at the proper

position?
out this section.

1. Mode
7. Are the platen glass and the slit glass clean?

8. Is the correct paper being used for the copy?
Indicates the adjustment mode.

25
: 25 mode
9. Are the copying materials and parts replaced
36
: 36 mode
when they reach the end of their usable life?

(developer, drum, cleaning blade, etc.)
47
: 47 mode
2. Symbols used in the tables

,
................. :
Indicates there is a pri-
10. Is there toner in the toner bottle?
ority
sequence
for
adjustments (including
{ (Empty circle)
checks) and settings.

Indicates adjustments
(including checks) and
settings that can be carried out independently.
1-1
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
PM cycle set
25
1-30
{
{
*1
{ *2
Process adjustment
L detection adjustment
36
1-46
Process adjustment
Toner density adjustment
36
1-46
Process adjustment
Dot diameter adjustment
36
1-47
Process adjustment
LD1 offset adjustment
36
1-47
Process adjustment
LD2 offset adjustment (7145)
36
1-48
Image adjustment
Magnification
adjustment
Vertical magnification of printer
36
1-49
Image adjustment
Magnification
Vertical magnifi-
adjustment
cation of scanner (platen)
36
1-51
Magnification
adjustment
Vertical magnification of scan-
36
1-52
36
1-51
36
1-52
36
1-53
36
1-54
36
1-55
10 Image adjustment
ner (RADF)
11 Image adjustment
12 Image adjustment
13 Image adjustment
Magnification
Horizontal mag-
adjustment
nification of
scanner
Timing adjust-
Main body
ment
related
Timing adjust-
RADF
ment
14 Image adjustment
Timing adjustment
Paper feed loop

amount adjust-
ment
15 Image adjustment
Timing adjust-
Leading edge
ment
original erasure
adjustment
1-2
{
{
E-RDH
RADF slit glass
1-30
RADF
25
Fixing unit-related parts
PM counter resetting
Developer
Page
Drum
Mode
items
Paper feeding-related rubber rollers
Adjustment
Parameter memory board
Adjustment classification
Write unit
I ADJUSTMENT
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
19 Image adjustment
20 Image adjustment
adjustment
Centering
Main body related
adjustment
Centering
adjustment
Centering
DBLT centering
adjustment
adjustment
Centering
RADF centering
adjustment
adjustment
RADF
RADF scanner
adjustment
density
adjustment
21 Drum count resetting
Drum count resetting
22 Fixing unit related

counter resetting
Fixing unit related

counter resetting
36
1-56
36
1-56
36
1-58
36
1-65
{ {
25/36 1-40 {
25/36 1-68
E-RDH memory check
23
E-RDH memory
check
*1
After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first carried out L
detection adjustment.
*2
When PRMB (Parameter memory board) is replaced, remember to replaced the developer before conducting the L deection adjustment.
47
1-88
Note:
When replacing a board due to the SCB (System control board) being damaged, the PRMB (Parameter
memory board) that was installed on the damaged SCB should be used as a rule on the new SCB.
The use of a new PRMB should be limited only when it is considered that the PRMB is also damaged.
On this occasion, adjustment data have not been input into the new PRMB and it is necessary to implement all of the adjustment items. In order to make the new PRMB effective, the 47 mode - 92 (output)
should be carried out before implementation of the adjustment items.
When the adjustment items have been implemented, the 47 mode - 96 (output) should be also executed.
The adjustment data are backed up by implementing the 47-96 mode.
For the original PRMB installed on the damaged SCB, the 47-92 mode is protected against inadvertent
execution. For details of the cancellation of protection, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor.
1-3
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
RADF slit glass
RADF
1-58
Developer
36
Drum
18 Image adjustment
Image read point
Write unit
17 Image adjustment
Timing
adjustment
Page
16 Image adjustment
Mode
items
E-RDH
Adjustment
Fixing unit-related parts
Adjustment classification
Paper feeding-related rubber rollers
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
I ADJUSTMENT
CE PASSWORD SETTING
4. CE PASSWORD SETTING
5. MODE CHANGE MENU
Important:
In order to prevent the malicious CE to access
5.1
Setting Method
data and to change settings of the machine,
The following modes can be selected on the mode
ensure to change the CE password.
change menu screen without turning OFF/ON the

power supply:
On key operator mode, if the enhanced security is
1 Basic screen
enabled, CE password must be input to verify the

CE to access the following service modes.
2 36 mode
3 25 mode
4 Key operation mode
36 mode
5 47 mode
25 mode
47 mode
6 Exit
A. Procedure
Register a CE password by the following procedure.
1. Turn on SW1 (main power switch) and SW2

(sub power switch).
A. Procedure
1. While the SW1 (main power switch) is ON, turn
2. Keep pressing the
OFF SW2 (sub power switch)

2. Turn the SW2 ON while pressing 2 and 5 of the
3. Input 9272 as the password and press the

[START] key. (The password is fixed and cannot
copy quantity setting buttons

CE password input request screen appears.
be changed.)
4. Press the key of the mode to be selected on the
3. Enter default password 92729272.

On the LCD, basic screen for 25 mode
appears.
4. Press [5. Password setting] key.
screen.
If enhanced security is enabled, enter CE password to access to 25 mode, 36 mode and
47 mode. Enter Key operator password to
Password setup screen appears.

5. Press [4. CE Password setting] key.
access [Key operator mode].

5. To return to the Mode Change Menu screen,
CE password input screen appears.

6. Enter new 8-digit CE password then press [Set]
key.
7. OFF/ON sub-switch to complete password input
procedure and to exit from 25 mode.
Note:
Only alphanumerical keys can be used for the
password. Continuous single alphanumeric cannot be used for the password.
In order to change the registered password, in the
above step 3, enter current password and continue following steps.
Do not use name, your birthday or employee
code number as the password since other people
can easily guess them.
CE should not inform other people of the password.
button until the message

Enter password for mode selection appears.
1-4
keep pressing the
button until the Mode
Change Menu screen appears.

6. When the adjustment ends, press [6. Exit] key
and the basic screen will appear.
6. CHECKING BY THE
COUNTER KEY FUNCTION
The counter key function enables to display of the
following parameters by using the counter button:
1 Total count
2 Total count start date
3 PM count/PM count limit
4 PM count start date
5 Fax send paper count
6 Fax receive paper count
7 Printer count
8 Scanner count
9 Drum count
10 Developing count
11 Fixing unit count
6.1
Checking Method of
Counter Key Function
the
A. Procedure
1. Turn on SW1 (main power switch) and SW2
(sub power switch).
2. Press the counter button.
3. The Counter confirmation screen appears, and
the total count value appears. The counter that
appears differs depending upon the installed
option.
4. If you press the ! button on the Counter confirmation screen, service-related counters that
indicate the PM count, and so on, appear.
5. To output the count value list, press the [PRINT]
key.
6. Press the [OK] key or the stop button to return to
the basic screen.
1-5
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
CHECKING BY THE COUNTER KEY FUNCTION
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7. 25 MODE
Adjustment item menu
Remarks
1. Software DIPSW
See the List of soft-
setting
2. PM COUNT/CYCLE
ware DIPSW.
1. PM COUNT reset
2. PM CYCLE set
3. Counter clear
1. Drum related
counter
3. Collecting data
3. Counter clear
2. Fixing related
counter
1. Count data
collection
Data Collection 1
Copy count of each
paper size
RADF paper passage count
1. Count data
Data Collection 2
collection
JAM occurrence
count by each point
1. Count data
collection
Copy count of each mode
Data Collection 3
1. Count data
collection
Data Collection 4
SC count : F code
2. Periodic data collection starts

4. Parts counter
1. Count of parts (Fixed)

2. Count of parts (Named)
5. Password setting
1. Key operator password setting
8 digits
2. User account (EKC) master key code setting
8 digits
3. Weekly timer master key code setting
4 digits
4. CE password setting
8 digits
6. Service TEL No.

setting
Telephone & Fax. No.

of service center setting.
1-6
25 MODE
7. Serial number
setting
1. Main body
Remarks
I ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment item menu
Sets up the serial

number display and
2. Optional tray
the destination.
3. LCT
4. Finisher
5. Fax
6. Printer
7. FL-102/FL-103
8. FS-114 punch unit
9. FS-114 saddle unit
10.RADF (7235/7228/7222)
8. Indication of ROM
Display each version
version
of ROM.
9. KRDS setting
See the KRDS manual provided separately.
10. ISW
Rewrites the contents of the flash

ROM of each board.
11. Indication of Root

counter
Displays the root counter (total counter).
12. Setting date
Sets the starting date

of the total counter.
13. Tray size setting
Set the paper size of

LT-203.
1-7
manuals4you.com
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.1
Setting Method
7.2
A special operating mode called 25 Mode has

been provided with this machine. This mode
enables rewriting of the non-volatile storage and
Setting Software DIPSW
A. Setting method
This setting specifies the software DIPSW on
the software SW setting screen.
specify other various settings.

Note:
The bit of the DIP switch is written in the non-vol-
A. Procedure
1. Turn OFF the SW2 (sub power switch) when the
SW1 (main power switch) remains ON.
atile memory every time it is changed.

B. Meaning of the values displayed on the
screen
copy quantity setting buttons.

If enhanced security is enabled, CE password
input request screen appears. Input the CE
password.
25 mode menu screen appears. At this moment,
the machine turns to 25 mode and the normal
copy operation is disabled.
3. Press the desired item key on the LCD screen.
Each setting screen will appear.
4. Enter data in each selected screen.
[1]
5. Press the [RETURN] key to check the data that

has been entered.
6. Turn the SW2 off to cancel the 25 mode.
7. New data will be effective after restarting.
[2]
[3] [4]
[1]
[2]
DIPSW number
Bit number (0 to 7)
[3]
[4]
Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF

8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.
C. Procedure
1. Enter the 25 Mode.
2. 25 mode menu screen
Press the [Software SW] key.
3. Software setting screen
Select DIP switch number.
Use the arrow key on the left.
4. Select bit number of the DIP switch.
Use the arrow key at the center.
5. Select ON (=1) or OFF (=0) of the DIP switch.
Use [ON] or [OFF] key.
[ON] : Set bit.
[OFF] : Clear bit.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the 25
mode menu screen.
For each switch function, see List of software
DIPSW.
1-8
25 MODE
Note:
Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW1
Functions
Operation when key counter
Ignore
is removed
1
Instantaneous
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
stop Jam
A3 (11 x 17) counting
Count as 1
Count as 2
method
2
Selection of maximum num-
*1
*1
ber of copies that can be stapled by FS-112/113
FS-112/114 limit on number
None
Decide with
Stop after paper
DIPSW 3-2
exited
of stapled sets
DIPSW2
Toner replenish stop timing 1
1-shot message display at auto-
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Unlatched
Latched
When copying
Interval between
ends
copy set
matic staple mode clearing

6
7
Prohibition of non-image
area erases, repeat (auto)
and original position correction
DIPSW3
Use F4 size for Latin America destination
SC latch (F34/F35/F36)
Toner replenish stop timing 2
FS-112: Message is displayed after stopping temporarily at 25 copies.

FS-114: Message is displayed after stopping temporarily at 20 copies.
1-9
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
List of software DIP SW
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW3
Functions
Return to EKC screen after
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
No
Yes
copying reservation
DIPSW4
*2
*2
0
1
2
3
Toner level detection

(Supply toner indication)
*3
Condition for stopping copy-
*3
ing after toner supply display
Non-display of advance/
delete buttons for job list
Yes
No
Job stop when there is no
No
Yes
Can reserve
Cannot reverse
copying
copying
toner left.
6
Copy reservation allowed (corresponding to coin vendor)
DIPSW5
Toner consumption reduction
*5
*5
DIPSW6
SW
K sizes
K size selection SW for Tai-
Metric sizes
wan destination
2
K size selection SW for Taiwan
available
Metric sizes
destination (By pass feed)

3
K sizes
available
1-10
25 MODE
DIPSW6
4
5
6
7
DIPSW7
Functions
*6
Timing for the polygon motor to
*6
stop/start to rotate at low speed
*7
Setting for the polygon motor
*7
to stop/rotate at low speed
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Selection of automatic erasure outside original
*8
*8
Automatic restart after feed-
*9
*9
*10
*10
*11
*11
*11
*11
Not required
Required
No
Yes
ing paper (Other than Inch)

2
Automatic conversion of
paper size detected by APS
(8.5 x 11/A4)
Nonstandard-size notification for platen APS A4

(Japan, Metric)/8.5x11 (Inch)
Nonstandard-size notification for platen APS B6

(Japan)/A5 (Metric)/5.5 x 8.5
(Inch)
Password that requires 25/

36/47 mode (9272)
Selection of A series size

(Metric only)
DIPSW8
Changing of key operator

fixed magnification setting
Permit
Prohibit
Disabling copying when PM

count reached
Permit
Prohibit
*12
*12
4
5
Priority tray when APS is

released
6
7
For checking the collected

data 2 to 4 in the 25 mode
Display
restricted
1-11
manuals4you.com
Display not
restricted
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW9
Functions
Japan
Inch
Metric
0
1
*13
Selection of copy quantity
*13
limit
*14
*14
Switching of message
7
DIPSW10
Default values
*15
Setting for summer time
Selection of magnification
*15
Display auto
1.00
mode when APS function is

cancelled
5
Icon display in the LCD message display section (toner
No
Yes
shortage, PM)
DIPSW11
Displaying of JAM code
No
Yes
Release of the applied func-
No
Yes
tion when the RADF is open

1
1-12
25 MODE
DIPSW12
Functions
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Setting of PM count at which
*16
*16
Recognize
Switched
copying is inhibited
5
6
KRDS connection recogni-
Not recognize
tion
7
F/E code screen switchover
No
(except for F34, F35 and F36)

DIPSW13
ON
OFF
Selection of filter for jagged

edges on slanting lines
*17
*17
6
7
DIPSW14
(all in F code)
0
1
Judging level of the out-oforiginal auto erasure mode
*18
Operation when stapling is not

possible (Other than B6R, post
*18
card nonstandard)*
*19
*19
Operation when one position

stapling is not available*
Operation when two position
*20
stapling is not available*
* Common to FS-112/113
1-13
manuals4you.com
*20
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW15
Functions
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Not stop
Stop
Stopping due to overloading when
Decided on
Stop
the FNS, IT is not connected (when

exiting 400 sheets)
DIPSW15-6
*21
*a
Stopping due to overloading

when the FNS is not connected
(when exiting 100 sheets)
DIPSW16
0
1
Fixing temperature at low

power mode
Operation of internal heater
*21
Always ON
Heater off while

in off mode
Copying before execution of
Permit
Prohibit
the L detection
4
*22
*22
*b
*b
*b
Control of dot diameter

adjustment
7
DIPSW17
HOST printing cannot be performed

when a key counter is installed
Printing takes
place
Printer abort
processing
Shift inhibited
Shift possible
*23
*a
*b
*23
F4 size setting
Shift from bypass feed in

ATS mode is inhibited
Default value of the 7145 is 0. Default value of the 7235/7228/7222 is 1.

Default value of the 7145 is 0. Default value of the 7235/7228/7222 is 1.
1-14
25 MODE
DIPSW17
Functions
Separation claw operation
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Normal
OFF
Normal
Not allowed to
OFF mode (for machines

destined for China)
DIPSW18
Tray 1 (main body upper

stage), separation of defec-
use
tive part
1
Tray 2 (main body lower
Normal
stage), separation of defec-
Not allowed to
use
tive part
2
Tray 3 (DB upper stage),

separation of defective part
Normal
Not allowed to
use
Tray 4 (DB lower stage),

separation of defective part
Normal
Not allowed to
use
Tray 5 (LT), separation of
Normal
Not allowed to
defective part
7
use
DB is isolated
Normal
Not allowed to
use
DIPSW19
Separation of defective part
Normal
of printer controller
Not allowed to
use

of FAX board
Normal
Not allowed to
use
Normal
Not allowed to
of HDD
use

of ADU
Normal
Not allowed to
use

of scanner
Normal
Not allowed to
use

of RADF
Normal
Not allowed to
use
1-15
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW20
Functions
Normal
of Network
1
Normal
Normal
Inch
Metric
Not allowed to
Not allowed to
Not allowed to
Not allowed to
use
Normal
of FNS
use (Offset not

allowed to use)*
Normal
of the saddle
DIPSW21
Japan
use
of USB
Default values
use
of IEEE1284
2
Not allowed to
use
8.5 x 11
A4
8.5 x 11R
A4R
8.5 x 14
F4
Platen size recognition

selector switch 1 for Latin
America (Inch only)

America (Inch only)

America (Inch only)
Notice of nonstandard small

platen size (Inch only)
Notice of
noticed size
Notice as nonstandard size
Job suspension/end at pulling out key counter
*24
*24
Notice of small size of platen
Notice size
Notice size as
mode (8.5x11/A4 or smaller)
detected by
APS
A4 (Japan, Metric) or 8.5x11

(Inch)
Switching of the count-up
*25
*25
No
Yes
function
7
When using an EKC, the

password screen appears at
the end of each job
* The saddle is also detached.
1-16
25 MODE
DIPSW22
Functions
0
1
Nonstandard size becomes
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
*26
*26
effective at automatic platen

start
2
Indication of total count start

day on counter key mode
No
Yes
screen
DIPSW23
Automatic changeover to
Tray 1 when FNS tray is full*
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes

3
100 sheets are exited when

FNS is not stapled, and tray
is detected full*
100 sheets are exited when

FNS is stapled, and tray is
detected full*
6
7
Machine stops when fixing

web count reaches to the
limit
* FS-112 only (7145)
1-17
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW24
Functions
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Automatic change of printer
*27
*27
paper size
Punching of mixed size print
job
7
Release punch Not release punch

automatically
and continue
*29
*29
Job stop changeover without

print process stop
DIPSW25
tray 1 when the IT tray is full
No
Yes
tray 2 when the IT tray is full
No
Yes
Normal on/off
All off
No
Yes
No
Yes
Switching of TSL control
4
5
For postcard-to-postcard
copying, rotation takes place
even when APS/AMS is not
used
180 degree rotation takes

place even when there are
no staples
FAX transmission 8K/16K for

machines destined for Taiwan
DIPSW26
Image is trans- Image is transmitted in

mitted with both
reduced form
edges erased
Image position reference

use for bypass feed copying
Center
Rear side of
transfer paper
Permit
Prohibit
on non-standard size paper

4
Printer EKC mismatch print

operation
1-18
25 MODE
DIPSW26
Functions
The timer for canceling a job that
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Disabled
Enabled
was interrupted due to removal

of the key counter is valid
DIPSW27
Scanner function
Yes
No
Automatic copying reserva-
*30
*30
Not provided
Provided
Permit
Prohibit
tion function
1
Paper exit function with face

up in the double sided copy
mode (corresponding to letter head paper)
Permission SW for copying

double sided special paper
Image rotation control when

using scanner
Only those
smaller than A4/
Those larger
than A4/letter
letter rotate
also rotate
*31
*31
5
6
7
DIPSW28
0
1
4
5
DIPSW29
Density setting when the

printer toner save function is
selected
aration output of user paper

(tray)
*37
*38
ment in platen memory copy
Selection of the transfer/sep-
*38
Image leading edge adjust-
*37
Leading edge position

adjustment at image rotation
*32
*33
TSL control of user paper
*32
*33
(tray)
1-19
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW29
Functions
Operation of the rear separa-
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Not provided
Provided
*34
*34
tion claw while in single-side

printing
DIPSW30
0
1
2
3
4
DIPSW31
Selection of the transfer/separation output of user paper

(by-pass)
*35
TSL control of user paper

(by-pass)
*35
*36
*36
Automatic power on by
RADF operation during the
power save mode
Use of E-mail
Permit
Prohibit
Use of scan to FTP
Permit
Prohibit
Use of BOX
Permit
Prohibit
No function
Function
provided
provided
DIPSW32
SMB function setting
8.5 x 14 is detected for F4

size
F4
8.5 x 14
Mode intended for automatic deletion of document
Except files
received by PC-Fax
Delete all
Konica Minolta Scan Distrib-
No function
Function
provided
provided
No function
Function
provided
provided
MMR
MH
utor setting
2
3
4
LDAP function setting
TiFF encoding system used when

Scan To E-mail is employed
file name
user name
Job list name switch
1-20
25 MODE
DIPSW33
Functions
*39
Number of punch hole
*39
1
2
Notice of the paper feed tray
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Invalid
Valid
Invalid
Valid
* Displayed
Displayed
when a coin bender is being

used with APS prohibited
3
Change-over of the display

of FAX transmitting address
Change-over of the display

of BOX related list password
DIPSW34
normally
KRDS/RDmode change (7145)
KRDS
RDmode
Valid
Invalid
Not set
Set
0 *a
0 *a
0*a
*40
*40
Mixplex function setting
System OFF setting when the

system is shut off or SW2 (subpower) is turned off
FS-114 paper exit tray position
Printing starts when paper is
Permit
Prohibit
provided in the FS-114 saddle

5
Correspondence to OpenPrint
Not corresponding
Corresponding
USB Print
Not corresponding
Corresponding
Overlay void setting
Not set
Set
(7235/7228/7222 only)
DIPSW35
*a
Paper exit to entire A5R finisher tray
Prohibit
Permit
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222, default value is 1.
1-21
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
DIPSW No. Bit
DIPSW40
Functions
Use of SNMP
Default values
Japan
Inch
Metric
Permit
Prohibit
1-22
25 MODE
*5
FS-112 stapling upper limit

Mode
1-4
1-3
50 sheets
45 sheets
40 sheets
35 sheets
SW for decreased toner consumption

Decreasing the developing bias, charging grid
potential by 50V (20 step) in this setting allows
the consumption of toner to be reduced.
Increasing the potential by 50V (20 step)
allows the image density to increase a little.
Mode
*2
Toner level detection (toner supply display)

After the TLD (Toner level sensor) detects the
no toner condition for more than a specified
period of time, this sets a timing for displaying
the message Please supply toner.
Mode
4-1
Toner consumption
increased (image density increased)

Toner consumption
No adjustment
4-0
100 effective copies
*6
After displaying a message set in DIPSW4-0/1, the count up to which the copy is prohibited
is set.
4-3
4-2
Timing for the polygon motor to stop/start a

low speed rotation
When the setting of the polygon motor is
Condition for stopping copying after toner supply display
Mode
5-5
decreased (image density decreased )
0 effective copies
*3
5-6
No adjustment
made for stopping or a low speed rotation, the

motor is shifted into a low speed rotation or
stopping after the elapse of time specified by
this DIPSW. The elapsed time starts either at
one of the following:
When the warm-up is completed.
When the final operation of the operation keys
(except the start key)/RADF/tray while in idling.
When the output of a copy or print job is completed.
Mode
6-5
6-4
15 seconds
30 seconds
60 seconds
120 seconds
1-23
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
*1
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
*7
Setting of the polygon motor for stopping or
*10 Automatic conversion of the APS detected
low speed rotation
paper size (8.5 x 11/A4)
In order to reduce the sound of rotation of the
The paper size detected by the APS is auto-
polygon motor while in idling, it is possible to
matically converted according to the standard
switch the rotation of the polygon motor either

to a low speed rotation or stopping. The timing
shown below before being copied.
for the switching is set based on *6 Timing for

the polygon motor to stop/start a low speed
rotation. When the polygon motor is stopped
or rotating at low speed, the time required for
Mode
7-2
No automatic conversion
A4 8.5 x 11 (Inch)
8.5 x 11 A4 (Japan, Metric)
the first copy being made is increased.
*11 Switching of non-standard size notice of
Mode
6-7
6-6
No preliminary rotation
(high speed)
platen APSA4 (Japan/Metric), 8.5 x 11 (inch)

When the original size is detected as a non-
Preliminary rotation
(low speed)
standard size, the switching is made to decide

a copying method: a copy is made forcibly into
Stopping
the following size or it is made in the size

selected as a non-standard size.
*8
When both the DIPSW 7-3 and 7-4 are 1, the

DIPSW7-4 has preference over 7-3.
Out-of-original auto erasure

When the AMS has been released due to the
original size being not the same as that of the
transfer paper size, this setting is used in the
platen copy to decide whether the out-of-original area is erased or not. This is the same
function as the memory switch function in the
key operator mode. (Switching is not available
in the RADF copy mode.)
Mode
7-0
Out-of-original auto erasure
Out-of-original erasure only while in

APS/AMS
*9
7-3
Copied in the size selected
Copied forcibly as A4 (Japan, Metric)

/8.5 x 11 (Inch)
Mode
7-4
Copied in the size selected
Copied forcibly as B6 (Japan)

/A5 (Metric)/5.5 x 8.5 (Inch)
*12 Priority tray when APS is released
Automatic re-starting after paper supply

(excluding inch system)
Mode
7-1
Re-starting by turning on the START
button
Re-starting by setting the tray (auto-
Mode
matic)
1-24
This setting sets the tray selection used when

APS is set OFF from key-operator mode.
Mode
8-6
8-5
8-4
No priority
Main-body upper tray
Main-body lower tray
DB upper tray
DB lower tray
25 MODE
Mode
*17 Judging level in the out-of-original auto era9-3
9-2
9-1
9-0
No limit
1 sheet
3 sheets
5 sheets
9 sheets
10 sheets
20 sheets
30 sheets
sure mode
This setting is for the application function of
the out-of-original auto erasure mode. When
the out-of-original auto erasure is set to automatic in the key operator mode, a threshold
value is set for detection of the original area.
Mode
13-7
13-6
Thick original
Normal original
50 sheets
Corresponding to
99 sheets
hybrid lights
*14 Switching of message

Mode
*18 Operation if stapling is not possible
9-7
9-6
The positioning of staples is made against the

image of an original. Since stapling is
Please insert copy card
Please insert coin
restricted only to the front or rear of the leading edge (the main body side of the paper
Please insert key

counter
exited) of the transfer paper, or to both of

these two positions, stapling may be some-
*15 Summer time setting

Mode
10-3 10-2 10-1 10-0
0 minute
30 minutes
60 minutes
90 minutes
120 minutes
150 minutes
ing operation is prohibited when PM is

attained
If the setting of the copy prohibition when
DIPSW8-2 reaches PM is 1, the copying
operation is stopped after the following PM
count is reached.
12-5
12-4
12-3
1000 copies
2000 copies
3000 copies
4000 copies
5000 copies
This SW is used to set the operation when

stapling is not allowed.
Mode
*16 Setting of the number of copies until the copy-
Mode
times unavailable (when stapling is not

allowed) depending on the position specified.
14-1
14-0
Auto cancel
Auto switching to 1position stapling
Inhibit
Forced 2-position stapling mode operation
*19 Operation when one position stapling is not

available
Mode
14-5
14-4
Auto cancel
Auto cancel
Inhibit
Forced 1-position stapling mode operation
1-25
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
*13 Copy quantity limit
25 MODE
*20 Operation when two position stapling is not
*23 F4 size setting
I ADJUSTMENT
available
Mode
Mode
17-2
17-1
17-0
14-7
14-6
8.5 x 13
Auto cancel
8.25 x 13
Auto cancel
8.125 x 13
Inhibit
8 x 13
Forced 2-position sta-
8.5 x 13.5
pling mode operation
*24 Job interruption/termination operation when

*21 Fixing temperature at low power mode
the key counter is being drawn out
Set the fixing temperature while in the low

power mode.
Mode
This is to set the operation of the copier when

outputting a print job.
The details of the operation can be changed
by the combination of this setting and the
16-1
16-0
155C
120C
Mode
21-4
85C
DIPSW1-0:0 Terminate by stopping
paper feed
DIPSW1-0:1 Clear jamming imme-
85C
DIPSW1:0 setting.
diately
16-1
16-0
DIPSW1-0:0 Interrupt by stopping

paper feed
70C
DIPSW1-0:1 Clear jamming imme-
120C
diately
120C
70C
Mode
*25 Switching of the count-up function

Mode
*22 Dot diameter adjustment control

In this setting, the SW is used to change the
timing for the dot diameter adjustment.
Mode
The power is off for
16-7
0
counter and the key counter

1
counter and the key counter count

up
Normal operation
Counting up for both the total
While in copying, both the total
16-6
more than 8 hours with

humidity over 60%
The power is off for
more than 8 hours
21-6
In the printer/FAX mode, only the

total counter counts up
(7145)
At all times (Every time
o
u.c
SW2 is turned on)

Non
(7235/7228/7222)
u
an
m
3
y
ls4
1-26
25 MODE
*30 Automatic copy reservation function
in the platen auto start mode
When this setting is 1, the copy reservation
The setting of the automatic selection of auto-
screen automatically appears after the end of
start is available for the memory switch setting
the original read operation. Also, the job set-
in the key operator mode. When this setting is

in the following condition, a setting can be
tings are the same as the settings for the previous job.
made to decide if the paper is automatically

fed from the bypass tray.
The setting of the automatic selection of autostart is on with the original size (platen) detected
Mode
27-0
Do not use
Use
as non-standard.
Mode
*31 Density setting when the toner save function
22-1
Auto start does not take place
Auto start takes place when the
is selected in the printer driver screen

When Toner saving mode is on in the printer
driver, the print density is set in the range
bypass tray is selected
shown below.
This setting is effective only for the PCL and
*27 Printer paper size automatic conversion
PS versions.
The paper size specified by the print job is

automatically changed and output according
to the following standard.
Mode
Mode
27-7
27-6
27-5
Standard
-4 (Lighter)
24-2
24-3
-3
No conversion
-2
Inch Metric
-1
Metric Inch
+1
Non (not allowed to
+2
+3 (Darker)
select)
*32 Selection of the transfer/separation output of

the user paper (tray)
This SW is used to set the transfer/separation
output which is applicable when the specified
paper is selected in the Paper type setting in
the key operator mode.
Mode
Plain paper (Japan)
*29 Switching of the job stop with no process stop

The SW is used to decide if a process stop is
made at the breaks between continuous two
or more jobs reserved.
Mode
29-2
29-1
29-0
Plain paper (Inch)
Plain paper (Metric)
Thick paper
Thin paper
Recycled paper
24-7
No process stop
Process stop
1-27
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
*26 Automatic feed of non-standard size originals
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
*33 TSL control of user paper (tray)
*35 TSL control of user paper (bypass feed)
This SW is used to set the TSL control which
When selecting the bypass tray on the copy
is applicable when the specified paper is
basic screen, this SW is used to set the TSL
selected in the Paper type setting in the key
control which is applicable when selecting the
operator mode.
When this SW is used to select the Switched
user paper for Special paper setting or the

specified paper for Paper type setting in the
according to the environment, the switching
key operator mode.
is made between Normal control and All off
When this SW is used to select the Switched
according to the environment.
according to the environment, the switching
Switched according to the environment performs the TSL control according to the humidity
detected by the main body HUM1 (Humidity sensor).
Mode
is made between Normal control and All off

according to the environment.
Switched according to the environment performs the TSL controle according to the humidity
detected by the main body HUM1 (Humidity sen-
29-4
29-3
Normal control
All off
Mode
30-4
30-3
Normal control
All off
Switched according to
the environment
Switched according to
the environment
sor).
*34 Selection of the transfer/separation output of

user paper (bypass feed)
When selecting the bypass tray on the copy
basic screen, this SW is used to set the trans-
*36 Automatic power on by the RADF operation
fer/separation output which is applicable when

selecting the user specified paper for Special
In this setting, when the following operation is

made during the power save mode, the power
paper setting or the specified paper for

Paper type setting in the key operator mode.
is automatically turned on.

When the original is set in RADF (when the
Mode
30-2
30-1
30-0
Plain paper (Japan)
Plain paper (Inch)
Plain paper (Metric)
Thick paper
Thin paper
Recycled paper
during the power save mode
PS301 (No original sensor) is turned off).

When the platen/RADF is opened (when PS15
(APS timing sensor) is turned off).
When the platen/RADF is closed (when PS15
(APS timing sensor) is turned on).
Mode
1-28
31-0
Disabled
Enabled
25 MODE
*37
While rotating image during copying 1-2
I ADJUSTMENT
mode, leading edge of the 2nd side shifts 3 to

4mm. This dipswitch is to adjust that shift.
Mode
28-3 28-2 28-1 28-0
+0mm
+0.5mm
-0.5mm
+3.5mm
-3.5mm
*38
In platen copy mode, the paper exit direction

is opposite between normal copy and memory
copy. Then the image position is not the
same.
This amount of gaps is adjusted by this
dipswitch.
Mode
+0mm
28-7 28-6 28-5 28-4

0
0
0
0
+0.5mm
-0.5mm
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
+3.5mm
-3.5mm
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*39
When using FS-113 (FS-114), number of

punch holes can be set independently from
engine specifications.
Mode
33-1
33-0
Default
2-hole only
0
0
0
1
2-hole or 3-hole is selectable

4-hole only
1
1
0
1
*40
FS-114 paper exit tray position

34-3
34-2
34-1
Undefined
Mode
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Folding/Stitch-and-fold
tray
1-29
manuals4you.com
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
7.3
PM Count Setting
Note:
When pressing the [RETURN] key without press-
This function resets the PM count and sets the PM
ing the [SET] key, the PM count start date is not
cycle. Care should be taken to reset the PM count
changed. It is necessary to reset the count again
properly. The PM count/cycle menu includes the fol-
for inputting the count.
lowing:
[1. PM count resetting]
[2. PM cycle setting]
7.3.3 Setting of PM cycle
[3. Counter clear]
Set PM Cycle as follows:
7.3.1 PM count reset
A. Procedure
Select whether to reset the count in the PM count

reset screen.

Press the [2. PM COUNT] key.
3. PM Count/Cycle Menu screen
A. Procedure
Press the [2. PM CYCLE Set] key.

4. PM Cycle set screen
Enter PM cycle from the numeric keys. Enter
upper 3-digit (hundred thousand, ten thousand,

Press the [2. PM COUNT] key.
3. PM Count/Cycle Menu screen
Press the [1. PM count reset] key.
thousand) only.
5. Press the [SET] key to enter a PM cycle that has
4. PM Count Reset screen

Press the [YES] key.
been entered.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the PM
count/cycle menu screen.
The PM count is reset.

Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key.
The PM count is not reset and returns to the PM
7.3.4 Counter clear

Reference:
The operation here is the same as [8. Counter
7.3.2 Entering PM count start date
clear] of the 36 mode menu screen.

When resetting the PM count, it is necessary to
input the start date, and the screen below will
appear automatically.
The counter must be cleared whenever the drum or

fixing parts/unit is replaced.
A. Procedure
Select the [2. PM Count] and press the [3. Counter

clear] key from the 25 mode menu screen to dis-
1. PM Count Starting Date Input screen

Enter a PM count start date from the numeric
play the counter clear screen.

Following menu options are available from this
keys.
2. Press the [SET] key to enter the data that has
screen.
Drum related counter (Drum counter, Drum drive
been entered.
3. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the PM
counter).
Fixing related counter (Fixing web counter).

A. Procedure
Press the [2. PM Count] key.
1-30
25 MODE
3. PM count/cycle setting screen
Press the key corresponding to the item to be

cleared.
5. Message in the message display area will con-
(1) Procedure
Press the [Data collection] key.
firm if you really want to clear the item. Press

the [YES] key. When the item is cleared, the
3. Data collection menu screen
Counter clear screen will be restored.
4. Data collection screen
6. When clearing another counter, repeat above

steps 3 and 4.
Press the [Count data] key.

Change the data number with the arrow key.
Pressing [NEXT] key enables display of next
7. Press the [RETURN] key twice to return to the

25 mode menu screen.
7.4
I ADJUSTMENT
B. Checking method of the collected data
Press the [3. Counter clear] key.

4. Counter clear screen
data collection screen.

5. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the data
collection menu screen.
Data Collection
The data is displayed at the line 2 in the message display area as Data number (No.): Count
value (00000000).
This function enables viewing of the various data
Press and hold the arrow key to display the next

items continuously.
recorded in the machine. Also, it is possible for the

collected data to be checked by KRDS and man-
Note:
agement listing. The data collection menu includes

the following:
In order to check the collected data 2 to 4, be

sure to make preparations given in Collected
data list in advance.
Count data collection

Area data collection start (Date count data)
A. Data that can be checked
No.
1
Classification
Copy count of each
Pre-peration
paper size
RADF paper pas2
sage count
Count of JAM occur-
Enter the 25 mode
rence by each point

Copy count of each
Select
mode
Count of SC occur-
[1. Software SW]
rence
Set the address to

8-7:1 (Note)
Note:
When the DIPSW8-7 is set to 0, the checking of
the collected data is limited only to No. 1.
1-31
manuals4you.com
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
C. Data collection details

(1) Data collection 1
a.
Copy count by each size

Classification
Size No.
Paper size for destination
KRDS (B1,
Japan
Metric
Inch
B6, B7, B8)
A3
A3
11 x 17
01
Copy count of
each paper size
B4
B4
8.5 x 14
02
A4/A4R
A4/A4R
8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11R
03
B5/B5R
B5/B5R
5.5 x 8.5
04
A5
A5
05
B6
F4
06
6
7
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11R
A4/A4R
07
08
Metric
Special
Metric
Special
Inch
Special
09
Postcard
b.
Scanner and counting of the number of FAX scans
Classification
Count of the No. of
scan image planes
c.
0A
Maximum count number : 99,999,999
Size No.
Feed mode
10
Other than 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, A3 and B4
11
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, A3 and B4
KRDS (BA)
01
00
Count RADF original feed quantities
Classification
RADF paper
Size No.
15
Feed mode
ADF mode original feed counter
passage count
16
17
RADF mode original feed counter

ADF mixed original mode original feed counter
18
RADF mixed original mode original feed counter

08
1-32
KRDS (F0)
00
01
07
25 MODE
No.
a.
44
72-18 FS-113
2C
KRDS (J0)
45
72-19 FS-112
2D
72-21 FS-112/113
2E
No.
Jam
Point
Jam
Point
KRDS (J0)
00
10-0
By-pass
00
46
01
11-0
Upper tray
01
47
72-23 FS-112
2F
72-81 FS-112/113
30
49
72-82 FS-113
31
02
03
12-0
13-0
Lower tray
DB upper tray
02
03
48
04
05
14-0
16-1
DB lower tray
Paper feed jam
04
05
50
72-83
32
06
15-0
LT tray
06
51
52
72-25 FS-114
72-43
33
34
07
16-2
LT tray
07
08
08
53
54
72-84
72-85
35
36
09
30-0
Conveyance jam
09
55
37
10
11
31-0
Conveyance jam
0A
0B
12
13
32-0
79
80
4F
50
Fixing unit conveyance jam
14
15
0C
0E
0F
75-10 IT-101
75-11
10
11
18
19
97-1
12
13
20
21
97-2
92-0
14
15
22
23
75-12 IT-101
75-13
16
17
24
25
61-1
61-2
DF-318/320
18
19
26
27
62-1
DF-318/320
1A
1B
28
29
62-2
62-3
1C
1D
30
31
62-4
62-5
1E
1F
32
33
63-1
34
35
63-2
63-3
22
23
36
37
63-4
24
25
38
39
26
27
40
41
28
29
42
43
ADU conveyance jam
DF-318/320
72-16 FS-112/113
72-17
Maximum count number : 999,999
0D
16
17
I ADJUSTMENT
Jam occurrence count by factor

a. Copy count of each mode
No.
20
21
2A
2B
Contents
KRDS (F1)
00
Platen single side single side
00
01
02
RADF double side single side
01
02
03
RADF double side double side
03
04
05
RADF single side single side

RADF single side double side
04
05
06
07
Finisher (Staple mode)

Finisher (Sort mode)
06
07
08
09
Finisher (Group mode)

Finisher (Number of stapling)
08
09
10
11
Life-size
Fixed ratio E3(1.41/2.00)
0A
0B
12
13

0C
0D
14
15
Fixed ratio R1(0.86/0.77)

0E
0F
16
17

User set magnification
10
11
18
19
Zoom
Maximum zoom
12
13
20
21
Minimum zoom
AMS mode
14
15
22
23
APS mode
AE mode
16
17
24
Interrupt mode
18
1-33
manuals4you.com
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
No.
KRDS (F1)
No.
By-pass feed mode
19
59
26
Book copy mode
1A
27
Frame erase mode
1B
28
Fold erase mode
29
Image shift mode
30
Reduction image shift mode
Contents
KRDS (F1)
Repeat mode
3B
60
Reverse image mode
3C
61
Non-image area erase mode
3D
1C
62
Increase contrast mode
3E
1D
63
Auto layout mode
3F
1E
64
40
31
1F
65
Number of copies in rotation
41
32
33
Number of paper feed quantities
20
21
66
Copy quantity of paper feed from tray 1

42
43
34
at intersheet mode

44
45
67
68
22
69
35
Number of feed in the OHP mode

(blank paper interleave)
23
70
71
36
Number of paper feed quantities

at mixed original mode
24
72
37
Access number of the JOB memory call

mode (Number of pressing the button)
25
38
Number of times the auto low

power mode is used
26
39
Number of starting copy with

copy quantity is set to 1
27
77
Copy quantity in the non-standard size mode
4D
40
Number of starting copy with copy

quantity is set between 2 and 5
28
78
Stamping/overlay mode copying count
79
Flip side 2 mode copying count
4E
4F
41

quantity is set between 6 and 10
29
80
Number of copies in the punch mode
42

quantity is set to 11 or above
2A
82
Number of copies in the thick

paper 1 copy mode
52
43
Number of starting copy in intersheet mode
2B
83
Number of copies in the thick

paper 2 copy mode
53
2C
2D
84
Number of copies in the plain

paper mode
54
44
45
Contents
25
Photo mode
46
47
73
Finisher, Number of stapling (front)

Finisher, Number of stapling (rear)
48
49
74
75
Booklet mode copying count

OHP mode (without doubled
4A
4B
76
sheet) copying count

Z-fold mode copying count
4C
81
50
51
46
Passage count in the ADF thick

paper mode
2E
85
Number of copies in the thin

paper mode
55
47
48
Verti./Horiz. zoom mode

Memory copy mode
2F
30
86
Number of copies in the recycled

paper mode
56
49
50
Proof copy mode

Text/Photo mode
31
32
87
Number of copies in the user

specified paper mode
57
51
52
Text mode
User set density mode
33
34
53
Number of feed in the OHP mode

(copy interleave)
35
54
55
36
37
56
57
Cover insertion mode

Chapter mode
38
39
58
2 in 1, 4 in 1, 8 in 1 mode
3A
1-34

a.
No.
Count number of SC occurrence
No.
Error code
Error code
Classification
KRDS
E1 00
(decimal number)
Classification
Main code Sub code
KRDS
(decimal number)
043
E56-1
Image control
Main code Sub code
044
E56-2
communication error
001
10-1
Communication error E0 00
045
E56-3
02
002
10-2
01
046
E56-4
03
003
02
047
E56-5
03
048
E56-6
Operation control
05
section system error
06
Paper feed tray error
01
04
004
18-1
005
006
18-2
18-3
04
05
049
E56-7
050
E56-8
007
18-4
06
051
E56-9
08
052
053
E56-10
09
E0 2A
054
055
60-1
60-9
056
057
60-11
67-3
058
059
70-1
70-9
060
061
70-11
77-2
31
32
062
063
77-3
77-5
33
E0 34
064
065
77-6
77-11
35
36
066
067
77-16
80-1
37
38
068
069
80-2
80-3
070
071
80-4
80-5
072
073
81-1
81-2
074
075
81-3
E88-1
Image processing
076
E89-1
System control board
0B
077
078
E89-2
E89-3
communication error
0C
0D
079
080
E89-4
E89-5
0E
0F
081
082
E89-6
E87-1
10
Print controller error
083
084
52-5
86-2
Fan lock error

Fax board error
085
86-3
008
26-1
L detection error
07
009
010
28-1
28-2
High voltage power

error
08
09
011
012
28-3
34-1
High fixing temperature
0B
013
014
34-2
35-1
abnormality
Low fixing tempera-
0C
0D
015
016
35-2
35-3
017
018
35-4
35-5
10
11
019
020
35-6
35-7
Low fixing tempera- E0 12

ture abnormality
13
021
022
35-8
35-9
14
15
023
024
35-10
36-1
16
17
025
026
36-2
36-3
027
028
40-1
029
030
40-9
41-1
031
032
46-1
46-8
0A
ture abnormality
0E
0F
Fixing sensor error
18
19
Scanning system
error
1A
1B
1C
1D
Image processing
system error
1E
1F
033
034
46-10
46-11
20
21
035
036
49-4
Image processing
22
23
037
038
49-6
51-4
system error
Motor speed error
24
25
039
040
51-5
51-6
041
042
52-1
52-2
26
27
Fan lock error
28
29
07
RADF error
2B
2C
2D
2E
Finisher error
Finisher error
Parameter memory
board abnormality
2F
30
39
3A
3B
3C
Flash ROM error
3D
3E
3F
E1 0A
system error
1-35
manuals4you.com
11
E0 40
41
42
3
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
25 MODE
No.
Error code
Classification
KRDS
No.
I ADJUSTMENT
(decimal number)
Main code Sub code
086
E86-04
Error code
Classification
KRDS
E0 5E
(decimal number)
Main code Sub code
Fax board error
E1 12
122
85-1
Network system
abnormality
087
E86-06
Fax error (System
E0 43
123
85-2
088
E86-88
control board side) E1 13
124
85-3
5F
089
E86-89
14
125
E85-11
E1 1B
60
090
15
126
E85-12
1C
091
E86-91
Fax error (System
16
127
E85-13
1D
092
093
E86-20
Fax error (Fax board side)
094
22-1
Machine internal
temperature
095
096
23-1
26-2
Drum periphery
L detection
097
098
26-3
28-4
099
43-1
Scanning system error
100
52-3
Fan lock error
101
36-4
Broken fixing sensor
102
52-6
Fan lock error
103
104
87-2
87-3
105
106
52-4
Fan lock error
107
108
86-7
86-8
109
110
control board side)
128
E85-14
1E
17
129
E85-15
1F
18
130
E85-16
20
E0 44
131
132
E85-17
E85-18
21
22
45
46
133
134
E85-20
E85-21
23
24
47
48
135
136
E85-22
E85-23
25
26
49
4A
137
138
52-9
81-4
Fan lock error

Flash ROM error
4B
4C
139
82-1
Document manager error
140
82-2
Print controller error

4D
Print controller error E0 4E
141
142
E82-10
E89-80
4F
50
143
144
E89-81
82-3
CPU hang up-2

29
I-FAX system error E0 65
Fax board error
51
52
145
146
E82-50
E82-51
E1 2A
2B
18-5
26-4
Paper feed tray error
53
High voltage power error
54
147
148
E82-52
77-13
2C
E0 66
111
112
51-2
52-7
Motor speed error

Fan lock error
55
56
149
150
77-14
77-22
67
68
113
114
52-8
E56-12
57
151
152
77-23
77-24
69
6A
115
116
E56-13
77-1
1A
E0 58
153
154
77-25
77-26
6B
6C
117
118
77-4
77-12
59
5A
155
156
77-27
77-28
6D
6E
119
120
77-17
77-54
5B
5C
157
158
77-29
E85-24
Network system
6F
E1 2D
121
77-55
5D
159
160
E85-25
52-10
abnormality
Fan lock error
2E
E0 70
161
E85-30
Network system
abnormality
E1 2F
System control board E1 19

communication error
Finisher error
CPU hang up-1
Finisher error
E0 61
62
63
64
E1 27
28
Maximum count number : 9,999
1-36
D. Starting periodic date collection

Reset the periodic data from the setting peri-
7.5
Copy Count for Each Part to

be Replaced
odic collection start date. Make a date that this

operation is performed as a new periodic col-
Perform the copy count display, count clear, limit
lection start date.

The periodic data can be checked with the
value setting and arbitrarily parts to be replaced set-
KRDS/RDmode (7145) and management list.
arbitrarily).
ting to the data of the parts to be replaced (fixed/

Each count value can be check with the manage-
(1) Procedure
1. Enter the 25 mode.
ment list of 36 Mode and the KRDS/RDmode
counter menu:
Copy Count for each fixed replacement part
(7145). The following are included in the part
Press the [3. Collecting data] key.

3. Data collection menu screen
Press the [2. Starting periodic data collection]
Copy Count for each arbitrarily replacement part

7.5.1 Copy count by parts to be replaced (fixed)
key.
4. Starting periodic data collection screen
Press the [YES] key to start the periodic data
Set the parts name of the fixed parts to be replaced
collection.
Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then data col-
(fixed), parts No. and copy count display, and count

reset.
lection start date is not reset and returns to the

data colleciton menu screen.
A. Procedure
Press the [4. Parts counter] key.
3. Parts counter menu screen
Press the [1. Count of parts (Fixed)] key.
4. Copy count screen by parts to be replaced
(fixed)
Press the arrow keys to select the data.
5. Press the [Count reset] key.
6. Count reset screen by parts to be replaced
(fixed)
Press the [YES] key to clear the copy count.
Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then the copy
count is not reset and returns to the copy count
screen by parts to be replaced.
1-37
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
25 MODE
B. List of parts to be replaced (fixed)
I ADJUSTMENT
No.
01
Unit
Fixing heat roller
16
00
24
17
ing charging
25
Fixing cleaner assembly
18
corona unit)
26
Heat insulating sleeve/A
19
27
Heat insulating sleeve/B
1A
assembly
28
Fixing idler gear/B
Drum unit
02
29
Transfer/separation
corona unit
03
30
Fixing claw
1D
31
32
Fixing roller holder/U

Fixing roller holder/L
1E
1F
33
34
Fixing sensor
Fuse mounting plate
20
21
35
assembly
Fixing heater lamp/1
22

Paper feed roller
23
24
Feed roller
Double feed preven-
2C
25
tion roller
Paper exit roller/A
26
Paper feed rubber

Feed rubber
29
2A
Double feed prevention rubber
2B
DC (includ-
Drum
Cleaning blade
Transfer/
separation
01
05
Developing unit
Developer
04
06
07
Main body
Developing unit
Ozone filter
05
06
41
42
Suction filter/A
Filter cover assembly
Main body
paper feed
(Tray 1) Paper feed

rubber
07
unit
(Tray 1) Feed ubber

(Tray 1) Double feed
08
09
36
37
LT-203
12
rubber
(Tray 2) Feed ubber
0B
45
DB-211/411
15
16
17
DB-211
18
19
20
21
22
By-pass
feed unit
(Tray 3) Paper feed

rubber
0D
(Tray 3) Feed ubber

0E
0F
prevention rubber
(Tray 4) Paper feed
10
rubber
(Tray 4) Feed ubber
11

prevention rubber
12
13
Paper feed roller

Feed roller
14
15
DF-318/320
FS-112
43
44
0C
40
0A

prevention rubber
Fixing unit
38
39
11
13
27
28
prevention rubber
(Tray 2) Paper feed
14
KRDS
(Z1)
KRDS
corona
09
10
Parts name
23
03
08
Unit
(Z1)
02
04
Parts name
No.
1-38
2
1C
25 MODE
Copy count by parts to be replaced
(Named; arbitrarily)
B. List of parts to be replaced (arbitrarily)

No.
Set the limit value for the parts to be replaced, parts

No., parts name setting, copy count display and
count reset.
A. Copy count display and count reset by parts
to be replaced
(1) Procedure
Press the [4. Parts counter ] key.
Press the [2. Count of parts (Named)] key.
(named)
Press the arrow key to select the data to be set
or changed.
Count timing
KRDS
(G0)
00
When copy count (at the paper exit is completed)
00
01
01
02
02
03
03
04
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
08
09
09
10

0A
0B

0C
0D

0E
0F
10
11
11
12
13
14
15
5. The following items can be set below:

COUNT RESET : To clear the copy count.
16
LIMIT SET : To enter the limit value (6-digit).

P/N SET : To enter the parts number (9-digit).
17

18
19
When paper is fed from LT-203
12
13
20
21
When paper is fed from by-pass tray

When paper is fed from tray 1
14
15
22
23

16
17
24
25

When paper is fed from ADU
18
19
26
27
When paper is exited from main body
1A
When RADF is read (1 count each for front and back)
1B
28

1C
1D
Parts name : To enter the parts name.

6. Press the [RETURN] key, then return to the
Copy screen by parts to be replaced.
29
1-39
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
7.5.2
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
C. Count resetting method
Note:
(1) Procedure
ing the [SET] key, the setting is complete without

changing a new limit value and returns to the

copy count screen by parts to be replaced

(Named).

Reference:
The right side of the limit value will be marked
if the copy count exceeds its limit value.
(named)
Press the arrow keys to select the data.
5. Press the [COUNT RESET] key.
6. Count reset screen by parts to be replaced
(named)
Press the [YES] key to clear the copy count that
E. Parts No. setting

Enter the new parts No. (9-digit) from the
numeric keys and alphabet keys on the screen.
has been selected.

Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then the copy
count is not reset and returns to the Copy count
(1) Procedure
screen by parts to be replaced (named).

D. Count limit setting method

Enter the new limit value from the numeric keys
on the screen.

(named)
(1) Procedure

or changed.

5. Press the [P/N SET] key.

6. Part No. setting screen by parts to be replaced

(named)
Enter new parts No. using the numeric and

(named)
alphabet keys.
7. Press the [SET] key to enter the limit value that

or changed.
has been entered.

8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the copy
5. Press the [LIMIT SET] key.

6. Copy count limit setting screen by parts to be
replaced (named)
Enter new value using the numeric keys.
count screen by parts to be replaced (named).

Note:
7. Press the [SET] key to enter the limit value that

has been entered.
ing the [SET] key, the setting is complete without

changing a new parts No. and returns to the copy
8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the copy

count screen by parts to be replaced (named).
count screen by parts to be replaced (Named).
1-40
25 MODE
Parts name setting
Enter the new parts name from the keys on the
screen.
There are three screen in the input screen and
are changed with the arrow key:
Alphabet (a capital letter), numeric number
Alphabet (a small letter), numeric number
Symbol, numeric number
The key arrangement can be changed by pressing the [Keyboard] key in the alphanumeric
(uppercase letter/lowercase letter), symbol and
data input screen.
(1) Procedure
(named)
or changed.
5. Press the [P/N SET] key.
6. Parts name setting screen by parts to be
replaced (named)
Enter new parts name using the keys on the
screen.
7. Press the [OK] key to enter the parts name that
has been entered and return to the copy count
screen by parts to be replaced (Named).
Note:
When pressing the [CANCEL] key without pressing the [OK] key, the setting is completed without
setting a parts name and returns to the copy
count screen by parts to be replaced (Named).
7.6
Password Setting
The following passwords are set.

Key operator password (8-digits): Password to
enter key operator mode when security
enhancement is enabled.
User account (EKC) master key code (8 digits):
An EKC master key code that is required when
entering various EKC setting modes.
Weekly timer password (4 digits): A weekly timer
password that is required when entering various
weekly timer setting modes.
CE password (8-digits): Password for CE to
access service modes when security enhancement is enabled.
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Procedure
Enter the 25 Mode.
Press the [5. Password setting] key.
Password setting menu screen
Press the key of an item that you want to set.
[Key Operator Password (8 digits)]
[User account (EKC) master key code (8 digits)]
[Weekly timer Password (4 digits)]
[CE Password (8 digits)]
Input a new password through the numeric keys
and press the [SET] key to update the password.
When the following keys are set for the password, each mode can be used without a password.
0000 : Weekly timer Password

00000000: User account (EKC) master key
code
5. Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 to set passwords for other items.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the password setting menu screen.
Note:
When pressing the [RETURN] key without pressing the [SET] key, the setting is complete. However the new password will not be entered and
the password setting menu screen will return.
Do not use name, your birthday or employee
code number as the password since other people
can easily guess them.
1-41
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
F.
25 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
The administrator should not inform other people

of the password.
7.7
Setting Phone Number of the

Service Center
7.8
Setting the Serial Number/

the Destination
7.8.1 Setting the serial number

This function is used to display, set and change the
This function displays the telephone and fax num-
serial number of the main body and optional units.
bers (Max. 21 digits) of the service center which is
The serial numbers can be read from KRDS/
indicated on the screen if a service call is required.
RDmode (7145).
This function is not related to KRDS/RDmode

(7145) functions. It is designed only for indicating
the data on the screen.
A. Procedure
Press the [7. Serial number] key.
A. Procedure
3. Serial number setting menu screen

Press the [6. Service TEL No.] key.
From among the keys, press the key of an item

you want to change.
3. Service center number setting screen

Press either of the [TEL] or [FAX] key which you
4. Serial number setting screen

Enter the 9-digit serial number from the alpha-
want to set.
4. Input the telephone number or fax number
bet and numeric keys on the screen and then

press the [SET] key to enter the number that
through the numeric keys and press the [SET]

key to update the telephone number or fax num-
has been entered.
ber.
5. When setting both the telephone number and
Reference:
Characters input are entered at the least signifi-
the fax number, repeat the procedures 3 and 4

above.
cant digit and displayed while shifting from right to

left.

mode menu screen.
5. Repeat the procedures 3 and 4 to set the serial
Note:
numbers of other items.

6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the Serial
When pressing the [RETURN] key without pressing the [SET] key, the setting is complete. However the new phone number will not be entered
and the 25 mode menu screen will return.
number setting menu screen.

Note:
When pressing the [RETURN] key without pressing the [SET] key, the setting is complete. However the new serial number will not be entered
and the Serial number setting menu screen will
return.
1-42
25 MODE
7.9
Displaying the ROM Version
To change the destination setting, press the [Desti-
Display ROM version mounted to the machine.
nation] key on the serial number setup menu. The

procedure is as follows.
A. Procedure
A. Procedure

Press the [ROM version] key.
3. ROM version display screen
Press the [7. Serial No.] key.
System control
Image control
Panel control
3. Serial number setting screen

Press the [Destination] key.
Optical control
Various options
4. Destination setting screen

Use the arrow key to select the destination.
If any option is not installed, its relevant position
5. Press the [OK] key to register the setting.
remains blank.
Note:
If you press [CANCEL] key, the copier will retain
the previous destination setting and return you to
mode menu screen.
7.10 KRDS Setting
the Serial number setting screen.

mode menu screen.
See the Manual for KRDS.
7.11 ISW Setting

Destination codes
Code
Destination
JP Japan
Code
IE
Destination
Ireland
CA
US
Canada
U.S.A
FI
SE
Finland
Sweden
KR
SG
Korea
Singapore
NO
AT
Norway
Austria
MY
CN
Malaysia
China
BE
NL
Belgium
Netherlands
SA
TW
Saudi Arabia
Taiwan
CH
FR
Switzerland
France
ZA
PL
South Africa
Poland
GB
DE
Great Britain
German
PT
ES
Portugal
Spain
EU
NZ
Europe
New Zealand
IT
DK
Italy
Denmark
AU
Australia
See the chapter ISW.
7.12 Root Counter Display

The root counter (total counter can be checked in
25 mode on the root counter display.
A. Procedure
Press the [11. Root counter] key.
3. Root counter display screen
Values of the root counter (total counter) are displayed.
mode screen.
1-43
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
7.8.2 Setting the destination
I ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
7.13 Setting Date
7.14 Tray Size Setting
Set the total count start day.
This setting is made when changing the paper size

of the option tray (LT-203). The paper size that can
A. Procedure
be selected is only A4 and 8.5 x 11.
A. Procedure
Press the [12.Setting date] key.

3. Setting date screen
Using the numeric keys, enter the year, month

Press the [13. Tray size setting] key.
and day in that sequence.

4. Press the [OK] key to return to the 25 mode
3. Tray size setting screen
screen.
Press the arrow key to change the paper size of

the LT-203.
mode menu screen.
Note:
Ends when the [CANCEL] key is pressed without
amending the entered date, and returns to the 25
manuals4you.com
mode menu screen.
1-44
8. 36 MODE
Charging grid voltage adjustment

Developing bias adjustment
8.1
L detection adjustment
Automatic toner supply
Setting Method
A special operating mode called 36 Mode has
Toner density adjustment
been provided with this machine. This mode
Dot diameter adjustment
enables adjustment of the various parts.
LD1 offset adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
LD2 offset adjustment (7145 only)

A. Procedure
1. Turn the SW2 (sub power switch) OFF when the
LD1 bias adjustment

LD2 bias adjustment (7145 only)
3. Press the arrow key until the item you want to
SW1 (main power switch) remains ON.

adjust appears. The adjustment screen of the

If security enhancement is enabled, the CE
4. Press the [Preceding screen] of each process
password input request screen appears. In put
adjustment screen to return to Process adjust-
CE password.
36 mode menu screen appears. At this moment,
ment menu screen.
selected item is displayed.
the machine turns to 36 mode and normal copy

operation is disabled.
(1) Process adjustmentCharging voltage value

adjustment
3. Press the desired item key on the LCD screen.

Each setting screen will appear.
Charging voltage value adjustment is inhibited in

the field.
4. Enter data in each setting screen.

5. Press the [RETURN] key to check the data that
(2) Process adjustmentTransfer current adjustment
has been entered.

6. Turn the SW2 OFF to cancel the 36 mode.
Transfer current adjustment is inhibited in the

field.
7. New data will be effective after restarting.
(3) Process adjustmentSeparation (AC) voltage

adjustment
Note:
If FNS is not installed, the [FNS adj.] key is netted
Separation (AC) voltage adjustment is inhibited

in the field.
(4) Process adjustmentSeparation (DC) voltage
value adjustment
and neither key can be selected.
8.2
Process Adjustment
Separation (DC) voltage value adjustment is

inhibited in the field.
Adjust the L detection, various high voltages, developer toner density, dot diameter, and the laser off-
(5) Process adjustmentCharging grid voltage

adjustment
set.
Charging grid voltage adjustment is inhibited in

the field.
A. Procedure
1. Select [1. Process adjustment] in the 36 mode
(6) Process adjustmentDeveloping bias adjustment
menu screen and display the Process adjustment menu screen.
Developing bias adjustment is inhibited in the

field.
2. The following items are shown on the Process

adjustment menu screen.
(7) Process adjustmentL detection adjustment

See L detection adjustment.
Charging voltage value adjustment

Transfer current adjustment
(8) Process adjustmentAutomatic toner supply

Normally carried out automatically, and the process adjustment - automatic toner supply is not
made in the field.
Separation (AC) voltage adjustment

Separation (DC) voltage value adjustment
1-45
manuals4you.com
36 MODE
(9) Process adjustmentToner density adjustment
8.4
Toner Density Adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
See Toner density adjustment.

(10) Process adjustmentDot diameter adjustment
The developer toner density can be increased or
See Dot diameter adjustment.
decreased by making this adjustment.
(11) Process adjustmentLD1 offset adjustment

See LD1 offset adjustment.
Major cases in which this adjustment is used:

When the image fogging has occurred due to the
(12) Process adjustmentLD2 offset adjustment
increased density in the developer toner density.

(In this case, reduce the toner density.)
(7145 only)
See LD2 offset adjustment.
Preparation: The drum cartridge must be set in
(13) Process adjustmentLD1 bias adjustment
advance.
The LD1 bias adjustment is not made in the field.

(14) Process adjustmentLD2 bias adjustment
A. Procedure
(7145 only)
The LD2 bias adjustment is not made in the field.

Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
8.3
L Detection Adjustment
3. Press the arrow key repeatedly until the Toner

density adjustment is displayed in the message
This adjustment be made immediately after replacement of the developer (before any copies are made
with the new developer). Developing counter is
automatically reset.
column.
4. Toner density adjustment screen
Select the set value [-2] to [+2], and press the
[START] key.
Set value: -2 (toner density decreased) to +2
(toner density increased)
Note:
After replacing the developer, do not make copies
until you have performed L detection adjustment.
When [Current set value] [New set value] =

the same, return the toner density to the normal
level.
When [Current set value] [New set value] = +
A. Procedure
(plus), increase the transient level of the toner

density.

When [Current set value] [New set value] = (minus), decrease the transient level of the toner

3. Process adjustment screen
Press the arrow key until the L detection adjustment value. appears in the message display area.
density.
According to the value set, the toner density is
4. L detection adjustment screen

Press the [START] key, then confirm that [OK] is
automatically adjusted. When the adjustment is

terminated in about 250 seconds.
displayed at Result and the L detection data value.

mode menu screen.

mode menu screen.
Note:
Note:
If an OK indication does not appear after the
When an error code is displayed while in the

toner density adjustment, conduct the toner den-
developer has been agitated, it means that an L

detection adjustment error has occurred. In this
sity adjustment again after checking the expected

defective parts on the error code list.
case, an error code will appear in the Result display area. For the meaning of error codes, refer to
F26-3: TDS (Toner density sensor output abnormality)
the L detection error code list of List of error

codes.
1-46
8.5
Dot Diameter Adjustment
A. Procedure
The MPC value can be corrected to change the

image density (dot diameter) by entering a setting.

(Common to copier/printer/fax)
3. Press the arrow key repeatedly until the LD1
Major cases in which this adjustment is used:
offset adjustment is displayed in the message
When you want to change the image density.

When changing the write unit or TCSB (toner
column.
4. LD1 offset adjustment screen
control sensor board), or when cleaning the

dust-proof glass.
Press the [COPY] key.

5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the

advance.
START button to print the test pattern.

6. Check the test pattern.
A. Procedure
Specification: Check to see if the LD1 laser output patterns are uniform as shown in the draw-
ing below and the starting points of the low

density section are matched between the reference lines.
3. Press the arrow key repeatedly until the Dot

diameter adjustment is displayed in the mes-
Since a single beam is employed for 7235/

7228/7222, the pattern shown as LD2 in the
illustration below is also output by LD1.
sage column.
4. Dot diameter adjustment screen
Select the set value [-3] to [+3], and press the
[START] key.
According to the value set, the dot diameter is
automatically adjusted.
[1]
Set value: -3 (toward the lighter) to +3 (toward

the darker)
mode menu screen.
Note:
When the adjustment is made toward the darker,
the dot diameter becomes thick and the toner
consumption is increased.
8.6
LD1 Offset Adjustment
LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
The write position of the LD1 laser is adjusted.

This adjustment must be made when replacing the
write unit, drum and/or the developer.
[1]
Reference line
advance. The developing unit must be filled with

developer. The L detection adjustment, toner den-
7. If it is not within specification, press the # button

while holding down the button.
sity adjustment and the dot diameter adjustment

must be completed.

Input the offset value through the numeric keys
and press the [SET] key.
Setting range: -128 ~ +127
1-47
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
36 MODE
9. Repeat the procedures 4 to 7 until the specified
I ADJUSTMENT
value is attained.
mode menu screen.
[1]
8.7
LD2 Offset Adjustment

(7145 only)
The write position of the LD2 laser is adjusted.

This adjustment must be made when replacing the
write unit, drum and the developer.
advance. The developing unit must be filled with
developer. The L detection adjustment, toner density adjustment, dot diameter adjustment and the
LD1 offset adjustment must be completed.
LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
A. Procedure
[1]

3. Press the [Next item] key repeatedly until the
LD2 offset adjustment is displayed in the mes-

sage column.

Enter the offset value through the numeric keys

5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the


6. Check the test patterns.

value is attained.
Specification: Check to see if the LD2 laser output patterns are uniform as shown in the drawing below and the starting points of the low
density section are matched between the reference lines.
Reference line
1-48

mode menu screen.
36 MODE
Timing Adjustment
Vertical magnification adjustment : Platen

Horizontal magnification adjustment : Platen
This function adjusts each timing. When timing

adjustment is performed, use A3 or 11 x 17 size
Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (single

side, 50%)
paper.
A. Procedure
1. Select [2. Timing adj.] in the 36 mode menu

side, 200%)
side, 100%)
The Timing adjustment menu screen will

side, 400%)
appear.
Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (dou-
screen.
The following items are included in the timing
ble side, 50%)
adjustment.
1 Vertical/horizontal magnification adjustment
Vertical magnification adjustment : RADF (double side, 100%)
2 Restart timing adjustment
3 Paper feed loop amount adjustment

4 Leading edge original erasure amount adjust-
ble side, 200%)

ment
5 Centering adjustment
ble side, 400%)

4. Enter data from the numeric keys on the screen,
then press the [SET] key to enter the data that
have been entered.
6 Image read point adjustment

7 Restoring standard data
2. Press the item key to be adjusted. The selected
setting screen will appear.
5. Press the [COPY] key to return to the basic

screen, then make a test copy.
3. Press the [RETURN] key in each of the timing

adjustment screens to return to the Timing
6. Press the # button while pressing the button to
return to the Vertical/Horizontal magnification

adjustment screen.
7. Press the [RETURN] key in the Vertical and
8.8.1 Vertical/Horizontal magnification adjustment

The vertical and horizontal magnifications of the
horizontal magnification adjustment screen to

return to the Timing adjustment menu screen.
(1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment
printer system and the copy system are adjusted.
With the amount of the paper feed loop

adjusted properly between the registration
A. Procedure
1. Select [2. Timing adj.] in the 36 mode menu
roller and the fixing roller, the transfer slippage

in the position about 20mm from the trailing
screen.
The Timing adjustment menu screen will
appear.
2. Select the [1. Drum clock adj.] on the Timing
The Drum clock adjustment (vertical/horizontal
edge of the transfer paper is prevented.

a. Procedure
Press the [2. Timing adj.] key.
magnification adjustment) will appear.

3. This adjustment has the following items. These
3. Timing adjustment menu screen

Press the [1. Drum clock adj.] key.
can be selected by pressing the arrow key:

Vertical magnification adjustment : Printer
4. Timing adjustment screen

Press the arrow key until Vertical magnification-
Vertical magnification adjustment : Printer 2
printer appears in the message display area.
1-49
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
8.8
36 MODE
5. Vertical/horizontal magnification (drum clock)
I ADJUSTMENT
adjustment screen
(2) Printer 2 vertical magnification adjustment

Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer
system.
6. Basic screen
Set the copy size to A3 or 11 x 17, and the copy
quantity to 5, then press the START button and
output an test pattern (No. 9).
7. Output five sheets of paper, and check for transfer jitter.
Note:
Ensure that the printer's vertical magnification is
adjusted before going ahead with this adjustment
a. Procedure
Approx.20mm
adjustment screen
Press the arrow key until Vertical magnificationCheck the transfer jitter at a point approx. 20mm
from the trailing edge of the paper.
printer 2 appears in the message display area.

5. Press the [COPY] key.

6. Basic screen
Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the

adjustment screen

7. Use a ruler to measure the vertical magnifica-
Enter a value through the numeric keys (the

change of a value should be made in two steps)
Setting range: -50 (reduction) ~ +50 (enlarge-
tion.
Standard value: 0.5% max (life size)
Within 1mm with respect to 205.7mm
ment)
1 step = 0.1%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the transfer jitter in all
five output sheets disappears.
205.7 1
11. Once you have confirmed that there is no transfer jitter, press the arrow key, then select Printer
2 to adjust the vertical magnification of Printer
2.
adjustment screen
Enter a value from the numeric keys, then press
the [SET] key.
Setting range: -50 (reduction) ~ +50 (enlargement)
1 step = 0.1%
value is attained.
1-50
36 MODE
(3) Platen vertical magnification adjustment
a.
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the Timing
(4) Platen horizontal magnification adjustment
Adjust the vertical magnification of the scanner
Adjust the horizontal magnification of the copy
system.
system.
Procedure
Note:
The result of the platen horizontal magnification
will be reflected all the images read by scanner
(RADF, platen).

a. Procedure
adjustment screen
Press the arrow key until Vertical magnificationplaten appears in the message display area.


6. Basic screen
Set the new test chart on the original glass and
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper. Then press the
adjustment screen
Press the arrow key until Horizontal magnifica-
START button.
tion-platen appears in the message display

area.
tion.

6. Basic screen
Within 1mm with respect to 200mm

START button.
7. Use a ruler to measure the horizontal magnification.
Within 1mm with respect to 200mm
200

200

adjustment screen
the [SET] key.
return to the Vertical/horizontal magnification

(drum clock) adjustment screen.
1 step = 0.05%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnifica-

adjustment screen
tion becomes the standard value.

the [SET] key.
1-51
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT

ment)
1 step = 0.1%
9. Vertical/Horizontal magnification (drum clock)
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the horizontal magnifi-
adjustment screen
cation becomes the standard value.

the [SET] key.

(5) RADF vertical magnification adjustment

Adjust the vertical magnification while in RADF
copying.
1 step = 0.1%
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnification becomes the standard value.
11. To adjust another adjustment item, press the
arrow key to select the desired adjustment.
a. Procedure


Press the [Timing adj.] key.
8.8.2 Restart timing adjustment

To adjust the restart timing.
adjustment screen
Press the arrow key to select the magnification
A. Procedure
you want to adjust.

The screen changes in the following order: Sin-
1. Select the [2. Timing adj.] in the 36 mode menu

screen, then the Timing adjustment menu
gle sided 50% 100% 200% 400%

Double sided 50% 100% 200% 400%.
screen will appear.

2. Select the [2. Restart timing] on the Timing

6. Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and
adjustment menu screen. then the Restart timing adjustment screen will appear.

START button.
3. Using the arrow key will allow you to select the

following items.
7. Use a ruler to measure the vertical magnification.
Restart timing adjustment : Engine (All)

Restart timing adjustment : Engine (Main body

Within 1.0mm with respect to 190mm
upper tray)
Restart timing adjustment : Engine (Main body
lower tray)
Restart timing adjustment : Engine (DB1)
Restart timing adjustment : Engine (DB2)
Restart timing adjustment : Engine (LCT)
Restart timing adjustment : Engine (Bypass)
Restart timing adjustment : Engine (ADU)
Restart timing adjustment : RADF (single side)
Restart timing adjustment : RADF (double side,
front)
[1]
190
[1]
back)
4. Enter a desired value from the numeric keys on
Vertical magnification
the screen, then press the [SET] key to validate

your entry.
1-52
36 MODE
(2) RADF restart timing adjustment
[COPY] key, then make a test copy from the

basic screen.
Reference:
The operation described here is the same as the
return to the Horizontal/Vertical magnification
adjustment in 36 mode menu screen - [9. RADF
adjustment screen.
adj.].
7. Press the [RETURN] key in the Restart timing

adjustment screen to return to the Timing
a.
Procedure

(1) Engine restart timing adjustment

Press the [2. Restart timing] key.
a. Procedure
4. Restart timing adjustment screen
Press the arrow key until the desired RADF

adjustment item appears in the message display

area.
Press the [2. Restart timing] key.


6. Basic screen
Press the arrow key until the desired adjustment

item appears in the message display area.
Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and

START button.
Adjustment the RADF double side (second

6. Basic screen
Select a maximum paper size for the tray you
want to adjust and press START to output the
side), then make a test copy in double side

single side mode and check the restart timing of
test pattern.
7. Check the restart timing.
2nd output paper.

Standard value: 2.0mm max.

Standard value: 3.0mm max. (life size)


the [SET] key.

the [SET] key.
Setting range: -127 (slow) ~ +127 (fast)

1 step = 0.1mm
Setting range: -50 (slow) ~ +50 (fast)

1 step = 0.1mm
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the restart timing

becomes the standard value.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the restart timing

becomes the standard value.

11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the timing


1-53
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
5. Turn on the Basic Screen by pressing the
36 MODE
8.8.3 Paper feed loop amount adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
return to the Paper feed loop quantity adjustIf a paper is skewed, adjust the amount of the loop
for each tray.
ment screen.
7. Press the [RETURN] key in the Paper feed loop
quantity adjustment screen to return to the
Timing adjustment menu screen.
A. Procedure
(1) Paper feed loop adjustment for engine
screen will appear.

2. Select the [3. Paper loop adj.] on the 36 mode
Procedure
menu screen, then the Paper feed loop
amount adjustment screen will appear.

following items.
Paper feed loop adjustment : All

Press the [3. Paper loop adj.] key.
Paper feed loop adjustment : Main body upper

tray
4. Paper feed loop amount adjustment screen

Press the arrow key until the desired adjustment
Paper feed loop adjustment : Main body lower

tray (small size) B5 only
item appears in the message display area.

Paper feed loop adjustment : Main body lower

tray (large size) Other than B5
6. Basic screen
Select a tray and a paper size properly and
Paper feed loop adjustment : DB upper tray

(small size) Other than A3, B4, 11 x 17 and 8.5 x
press START to output the test pattern.

7. Check the skewing condition.
14.
Paper feed loop adjustment : DB upper tray
8. When the paper feed loop quantity is not appropriate, press the # button while pressing the
(large size) A3, B4, 11 x 17 and 8.5 x 14

Paper feed loop adjustment : DB lower tray
button.
(small size) Other than A3 and 11 x 17

Paper feed loop adjustment : DB lower tray

the [SET] key.
(large size) A3 and 11 x 17

Paper feed loop adjustment : LCT

1 step = 0.23mm
Paper feed loop adjustment : Bypass (normal

paper)
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the paper feed loop

amount becomes appropriate.
Paper feed loop adjustment : Bypass (thick

paper)

Paper feed loop adjustment : Bypass (post card)

Paper feed loop adjustment : ADU (excepting
8.5 x 5.5)
Paper feed loop adjustment : ADU (8.5 x 5.5)
Paper feed loop adjustment : RADF (single side)
your entry.
basic screen.
a.
1-54
(2) Paper feed loop adjustment for RADF
8.8.4 Leading edge original erasure adjustment
Reference:
Adjust the leading edge original erasure (leading
adjustment in 36 mode menu screen - [9. RADF

adj.].
a.
edge blank cut) amount.

Note:
If you reduce the erasure width, a black line may
appear on the leading edge of the paper when
Procedure
you make an enlarged copy.

A. Procedure

Press the [3. Paper loop adj.] key.


Press the arrow key until RADF appears in the
message display area.

Press the [4. Lead edge timing] key.
4. Leading edge original erasure adjustment
6. Basic screen
screen

START button.
5. Basic screen
Place the test chart on the platen glass. Select a
7. Check the condition of skewing in the output

copy.
maximum paper size for the tray you want to

adjust and press START.
8. When the paper feed loop quantity is not appropriate, press the # button while pressing the
6. Measure the leading edge original erasure.

Standard value: Within 3.0mm
button.


the [SET] key.
Setting range: -10 (small) ~ +10 (large)
1 step = 0.5mm
8. Leading edge original erasure adjustment

screen
the [SET] key.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the skewing condition

is correct.

1 step = 0.1mm

9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the leading edge original erasure amount becomes the standard
value.
1-55
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
8.8.5 Centering adjustment
In the centering adjustment, the centering of the
7. Press the [Preceding screen] key in the Center-
image is adjusted in the direction at a right angle to
ing adjustment screen to return to the Timing
the feed direction.
return to the centering adjustment screen.
A. Procedure
screen will appear.
2. Select the [5. Centring adj.] on the Timing
adjustment menu screen, then the centering
adjustment screen will appear.
following items.
(1) Each tray centering adjustment

a. Procedure
Press the [5. Centring adj.] key.
4. Centering adjustment screen
Press the arrow key until the desired tray
appears in the message display area.
(1) Each of tray adjustments

Centering adjustment : All
Centering adjustment : Main body upper tray

6. Basic screen
(common, small size, large size)

Centering adjustment : Main body lower tray
Select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the


Centering adjustment : DB upper tray
7. Fold the output at the center in the paper feed

direction, and check that the left and right lines

Centering adjustment : DB lower tray
overlap completely.
Standard value: Within 2mm

Centering adjustment : LCT

Centering adjustment : ADU


Centering adjustment : Bypass

the [SET] key.

Setting range: -53 (inward direction of the center
line) ~ +53 (rear direction of the center line)
1 step = 0.09mm
(2) Platen adjustment

Centering adjustment : Platen
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the miscentering is

within standard value.
(3) RADF adjustment

Centering adjustment : RADF
Note:
(single side, double side front, double side back)
If it can not be adjusted within the specified

range, see Other Adjustments.

your entry.


basic screen.
1-56
(2) ADU centering adjustment
Note:
Be sure to perform the centering adjustment for

each tray before starting this adjustment.

(3) Platen centering adjustment
a. Procedure
Note:


a.

Press the arrow key until ADU appears in the
Procedure


6. Basic screen

Select copy mode to single side double side

mode, then press the START button to print the
test pattern.
7. Fold the output at the center in the paper feed
direction, and check that the left and right lines
overlap completely.
Standard value: Back : Within 3mm
Front and back : Within 3mm

Press the arrow key until Platen appears in the
6. Basic screen
select A3 or 11 x 17 size paper, then press the
START button.
7. Check the miscentering by comparing the original with the copy.
[1]
[2]

the [SET] key.
[1]
Lengthwise direction
[2]
Miscentering amount between first side

and second side

1 step = 0.04mm


the [SET] key.

1 step = 0.09mm
1-57
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
(4) RADF centering adjustment
8.8.6 Image read point adjustment
Note:
Adjust the image read point (leading edge timing).
For the image read position adjustment, the following two types are available:
Platen adjustment
a. Procedure
RADF adjustment
Note:
Be sure to perform the restart timing adjustment
(engine) before starting this adjustment.
The RADF read position adjustment is inhibited in

Press the arrow key until RADF appears in the
the field.
If you shift this value by a large amount, the
RADF read density may change.

6. Basic screen
A. Procedure

START button.
Adjust the RADF (double side (second side)),
then make a test copy in double side single
side mode and check the loop amount of 2nd
outputted paper.
7. Check the miscentering by comparing the origi-

Press the [6. Read point adj.] key.
4. Image read point adjustment screen
Select the Platen adjustment, and press the
[COPY] key.
5. Basic screen
nal with the copy.


START button.

6. Make a comparison between original image and

test copy image. Then check the image read
the [SET] key.

point.
Standard value: 10 1.0mm

1 step = 0.04mm
8. Image read point adjustment screen


the [SET] key.

1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the image read point is
1-58
36 MODE
8.9
Reset the adjusted set values of timing adjustment
Conduct a test while in continuous copying opera-
to the standard values (factory default data).
tion.
The following are included in the return to standard

data:
Select the [3. Running mode] in the 36 mode menu
Recall standard data : Vertical/Horizontal magnification adjustment
will appear.
Recall standard data : Restart timing adjustment
The following items can be selected:
Recall standard data : Paper feed loop amount
A. Intermittent copy mode
adjustment
Running Test Mode
screen, then the Running test mode menu screen
In this mode, after the set number of copy oper-
Recall standard data : Leading edge original erasure adjustment
ations has been completed, the machine goes

into the copy ready status, waits 0.5 sec., then
starts the same operation again.
Recall standard data : Centering adjustment

Recall standard data : Original read point adjustment
B. Paperless intermittent copy mode

It makes copies at roughly the same timing as
A. Procedure
for a normal copy, without performing paper

detection or jam detection. Also, like running

mode 1, after the set number of copy operations has been completed, the machine goes

Press the [7. Factory default] key.
into the copy ready status, waits 0.5 sec., then

starts the same operation again.
4. Resetting standard data screen

Press the arrow key until the desired item
5. Press the [YES] key to reset the set values to
the standard values that have been selected
and to return to the Timing adjustment menu
C. Paperless mode
It makes copies at roughly the same timing as
for a normal copy, without performing paper
detection or jam dection.
screen. Press the [NO] or [RETURN] key, then

the set values are not reset and return to the
D. Paperless/endless mode
It automatically sets the copy quantity to infinity.
Timing adjustment menu screen.

6. To reset another adjustment item, repeat steps
Also, like running mode 3, it makes copies at

roughly the same timing as for a normal copy,
4 to 5.
without performing paper detection or jam

detection.

E. Running mode
Running mode consists of paperless/endless
mode plus an operation consisting of an optics
each time scan and an automatic paper feed
tray change.
1-59
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
8.8.7 Recall standard data
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
8.9.1 Setting method
8.10 Test Pattern Output
A. Procedure
Output various test patterns and use the results to

Press the [3. Running mode] key.
Select the [4. Test pattern] in the 36 mode menu
3. Running test mode menu screen
appear.
detach defective parts.

screen, then the test pattern output screen will
Press the key according to the desired mode.

Note:
For modes not listed specifically on the Service
(Mode 1 to Mode 5)
4. Basic screen
Press the START button.
5. After checking the copy operation, press the
Stop button to stop copy operation.
Manual, output should not be made.

A. Procedure
return to the Running mode menu screen.

7. To perform another running test mode, repeat
steps 3 to 6.
8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to 36 mode
menu screen.
Press the [4. Test pattern] key.

3. Test pattern output screen
Enter a pattern number to be output from
numeric key.
5. Copy screen
Select A3 or 11 x 17 and press the start button
to output a test pattern.
6. When you want to output another test pattern,
press the # button while pressing the button
and repeat the procedures 3 to 5 above.
mode menu screen.
1-60
No.1 Overall Halftone

[Check Items]
When the density is set to 70 (halftone)
When there are white stripes, black stripes or uneven density found, check the printer system for any
abnormality.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, and cleaning unit
When the density is set to 0 (white)
When there is image gray back ground, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, and high voltage contact
When the density is set at 255 (black)
When the density is thin, check the printer system for any abnormality.
[Recommended check point]: Write unit
* For information about setting the density, see 7.11 Test pattern density adjustment below.
Test Pattern
When the density is set to 70
1-61
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
No.5 Gradation Pattern

[Check Items]
Check the pattern to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform with the gradation continuously reproduced.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit, and LD1/LD2 offset adjustment
* For LD1/LD2 offset adjustment, see 1. Process adjustment.

* Since a single beam is employed for 7235/7228/7222, the pattern shown as LD2 in the illustration
below is also output by LD1.
Test Pattern
LD1 LD2
1-62
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
No.11 Beam Check

[Check Items 1]
For developement and analysis of the write unit
[Check Items 2]
Check the solid black pattern to see if there is uneven density found in the main scanning and sub-scanning directions.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, transfer/separation corona unit, and developing unit
[Check Items 3]
Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern at the leading/trailing edge of the
test pattern in the feed direction.
[Recommended checkpoint]: Transfer/separation corona unit
Test Pattern
[1]
[2]
[1] Solid black pattern
[2] Gradation pattern
1-63
manuals4you.com
No.16 Linearity Evaluation Pattern

[Check Items]
Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vartical magnification, tilt image, and leading edge timing of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible
on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test Pattern
[1]
237mm
20mm
31mm
28
0m
190mm
[1]
205.7mm
0m
28
190mm
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
190mm
[1] Edge of pager
1-64
36 MODE
8.12 Image Quality Adjustment

This function adjusts the image quality adjustment.
Density of respective patterns is adjusted in the fol-
The following are shown on the image quality
lowing procedure.
adjustment menu:
RADF scan density adj.
A. Procedure
Non-image area erase check.
8.12.1 RADF scanning density adjustment
Press the [5. Density adj.] key.

When the slit glass is replaced, adjust the density
3. Print density adjustment menu screen

Press the [1. Print density adj. (1)] Key.
when reading the original with the RADF.
4. Print density adjustment screen

Press the key according to the desired test pat-
Note:
The mechanical adjustment, optical adjustment
tern to be adjusted.
5. Enter a desired density by a numeric value from
the numeric keys, then press the [SET] key.
and electrical adjustment of the scanner are completed.

Make sure that the slit glass is cleaned.
Make sure that the white chart is not dirty or
Input range : 000 (light) to +255 (dark).

7. Basic screen
Press the START button to output a test pattern.
folded.
8. Check the density of the output test pattern.

A. Procedure
return to the Print density adjustment screen.

10. To adjust another test pattern, repeat steps 4 to

Press the [6. Image quality adj] key.
9.
11. Press the [RETURN] key to return to Print den-
3. Image quality adjustment screen

Press the [1. RADF Scan density adj.] key.
sity adjustment menu screen.
4. RADF Scanning density adjustment screen

Set the white chart in A4 direction on the RADF.
5. Press the [START] key.
6. Check that Completed appears in the message display area.
7. If ERROR appears in the message display
area, then repeat steps 4 and 5.
Note:
If ERROR is displayed repeatedly, there is a
possibility of a defect in the adjustment of the
scanner machine, optics, or electricrelated parts.
8. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the Image
quality adjustment screen.
1-65
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
8.11 Test Pattern Density Adjustment
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
8.12.2 Non-image area erase check
(3) Warning-2
A datum with potentioal not to function non-imagea-
Carry out a survey of the installation environment
rea-erase is found.
Please confirm adjustment - 36 mode columns of
after the machine is newly installed or moved to a

different location.
Preparation:
the Service Manual.
Be sure that the RADF is fully open.

Do not place anything on the platen glass.
(4) Remedy-2
If you use the non-original erasure function rela-
The platen glass must not be dirty.
tively infrequently, you can use the machine in its

present installation environment.
A. Procedure
If, however, you copy originals that have a dark

Press the [6. Image quality adj] key.
a dark location and facing a direction such that

external light does not get into it, then carry out the
3. Image quality adjustment screen
installation survey once again. In this case, if there
Press the [2. Non-image Area Erase check] key.

4. Non-image area erase check screen
is a bright light source, such as a fluorescent light,

directly above the machine, reconsider the installa-
Press the [START] key.

5. Confirm that Operation OK appears on the
tion location and direction, or take steps to block off

the light from the light source (by using a cover, for
message display.
If Operation NG appears, carry out non-origi-
example), then carry out the installation survey

once again.
background fairly frequently, reinstall the machine in
nal erasure installation survey once again while

seeing to Trouble and Remedy below.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the Image
quality adjustment screen.
B. <Trouble and Remedy>

(1) Warning-1
Adjust for Extreme Brightness. In many cases, the
Nonimage-area-erase function will not operate correctly.
Please confirm adjustment - 36 mode columns of
the Service Manual.
(2) Remedy-1
If you use the non-original erasure function, or copy
originals that have a dark background using the
nonoriginal erasure method, relatively infrequently,
use the machine in its present installation environment.
If, however, you copy originals that have a dark
background fairly frequently, re-install the machine
in a dark location and facing a direction such that
external light does not get into it, then carry out the
installation survey once again.
1-66
8.13 List Print
F.
Log list (1)

The data from the memory is dumped in the
Select the [7. List Print] from the 36 mode menu
HEX format and the ASCII format. (for analyz-
screen to display the list print menu screen.
ing trouble)
You can select following menu options from this
Normally not used.
screen.
G. Log list (2)
The data from the memory is dumped in the
Test pattern
Font pattern
Memory dump list
HEX format and the ASCII format. (for analyz-
Management list
ing trouble)
Adjustment list
Normally not used.
Log list (1)

H. Analysing list
Outputs the necessary list prints together if
Log list (2)

Analysing list
E-Mail KRDS com.list
trouble occurs in the field. (for analysing trou-
Note:
ble)
Normally not used.
Don't try to touch a mode not mentioned.

(1) Procedure
A. Test pattern
This option is used to output a grid pattern consisted of line width of 2 dots and line-to-line
space of 500 dots. From this pattern, you can

Press the [7. List print] key.
3. List print menu screen
check the write system for normal performance.
Press the key corresponding to the desired

menu option.
B. Font pattern
This option outputs the font list built in the
4. List print screen

When outputting the memory dump list, specify
the start and end addresses.
engine.
C. Memory dump list
This option is used to dump out data (in HEX
Note:
The memory dump list is dump output in both the
HEX and ASCII format.
and ASCII format) after the address specified in

E-RDH memory (this list is referenced for trou-

6. Basic screen
bleshooting).
D. Management list
This option outputs the machine status, counter
information and history of jam and so on.
Press the [START] key to output the list.

7. Press the # button while depressing the button
to return to the list print screen.
8. When outputting another list, repeat above
E. Adjustment list
This option outputs a list of current adjusting
steps 3 to 7.
9. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the list
values in the 25/36 mode.
print menu screen.

I.
E-Mail KRDS com.list

This option outputs the result of the E-mail
KRDS communication.
1-67
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
8.14 Counter Clear
8.15 Adjustment of RADF
The counter must be cleared whenever the drum or
Adjustments of RADF are performed in the follow-
fixing parts/unit is replaced.
ing procedures. For the adjustment, A3 or 11 x 17
Select the [8. Counter Clear] from the 36 mode
copy paper should be used.
menu screen to display the counter clear screen.

Following menu options are available from this
screen.
A. Procedure
1. Select the [9. RADF adj.] from the 36 mode
Drum related counter (Drum counter, Drum drive
menu screen to display the RADF adjustment
counter).
menu.
Fixing counter (Fixing web counter).
The following are included in the RADF adjustment:
A. Procedure
1 Vertical/horizontal magnification (Drum clock)

adjustment
2 Restart timing adjustment
Press the [8. Counter clear] key.

3. Counter clear screen
3 Paper feed loop amount adjustment

4 Centering adjustment
Press the key corresponding to the item to be

cleared.
5 RADF scanning density adjustment

2. Press the key corresponding to the desired
4. Message in the message display area will confirm if you really want to clear the item. Press
item. The screen corresponding to the selected

item will appear.
the [YES] key. When the item is cleared, the

Counter clear screen will be restored.
3. Press the [Preceding screen] key in each of the

RADF adjustment screens to return to the
5. When clearing another counter, repeat above

steps 3 and 4.
RADF adjustment menu screen.
6. Press the [RETURN] key to return to 36 mode

menu screen.
8.15.1 Vertical magnification adjustment in

RADF system
Reference:
Adjust the vertical magnification of the RADF.
The operation here is the same as [2. PM count] [3. Counter clear] on the 25 mode menu screen.
A. Procedure
menu.
2. Select [1. Drum clock adj.] from the RADF
adjustment menu
screen will appear.
and
the
Magnification

following items.
side, 50%)
side, 100%)
side, 200%)
side, 400%)
1-68
36 MODE
ble side, 50%)

Within 1.0mm with respect to 190mm

your entry.
[1]

basic screen.
6. Press the # button while depressing the button
190
[1]
Vertical magnification
to return to the Magnification adjustment

screen.
7. Press the [Preceding screen] key in the Vertical/horizontal magnification adjustment screen

to return to the RADF adjustment menu

screen.
adjustment screen
B. Vertical magnification adjustment in RADF
the [SET] key.

system
Adjust the vertical magnification while in RADF
ment)
1 step = 0.1%
copying.
10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the vertical magnification becomes the standard value.
a. Procedure


Press the [9. RADF adj.] key.
12. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the RADF

3. RADF adjustment menu screen

8.15.2 Adjustment of restart timing

adjustment screen
Use the following procedure to adjust the RADF
Press the arrow key to select the magnification

you want to adjust.
restart timing.
The screen changes in the following order: Single sided 50% 100% 200% 400%
A. Procedure
Double sided 50% 100% 200% 400%.

6. Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF and
START button.

menu.
2. Select [2. Restart timing] from the RADF
adjustment menu and the Re-start timing
adjustment screen will appear.
tion.
1-69
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
following items.
Restart timing adjustment : RADF (single side)

front)
START button.
6. Check paper feed loop volume.
7. When the paper feed loop quantity is not appro-
back)
priate, press the # button while pressing the

button.

your entry.


basic screen.
the [SET] key.

Setting range: -10 (decrease) ~ 00 (standard) ~
+10 (increase)
1 step = 0.5mm

Standard value: -3.0mm maximum (Life size).
9. Repeat above steps 4 to 8 until an appropriate

while depressing the button
paper feed loop volume is obtained.


Enter the value from the numeric keys, then
press the [SET] key.
Setting range: -50 (delays the timing) ~

8.15.4 Centering adjustment
+50 (advances the timing)

1 step = 0.1mm
Reference:
9. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the re-start timing

meets the standard value.
adjustment in 36 mode menu screen -[2. Timing

adjustment].
10. Press the [RETURN] key in the Restart timing

adjustment screen to return to the RADF
Adjust the centering of the image in the direction at

a right angle to the original feed direction of the
RADF. For adjustment items, the following three

8.15.3 Paper feed loop adjustment
items can be selected:

Centering adjustment : RADF (single side)
Reference:
Centering adjustment : RADF (double side, front)

Centering adjustment : RADF (double side,
adjustment in 36 mode menu screen -[2. Timing

adjustment].
Adjust the paper feed loop quantity while in RADF
back)
A. Procedure
copying.

A. Procedure



Press the arrow key until the desired item

Press the [3. Paper Loop adj.] key.


1
5. Basic screen
1-70
36 MODE
6. Basic screen
START button.
indicated in the message display area.

7. If the message ERROR appears in the message display area, repeat above steps 4 and 5.
When the RADF (double side, back) is selected,

make copies from double side single side
mode, and use the second for the adjustment.
7. Check the miscentering by comparing the original with the copy.
Note:
If ERROR is displayed repeatedly, there is a
possibility of a defect in the adjustment of the
scanner machine, optics, or electricrelated parts.


8.15.6 RADF image read point adjustment
the [SET] key.

Adjust the original read position while in RADF

copying.
1 step = 0.04mm
Note:

The RADF read position adjustment is inhibited in

the field.

8.15.5 RADF scanning density adjustment
8.16 FNS Adjustment

(FS-112 only)
Whenever the slit glass is replaced, its density in

reading an original must be adjusted in the following
Adjust the alignment plate position of the finisher.

When the sheets of paper exited from the finisher
manner.
are uneven, adjust the corresponding paper size.
Note:
Before starting this operation, every adjustment
A. Procedure
must be completed for the scanner's mechanical,

optical and electric system.
Make sure that the slit glass must be cleaned.
Make sure that the white chart is not stained or
folded.

Press the [10. FNS adj.] key.
3. FNS adjustment menu screen
Press [1. FNS alignment plate position adjustment (rear)] or [2. FNS alignment plate position
adjustment (front)].
A. Procedure
4. FNS matching
screen

plate
position
adjustment
Press the arrow key until the target paper size of

the adjustment is displayed.

Press the [5. RADF Scan density adj.] key.
5. Press the [Copy screen] key to display the basic

screen. Set the output setting to the group mode
4. RADF scanner density adjustment screen

Set the white chart in A4 direction on the RADF.
and press the [OK] key.

Conduct the test copy on the paper size in
which irregularity occurs.
1-71
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
6. Make sure that the message Completed is
36 MODE
6. Check the positions of the alignment plate and
I ADJUSTMENT
the paper from the paper exit side.

7. When irregularity still recurs, press the # button
while pressing the button.
8. FNS
matching
plate
position
A
Fold
adjustment
screen
Enter an adjusting value from the numeric keys,
then press the [SET] key.
Exit direction
1 step = 0.2mm
4511D528AA
9. To adjustment of another paper size, select it

from the arrow keys, then repeat steps 4 to 7.
10. Press the [RETURN] key to return to the FNS
B
Fold
8.17 FNS Adjustment

(FS-114 only)
Exit direction
Perform each finisher adjustment.
4511D527AA
8.17.1 Fold & Stitch position adjustment

(SK-114)
9. If it is not within the standard, press # button

while pressing button.
Adjust the fold & stitch position of the saddle kit.

It is adjusted when the stapling unit 1 or 2 is
10. On the Fold & Stitch position adj. screen,

enter a numeric value using the numeric key-
replaced, when the staple position is not correct,

and when the staple tile adjustment is performed.
pad. Then, press [SET] key.

A. Procedure
1 step = 0.5mm
In case of A: set a plus value

In case of B: set a minus value

11. Repeat the steps 4 through 9 until the
Press any key to return again to 36 mode menu

screen. Only through this operation, [10. FNS
adj.] is made effective.
12. Press [RETURN] and go back to the FNS adj.

menu screen.
3. On the FNS adj. menu screen,

select [1. Fold&Stitch posit adj.].
4. On the Fold & Stitch posit adj. screen,
select the paper size you want to adjust by
using the arrow keys.
5. Set five A4 originals in the ADF.
6. Press the [Copy screen] key to output a
fold&stitch sample.
7. Fold the output sample along its crease.
8. Check the distance between the fold and staple
positions.
Standard A, B: 0 1.5mm
fold&stitch position comes within the standard

range.
1-72
8.17.2 Fold position adjustment (SK-114)

Adjust the fold position of the saddle kit.
9. On the Fold position adj. screen,
It is adjusted when the fold unit is replaced, when
enter a numeric value using the numeric key-
the fold position is incorrect, and when the folding

tilt adjustment is performed.
pad. Then, press [SET] key.

1 step = 0.5mm
A. Procedure
In case of A: set a plus value
In case of B: set a minus value
10. Repeat the steps 4 through 8 until the fold posi-

tion comes within the standard range.

menu screen.
8.17.3 Punch position adjustment (PK-114)
select [2. Fold position adj.].

4. On the Fold position adj. screen, select the
Adjust the hole positions of the punch kit.
paper size you want to adjust by using the arrow

keys.
5. Press the [Copy screen] key to output a fold
sample.
A. Procedure
6. Fold the output sample along its crease.

7. Check the misalignment.

Standard A, B: 0 1.5mm

select [3. Punch position adj.].

punched sample.
5. Check the hole positions on the sample.
Standard A: 13 3mm (2 holes)
9.5 3mm (2 holes and 3 holes)
11 3mm (4 holes)
Exit direction
4511D525AA
A
B
Exit direction
[1]
Exit direction
[2]
7145fs1040
4511D526AA
1-73
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
36 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
8.17.4 Punch loop adjustment (PK-114)
Adjust the loop amount of the punch kit.

It is adjusted when the punch holes are tilted, or
when paper frequently jams in punch mode.
A. Procedure
[1]
[2]
7145fs1041


select [4. Punch loop adj.].
4. On the Punch loop adj. screen, select the
paper size you want to adjust by using the arrow
[1]
[2]
keys.
7145fs1042
punched sample.
6. Check the tilt of holes on the sample.
7. If the holes are tilted, press # button while
pressing button.
8. On the Punch loop adj. screen,

enter a numeric value using the numeric keypad. Then, press [SET] key.
1 step = 1.0mm
[1]
[2]
7145fs1043

7. On the Punch position adj. screen,
enter a numeric value using the numeric keypad. Then, press [SET] key.
[1]
[2]
7145fs1044
[1]
[2]
7145fs1045
1 step = 0.5mm
To shift in [1] direction: set a plus value
To shift in [2] direction: set a minus value
8. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 until the punch
positions come within the standard range.
menu screen.
1-74
36 MODE
When the punch part JAM occurs frequently: set
I ADJUSTMENT
a minus value
When inclination is in a punch hole: set a plus
value (In both the cases of [1] and [2], it sets to
plus side.)
9. Repeat the steps 4 through 7 until there is no tilt.
menu screen.
1-75
manuals4you.com
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
9. 47 MODE
9.1
c.
47 Mode Setting Method
Procedure

A. 47 Mode
This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/
Using the numeric keys, enter the input check

code. *1
output check function) to check and adjustment the
3. When using the multi mode, press the button.

4. Using the numeric keys, enter the multi code.*1
various signals and loads.
5. Input check result will appear in the input check

B. Operation method (to start 47 mode)
result display area.
(1) 47 Mode startup

a. Turn the SW2 (Sub power switch) OFF.
6. To check other signal input check, repeat steps
b.
Turn the SW2 ON while pressing 4 and 7 of the

*1
If security enhancement is enabled, input CE
(3) Output check method
password.
The moment I/O check mode is displayed in
a.
c.
2 to 5.
the message display area at the center of the

screen, check to see if the 47 mode is acti-
b.
vated.
See [5] Input check list.
Enter the output code (see the input/output

check code) of the operating load you want to
check with the number of sheets setting button.
When using the multi mode, press the button
and enter the multi code according to the
desired output check item (load).
47 mode menu screen
c.
Press the [START] key to perform the output

check.
d.
To end the output check, press the [STOP] key.
e. Procedure
Using the numeric keys, enter the output check
[1] [2]
[3]
code.*2
[4]
[1]
[2]
Input/Output check code

Multi code
[3]
[4]
Input check
Output check
3. When using the multi mode, press the button.

4. Using the numeric keys, enter the multi code.*2
5. Press the [START] key to perform the output
check.
6. To end the output check, press the [STOP] key.
7. To make another output check, repeat steps 2 to
6.
(2) Input check method

a. Using the numeric keys, enter the code input
b.
for the desired signal (sensor, etc.) to check.

When using the multi mode, press the button
and enter the multi code according to the
desired input check item (signal) with the
numeric keys.
1-76
*2
See [6] Output check list.
(4) Exiting the 47 mode

To end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 OFF.
47 MODE
RADF Original Size Detection

This adjustment is done when RADF fails to cor-
13. Set a sheet of B6R paper in the Bypass tray.
rectly detect size of an original.
14. Press the button.

15. Press [3] by means of the numeric keys.
A. Procedure
Check that 028-003 appears in the message

display area.

Press 69 by means of the numeric keys.
display area.
3. Set the original guide plate to the minimum size
(width) position, then press the [START] key.
6. Enter 1 from the the numeric keys.
Make sure that 069-001 is indicated in the
7. Set the original guide plate to the maximum size
(width) position, then press the [START] key.
9. To end the 47 mode, turn the SW2 OFF.
9.3
Bypass Size Detection

Adjustment
17. Press the [STOP] key.

9.4
Action for Mounting When

Reinstalling the HDD
Removing the HDD for analysis of an abnormality

and then reinstalling it after turning on and off the
power may result in no recognition of the HDD. To
avoid a condition like this, conduct this setting.
A. Procedure
2. 47 mode setting screen
Press the No. of sheets setting button to enter
15. Check to see if 015-000 is displayed in
the message display column.
Perform this adjustment if paper size detection at

the bypass feed tray does not function correctly.
A. Procedure

4. Press the No. of sheets setting button to enter
97.
Check to see if 015-097 is displayed in the
message display column.

Press 28 by means of the numeric keys.
display area.
3. Set a sheet of A4R paper in the bypass tray.
6. Press the [STOP] key to terminate the setting.

Note:
When the data is in nonconformity, an error may
occur. In that case, execute the format (key oper-

5. Press [1] by means of the numeric keys.
ator mode).

display area.
7. Press the [STOP] key.
8. Set a sheet of A4 paper in the bypass tray.
10. Press 2 by means of the numeric keys.
display area.
1-77
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
9.2
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
9.5
Input Check List
Classification Symbol
Code
Multi code
Name
Display
TSCB
00

(Drum temperature)
0 to 255
TSCB
01
0 to 255
TSCB
02
0 to 255
TH1
03
Fxing temperature sensor/1
0 to 255
ON
Analog
signal
OFF
TH2
04
Fxing temperature sensor/2
0 to 255
TDS
05
Toner temperature sensor
0 to 255
HUM1
06
Humidity sensor
0 to 255
PS8
10
Paper feed
No paper sensor/U
PS11
No paper sensor/L
PS103
No paper sensor/3
Paper No paper
PS108
No paper sensor/4
PS13
Bypass tray no paper sensor
PS153
No paper sensor (LT-203)
Upper limit sensor/U
PS10
PS7
12
Upper limit sensor/L
PS102
Tray upper limit sensor/3
PS107
PS152
Tray upper limit sensor (LT-203)
Tray set sensor/U
PS9
13
No paper Paper
Upper
limit
limit
Yes
PS12
Tray set sensor/L
PS101
Tray sensor/3
PS106
Tray sensor/4
Main body upper tray paper size signal
Main body lower tray paper size signal
PSDTB/3
Paper size detection signal board/3
PSDTB/4
Paper size detection signal board/4
16
Not at
upper
No
0 to 9*1
*1 Paper size signal (Inch)

Tray
Symbol displayed
1
B5
2
B4
3
A5R
4
A4
5
A4R
2,3,4
A5R
A4
A4R
A3
F4
6
F4
7
8
9
0
5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 14
5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 14
11 x 17
*1 Paper size signal (Metric)

Tray
Symbol displayed
5
6
B5
B4
A5R
A4
A4R
F4
2,3,4
B5
B4
A5R
A4
A4R
A3
1-78
5.5 x 8.5 8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 14

F4
8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R 11 x 17
47 MODE
Tray
LCT(3)
Symbol displayed
1
A4
A4R
8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R
B5R
B5
A4
A4R
Code
Multi code
Name
20
Registration sensor
Conveyance PS104
Paper feed sensor/U (DB upper tray)
PS105
Paper feed sensor/L (DB lower tray)
Timing sensor/U (Main body upper tray)
8.5 x 11 8.5 x 11R
Display
ON
Paper feed
PS1
PS21
OFF
Paper No paper
(7145/7235/7228)
PS22
Timing sensor/L (Main body lower tray)
5
(7145/7235/7228)
PS155
SW151
Scanner
Paper feed sensor (LT-203)
Interlock switch (LT-203)
Open
PS2
22
Fixing exit sensor
Paper No paper
SW3
23
Interlock switch
Open
VR1
28
Bypass tray paper size sensor VR
0 to 255
38
Measured LD alarm value (LD1)
0 to 255
2
(7145)
Measured LD alarm value (LD2)
0 to 255
Measured LD alarm value
(7235/7228/7222)
PS14
40
1
(7145)
Scanner home position sensor
PS15
APS timing sensor
PS17
APS sensor
Close
Close
0 to 255*2
Other
than H.P.
H.P.
Open
Close
Original is
No
provided original
*2
The results can be displayed by pressing the start button
1-79
manuals4you.com
the stop button in this order.
I ADJUSTMENT
*1 Paper size signal (Common)
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
Intrinsic
Code
Multi code
50
functions
Name
Check of DB serial communications
Display
ON
OFF
0001
0000
Normal Abnormal
(7145)
or not
Check of DF serial communications
connected
(7235/7228/7222)
Check of FNS serial communications
Check of scanner serial communications
Check of Main drive board serial com4

(7235/7228/7222) munications
51
Judging of the main body type
(7145)
0096 to 0098*3
(7235/7228/7222)
TLD
57
Judging of the DB type
Toner level detector sensor
0 to 6*4
Not
Provided
provided
PS5
Toner bottle sensor
Provided
Not
provided
RADF
*3
60
No original sensor
Paper No paper
Cover open/close sensor
Open
Close
PS303
DF open/close sensor
Open
Close
PS308
Original registration sensor
PS309
Original conveyance sensor
PS302
Original exit sensor
PS305
Original size sensor/1
PS306
VR301
Original size VR
No paper Paper
Paper No paper
0 to 255
0096
7222
0097
7228
0098
7235
Judging code of the DB type
Display
Judging type
PS301
Judging code of the Main type (7235/7228/7222)
Display
Judging type
*4
PS304
0
Not connected
2
DB-211
3
DB-411
1-80
5
DB-211 + LT-203
6
DB-411 + LT-203
FS-112
PS701
Code
Multi code
70
Name
Pressure sensor (Level)
Display
ON
OFF
No
Pressure
pressure applied
PS705
Shutter sensor
PS701
Pressure sensor (HP)
PS704
Paper exit full sensor
ON
OFF
No
Pressure
pressure applied
Other
Full
than full
PS703
Exit sensor
PS702
FNS entrance censor
PS712
10
Stapler HP sensor
PS713
12
Staple detection sensor
Paper No paper
Other
H.P.
than H.P.
No
Staples
staples provided
provided
PS714
14
Stapler ready sensor
16
24V detect
PS711
17
Tray upper limit sensor
PS706
18
Tray lower limit sensor
Stapler Stapler
not ready ready
0V
24V
Upper
Not at
limit
upper
limit
Lower
limit
Other
than
lower
limit
FS-113
PS707
19
No paper sensor
PS708
20
Stapler unit HP sensor
PS709
21
Alignment HP sensor/R
PS710
22
Alignment HP sensor/F
1st tray exit sensor
PC3
Stacking sensor
PC4
Upper path sensor
PC2
Lower path sensor
PC1
70
PC6
1st tray full detection sensor
PC7
Elevate tray full detection sensor
PC9
Alignment HP sensor
PC14
Staple home sensor
PC12
Stacking roller home sensor
PC13
10
Paper exit roller home sensor
PC5
11
Process tray paper detection sensor
12
Stapler 1 home sensor
Paper No paper
H.P.
Other
than H.P.
Paper No paper
H.P.
Other
than H.P.
Paper No paper
H.P.
Other
than H.P.
1-81
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
FS-113
Code
70
Multi code
13
Name
Staple empty detection sensor 1
Display
ON
OFF
No
Staples
staples provided
provided
14
Self-priming sensor 1
Stapler
15
Stapler 2 home sensor
H.P.
16
Staple empty sensor 2
No
Stapler
ready not ready

Other
than H.P.
Staples
staples provided
provided
17
Self-priming sensor 2
Stapler Stapler
ready not ready
PWB-F
18
Elevate tray top face sensor
Upper
limit
Not at
upper
PC8
19
Elevate tray paper extractor sensor
ON
OFF
S2, S3
20
Elevate tray upper limit/lower limit

switch
Upper
limit
Not at
upper
limit
limit
PC10
21
Shift home sensor
H.P.
Other
than H.P.
S4
22
Punch 2-hole/3-hole detection sensor
2 holes
3 holes
PC15
23
Punch motor pulse sensor
ON
OFF
PC11
24
Shift motor pulse sensor
27
Passage sensor
Paper No paper
Entrance sensor
Paper No paper
(inch system only)
RU-101
PS2
FS-114
PC4-FN
70
exists
PC5-FN
Transport sensor
PC6-FN
Alignment home position sensor 1
PC7-FN
S3-FN
Elevate tray upper/lower limit SW
Upper
limit
Except
upper limit
S2-FN
Shutter detection SW
Close
Open
S1-FN
Front cover open/close detection SW
Pulse sensor
Shade Transmit
PC23-SK
10
In & out guide home position sensor
Shade Transmit
Shade Transmit
PC14-FN
11
Elevator tray lower limit sensor
PC15-FN
12
Top face detection sensor
13
BK-114 detection
PC3-FN
14
Elevator tray position detect sensor
Home Except home

position position
Equipped
Not
equipped
1-82
Shade Transmit
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
Name
Display
ON
FS-114
PC16-FN
70
PC11-FN
ADU
15
Shutter home position sensor
17
Exit paddle home position sensor
OFF
Home Except home

position
position
PC12-FN
18
Exit roller home position sensor
PC8-FN
19
Storage tray paper detect sensor
PC10-FN
20
Staple home position sensor
21
Self-priming sensor
22
Staple empty detection sensor
23
Staple home sensor
25
Punch position sensor 1
26
PC1-PK
27
Punch trash full sensor
Shade Transmit
PC22-SK
28
Crease roller home position sensor
Home Except home

position position
S4-FN
29
Transport jam detection SW
PC26-SK
30
Layable guide home sensor
PC20-SK
31
Saddle exit sensor
PC21-SK
32
Saddle tray empty sensor
33
Saddle staple home position sensor 1
34
Saddle self-priming sensor 1
35
Saddle staple empty detection sensor 1
36
Saddle staple home position sensor 2
37
Saddle self priming sensor 2
38
Saddle staple empty detection sensor 2
Paper exists No paper

Shade Transmit
Transmit Shade
Close
Open
Shade Transmit
Paper exists No paper
Shade Transmit
S4-SK
39
Saddle interlock switch
PC18-SK
40
Saddle exit roller home position sensor Except home Home

position position
ADU sensor
PS4
80
1-83
manuals4you.com
Open
Open
Close
Close
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
I ADJUSTMENT
9.6
Output Check List
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
changed in the field
High volt-
L1
00
Exposure lamp
age/image
M4
01
01
Developing motor
M3
(7145)
M1
01
Main motor
SD9
01
Toner solenoid
HV
02
Charging
03
04
Transfer
Separation (AC)
X
X
05
06
Transfer + Separation (AC + DC)

Separation (DC)
X
X
07
08
Grid
Dmax/ LED
X
X
10
(7145)
Guide plate
11
Bias (7145)
Bias + Guide plate (7235/7228/7222)
15
Service counter clear (Clears service

related counter values from the PRMB
PRMB
(Parameter memory board))
Reuse counter clear (prohibited in the field)
10
11
EKC data block clear

Job memory data block clear
12
Arbitrary replacement parts data block

clear
13
Coded dialing data block clear (for Fax)
14
One touch data block clear (for Fax)
15
16
Group data block clear (for Fax)

Fax file format (for Fax)
17
FL related non-volatile data initialization

(for Fax)
18
19
E-Mail address list clear

FTP address list clear
20
21
Box No. list clear

E-Mail Subject list clear
22
23
E-Mail Body list clear

Initialization of scanner file name
24
25
Initialization of copier file name

Initialization of SMB data
26
90
Initialization of LDAP data

Setting of system/copier and initialization
97
of memory switch
HDD mounting measure
1-84
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
High volt-
PRMB
15
age/image
Paper feed
SD1
20
Initialize KRDS non volatile area

Initial generation of document folder
1st paper feed solenoid/U
SD2
1st paper feed solenoid/L
SD3
Bypass solenoid
SD101
Paper feed solenoid/U
SD102
Paper feed solenoid/L
SD151
LT Paper feed solenoid
Paper feed motor
M100
M150
2
3
DB Paper feed motor

LT Paper feed motor
M9, MC1,
MC2
Paper feed motor, registration clutch,

loop clutch
Tray motor/U
M8
M101
2
3
Tray motor/L
Tray up motor/3
M102
M151
4
5
Tray up motor/4
Tray up motor
M9
M7
Scanner
98
99
21
23
MC1
MC2
25
26
Registration clutch
Loop clutch
28
Bypass size adjustment (A4R in width)
Bypass size adjustment (A4 in width)
Bypass size adjustment (B6R in width)
SD7
29
M2
M5, FM7
31
Scanner motor
32
Polygon motor (steady rotation) *1
Polygon motor (Pre-rotation) *1
(7235)
M5, FM7
(7235)
Main body
M2,L1
34
Shading correction operation
LD
LD,M5
36
37
Laser PWM (0 to 255)

Conpel to laser ON
LD,M5
L1
38
39
LD alarm measurement
Platen still APS
M11
M1
40
41
Fixing motor
Main motor (sequential)
42
2
1
Main motor (motor alone)

M1
FM3
*1
FM4
2
7235 only, FM7 (Polygon cooling fan) also rotates at the same time.
1-85
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
I ADJUSTMENT

Main body
FM2
42
Fixing cooling fan
(7145/7235)
FM1
DC power supply cooling fan
FM5
FM6
FM3,FM6
Internal dehumidifying fan/1, 2
FM301
Cooling fan
Internal cooling fan/2 (low speed)
FM7
(7145)
FM7
10
Internal cooling fan/2 (high speed)
(7145)
TC
L2
43
45
L3
Total counter
Operation
panel
OB
OB
48
49
All LED ON
Operation panel check (Checking for
Intrinsic
M3
50
LCD, keys, and buzzer)

Developing motor (motor alone)
functions
M3
(7145)
1 to 255
RADF
Developing motor (sequential)

Use the multicode 1 to 255 to set the
PCL
51
No. of rotations.
Pre-charging exposure lamp
TSL
SD4
52
53
Transfer synchronization lamp

M4
M4, SD9
55
1
2

Toner supply motor 1, Toner solenoid
M10
M10
56
1
2
Toner supply motor 2 (CW)

Toner supply motor 2 (CCW)
TLD
SD9
57
58
Toner level sensor

Toner supply solenoid
M301
59
60
24V power source remote

Original feed motor (CW)
M301
M303
2
3
Original feed motor (CCW)

Original reversal motor (CW)
M303
M302
4
5
Original reversal motor (CCW)
M302
M302
6
7
Original conveyance motor (CCW/100%)

SD302
SD301
8
9
Rollar pressure solenoid

Paper exit solenoid
SD303
VR301
10
0
Stamp solenoid
Original size adjustment (small size)
69*
VR301
1
Original size adjustment (large size)
Be sure to execute the operation without fail when DF-320 is installed.
1-86
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
FS-112
M701
FNS conveyance motor
M702
70
Paper exit motor (forward rotation)
M702
Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
M707
Pressure motor (forward rotation)
M707
Pressure motor (reverse rotation)
M706
Tray up motor(raise)
M706
Tray up motor (lower)
M705
Stapler shift motor, (initialize) (A4/F)
M705
Stapler shift motor, (initialize)(A4/R)
M703,M704
10
Alignment motor/R,F (initialize)
M703,M704
11
Alignment motor/R,F (A4 size position)
M703,M704
12
13
Alignment motor/R,F (rocking)

Stapler motor
Exit motor
M708
FS-114
M1-FN
70
M2-FN
M3-FN
Transport motor
Entrance motor
M4-FN
M5-FN
Alignment motor 1
Alignment motor 2
M11-FN
M11-FN
5
6
Elevator motor (up)

Elevator motor (down)
M12-FN
M6-FN
7
11
Shutter opening motor

Exit open/close motor
M9-SK
M7-FN
12
17
Saddle exit open/close motor

Stapling unit moving motor
M10-SK
SL1-FN
23
53
Crease motor
Storage paddle solenoid
SL2-FN
54
78
Exit paddle solenoid

Punch motor
IT
SD8
75
79
1
Punch motor
IT gate solenoid
ADU
M6
80
Forward rotation (7145: 230mm/sec,

7235: 180mm/sec, 7228/7222: 140mm/
M6
M6
M6
SD5
83
sec)
Forward rotation (600mm/sec)
Reverse rotation (7145: 230mm/sec,
7235: 180mm/sec, 7228/7222: 140mm/
sec)
Reverse rotation (600mm/sec)
ADU gate solenoid
1-87
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
Code
Multi code
Name
Cannot be set or
I ADJUSTMENT

Others
90
PM counter clear
91
Process counter clear (prohibited in the field)
Drum counter clear (prohibited in the field)
PRMB (Parameter memory board) initiali-
92
zation
93
(Process initial set/prohibited in the field)

Initial settings
95
Automatic adjustment of L detection ref-
erence value
(prohibited in the field)
96
Process delivery completing setting (pro-
97
hibited in the field)

Light distribution check
98
After completion of process shipment,
temporary initialization of the PRMB

(Parameter memory board)
119
121
Network initialization
197
198
E-RDH (DRAM) capacity display

E-RDH (DRAM) capacity check
999
Checking of status control board (prohibited in the field)
Initialize fax-related nonvolatile memory
om
ou.c
y
4
s
l
a
nu
ma
3
1-88
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS

Caution:
Be sure the power cord has been unplugged
from the wall outlet.
10.1 RADF Height Adjustment

A. Procedure
1. Close the RADF.
2. Open the open/close cover [1], then turn the
[1]
[2]
RADF height adjustment screw [2] until the

RADF height adjust pointer [3] comes to center
of the scale divisions.
1-89
manuals4you.com
[3]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.2 RADF Distortion Adjustment

Adjust the amount of distortion of a copy in the following procedures.
A. Procedure
1. Set a A3 paper on the tray of the main body.
2. Set the ADF adjustment chart on the RADF,
then make a copy.
3. Check the amount of distortion in the copy.
Standard value: 0.3% less.
[1]
A
[1]
Paper feed direction
4. When the distortion is larger than the tolerance,

adjust it using the skew adjustment screw [1].
A: Turn the dskew adjustment screw [1] clockwise.
B: Turn the skew adjustment screw [1] counterclockwise.
5. Repeat above steps 2 to 4 until the standard
value for distortion is met.
1-90
[1]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.3 RADF Original Skew Adjustment (Front Side)

When the front side of the originals are fed being
skewed, adjust the registration pully bracket.
A. Procedure
1. In the single sided single sided copy mode,
set the adjustment chart to the RADF for copying.
2. Check the original skew pattern.
Standard value: Within 0.5%
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Image
[2]
[3]
Paper
3. When the skew is not up to the standard, open

the open/close cover [1], loosen the screw [3]
and adjust the position of the registration pulley
bracket[2].
[3]
[1]
A: Move the registration pully bracket [2] down

[4].
B: Move the registration pully bracket [2] up [5].
4. Repeat above steps 1 to 3 until the standard
[5]
[4]
value for the skewed original is within standard

value.
[2]
1-91
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10.4 RADF Original Skew Adjustment (Back Side)

When the back side of the original is supplied on a
skew, adjust the clearance of the guide plate.
A. Procedure
1. In the double sided single sided copy mode,
set the adjustment chart to the RADF for copying.
2. Check the original skew pattern.
Standard value: Within 0.5%
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Image
[2]
[3]
Paper
1-92
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
3. When the skew is not up to the standards, open
I ADJUSTMENT
[5]
the open/close cover [1] and remove the 2 covers [2].

4. Loosen the hexagon nut [3], and rotate the set
screw[4] to adjust the clearance of the guide
plate.
A: Loosen the hexagon nut [3] at the rear and
rotate the set screw [4] clockwise.
B: Loosen the hexagon nut [3] at the front and
rotate the set screw [4] clockwise.
[2]
Note:
Since there is the possibility of jamming, be sure
not make the clearance of the guide plate narrower than the standard value. (Be sure not to
tighten the hexagon nut [3].)
The reference value of the clearance of the guide
plate should be determined based on the position
where the difference in level [A] of the second
stage of the clearance reference block [5]
becomes flush with the metal frame surface [B].
5. Repeat the steps 1 to 4 until the original skew
[1]
[2]
gets within the standard value.
[3]
[4]
1-93
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10.5 DB-411 Paper-Centering

Adjustment
Make a copy of the test chart, then perform necessary adjustment until the standard value for the
paper centering is fit.
A. Procedure
1. Loosen a screw [1] on the side guide situated at
[2]
bottom of the paper feed tray. And also loosen

the 2 screws [3] on the reinforcing plates (front/
[1]
back) [2] situated at top of the tray.
[3]
2. Rotate the adjusting cam [4], move the side

guide back and forth and adjust it so that the
centering of the image center [6] to the paper
center [5] becomes within the specified value
(within 3mm).
3. When the adjustment is complete, tighten the
screws provided for the side guide and reinforc-
[4]
ing plates.
Note:
If paper miscentering occurs, move the side guide
forwards and backwards, and adjust the gap for
the paper in use to between 1.0 and 1.5mm.
(The gap must be set so that the tray meets both
the lower limit position and the upper limit position.)
1-94
[7]
[6]
[5]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.6 DB-411 Tray Tilt Adjustment

Normal paper feed can't be expected if the tray is
tilted. In such case, adjust the tray and paper feed
roller shaft so that they may be parallel in each
other. Whenever the wire is replaced, this adjustment must be implemented.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the front cover of the tray.
2. Loosen a screw [2] of the wire adjustment part
[1] situated in front side of the tray.
[1]
[2]
3. Position in front and in rear the 2 metal scales
[1]
[2] in the tray [1] as shown in the drawing.

4. Move the wire adjustment part [3] until the distance from top of the side plate to the tray [1] top
face is equal in both the front and back sides.
[3]

screw [4] for the wire adjustment part [3].
[2]
[4]
1-95
manuals4you.com
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.7 LT Tray Tilt Adjustment

Normal paper feed can't be expected if the tray is
tilted. In such case, adjust the tray and paper feed
roller shaft so that they may be parallel in each
other. Whenever the wire is replaced, this adjustment must be implemented.
A. Procedure
1. Remove the LT from the main body.
2. Open the top cover and remove the right cover
and the front cover.
3. Loosen a screw [2] of the wire adjustment part
[1] situated in front.
[1]
manuals4you.com
[2]
1-96
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
4. Position in front and in rear the 2 metal scales
I ADJUSTMENT
[1]
[2] in the tray [1] as shown in the drawing.

5. Move the wire adjustment part [3] until the distance from top of the side plate to the tray [1] top
face is equal in both the front and back sides.
screw [4] for the wire adjustment part [3].
[2]
[3]
[4]
1-97
manuals4you.com
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.8 FS-113 Output Check Mode

A. Switches on PWB
S1
Used to run the Test Mode opera-
S2
tion.
S3
DIP switch used to set the Test
LED1~4
Mode operation.
Turn ON or OFF, or blink to indicate a specific condition during
Test Mode operations.
S3
S2
S1
1-98
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
(1) Test Mode Setting Procedure

a. Procedure
1. Turn OFF SW2 (Sub power switch) of the
copier.
2. Flip keys of the DIP switch into the ON or OFF
position as necessary. (See Table below.)
3. Turn ON SW2 (Sub power switch) of the copier.
4. This sets the Finisher into the corresponding
Test Mode operation.
b.
Resetting Procedure
Flip all keys of the DIP switch to their respective

initial positions (OFF positions) and turn OFF,
then ON, SW2 (Sub power switch) of the copier.
(2) Test Mode Operations
Test Mode
DIP Switch (S3)
Operation
Online
1st Tray exit

Elevator Tray
ON
exit
Finisher Tray
exit
Shifting
operation
Aligning Plate
operation
Stapling Unit
CD movement
Exit Roller/
Rolls spacing
Storage Roller/
Rolls spacing
Elevator Tray
operation
Hole Punch
operation
Hole position
selection
Sensor test
1
{
2
{
3
{
4
z
ON
ON ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON ON
ON {
ON z
ON
ON {
ON ON
ON z
ON ON {
ON
ON
ON
LED
ON ON
Indicates sen-
sor state
z: Blinking {: OFF
1-99
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
B. Test Mode
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
(3) Operation in Each Test Mode Operation

a.
1st Tray Exit

S1: ON
Motors and solenoids: Energized
[Entrance Motor (M1), Upper Entrance Motor
(M4), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1), 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2)]
S2: ON
Motors and solenoids: Deenergized
(M4), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1), 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2)]
b.
Elevator Tray Exit

S1: ON
Motors: Energized
(M4), Lower Entrance Motor (M2), Exit Motor
(M3)]
S2: OFF
Motors: Deenergized
(M3)]
c.
Finisher Tray Exit

S1: ON
Motors and solenoids: Energized
(M3), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1)]
S2: OFF
Motors and solenoids: Deenergized
(M3), Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1)]
d.
Shifting Operation
S1: ON
The Elevator Tray shifts to the front.
S2: ON
The Elevator Tray shifts to the rear.
1-100
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Aligning Plate Operation
I ADJUSTMENT
e.
S1: ON
At the home position
S1: ON
At a position to align A4 paper
S1: ON
At a position to align 8.5 x 11 paper
S1: ON
At a position to align A4R paper
S1: ON
At a position to align 8.5 x 11R paper
f.
Stapling Unit CD Movement

S1: ON
At home position
S1: ON
At a position for A4 corner stapling
S1: ON
At home position
S1: ON
At a position for A4R corner stapling
g.
Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing

S1: ON
Pressed
S2: ON
Separated
h.
Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing

S1: ON
Pressed
S2: ON
Separated
1-101
manuals4you.com
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
i.
Elevator Tray Operation

S1: ON
Goes up until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit
Sensor PQ
(PWB-D) is blocked.
S2: ON
Goes down until the Elevator Tray Upper Limit
Sensor PQ
(PWB-D) is unblocked.
j.
Hole Punch Operation

S1: ON
The Punch Motor (M11) is energized.
S1: ON
The electromagnetic spring clutch is energized.
S2: ON
The Punch Motor (M11) is deenergized.
k.
Hole Position Selection U.S.A. and Canada

S1: ON
2-hole position
S2: ON
3-hole position
l.
Sensor Test
Sensor
State
LED
1 2 3 4
Elevator Tray Upper Limit

Sensor PQ (PWB-D)
Storage Sensor (PC3)
Unblocked { { { z
Blocked
{ { z {
Lower Entrance Sensor

(PC2)
Blocked
{ z { {
Upper Entrance Sensor

(PC4)
Blocked
z { { {
z: ON
{: OFF
1-102
10.9 Lengthwise Position Adjustment

of Punch Hole of FS-113
A. Procedure
1. Set the copier into the Hole Punch mode and
make a 1-sided copy from a 1-sided original.
2. Fold the copy in half and check to see if the
holes are aligned
(deviation should be within 2mm).
3. If the holes are misaligned, loosen the screw
that secure the Punch Unit and slide the Punch
Unit as necessary.
4. Make a copy again and check for correct hole
positions.
1-103
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10.10 Adjustment of FS-113 Solenoids

A. Adjustment of the Upper/Lower Entrance
Switching Solenoid (SL1)
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen one screw that secures the solenoid in
position.
2. Move the solenoid up or down and, when
dimension A measures 4.4mm, tighten the
screw.
B. Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2)

(1) Procedure
1. Loosen one screw that secures the solenoid in
position.
2. Move the solenoid to the right or left and, when
dimension B measures 3.6mm, tighten the
screw.
1-104
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.11 FS-113 Timing Belt Tension

Adjustment
A. Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor
(M4) Timing Belt
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws.
2. Use a spring balance to apply pressure at C and
tighten the 2 screws at the position where the
tension becomes 200 100gf when the belt
deflects 4mm.
B. Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor

(M2) Timing Belt
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws.
[2]
2. Use a spring balance to pull the square hole [2]

given in the lower entrance motor mounting
bracket with a force of 800 50gf and tighten
the 2 screws.
[1]
C. Adjustment of the Exit Motor (M3) Timing

Belt
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws.
2. Tighten the 3 screws at the position [3] where
the external form of the screw [1] coincides with
[1]
that of the oblong hole in the exit motor mounting bracket [3].
[2]
1-105
manuals4you.com
[3]
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
10.12 FS-113 Adjustment of the

Elevator Tray Upper Limit
Sensor
This adjustment must be made when the Control
Board (PWB-A) or the Elevate Tray Top Face
Sensor (PWB-C, D) is replaced with a new one.
A. Procedure
1. Set up the sensor test mode.
2. Turn VR1 on PWB-A fully counterclockwise.
3. Using a sheet of paper, block the Elevator Tray
Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C).
4. Check that LED4 on PWB-A turns OFF. If it
stays ON, slowly turn VR1 clockwise and stop
turning it as soon as the LED turns OFF.
1-106
10.13 Adjustment of FS-113 Elevator Tray Overload Detection

Level
This adjustment must be made when the Control
Board (PWB-A) or the Elevator Motor (M7) is
replaced with a new one.
A. Procedure
1. Set the Elevator Tray operation function of the
Test Mode.
2. Turn VR2 on PWB-A fully counterclockwise.
3. Using a sheet of paper, block the Elevator Tray
Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C). Then using
the Elevator Tray operation function, lower the
Elevator Tray.
4. Place 1,500 sheets of A3 (20lbs) or 3,000
sheets of A4 (20lbs) paper on the Elevator Tray.
5. Using the Elevator Tray operation function,
raise the Elevator Tray.
6. While the Elevator Tray is going up, turn VR2 on
PWB-A clockwise and, when LED3 on PWB-A
turns from a steady light to off, stop turning VR2.
1-107
manuals4you.com
I ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.14 Staple Position Adjustment

of FS-114
It is replaced when the stapler is replaced or
when the staple position is not correct.
A. Procedure
1. Set the staple mode and make a copy.
2. Check the staple position of the paper.
1-Point Tilted Staple
Paper Width 279 to 297mm: 45 tilt
Measurement
Specification
Adjustment range
position
A, D
4.4 3mm
B, C
12.1 4mm
+1mm to -2mm
Measurement
position
Specification
Adjustment range
A
B
4.9 3mm
16.2 4mm
+1mm to -2mm
C
D
10.1 4mm
6.5 3mm
+1mm to -2mm
B
C
B5, B4: 30 tilt

4349D503AA
1-Point Parallel Staple

Paper Width 182 to 216mm
Measurement
Specification
Adjustment range
4.5 3mm
6.0 4mm
+1mm to -2mm
position
A
B
4349D504AA
1-108
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
2-Point Staple
C, F
Adjustment range
6.0 4mm
+1mm to -2mm
Y 4mm
X 4mm
I ADJUSTMENT
Measurement Specification
position
D
E
Y = (paper width-x-11) / 2
X = A3, A4: 137
B4, B5: 114
4349D505AA
A4R: 190
B5R: 162
Substitute above into the equation.
3. If the staple position is misaligned, remove one
screw and the cover.
4. Loosen two adjustment screws and move the
Stapler Unit in the direction of the arrow to make
the adjustment.
5. Make another copy and check the staple position.
4349D513AA
10.15 Adjustment of the Installation Position of the Shutter

Drive Gear of FS-114
When the gear/1, 2 or 3 is replaced, or the gear/
1, 2 or 3 is removed.
A. Procedure
1. Set three gears.
Gear 2
Note:
Set the gears so that the marks on Gears 1 and 3
Gear 1
Gear 3
are aligned with the rib of Gear 2 as shown on the

right.
4349D502AA
1-109
manuals4you.com
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.16 Punch Hole Deviance Adjustment of FS-114 (PK-114)

When the punch kit is replaced or removed.
A. Procedure
1. Set the copier into the Hole Punch mode and
make a 1-sided copy from a 1-sided original.
2. Fold the output paper in half and check whether
the punch hole positions are aligned.
Specification: Within 2mm
4349D501AA
3. If the punch hole position is misaligned, remove

two screws and the cover.
4. Loosen one adjustment screw and move the
Punch Unit forward or backward to make the
adjustment.
5. Make another copy and check the punch hole
position.
4512U025AB
1-110
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.17 Fold Angle Adjustment of

SK-114
It is performed when the fold unit is replaced or a
tilt occurs in paper folding.
A. Procedure
1. Enter the Crease mode and make a copy. (A3
Size)
2. Fold the output paper and half and check
A
Center
whether section A of the paper is aligned.

Specification: 0 1.5mm
3. If the fold position is slanted as shown on the
left, make the following adjustment.
Fold
4511D529AA
4. Open the Front Door, loosen one adjustment

screw, and move the Crease Unit to the left to
*
make the adjustment.

If the fold position is slanted opposite to the
figure of step 3, move the Crease Unit to the
right to make the adjustment.
5. Make another copy and check the fold position.

4511D530AA
1-111
manuals4you.com
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
I ADJUSTMENT
10.18 Staple Angle Adjustment of

SK-114
It is performed when the staple unit 1 or 2 is
replaced or a tilt occurs in center staple position.
A. Procedure
1. Set five A4 originals in the ADF.
2. Set to 2-point Staple and Crease mode and
make a copy. Check whether the staple position

is aligned correctly.
Specification: 0 1.5mm
3. If the staple position is slanted as shown on the
figure, make the following adjustment.
Exit direction
4511D531AA
4. Release the lock release lever of the Saddle

Unit.
5. Loosen one adjustment screw and move the
lock lever to the left to make the adjustment.
*
If the staple position is slanted opposite to the

figure of step 3, move the lock lever to the
right to make the adjustment.

6. Make another copy and check the staple posi4511D532AA
tion.
1-112
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISW
ISW
2. SETUP
1. DESCRIPTION OF THE ISW
A. Board used for the ISW

The following boards are available for rewriting
a program using the ISW in this machine.
The ISW (In-System Writer) is an operation by
SCB (System control board)
which the control program, that is stored in the flash
CB (Main body control board)

FNSCB (FNS control board) : FS-112
ROM incorporated into a variety of control boards in

grated into the main body of the copier. Executing
PWB-A FN (Main control board) : FS-114

FAX control
the ISW allows you to renew the version of the con-
For the printer controller, see the Service Manual
the digital copier, is rewritten with the board inte-
trol program without changing the board or to install

the latest program while changing the board.
As a tool to execute the ISW, you can use the [ISW
Trns (PC software)] by which rewriting is made with
a personal computer (PC) connected to the digital
copier.
of IP.
For boards other than the above, the ROM is
required to be changed.
B. Data flow
There are 2 types of data flows for the ISW as
shown below:
This tools allow direct rewriting of the control program in the flash ROM included in the copier main
PCSCBCBFNSCB/PWB-A FN
PCSCBFAX
body by connecting the ISW connector of the copier

main body.
Important:
The method of carrying out the necessary setup

work on the main body for executing ISW is
described here. For the operation of the ISW Trns,
see the ISW (In-System Writer) Service Manual.
When the overall control program has not been

written into the SCB (System control board), it is
not possible to rewrite programs for other boards.
C. Checking before transfer
Before executing the ISW, be sure to check to
see if the transfer case and the transfer mode
to be used are correct.
Note:
When using the USB, be sure to turn on the USB
radio button in the [Setting (S)] - [Communication
(1) When the overall control program has not
setting (C)] of the ISWTrns and press the OK button.
been installed
When the overall control program has not been
For the ISW method of this machine, only the

ISW Trns is available.
installed, the LCD screen is not displayed and

data cannot be written in the 25 mode.
Transfer case: When the SCB (System control
board) is being replaced.
Transfer mode:When the power is on. (When
the data LED indicator lamp is
on The ISW is waiting for
transfer. When the lamp is
flashing The ISW is receiving
data.)
2-1
manuals4you.com
II ISW
II
SETUP
(2) When the overall control program has been
installed
E. Preparation of the copying machine for ISW

transfer
When the overall control program has been
When the copier and the PC are USB con-
installed, it is possible to write data in the 25
nected for the first time, it is necessary to install
mode.
Transfer case: Version up, when boards other
the USB driver into the PC. (It is not required,

however, to install the USB driver on and after
the second connection.)
than the SCB (System control

board) are being replaced.
For details of the installation procedure of the

USB driver, see 3. USB ISW.
Transfer mode:25 mode
Before operating the ISW, maintain the copier

in ISW mode.
II ISW
D. ISW connectors
The ISW connectors are provided on the right
side of the main body, and each of the connectors is covered with a cap or seal. Be sure to
(1) When the overall control program has been

installed
remove this cap or seal while in use.
a.
Procedure
The following two types of IF are available:

USB (B type)

IEEE1284 (Nibble/ECP/compatible mode)

Press the [10.ISW] key.

3. ISW menu screen
Select the ROM where the ROM data to be
rewritten.
[START] key is displayed.
4. Program rewrite screen
Note:
This step is to be used only when carrying out the
ISW to make a USB connection. When a connection method other than the above is used, proceed to Step 6.

After confirming that a message Reading program data is to be displayed, disconnect once
the USB cable that has been connected to the
copier and then reconnect it again.
Note:
The step is to be used only when carrying out the
ISW to make a USB connection. When a connection method other than the above is used, pro-
7322fs2001
ceed to Step 6.
Pressing [START] key, cause the machine to be
data waiting condition.
2-2
SETUP
Note:
When the ISW is carried out to make a USB con-
F.
Data transfer error

When a transfer error occurs, an error mark is
displayed in the message area on the LCD dis-
nection, this step should be omitted.
play.
If an error occurs, see the section Error han-
7. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the ISW (In-System Writer)
dling in the separate ISW Service Manual

and perform the appropriate countermeasures.
Service Manual.
8. In about 60 seconds after the data transfer from
After the countermeasures are completed, per-
the PC has been completed, the ISW data is
form the re-write operation again from the
written from the system memory in the SCB
beginning.
(1) ISW for image control/FNS control/FAX con-
which data is stored.
trol
a.
Note:
When Steps 4 and 5 are not carried out to make a
Procedure
USB connection, the USB port is not opened and

the data cannot be sent from the PC. When the

Press the [10. ISW] key.
normal operation of the ISW is not available, start

all over again from Step 1 after turning the SW1
3. ISW menu screen

Select a ROM the data of which is rewritten. The
(main switch) OFF and ON.

Be sure not turn off the power to the copying
machine while the ISW data is being written.

9. When data has been written into the flash ROM,

the system is restarted to display the 25 mode
Note:
This step is to be used only when carrying out the
ISW to make a USB connection. When a connection method other than the above is used, pro-
menu screen.
(2) When the overall control program is not
installed
ceed to Step 6.
1. Turn on the SW1 (Main power switch) and the

SW2 (Sub-power switch).

After confirming that a message Reading pro-
2. Check to see if the data LED indicator lamp is

on. In this condition, the ISW is placed in waiting
gram data is to be displayed, connect the USB

cable.
for transfer.
Check to see if the data LED is flashing while
Note:
the ISW data is being received.

3. The procedure after this is the same as the
The step is to be used only when carrying out the

ISW to make a USB connection. When a connec-
steps above for (1) When the overall control

program has been installed.
tion method other than the above is used, proceed to Step 6.

Press the [START] key to put the ISW into the
state of waiting for transfer.
2-3
manuals4you.com
II ISW
(System control board) into the flash ROM in
SETUP
Note:
When the ISW is carried out to make a USB connection, this step should be omitted.
7. Execute the operation according to the procedure given in the ISW (In-system Writer) Service
Manual.
8. In about 100 seconds after completion of the
transfer of data from the PC, the ISW data is
written into the flash ROM in the ISW-intended
II ISW
board.
Note:
When Steps 4 and 5 are not carried out to make a
USB connection, the USB port is not opened and
the data cannot be sent from the PC. When the
normal operation of the ISW is not available, start
all over again from Step 1 after turning the SW1
(main switch) OFF and ON.
Do not turn off the power to the copying machine
while the ISW data is being written.
9. When the data has been written into the flash
ROM, a message Completed successfully is
displayed.
10. Press the [RETURN] key twice to return to the
25 mode menu screen.
2-4
USB ISW
3. USB ISW
The ISW RNs tool for transfer can be installed in the PC by using the setup disk. However, the USB driver
(KCAUSB.SYS) is required to be installed by the plug-and-play of the Windows after connecting the PC and
the copier with the USB cable.
The installation of the USB driver is required only when the PC is connected to the copier for the first time.
(No installation is required on and after the second connection.)
A. Preparation for the installation of the USB driver
II ISW
Press the [10.ISW] key.

3. ISW menu screen
Select the ROM where the ROM data to be rewritten.
Pressing [START] key causes the machine to be data waiting condition.
5. Connect the USB connector.
The Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard display is shown.
(The succeeding steps of the B. USB driver installation procedure (Windows 2000/XP)).
B. USB driver installation procedure (Windows 2000/XP)
When the PC and the copier are connected with the USB cable, the USB driver is automatically installed by
the plug-and-play.
However, this may cause the USB driver (USBPRINT.SYS) of the Windows to be installed. Accordingly, the
USB driver should be set by following the procedure given below:
1. Select Install from a list or specific location [Advanced] in the display shown below, and then click
[Next].
2. Select Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that I can choose a specific driver in the
Install Hardware Device Drivers screen, and then click [Next].
2-5
manuals4you.com
USB ISW
3. Select the USB driver in the driver selection screen, and then click [Next] for installation.
: Konica Minolta 7145 USB Driver (ISW)
II ISW
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222 : Konica Minolta 7222/7228/7235 USB Driver (ISW)
4. When the Completing the Upgrade Device Driver Wizard screen is displayed, click [Finish] to finish the
installation.
5. In the Device Manager screen, check to see if the installation of the USB driver is carried out correctly.
: Konica Minolta 7145 USB Driver (ISW)
In the case of the 7235/7228/7222 : Konica Minolta 7222/7228/7235 USB Driver (ISW)
2-6
SERVICE SCHEDULE
III SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.1
Service Schedule
1.1.1 7145
Service item
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Periodic check (I)

Every 240,000
copies
Periodic check (II)

Every 360,000
copies
Periodic check (III)

Every 480,000
copies
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
Periodic check (I)
Every 480,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Periodic check (I)

Every 240,000
copies
DB-211
z
z
Periodic check (II)

Every 1,200,000
copies
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
Periodic check (I)

Every 960,000
copies
DB-411
Periodic check (IV)

Every 720,000 copies
DF-318
III SERVICE
Main
body
x 10,000 copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
3-1
manuals4you.com
z
z
z
z
z
z
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Service item
LT-203
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
x 10,000 copies
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Periodic check (I)

Every 240,000
copies
FS-112
Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
z
z
z
z
III SERVICE
Periodic check (I)

Every 600,000
copies
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
FS-113+RU-101 Maintenance
Every 120,000
copies
FS-114/PK-114 Maintenance
SK-114/BK-114 Every 120,000
copies
1.1.2 7235
Service item
Main
body
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
x 10,000 copies
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120
Periodic check (I)

Every 200,000
copies
Periodic check (II)

Every 300,000
copies

Every 400,000
copies
DF-320
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
Periodic check (I)
Every 200,000
copies
z
z
Periodic check (I)

Every 1,000,000
copies
DB-411
Periodic check (IV)

z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
3-2
z
z
z
z
SERVICE SCHEDULE
DB-211
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
x 10,000 copies
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120
Periodic check (I)

Every 400,000
copies
LT-203
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
z
z
Periodic check (I)

Every 400,000
copies
z
z
z
z
Every 100,000
copies
SK-114/BK-114 Every 100,000
copies
80
III SERVICE
Service item
1.1.3 7228/7222
Service item
Main
body
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
x 10,000 copies
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Periodic check (I)

Every 200,000
copies
Periodic check (II)

Every 300,000
copies

Every 400,000
copies
z
z
Periodic check (IV)

DF-320
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
DB-411
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
Periodic check (I)

Every 200,000
copies
3-3
manuals4you.com
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Service item
DB-211
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
x 10,000 copies
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
Periodic check (I)

Every 400,000
copies
LT-203
Maintenance
Every 100,000
copies
z
z
Periodic check (I)

Every 400,000
copies
z
z
SK-114/BK-114 Every 100,000
copies
III SERVICE
Every 100,000
copies
3-4
80
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.2
Maintenance Items
1.2.1 7145
Every 120,000 copies/prints
Service item
Quantity
Implementation classification
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replacement
Preparations
z
z
(1) Image check

(2) Exterior
Fixing unit
(1) Removal of fixing unit
Main body
(1) Suction filter/A
(2) Filter cover assembly
Read unit
Paper
feed unit
Bypass
feed unit
Fixing unit
MaterialsTools
used
z
z
(3) Cooling fan/1 (FM4)

Cooling fan/2 (FM7)
Inlet filter
Developing suction/F, /R
Blower brush
(1) Platen glass

(include the slit glass)
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) No. 1 to No. 3 mirrors
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(1) Paper feed roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Feed roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(4) Paper dust removing

brush
Blower brush/
Cleaning pad
(1) Double feed prevention roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Feed roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(1) Fixing claw
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Fixing sensor
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Fixing thermostat
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(4) Fixing heat roller
(5) Fixing press roller
(6) Heat insulating sleeve/A
(7) Heat insulating sleeve/B
(8) Fixing idling gear/B
III SERVICE
No. Classification
z
z
z
Solvest 240 or
Multemp FF-RM
z
z
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(9) Install of fixing unit
3-5
manuals4you.com
SERVICE SCHEDULE
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Final check
(1) Loading of toner cartridge
(2) Check of W.U.T
(3) Check of image

adjustment
(4) Check of copy samples
(5) 25 mode PM counter

resetting
(6) Peripheral and exterior

of the machine
MaterialsTools
used
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Note:
The inlet filters for the FM4/FM7 may get soiled depending on the location in which the machine is placed.
Be sure to clean it when the filter is found clogged with dust while in inspection.
When cleaning is not made properly, toner packing may result due to a temperature rise inside the
machine.
III SERVICE
1.2.2 7235/7228/7222
No. Classification
1
Preparations
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
z
z
(1) Image check

(2) Exterior
Main body
Read unit
Paper
feed unit
Bypass
feed unit
(1) Suction filter/A
(2) Filter cover assembly
z
z
(3) Cooling fan/1 (FM4)

Inlet filter
(4) Developing suction/F, /R
(1) Platen glass

(include the slit glass)
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) No. 1 to No. 3 mirrors
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Feed roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad

brush
Blower brush/
Cleaning pad
(1) Double feed prevention roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Feed roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
3-6
Blower brush
SERVICE SCHEDULE
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Final check
(1) Loading of toner cartridge
(2) Check of W.U.T
(3) Check of image

adjustment
(4) Check of copy samples
(5) 25 mode PM counter

resetting
(6) Peripheral and exterior

of the machine
MaterialsTools
used
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
1.2.3 DF-318/320
Every 120,000 copies/prints (7145)
Every 100,000 copies/prints (7235/7228/7222)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
Preparations
(1) Paper through check
Paper feed
section
(1) Original registration

sensor
Blower brush
(2) Original conveyance

sensor
Blower brush
(3) Original size sensor/1, /2
Blower brush
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(5) Feed roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(6) Double feed prevention

roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Water/
Cleaning pad
Note:
Do not use
alcohol.
(7) Read roller

brush
3
Final check
Blower brush
z
z

(2) Exterior cleaning
3-7
manuals4you.com
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
III SERVICE
Note:
The inlet filters for the FM4 may get soiled depending on the location in which the machine is placed. Be
sure to clean it when the filter is found clogged with dust while in inspection.
When cleaning is not made properly, toner packing may result due to a temperature rise inside the
machine.
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.2.4 DB-211/411
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
Preparations
Paper feed
section
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Feed roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Final check

Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
1.2.5 LT-203
III SERVICE

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
Preparations
Paper feed
section
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Feed roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Final check

Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
1.2.6 FS-112
Every 120,000 copies/prints (7145 only)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
Preparations
Conveyance
section
(1) Conveyance drive

roller/A
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Paper exit drive roller
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Final check

3-8
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.2.7 FS-113/RU-101
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
Preparations
FS-113
(1) Each of conveyance

rollers
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(2) Paddle
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(3) Punch scraps box

section
Cleaning pad

rollers
(2) Exterior
RU-101
Final check

Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
1.2.8 FS-114
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
Preparations
Conveyance
section

rollers
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Alignment
section
(1) Paddle
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Final check
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
1.2.9 PK-114
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
Conveyance
section

rollers
Punch
(2) Cleaning the punch

scraps box
scraps box
3-9
manuals4you.com
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
III SERVICE
No. Classification
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.2.10 SK-114
No. Classification
Service item
Conveyance
section

rollers
Exterior
section
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
1.2.11 BK-114
No. Classification
Tray
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
(1) Tray stack surface
III SERVICE
Service item
3-10
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3
Periodic Check Items
1.3.1 7145
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 240,000 copies/prints)
Service item
Quantity
Drum unit
(1) Drum
(2) Cleaning blade

assembly
26TA-209
Charging
corona unit
(1) Charging corona wire
Transfer/
separation
corona unit
(1) Discharge wire
Developing unit
(1) Developer
Developing unit
installing
z
z
z
(2) Changing control plate
Cotton swab
Cleaning pad
Cotton swab
(2 pcs.: 1 for
each of transfer
and separation)
z
1
(2) 36 mode L detection

adjustment
z
z
Main body
(1) Ozone filter

40LA1017
Fixing unit
(1) Fixing cleaner assembly

40LA-540
(2) Fixing claw

26NA5427
(3) Fixing bearing /U

26NA5371
(4) Fixing bearing /L

26NA5359
Final check
Setting powder
(3) 25 mode or 36 mode

Photosensitive
counter reset
2
MaterialsTools
used
III SERVICE
No. Classification

Fixing counter reset
(2) 36 mode LD1 offset

adjustment

adjustment
(4) Check of image

adjustment
3-11
manuals4you.com
SERVICE SCHEDULE
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 360,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
1
Bypass
feed
(Paper feed
section)
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
(1) Double feed

prevention roller
40AA-406

26NA-428
Actual durable
count : 100,000
(3) Feed roller

40AA-425
Actual durable
count : 100,000
Actual durable
count : 100,000
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 480,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
III SERVICE
Main body
paper feed unit
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
(1) Paper feed rubber

40LA4009
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(2) Feed rubber

26NA4011
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(3) Double feed

prevention rubber
26NA4012
Transfer/
separation
corona unit
(1) Transfer corona unit

40LA-260
Fixing unit
(1) Fixing sensor assembly

40LA-534
(2) Fuse mounting plate

SP00-0110
(3) Fixing heater lamp/1

40LA8302
(4) Fixing heater lamp/2

40LA8303
Actual durable
count : 200,000
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 720,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Developing unit
(1) Developing unit (Unit

without developer)
40LA-300
Drum unit
(1) Drum unit (Unit without drum)

40LA-990
MaterialsTools
used
3-12
z
z
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3.2 7235/7228/7222
Drum unit
Service item
Quantity
(1) Drum
(2) Cleaning blade

assembly
26TA-209
MaterialsTools
used
z
z

Photosensitive
counter reset
2
3
Charging
corona unit
(1) Charging corona wire
Transfer/
separation
corona unit
(1) Discharge wire
Developing unit
(1) Developer
Developing unit
installing
Setting powder
z
z
z
(2) Changing control plate
Cotton swab
Cleaning pad
Cotton swab
(2 pcs.: 1 for
each of transfer
and separation)
z
1
(2) 36 mode L detection

adjustment
III SERVICE
No. Classification
Main body
(1) Ozone filter

40LA1017
Fixing unit
(1) Fixing heat roller

26NA5303
(2) Fixing pressure roller

27LA5304
(3) Fixing cleaner assembly

27LA-540*
(4) Heat insulating sleeve /A

26NA5372
(5) Heat insulating sleeve /B

26NA5373
(6) Fixing claw

27NA5427
(7) Fixing bearing /U

26NA5371
(8) Fixing bearing /L

26NA5359
(9) Fixing idling gear /B

27NA5394
Solvest 240 or
Multemp FFRM
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(10)Fixing sensor
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
(11)Fixing thermostat
Drum cleaner/
Cleaning pad
3-13
manuals4you.com
SERVICE SCHEDULE
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Final check

Fixing counter reset

adjustment
(3) Check of image

adjustment
MaterialsTools
used
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 300,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
1
Bypass
feed
III SERVICE
(Paper feed
section)
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
(1) Double feed

prevention roller
40AA-406

26NA-428
Actual durable
count : 100,000
(3) Feed roller

40AA-425
Actual durable
count : 100,000
MaterialsTools
used
Actual durable
count : 100,000
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 400,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
Service item
Quantity

1
Main body
paper feed unit

40LA4009
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(2) Feed rubber

26NA4011
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(3) Double feed

prevention rubber
26NA4012
Transfer/
separation
corona unit
(1) Transfer corona unit

40LA-260
Fixing unit
(1) Fixing sensor assembly

26WA-534
(2) Fuse mounting plate

SP00-0110
3-14
Actual durable
count : 200,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 600,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Developing unit
(1) Developing unit (Unit

without developer)
27LA-300
Drum unit
(1) Drum unit

(Unit without drum)
27LA-200
MaterialsTools
used
z
z
1.3.3 DF-318
Paper feed
section
Service item
Quantity
(1) Feed rubber

12QV4034
(2) Double feed

prevention roller
13GL-405
MaterialsTools
used
z
z
Actual durable
count : 250,000
Actual durable
count : 250,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,200,000 copies/prints)

No. Classification
1
Paper feed
section
Service item
13GL4011
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
Actual durable
count : 300,000
1.3.4 DF-320
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints)
No. Classification
1
Paper feed
section
Service item
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used

13GL4011
(2) Feed rubber

12QV4034
(3) Double feed

prevention roller
13GL-405
3-15
manuals4you.com
III SERVICE
No. Classification
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3.5 DB-211
A. Periodic check (I)
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Paper feed
section
MaterialsTools
used

40LA4009
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(2) Feed rubber

26NA4011
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(3) Double feed

prevention rubber
26NA4012
Actual durable
count : 200,000
1.3.6 DB-411
III SERVICE
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Paper feed
section
MaterialsTools
used

40LA4009
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(2) Feed rubber

26NA4011
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(3) Double feed

prevention rubber
26NA4012
Actual durable
count : 200,000
1.3.7 LT-203
No. Classification
Service item
Quantity
Paper feed
section
MaterialsTools
used

40LA4009
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(2) Feed rubber

26NA4011
Actual durable
count : 200,000
(3) Double feed

prevention rubber
26NA4012
3-16
Actual durable
count : 200,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3.8 FS-112
Exit section
Service item
(1) Paper exit roller /A
13GQ4519
Quantity
MaterialsTools
used
Actual durable
count : 600,000
III SERVICE
No. Classification
3-17
manuals4you.com
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.4
III SERVICE
No.
Replacement Parts List

Unit
Parts name
Parts No.
Quantity
Actual durable
count
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
26TA-209
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
40LA-990
(7145)
27LA-200
(7235/7228/7222)
720,000
(7145)
600,000
(7235/7228/7222)
40LA-260
480,000
(7145)
400,000
(7235/7228/7222)
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
40LA-300
(7145)
27LA-300
(7235/7228/7222)
720,000
(7145)
600,000
(7235/7228/7222)
01 DC (including changing
corona unit)
Drum
02
Cleaning blade assembly
03
Drum unit
04 Transfer/separation
corona
Transfer/separation corona
unit
05 Developing unit
Developer
06
Developing unit
07 Main body
Ozone filter
40LA1017
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
41
Suction filter /A
40LA-318
120,000
(7145)
100,000
(7235/7228/7222)
42
40LA-314
120,000
(7145)
100,000
(7235/7228/7222)
08 Main body paper feed

09 unit
(Tray 1) Paper feed rubber
40LA4009
200,000
(Tray 1) Feed rubber
26NA4011
200,000
10
(Tray 1) Double feed preven-
26NA4012
200,000
tion rubber
11
40LA4009
200,000
12
26NA4011
200,000
13
(Tray 2) Double feed prevention rubber
26NA4012
200,000
3-18
No.
Unit
Parts name
Parts No.
Quantity
Actual durable
count
14 DB-211/411
40LA4009
200,000
15
26NA4011
200,000
16
26NA4012
200,000
17 DB-211
40LA4009
200,000
18
26NA4011
200,000
19
26NA4012
200,000
20 By-pass feed unit
40AA-406
100,000
21
Paper feed roller
26NA-428
100,000
22
Feed roller
40AA-425
100,000
23 Fixing unit
Fixing heat roller
40LA5303
(7145)
26NA5303
(7235/7228/7222)
120,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
24
40LA5304
(7145)
27LA5304
(7235/7228/7222)
120,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
25
40LA-540
(7145)
27LA-540
(7235/7228/7222)
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
26
26NA5372
120,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
27
26NA5373
120,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
28
Fixing idling gear/B
40LA5394
(7145)
27LA5394
(7235/7228/7222)
120,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
30
Fixing claw
26NA5427
(7145)
27LA5427
(7235/7228/7222)
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
31
Fixing bearing/U
26NA5371
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
3-19
manuals4you.com
III SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
III SERVICE
No.
Unit
Parts name
Quantity
Actual durable
count
26NA5359
240,000
(7145)
200,000
(7235/7228/7222)
40LA-534
(7145)
26WA-534
(7235/7228/7222)
480,000
(7145)
400,000
(7235/7228/7222)
32 Fixing unit
Fixing bearing/L
33
Fixing sensor assembly
34
Fuse holder
SP00-0110
480,000
(7145)
400,000
(7235/7228/7222)
35
Fixing heater lamp/1 (7145)
40LA8302
480,000
36
Fixing heater lamp/2 (7145)
40LA8303
480,000
37 DF-318/320
Paper feed roller
13GL4011
300,000
38
Feed rubber
12QV4034
250,000
39
13GL-405
250,000
40 FS-112
Paper exit roller/A (7145)
13GQ4519
600,000
43 LT-203
Paper feed rubber
40LA4009
200,000
44
Feed rubber
40LA4011
200,000
45
Double feed prevention rubber
26NA4012
200,000
1.5
Important Maintenance Parts
The important parts specified by Konica Minolta

in order to maintain safety of the products are
referred to as important maintenance parts.
The important maintenance parts for this
machine are as described below:
No.
Unit
Parts name
Fixing unit
Fuse mounting
plate assembly
Parts No. Quantity

SP00-0110
Note:
SP is indicated in front of the parts number of
the important maintenance part. Exercise care
when installing the parts according to III. Directions for disassembly and assembly in this manual.
Parts No.
3-20
1 PM PARTS KIT
2. 1 PM PARTS KIT
7145
Name
Parts No.
Quantity
Fixing heat roller
40LA5303
Fixing press roller
40LA5304
26NA5372
26NA5373
Fixing idling gear/B
40LA5394
Suction filter/A
40LA-318
40LA-314
Dust bag
Cleaning pad (10 pcs.)
Cotton swabs (4 pcs.)
Parts No.
Quantity
26TA-209
Ozone filter
40LA1017
Fixing heat roller
26NA5303
27LA5304
27LA-540
26NA5372
26NA5373
Fixing claw
27LA5427
Fixing bearing/U
26NA5371
Fixing bearing/L
26NA5359
Fixing idling gear /B
27LA5394
Suction filter/A
40LA-318
40LA-314
Dust bag
Cleaning pad (10 pcs.)
Cotton swabs (4 pcs.)
III SERVICE
120,000 copies/kit
7235/7228/7222
200,000 copies/kit
Name
3-21
manuals4you.com
SERVICE MATERIALS LIST
3. SERVICE MATERIALS LIST
III SERVICE
Material No.
Name
00V-16-0
Drum cleaner
000V-19-0
Setting powder
000V-18-1
Cleaning pad
00GR00260
Multemp FF-RM
00GR00210
Solvest 240
Shape
Remark
200ml
25g
10pcs/1pack
25g
Multemp FF-RM
recommended
3-22
CE TOOLS LIST
4. CE TOOLS LIST
Tool No.
26NA21340
Name
Shape
Drum rotation material
Quantity
1
Remark
Mounted on the drum
unit.
26NAJG011
Mirror positioning jig
00VD-5000
New pyramid chart
120A9711
Adjustment chart
For DF adjustment
DF-320 is contained in
120A9712
White chart
III SERVICE
the same package.
For DF adjustment
DF-320 is contained in
the same package.
00VC-2-00
Drum cover
00VD-1000
Blower brush
00VE-1003
Tester
14GS46310
Stapler unit position-
ing jig
For SK-114 staple adjustment
3-23
manuals4you.com
III SERVICE
CE TOOLS LIST
Blank page
3-24
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
IV DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1
Main Body Parts Layout Drawing
A. Switches and sensors

(1) Main body rear side
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
PS12 (Tray set sensor/L)
[2]
[4]
SW1 (Main power switch)
4-1
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
7322fs4011

(2) Bypass tray/Developing unit
[4]
[3]
[2]
manuals4you.comIV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[1]
[3]
PS13 (Bypass tray no paper sensor)
[2]
VR1 (Bypass tray paper size sensor VR)
[4]
PS20 (Bypass tray paper size sensor)
(3) Fixing unit
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
TH2 (Fxing temperature sensor/2)
[3]
TS (Thermostat)
[2]
[4]
4-2

(4) Scanner section/Operation section
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
SW2 (Sub power switch)
[3]
PS17 (APS sensor)
PS14 (Scanner home position sensor)
[4]
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
4-3
manuals4you.com

(5) Main body right side (Paper feed section/ADU)
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
PS4 (ADU sensor)
[5]
PS22 (Timing sensor/L) (7145/7235/7228 only)
[2]
[3]
PS8 (No paper sensor/U)

PS11 (No paper sensor/L)
[6]
[7]

PS21 (Timing sensor/U) (7145/7235/7228 only)
[4]
[8]
IV DIAGRAMS
3
[2]
4-4

(6) Main body front side/Main body left side
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
SW3 (Interlock switch)
[3]
HUM1 (Humidity sensor)
[2]
SW1 (Main power switch)
[4]
PS5 (Toner bottle sensor)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
4-5
manuals4you.com

B. Loads
[18]
[17]
[16]
[1]
[15]
[2]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[5]
[10]
[6]
[9]
IV DIAGRAMS
[8]
[7]
[1]
[10]
SD2 (1st paper feed solenoid/L)
[2]
[3]

SD9 (Toner solenoid)
[11]
[12]

MC2 (Loop clutch)
[4]
[5]
FM7 (Internal cooling fan/2) (7145 only)

M3 (Developing motor) (7145 only)
[13]
[14]

[6]
[7]
FM1 (DC power supply cooling fan)

M7 (Tray motor/U)
[15]
[16]
M1 (Main motor)
[8]
[9]
M8 (Tray motor/L)
M6 (ADU motor)
[17]
[18]
M11 (Fixing motor)

M2 (Scanner motor)
4-6

(2) Main body right side (Paper feed section/ADU)
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]

[3]
SD3 (Bypass feed solenoid)
[4]
[5]

IV DIAGRAMS
(3) Write unit
[1]
[1]
M5 (Polygon motor)
4-7
manuals4you.com

(4) Drum unit/Fixing unit
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]

[3]
[4]
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
4-8

SD7 (Separation claw solenoid)

(5) Operation section/Scanner section
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
7322fs4001
PTC (Heater) : Option of the service parts
[3]
[2]
setting
FM4 (Internal cooling fan/1)
[4]
[5]
FM7 (Polygon cooling fan) (7235 only)

FM2 (Fixing cooling fan) (7145/7235 only)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
4-9
manuals4you.com

C. PCBs and others
[8]
[9]
[1]
[7]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
IV DIAGRAMS
[5]
[1]
[2]

FCB (Fixing control board) : only 220V system
[6]
[7]

PRMB (Parameter memory board)
[3]
[4]
CBR2 (Circuit breaker/2)

[8]
[9]

SCDB (Scanner drive board)
[5]
DCPS (DC power supply)
4-10

[9]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
7322fs4002e
[6]
ADUDB (ADU drive board)
[2]
[3]
FCB (Fixing control board)

[7]
[8]

[4]
[5]

[9]
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
4-11
manuals4you.com

(2) Operation section/Scanner section
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
TC (Total counter)
(7145 is provided as standard equipment)
[5]
[6]
LCDB (Display board)

PAKB (Panel key board)
[2]
[3]
KC (Key counter)
OB (Operation board)
[7]
[8]
PSW2B (Power SW2 board)

L1INVB (Exposure lamp power supply board)
[4]
INV2 (Display inverter)
IV DIAGRAMS
(3) Main body front side
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
PFDB/U (Paper feed detection board/U)

PFDB/L (Paper feed detection board/L)
[3]
4-12
HV (High voltage power)

(4) Write unit/Drum unit
[3]
[2]
[1]
TCSB (Toner control sensor board)
[2]
[3]
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
4-13
manuals4you.com
1.2
DF-318/320 Parts Layout Drawing

[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
PS301 (Original no paper sensor)
[4]
SD302 (Roller pressure solenoid)
[2]
[3]
SD301 (Paper exit solenoid)

[5]
PS304 (Cover open/close sensor)
[5]
[6]
IV DIAGRAMS
[4]
[7]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]

SD303 (Stamp solenoid)
[5]
[6]
VR301 (Original size VR)

PS305 (Original size sensor/1)
[3]
[4]
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor)

PS302 (Original exit sensor)
[7]
PS306 (Original size sensor/2)
4-14
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
M301 (Original feed motor)
[4]
FM301 (Cooling fan)
[2]
[3]
M303 (Original reverse motor)

M302 (Original conveyance motor)
[5]
DFDB (DF drive board)
1.3
DB-211 Parts Layout Drawing

[9]
[8]
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
PS103 (No paper senso /3)

PS108 (No paper sensor/4)
[6]
[7]
PSDTB/3 (Paper size detection board/3)

HTR100 (Heater) : Option of the service
[3]
[4]
PS105 (Paper feed sensor/L)

PS107 (Tray upper limit sensor/4)
[8]
parts setting
[5]
[9]
PS104 (Paper feed sensor/U)
4-15
manuals4you.com
[8]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
PS106 (Tray sensor/4)

DBDB (DB drive board)
[5]
[6]
M101 (Tray up drive motor/3)

M100 (DB feed motor)
[3]
[4]
SD102 (Paper feed solenoid/L)

[7]
[8]
SD101 (Paper feed solenoid/U)

1.4
DB-411 Parts Layout Drawing

[6]
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
PS103 (No paper sensor/3)

PS104 (Paper feed sensor/U)
[3]
PS105 (Paper feed sensor/L)
4-16
[4]
[5]

[6]
parts setting
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
PS109 (Remaining paper sensor)

[4]
[5]

[3]
M100 (DB feed motor)
[6]
1.5
LT-203 Parts Layout Drawing

[9]
[8]
[10]
[11]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
LTDB (LT drive board)
[6]
SD151 (LT paper feed solenoid)
[2]
[3]
SW151 (Interlock switch)

PS154 (Remaining paper sensor/1)
[7]
[8]
PS153 (No paper sensor)

PS155 (Paper feed sensor)
[4]
[5]
PS151 (Remaining paper sensor/2)

[9]
[10]
PS152 (Tray upper limit sensor)

M151 (Tray up drive motor)
parts setting
[11]
M150 (LT paper feed motor)
4-17
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
[7]
1.6
FS-112 Parts Layout Drawing
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
M706 (Tray up/down motor)
PS706 (Tray lower limit sensor)
[4]
[5]
PS703 (Paper exit sensor)

PS704 (Paper exit full sensor)
[3]
PS716 (Tray count sensor)
[6]
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
PS710 (Alignment HP sensor /F)

M704 (Alignment motor /F)
[3]
M703 (Alignment motor /R)
[4]
[5]
4-18
PS709 (Alignment HP sensor /R)

PS707 (No paper sensor)
[1]
[2]
[1]
PS708 (Stapler unit HP sensor)
[2]
M705 (Stapler movement motor)
[2]
[1]
MS701 (Front door switch)
[2]
FNSCS (FNS control board)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
4-19
manuals4you.com
[6]
[5]
[7]
[8]
[4]
[3]
[9]
[2]
[1]
M707 (Paper pressure motor)

MS702 (Shutter switch)
[6]
[7]
M702 (Paper exit motor)

M701 (FNS conveyance motor)
[3]
[4]
PS705 (Shutter sensor)

PS701 (Paper pressure sensor)
[8]
[9]
FM701 (Cooling fan)

SD701 (Roller release solenoid)
[5]
PS702 (FNS entrance sensor)
IV DIAGRAMS
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
M708 (Stapler motor)
[3]
PS712 (Stapler HP sensor)
[2]
PS713 (Staple detection sensor )
[4]
PS714 (Stapler ready sensor)
4-20
1.7
RU-101 Parts Layout Drawing

[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
PS1 (Front door sensor)
[2]
1.8
[3]
FUB (Fuse board)
IT-101 Parts Layout Drawing

[4]
IV DIAGRAMS
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
PS25 (IT door sensor)
[3]
PS24 (IT paper exit sensor /L)
[2]
SD8 (Gate solenoid)
[4]
PS23 (IT paper exit sensor /U)
4-21
manuals4you.com
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1
Main Body Connector Layout Drawing
A. Main body control board

28 (W: 22 pin)
17 (W: 36 pin)
29 (W: 32 pin)
23 (GY: 22 pin)
16 (W: 15 pin)
18 (W: 14 pin)
38 (W: 9 pin)
41 (W: 11 pin) 36 (W: 10 pin)
35 (W: 5 pin)
37 (W: 8 pin)
1 (W: 8 pin)
27 (W: 8 pin)
2 (BK: 68 pin)
20 (W: 4 pin)
42 (W: 8 pin)
21 (W: 6 pin)
24 (W: 40 pin)
22 (W: 5 pin)
19 (W: 9 pin)
40 (W: 4 pin)
26 (W: 34 pin)
25 (W: 36 pin)
IV DIAGRAMS
39 (W: 4 pin)
4-22
15 (W: 24 pin)

28 (W: 22 pin)
29 (W: 30 pin)
23 (GY: 22 pin)
17 (W: 36 pin)
32 (W: 3 pin)
38 (W: 9 pin)
19 (W: 3 pin)
16 (W: 9 pin)
33 (W: 4 pin)
35 (W: 5 pin)
31 (W: 11 pin) 36 (W: 10 pin)

18 (W: 14 pin)
27 (W: 8 pin)
37 (W: 8 pin)
15 (W: 30 pin)
90 (W: 8 pin)
20 (W: 4 pin)
21 (W: 6 pin)
24 (W: 38 pin)
22 (W: 5 pin)
42 (W: 8 pin)
26 (W: 36 pin)
25 (W: 34 pin)
15 (W: 30 pin)
7322fs4003
14 (W: 4 pin)
B. System control board

46 (W: 50 pin)
431 (W: 5 pin)
45 (W: 4 pin)
39 (W: 9 pin)
44 (W: 22 pin)
IV DIAGRAMS
34 (W: 24 pin)
432 (W: 24 pin)

47 (W: 2 pin)
32 (BK: 20 pin) 33 (BK: 24 pin)
35 (W: 144 pin)

41 (W: 8 pin)
42 (W: 9 pin)
501 (BK: 44 pin)

40 (W: 36 pin)
502 (W: 3 pin)

38 (BK: 100 pin)
37 (BK: 120 pin)
500 (W: 4 pin)
4-23
manuals4you.com
31 (W: 7 pin)
7145fs4033

46 (W: 50 pin)
52 (W: 28 pin)
57 (W: 9 pin)
59 (GY: 24 pin)
58 (W: 20 pin)
431 (W: 5 pin)
44 (W: 22 pin)
53 (W: 144 pin)
502
(W: 3 pin)
40 (W: 36 pin)
432 (W: 12 pin)

42 (W: 9 pin)
501 (BK: 44 pin)
41 (W: 8 pin)
48 (W: 4 pin)
56 (BK: 100 pin)
55 (BK: 120 pin)
500 (W: 4 pin)

43 (W: 6 pin)
7322fs4004
C. High voltage power
70 (W: 9 pin)
71 (W: 12 pin)
72 (W: 3 pin)
IV DIAGRAMS
D. DC power supply
1 (W: 5 pin)
3 (W: 5 pin)
2 (W: 7 pin) (7145)

2 (W: 6 pin) (7235/7228/7222)
7 (W: 26 pin)
6 (W: 20 pin)
8 (W: 4 pin)
10 (W: 3 pin)
5 (W: 4 pin)
7322fs4005e
E. A/D conversion board
60 (W: 50 pin)
4-24

F.
Scanner drive board (7145 only)

61 (W: 15 pin)
64 (W: 9 pin)
60 (W: 5 pin)
62 (W: 3 pin) 63 (W: 4 pin)
G. Operation board
84 (W: 13 pin)
80 (W: 24 pin) (7145)

80 (W: 28 pin) (7235/7228/7222)
83 (W: 4 pin)
86 (W: 14 pin)
89 (W: 8 pin)
7322fs4006e
50 (W: 24 pin) (7145)

50 (W: 12 pin) (7235/7228/7222)
I.
IV DIAGRAMS
H. LD drive board
7322fs4007e
Index sensor board

51 (W: 5 pin)
J.

1 (W: 7 pin)
4-25
manuals4you.com

K. Power SW2 board
1 (W: 8 pin)
L.
Paper size detection board /U, /L

1 (W: 5 pin)
M. Parameter memory board

2 (BK: 24 pin)
IV DIAGRAMS
1 (BK: 20 pin)
N. Exposure lamp power supply board

96 (W: 2 pin)
97 (W: 2 pin)
O. Display inverter
77 (W: 4 pin)
71 (W: 3 pin)
4-26

P.
Exposure lamp inverter
931 (W: 4 pin)
930 (W: 3 pin)
Q. ADU drive board (Except the 7145)
71 (W: 6 pin)
70 (W: 9 pin)
7322fs4008
R. Fixing control board (Metric size only)
IV DIAGRAMS
99 (W: 4 pin)
4-27
manuals4you.com
2.2
DF-318/320 Connector Layout Drawing
A. DF drive board
216 (W: 6 pin)
215 (W: 18 pin) 212 (W: 7 pin)
213 (W: 3 pin)
214 (W: 28 pin)

211 (W: 36 pin)
2.3
DB-211 Connector Layout Drawing
A. DB drive board
101 (9 pin)
100 (6 pin)
106 (19 pin)
IV DIAGRAMS
102 (11 pin)
103 (24 pin)
104 (18 pin)
B. Paper size detection board /3

1 (5 pin)
C. Paper size detection board /4

1 (5 pin)
4-28
2.4
DB-411 Connector Layout Drawing
A. DB drive board
101 (9 pin)
100 (6 pin)
106 (19 pin)
102 (11 pin)
105 (3 pin)
103 (24 pin)
B. Paper size detection board /3

1 (5 pin)
2.5
LT-203 Connector Layout Drawing
112 (11 pin)
114 (3 pin)
113 (17 pin)
110 (19 pin)
4-29
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
A. LT drive board
2.6
FS-112 Connector Layout Drawing
A. FNS control board

701 (10 pin)
715 (30 pin)
712(2 pin)
706 (2 pin)
711 (2 pin)
714 (15 pin)
709 (12 pin)
716 (36 pin)

FNS CB
703 (12 pin)
2.7
707 (30 pin)

717 (2 pin)
RU-101 Connector Layout Drawing
A. Fuse board
IV DIAGRAMS
F1
3 (W: 6 pin)
4 (W: 2 pin)
4-30
702 (11 pin)

713 (3 pin)
710 (2 pin)
708 (8 pin)
705 (W: 6 pin)
704 (12 pin)
JAM CODE LIST
3. JAM CODE LIST

Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
Bypass
Upper
J10
J11
tray
Lower
J12
tray
DB tray
J13
J14
LT-203
DB tray
J15
J16-1
During operation
Code
Correction
PS1 (Registration sensor) failed to turn ON
operation
If copying is in
Take out the paper
within a predetermined time after SD3
progress at
from the bypass
(Bypass solenoid) ON.
time of jam, the
tray, and remove
copier com-
any jammed paper.
pletes ejection
Open the ADU door,
within a predetermined time after SD1 (First
and then stops. remove any jammed
paper feed solenoid/U) ON.
paper. Pull out the
tray, and remove
within a predetermined time after SD2 (First

paper feed solenoid/L) ON.
any jammed paper.
PS104 (First paper feed sensor/U) failed to

turn ON within a predetermined time after
Open the DB conveyance door,
SD101 (Paper feed solenoid/U) ON.

PS105 (First paper feed sensor/L) failed to
remove any jammed

paperr. Pull out the
turn ON within a predetermined time after

SD102 (Paper feed solenoid/L) ON.
tray, and remove

any jammed paper.
PS155 (Paper feed sensor) failed to turn ON

within a predetermined time after SD151 (LT
Open the LT top

cover, remove any
paper feed solenoid) ON.
jammed paper.
The PS1 (Registration sensor) is not turned
Open the ADU door,
ON in the specified period of time after either

of the PS104 (Paper feed sensor/U), the
remove any jammed

paper.
LT-203
Others
Others
FS-112
Others
J16-2
J20-2
J20-3
J20-3
FS-113
Others
FS-114
turned OFF.
PS104 (Paper feed sensor/U) or PS105
Open the LT top
(Paper feed sensor/L) failed to turn ON

within a predetermined time after SD151 (LT
cover, remove any

jammed paper.
paper feed solenoid) ON.

ADU door open jam
Printer section
Remove jammed
SW3 (Interlock switch) went OFF during

copying/printing.
stops immediately.
paper according to
message.
IV DIAGRAMS
PS105 (Paper feed sensor/L) and the PS155

(Paper feed sensor) is turned ON and then
FNS front door open jam

MS701 (Front door) went OFF during copying/printing or, came off from the main body.
FNS upper front cover open jam
PC17 (Front door detection sensor) went
OFF during copying/printing or, came off
J20-3
from the main body.

FNS front door open jam
The S1-FN (Front cover open/close detection SW) turned OFF while in copying/printing.
4-31
manuals4you.com
JAM CODE LIST

Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
Others
Others
J20-4
J20-5
RU-101
Others
J20-6
FS-112
Correction
operation
During operation
Code
When an emergency stop instruction is
Printer section
Remove jammed
received from the system while in the system
stops immedi-
paper according to
emergency stop jam print job.
ately.
message.
RU-101 front door open jam

PS1 (Front door sensor) went OFF during
copying/printing.
FNS shutter switch operation jam
MS702 (Shutter) went ON during copying/
printing.
Others
J20-6
FS-114
Intermediate transport guide open jam

The S4-FN (Intermediate jam guide detection SW) turned OFF while in copying/printing.
Shutter open jam
The S2-FN (Shutter detection SW) turned
OFF while in copying/printing.
Others
FS-113
J20-7
Others
J20-7
SK-114
Others
FS-113
Top cover open jam

PC18 (Top cover detection sensor) went
OFF during copying/printing.
SK-114 open jam
The S4-SK (Saddle safety switch) turned
OFF while in copying/printing.
J20-8
Connecting connector coming off jam

The FS-113 connecting connector comes off
from the main body during copying/printing.
IV DIAGRAMS
Conveyance
J30
J31
Fixing/
J32
Exit
Others
Open the ADU door,
within a predetermined time after MC1 (Registration clutch) ON.
remove any jammed

paper.
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) failed to turn ON

within a predetermined time after MC1 (Registration clutch) ON.
The PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) is not turned
OFF in the specified period of time (by paper
sizes) after it is turned ON.
J50-1
Failed to receive print request from system

within a predetermined time after PS1 (Reg-
The main body

stop immediately.
J50-2
istration sensor) ON.

Valid signal failed to turn ON within a pre-
J50-3
determined time after start of printing.

MC1 (Registration clutch) failed to turn ON
within a predetermined time after start of
printing.
4-32
JAM CODE LIST

Jam
Causes
Resulting
J61-1
320
J61-2
J62-1
J62-2
J62-3
The PS304 (Cover open/close sensor) is
The RADF
Open the open/
turned OFF while in operation.

The PS303 (DF open/close sensor) is turned
stops immedi-
close cover, remove
ately.
any jammed paper.
OFF while in operation.
Remove any
Original did not feed.
jammed paper from
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) failed

to turn ON within a predetermined time after
the main bodys
start of refeed for single sided original.
tion.
conveyance sec-

to turn ON within a predetermined time after
start of reverse refeed for double sided original.
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) did not
J62-4
go OFF within the specified period after it

went ON, during original exit.
J62-5
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) did not

go OFF within the specified period after it
J63-1
went ON, during original reversal.

PS302 (Original exit sensor) did not go ON
J63-2
during original exit.

PS302 (Original exit sensor) did not go OFF
within the specified period after it went ON,
during original exit.
J63-3
PS308 (Original registration sensor) failed to

turn OFF within a predetermined time after
start of refeed for single sided original.
J63-4
to turn OFF within a predetermined time after

start of reverse refeed for double sided original.
J65-1
When idling
DF-318/
Correction
operation
During operation
Code
IV DIAGRAMS
Classification
PS308 (Original registration sensor) ON dur-
Open the open/
ing idling state.
close cover, remove

any jammed paper.
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor) ON

during idling state.
Open the open/

close cover and the
PS308 (Original registration sensor), PS309

(Original conveyance sensor) ON during
reverse guide and

remove jammed
paper, if any.
J65-8
idling state.
PS302 (Original exit sensor) ON during idling
J65-9
state.
J65-2
J65-3
(Original exit sensor) ON during idling state.

J65-10
PS309 (Original conveyance sensor), PS302

(Original exit sensor) ON during idling state.
4-33
manuals4you.com
JAM CODE LIST

Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
DF-318/
J65-11
320
Correction
operation
When idling
Code
Open the open/
(Original conveyance sensor), PS302 (Origi-
close cover and the
nal exit sensor) ON during idling state.
reverse guide and

remove jammed
paper, if any.
FS-112
J72-1
PS702 (FNS entrance sensor) ON during
Remove jammed
idling state.
paper, if any, from
The PS2 (Passage sensor) of RU-101 is
Remove jammed
turned ON while in idling.
paper, if any, from
the FNS/main body.

FS-113
J72-1
RU-101
the FNS/RU/main
body.
FS-114
J72-1
PC4-FN (Entrance sensor) is ON during

idling.
Remove jammed
paper, if any, from
FS-112
J72-2
PS707 (No paper sensor) ON during idling

state.
the FNS/main body.
FS-113
J72-2
While in idling, either of the PC4 (Upper path

sensor), the PC2 (Lower path sensor), PC3
Remove jammed
paper, if any, from
(Storage sensor), PC5 (Process tray paper

exit sensor) and the PC1 (1st tray exit sen-
the FNS/main body.
FS-114
J72-2
sor) is ON.
PC5-FN (Transport sensor) is ON during
J72-3
idling.
PC8-FN (Storage tray detecting sensor) is
FS-112
J72-16
FS-113 J72-16
RU-101
FS-114
FS-112
J72-16
J72-17
During operation
IV DIAGRAMS
SK-114 J72-4
ON during idling.
PC20-SK (Saddle exit sensor) is ON during
Remove jam paper
idling.
from SK/FNS if any.
PS702 (FNS entrance sensor) failed to turn
The FNS/main
Remove jammed
ON within a predetermined time after PS2

(Fixing exit sensor) ON.
body stop
immediately.
paper, if any, from

the FNS/main body.
After the PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) is turned

ON, the PS2 (Passage sensor) of RU-101 is
Remove jammed
paper, if any, from
not turned ON.
the FNS/RU/main
body.
PC4-FN (Entrance sensor) does not ON

after specified time from PS2 (fixing exit sen-
Open front door and

remove jammed
sor) ON.
PS707 (No paper sensor) failed to turn ON
paper if any.
Remove jammed
within a predetermined time after PS702

(FNS entrance sensor) ON. (Straight, sort/
paper, if any, from

the FNS/the main
group mode for other than small size)
body.
4-34
JAM CODE LIST

Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
FS-113
J72-17
During operation
Code
The PS2 (Passage sensor) of RU-101 is

not turned OFF.
After the PS2 of RU-101 is turned ON,
Correction
operation
The FNS/main
Pull out the FNS
body stop
immediately.
from the main body,

and remove
the PC1 (1st tray exit sensor) is not
jammed paper, if
turned ON. (Sort/Group)
any, from the FNS/

main body.

the PC4 (Upper path sensor) is not
turned ON. (Staple)

the PC2 (Lower path sensor) is not
turned ON. (Staple/Sort/Group)

The PC4 is not turned OFF after it is
turned ON. (Staple)

The PC2 is not turned OFF after it is
turned ON. (Staple/Sort/Group)

After the PC4 is turned ON, the PC3
(Storage sensor) is not turned ON. (Staple)
FS-114
J72-17
After the PC2 is turned ON, the PC3 is

not turned OFF. (Staple/Sort/Group)
PC4-FN (Entrance sensor) does not OFF

after specified time from ON.
Open front door and

remove jammed
PC5-FN (Transport sensor) does not ON

after specified time from PC4-FN (Entrance
paper if any.
FS-113
J72-18
After the PC1 (1st tray exit sensor) is
Pull out the FNS
turned ON, it is not turned OFF.

After the PC3 (Storage sensor) is turned
from the main body,

and remove
ON, it is not turned OFF.
jammed paper, if
any, from the FNS/
main body.
FS-114
FS-112
J72-18
J72-19
J72-21
PC5-FN (Transport sensor) does not OFF
Open front door and
after specified time from ON.
remove jammed
paper if any.
PS702 (FNS entrance sensor) failed to turn

OFF within a predetermined time after turn-
Remove jammed
paper, if any, from
ing ON. (Staple, sort/group)
the FNS/main body.
PS707 (No paper sensor) failed to turn OFF

(Paper exit sensor) turning ON. (Small size
staple, sort/group)
4-35
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
sensor) ON.
JAM CODE LIST

Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
While exiting paper after completion of sta-
operation
The FNS/main
Pull out the FNS
pling, the PC5 (Process tray paper detection
body stop
from the main body,
sensor) is not turned OFF after it is turned
immediately.
and remove
FS-113
FS-114
J72-21
J72-21
SK-114
During operation
Code
Correction
jammed paper, if
ON.
any, from the FNS/

main body.
After specified time from stapling, PC8-FN
Remove jammed
(Strorage tray paper detect sensor) or
paper, if any, from
PC20-SK (Saddle exit sensor) of SK-114
the FNS/main body.
does not ON.

FS-112
J72-23
FS-114
J72-25
PS707 (No paper sensor) failed to turn OFF

(Paper exit sensor) turning ON. (Straight)
SK-114
FS-114
J72-43
PK-114
FS-112
PC22-SK (Crease roller home position sen-
Open front door and
sor) does not ON within specified time.
remove jammed
paper if any.
M1-PK (Punch motor) does not OFF after

specified time from ON.
J72-81
Staple jam M708 (Stapler motor) failed to
Remove the
turn OFF within a predetermined time after

turning ON. (Forward operation not com-
jammed staple.
pleted.)
FS-113
J72-81
After the staple motor 1 starts forward rota-
The FNS/main
Pull out the FNS
tion, the PC14 (Staple home sensor) is not

turned ON in the specified period of time.
body stop
immediately.
from the main body,

and remove
IV DIAGRAMS
Then, the staple motor 1 starts backward

rotation and the PC14 is turned ON in the
jammed staples, if
any.
specified period of time.

FS-114
FS-113
J72-81
J72-82
J72-83
Staple home position sensor does not ON
Remove jammed
after specified time from staple motor forward rotation.
staple, if any.
After the staple motor 2 starts forward rotation, the PC14 (Staple home sensor) is not
Pull out the FNS

from the main body,
turned ON in the specified period of time.

Then, the staple motor 2 starts backward
and remove
jammed staples, if
rotation and the PC14 is turned ON in the

any.
After the staple motors 1 and 2 start forward

rotation, the PC14 (Staple home sensor) is
not turned ON in the specified period of time.
Then, the staple motors 1 and 2 start backward rotation and the PC14 is turned ON in
the specified period of time.
4-36
JAM CODE LIST

Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
J72-84
J72-85
IT-101
J75-1
J75-10
J75-11
During operation
SK-114
Correction
operation
Saddle staple home position sensor 1 does
During operation When idling
Code
PS23 (IT exit sensor/U) or PS24 (IT exit sen-
J75-12
The FNS/main
not ON within specified time from saddle sta- body stop

ple motor 1 forward rotation.
Remove jammed
staple, if any.
immediately.
Saddle staple home position sensor 2 does

not ON within specified time from saddle staple motor 2.
sor /L) went ON during idling.
Open the IT cover,

remove any jammed
paper.
PS23 (IT exit sensor/U) failed to turn ON
Printer section
within a predetermined time after PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) turning ON.
stops immediately.
PS24 (IT exit sensor/L) failed to turn ON

within a predetermined time after PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) turning ON.
PS2 (Fixing exit) failed to turn OFF within a
predetermined time after PS23 (IT exit sensor /U) or PS24 (IT exit sensor/L) turning
ON.
J75-13
The IT door open jam
J81
J82
PS1 (Registration sensor) ON during idling

state.
Open the ADU door,

remove any jammed
paper.
PS105 (Paper feed sensor/L) ON during
Open the DB con-
idling state.
veyance door,
remove jammed
IV DIAGRAMS
Paper
feed
When idling
PS25 (IT door sensor) went OFF during

copying/printing.
paper. If paper is
jammed in the main
body: open the ADU
door, remove the
J83
Paper
exit
J90
PS155 (Paper feed sensor) ON during idling
jammed paper.
Open the LT top
state.
cover, remove any

jammed paper.
PS2 (Fixing exit sensor) ON during idling

state.
Open the ADU door,

remove any jammed
paper.
4-37
manuals4you.com
JAM CODE LIST

Classification
Jam
Causes
Resulting
ADU
J92
conveyance
J97-1
Correction
operation
During operation
Code
Printer section
Open the ADU door,
within a predetermined time after start of
stops immedi-
remove any jammed
ADU reversal.
ately.
paper.
PS4 (ADU sensor) failed to turn ON within a

predetermined time after PS2 (Fixing exit
sensor) ON.
J97-2
PS4 (ADU sensor) failed to turn OFF within a
J100
PS4 (ADU sensor) ON during idling state.
IV DIAGRAMS
When idling
predetermined time after turning ON.
4-38
ERROR CODE LIST
4. ERROR CODE LIST

4.1
Error Code List
Classification Warning
Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Communication
F10-1
abnormalities
F10-2
Estimated abnormal parts
Communication error at CB (Main
operation
The main
body control board)
body stops
Failure in serial communication
immediately,
between the SCB (System control
and the RL1
board) and CB (Main body control
(Main) turn
board).
Communication error at CB (Main
OFF.
body control board)

Serial communication error to the
sub CPU in the CB, receiving
command error, and platen operF10-3
F10-4
ation sequence error.

Communication error between
the CB (Main body control board)

and DBDB (DB drive board).
Sub-CPU A/D conversion error

Two consecutive failures to
Paper feed
tray abnor-
F18-1
malities
F18-2
Main body
F18-3
Paper feed
tray abnor-
F18-4
malities
F18-5
Error in main body upper tray up

PS10 (Upper limit sensor/L) failed

M7 (Tray motor/U)
to turn ON within a predetermined

time after M7 (Tray motor /U) ON.
Error in main body lower tray up

PS10 (Upper limit sensor/L) failed

M8 (Tray motor/L)
to turn ON within a predetermined

time after M8 (Tray motor/L) ON.
Error in DB upper tray up


failed to turn ON within a prede-
PS102 (Tray upper limit sen-
termined time after M101 (Tray

up drive motor/3) ON.
sor/3)
Error in DB lower tray/LCT tray up The main

PS107 (Tray upper limit sensor/4) body stops

failed to turn ON within a predetermined time after M102 (Tray
immediately,
and the RL1
up drive motor/4) ON.

Error in LT tray up
(Main) turn
OFF.
LTDB (LT drive board)

failed to turn ON within a prede-

PS152 (Tray upper limit sen-
termined time after M151 (Tray

up drive motor) ON.
sor)
4-39
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
respond to CB (Main body control

board) A/D conversion request.
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
code
Drum-area
F22-1
abnormalities
F23-1
operation
Internal overheating
TCSB (Toner control sensor board)
The temperature at the outside of
the drum reached or exceeded
136F.
(7145 only)
PCL connector detached
PCL (Pre-charging exposure
When the PCL was being turned
lamp) connector
ON prior to the start of initial
charging, a PCL abnormality was

detected 15 times in a row at the
specified intervals after the specified period of time.
High
F26-1
voltage
power
error
F26-2
L detection data error
When the L detection output is

greater than 3.0V.
Abnormal output from TDS (Toner

density sensor)
Maximum TDS output voltage
failed to exceed 1.0V.
F26-3
Abnormal output from TDS (Toner

density sensor)
TDS output ripple voltage failed
to reach 0.5V
IV DIAGRAMS
F26-4
Toner density abnormality

If L detection power exceeds

Toner supply unit
2.6V prior to toner out detection

by the TLD (Toner level sensor),
Load the toner bottle again
the automatic toner supply feature should restore the toner den-
Main body
sity. This error occurs if this

feature fails to restore the density.
High
voltage
F28-1
power
error
Charging abnormality
When the EM signal (charge_em
If any copying
operation is
1) is detected 5 times at the spec- being made,

ified intervals.
stop the main
Charging corona
body after
completion of
paper exit.
Turn the RL1
F28-2
Transfer lightning abnormality
(Main) off.
The main
Transfer corona section
When the EM signal (trans_em) is

detected 3 times at the specified
body stops
immediately,

intervals, this phenomenon

occurs 5 times in 1 job.
and the RL1

(Main) turn
OFF.
4-40
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
code
F28-3
Separation lightning abnormality
operation
The main
Separation corona
When the EM signal
body stops
(separate_em) is detected 3
immediately,
times at the specified intervals,
and the RL1
this phenomenon occurs 5 times
(Main) turn
in 1 job.
OFF.
High fixing temperature abnor-
The main
temperature
mality (TH1)
body stops
abnormalities
The TH1 (Fixing temperature
immediately,
sensor/1) detects a temperature
and the RL1
over 457F continuously for a

(Main) turn
OFF. Accep-

High fixing temperature abnormality (TH2)
tance of all
keys is dis-
WARNING
When F34-, F35- or
The TH2 (Fixing temperature

sensor/2) detects a temperature
abled.
F34-1
F34-2
Low fixing
temperature
abnormalities
F35-1
F36-
(fixing temperature related abnormality)
over 457F continuously for a

occurs, be sure to repair a

defective part before set-
Low fixing temperature abnormality (L2 burnt out)
ting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0.

If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set
When turning on electricity to the

L2 (Fixing heater lamp/1) for
to 0 without repairing a
defective part, this may
more than the specified period of

time while in idling.
cause a fire.
IV DIAGRAMS
High fixing
4-41
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Low fixing temperature abnormal-
tempera-
ity (L2 burnt out)
body stops
ture abnor-
In other than warming-up, the
immediately,
malities
TH1 (Fixing temperature sensor/
and the RL1
1) elapses for more than the
(Main) turn
specified period of time in a tem-
OFF. Accep-
perature below 329F (7145)/
tance of all
320F (except the 7145).
keys is dis-
TH1 (Fxing temperature sensor/

1) low temperature abnormality
abled.
Low fixing
F35-2
F35-3
IV DIAGRAMS
When F34-, F35- or

F36-
(fixing
tempera-
ture related abnormality)
at the start of turning on electricity to the L2 (Fixing heater

lamp/1) is below 320F

(7145)/302F (except the
7145), the difference between

the TH1 temperature at the
cause a fire.
not reach the specified value.

When the temperature
detected by the TH1 at the
start of turning on electricity to
the L2 is above 320F (7145)/
302F (except the 7145), the
TH1 temperature does not
reach the warming-up completion temperature in the
specified period of time after
the start of turning on electricity to the L2.
F35-4
WARNING

ture after the elapse of the

specified period of time does
In warming up, when the temperature detected by the TH1
time of turning on electricity to

the L2 and the TH1 tempera-
Low fixing temperature abnormality (L3 burnt out)

When turning on electricity to the
L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2) for a
specified period of time during in
idling.
operation
The main
4-42
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Low fixing temperature abnormal-
operation
The main
temperature
ity (L3 burnt out)
body stops
abnormalities
In other than warming up, the
immediately,
TH2 (Fixing temperature sensor/
and the RL1
2) elapses for more than the
(Main) turn
specified period of time in a tem-
OFF. Accep-
perature below 329F (7145)/
tance of all
320F (except the 7145).
keys is dis-

2) low temperature abnormality
abled.
Low fixing
F35-5
F35-6
WARNING
When F34-, F35- or
F36-
(fixing
tempera-
In warming up, when the temperature detected by the TH2

at the start of turning on electricity to the L3 (Fixing heater

lamp /2) is below 320F

(7145)/302F (except the
7145), the difference between

the TH2 temperature at the
cause a fire.

the L3 and the TH2 temperature after the elapse of the
specified period of time does
not reach the specified value.

When the temperature
detected by the TH2 at the
IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code
the L3 (Fixing heater lamp/2)

is above 320F (7145)/302F
(except the 7145), the TH2
temperature does not reach
the warming-up completion
temperature in the specified
period of time after the start of
turning on electricity to the L3.
F35-7
Fixing heat roller wrapping jam

failure (TH1)
While in copying, the TH1 (Fixing
temperature sensor/1) detects a
condition in which the temperature is lower than the specified
one as compared with the temperature taken the specified
period of time previously.
4-43
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Fixing heat roller wrapping jam
temperature
failure (TH2)
body stops
abnormalities
While in copying, the TH2 (Fixing
immediately,
temperature sensor/2) detects a
and the RL1
condition in which the tempera-
(Main) turn
ture is lower than the specified
OFF. Accep-
one as compared with the tem-
tance of all
perature taken the specified
keys is dis-
period of time previously.
abled.
Low fixing
F35-8
F35-9
IV DIAGRAMS
(fixing
tempera-
ature detected by the TH2 (Fixing

temperature sensor/2) reaches

the Ready temperature earlier

than the temperature detected by
the TH1, the temperature

detected by the TH1 does not
cause a fire.
ture.
the Ready temperature earlier

than the temperature detected by
the TH2, the temperature
detected by the TH2 does not
reach the Ready temperature in
the specified period of time after
the temperature detected by the
TH1 reaches the Ready temperature.
F36-1
F36-

ature detected by the TH1 (Fixing

temperature sensor/1) reaches
ing sensor
abnormalities
When F34-, F35- or

2) contact failure
In warming up, when the temper-
Sub CPU fix-
WARNING
the temperature detected by the

TH2 reaches the Ready temperaF35-10
1) contact failure
In warming up, when the temper-
reach the Ready temperature in

the specified period of time after

1) high temperature abnormality
(Sub CPU detection)
In the sub CPU, the TH1 detects
a temperature above 457F for
operation
The main
4-44
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
operation
The main
ing sensor
1)open abnormality
body stops
abnormalities
(Sub CPU detection)
immediately,
and the RL1
a temperature from 18F to -4F
(Main) turn
continuously for the specified
OFF. Accep-
period of time.
tance of all
keys is dis-
2) high temperature abnormality
abled.
Sub CPU fix-
F36-2
F36-3
F36-4
WARNING
When F34-, F35- or
F36-
(fixing
tempera-
(Sub CPU detection)

a temperature above 457F for



2) open abnormality
(Sub CPU detection)

a temperature from 18F to -4F
cause a fire.
continuously for the specified

period of time.
Scanner
F41-1
abnormalities
M2 (Scanner motor) drive abnormality
Scanner stops
immediately.
M2 (Scanner motor)
SCDB (Scanner drive board)
(7145 only)
Occurs at exposure unit initial

search or at return scan if PS14
(Scanner home position sensor)
fails to turn ON within a predeterF43-1
mined time.
L1 (Exposure lamp) abnormality
IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code
L1 (Exposure lamp)
After the L1 is turned ON, an L1

abnormality signal is detected
continuously after the elapse of
Image
F46-1
control abnor-
Laser driver abnormality

Caused by overcurrent in laser
The main
body stops
Laser diode
malities
output.
Laser index abnormality
immediately,
and the RL1
Occurs if index period is different

from expected value.
(Main) turn
OFF.
M5 (Polygon motor)
Laser route
ADB (A/D conversion board)
F46-8
F46-10
AOC abnormality
Scanner stops
immediately.
F46-11
AOC counter overflow

AGC abnormality
AGC counter overflow
L1 (Exposure lamp)
Exposure unit stop position
4-45
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Image
F49-4
control abnor-
operation
INDEX (Index sensor board) con-
The main
nection abnormality
body stops
malities
immediately,
and the RL1
(Main) turn
OFF.
F49-6
ADB (A/D conversion board) con-
Scanner stops
CCD on ADB (A/D conversion
nection abnormality
immediately.
board)
Flex wiring harness
Motor speed F51-2

abnormalities
F51-4
(7145)
M11 (Fixing motor) speed abnormality
The main
body stops
Motor lock detection (LOCK) signal has been detected 5 times at
immediately,
and the RL1
the specified intervals.

M3 (Developing motor) speed
(Main) turn
OFF.
abnormality
Motor lock detection (LD) signal
M11 (Fixing motor)

has been detected 5 times at the

specified intervals.
F51-5
(7145)
M1 (Main motor) speed abnormality
M1 (Main motor)
Motor lock detection (LOCK) signal has been detected 5 times at
IV DIAGRAMS
F51-6
the specified intervals.

M5 (Polygon motor) speed abnormality
M5 was not locked 7 sec. after
M5 (Polygon motor)
starting to run.
Fan lock
abnormalities
F52-1
FM3 (Internal dehumidifying fan)
abnormality
When the motor lock signal (EM)
was detected at the specified

cycle with [H] detected continuously, the fan has been judged
abnormal in the succeeding two
retries.
4-46
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Fan lock
F52-2
abnormalities (7145/
7235)
FM2 (Fixing cooling fan/1) abnor-
operation
The main
FM2 (Fixing cooling fan)
mality
body stops
When the motor lock signal
immediately,
(LOCK) was detected at the
and the RL1
specified cycle with [H] detected
(Main) turn
continuously, the cooler has been
OFF.
judged abnormal at the succeeding two retries.

F52-3
FM4 (Internal cooling) abnormality


abnormal at the succeeding two
retries.
F52-4

abnormality


retries.
F52-5
FM6 (Internal dehumidifying fan/

2) abnormality

IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code

retries.
F52-6
Printer controller cooling fan

abnormality
Printer controller
When an error status signal was

sent from the printer controller.
F52-7
FM301 (Cooling fan) abnormality

FM301 (Cooling fan)


retries.
4-47
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
operation
The main
abnormality
body stops
immediately,
and the RL1
cycle with [H] detected continu-
(Main) turn
ously, the fan has been judged
OFF.
Main body
code
Fan lock
F52-8
abnormalities (7145)
abnormal at the two succeeding

retries.
F52-9
HD-103 cooling fan abnormality

When a lock signal was detected
HD-103 Cooling fan

while in the HDD operation.

F52-10
FM7 Polygon cooling fan abnormality
FM7 (Polygon cooling fan)
(7235)
When motor lock signal (EM) was

detected at the specified cycle
with [H] also detected continuously, the fan was judged to be

abnormal after being twice
retried.
Image control
communication
E56-1
abnormalities
Communication abnormality
between system-control of the
SCB (System control board) and
engine-control of the CB (Main
body control board).
Occurs if SCB fails to responds
IV DIAGRAMS
when SW2 (Sub power switch)

turns ON.
E56-2
While on standby, the process
Ready signal has not been
detected for the specified period
E56-3
of time.
While on standby, the scanner
of time.
4-48
Engine power
supply OFF

ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
operation
Engine power
communication
supply OFF
abnormalities
Image control
E56-4

FNSCB (FNS control board)

While on standby, the FNS
of time.
E56-5


Platen-original size notification
timeout.
Operations
unit control
E56-6
abnormalities
Operation status error

Memory access error at copy
E56-7
insertion.
Operation management error
E56-8
Control error at panel manager

Operation drawing error 1
E56-9
Screen-data drawing mismatch

Operation drawing error 2
E56-10
Drawing-component data error

Operation panel communication
abnormality
Communication error with the
IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code
OB (Operation board)
operating section CPU

Image control
E56-11
Machine type judgement abnormality
communication
abnormalities
(Except
the 7145)
The type information of the SCB

(System control board) is different
SCB program
from the type information of the

CB (Main body control board).
E56-12


body control board). There is no
response from the engine after a
signal is sent for periodic communication.
4-49
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
operation
Engine power
communication
supply OFF
abnormalities
Image control
E56-13

body control board). The destination value RAM area on the
FNS
engine side is unjustly rewritten.

FNS communication abnormality
The main
communication
Failure in serial communication
body stops
abnormalities
between the CB (Main body con-
immediately,
(FS-112/113/
114)
trol board) and FNSCB (FNS con- and the RL1

(Main) turn
trol board).
FNS
F70-1
FS-112
F70-11
FS-113
F77-1
FS-112 flash-ROM abnormality

Detected checksum error in FNS
OFF.
flash ROM.
M8 (Shift motor) drive abnormal-
M8 (Shift motor)
ity
When starting to return to the
PC11 (Shift motor pulse sensor)
home position, the PC10

(Shift home sensor) is not
PC10 (Shift home sensor)

PWB-A (Control board)
turned ON in the specified

period of time after the M8 is
turned ON.
When starting to move to the
IV DIAGRAMS
shift position, the PC10 is not

turned OFF in the specified
turned ON.
FS-112
F77-2
The PS711 (Tray upper limit

sensor) is not turned ON in

the specified period of time

after the paper extractor

PS706 (Tray lower limit sensor)
starts to go up.
While in copying, the PS711
is not turned ON in the specified period of time after the
M706 starts to go up.

Paper is not detected even
after the paper detection
operation is made 3 times.
4-50
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
FS-113
F77-2
M7 (Elevator motor) drive abnor-
operation
The main
mality
body stops
While the elevate tray is going
immediately,

PWB-F (Elevate tray top face
up, the PWB-F (Elevate tray
and the RL1
sensor)
top face sensor) is not turned
(Main) turn
OFF in the specified period of
OFF.
S2 (Elevate tray upper limit switch)

S3 (Elevate tray lower limit switch)
M7 (Elevator motor)
time after the M7 is turned

ON.
While the elevate tray is going
The S2 (Elevate tray upper

limit switch) or the S3 (Ele-
down, the M7 is locked.
vate tray lower limit switch) is

period of time after the elevate tray starts to drive.
FS-114
F77-2
M11-FN (Elevator motor) drive

failure
M11-FN (Elevator motor)

PWB-A FN (Control board)
PC15-FN (Top face detection

sensor)
During tray ascending, PC14FN (Top face detection sensor) does not ON after specified time from M11-FN ON.
FS-112
F77-3
During tray descending, it

does not reach the target
position within specified time.
During tray descending, M11-
FN is locked.
M704 (Alignment motor /F) drive
M704 (Alignment motor/F)
abnormality
The PS710 (Alignment HP
PS710 (Alignment plate HP

sensor/F)
sensor/F) cannot be attained

in the specified period of time

Sensor wiring harness/2
after the start of the alignment

plate HP search.
Motor wiring harness/2
IV DIAGRAMS
FNS
code
The PS710 cannot be passed

through in the specified
period of time after the alignment plate starts to move to
the size position.
4-51
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
FNS
code
FS-113
F77-3
M5 (Alignment motor ) drive
operation
The main
abnormality
body stops
While in search of the home
immediately,
position, the PC9 (Alignment
and the RL1
home sensor) is not turned
(Main) turn
ON in the specified period of
OFF.

M5 (Alignment motor)
PC9 (Alignment home sensor)

ON.
When the alignment operation

starts, the PC9 is not turned
OFF in the specified period of
FS-114
F77-3
ON.
M4-FN (Alignment motor 1) driv-
M4-FN (Alignment motor 1)
ing failure
PC6-FN (Alignment home

position sensor 1) does not

ON within specified time from
position sensor 1)
start of alignment plate HP

searching.
PC6-FN does not OFF within

specified time from start of
alignment plate home position
search.
IV DIAGRAMS
FS-113
F77-4
M13 (Paper exit roller separation

motor) drive abnormality
M13 (Paper exit roller separation motor)
When the pressure position

drive starts, the PC13 (Paper
exit roller home sensor) is not
turned ON.
When the separation position

drive starts, the PC13 is not
turned OFF in the specified
turned ON.
4-52
PC13 (Paper exit roller home sensor)
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
FS-114
F77-4
M6-FN (Exit open/close motor)
operation
The main
drive failure
body stops
M6-FN (Exit open/close motor)
After starting pressing posi-
immediately,
PC12-FN (Exit roller home
tion driving, PC12-FN (Exit
and the RL1
position sensor)
roller home position sensor)
(Main) turn
does not ON within specified
OFF.
time from M6-FN ON.
After starting separation position driving, PC12-FN does

not OFF within specified time
FS-112
F77-5
from M6-FN ON.

drive abnormality
The M707 does not make a turn


after it starts to operate.
FS-113
F77-5
M12 (Storage roller separation

motor) drive abnormality
M12 (Storage roller separation motor)
PC12 (Storage roller home sensor)
When the pressure position

drive starts, the PC12 (Stor-
age roller home sensor) is not

truned on in the specified
turned ON.
When the separation position

drive starts, the PC12 is not
IV DIAGRAMS
FNS
code

turned ON.
FS-112
F77-6
abnormality
The PS708 (Stapler unit HP

PS708 (Stapler unit HP sensor)
sensor) is not turned ON in

the specified period of time

after the start of the home

position search.
The PS708 is not turned OFF

after the start of the movement to the 2-staple standby
position.
4-53
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
FNS
code
FS-113
F77-6
M6 (Staple movement motor)
operation
The main
drive abnormality
body stops
M6 (Staple movement motor)
The PC14 (Staple home sen-
immediately,
PC14 (Staple home sensor)
sor) is not turned ON in the
and the RL1
(Main) turn
the M13 is turned ON.
OFF.
The home position cannot be

passed through in the specified period of time after the
start of the movement to the
FS-114
F77-6
1-staple position.
M7-FN (Stapling unit moving
M7-FN (Stapling unit moving
motor) driving failure

PC10-FN (Staple home posi-
motor)
tion sensor) does not ON

within specified time from
PC10-FN (Staple home position sensor)
starting of HP search.
PC10-FN does not OFF when
starting to move to 1-position
stapling position.
FS-112
F77-11
Stapler reversal abnormality

The PS712 (Stapler HP sensor)

M708 (Staple motor)
cannot be attained in the specified period of time after the start
PS712 (Stapler HP sensor)
IV DIAGRAMS
of the reverse rotation of the

M708 (Staple motor).
FS-113
F77-11
Stapler /F drive abnormality

passed through in the specified period of time after the
start of the staple 2/F drive.

While in the staple 2/F drive,
the home position cannot be
attained in the specified
period of time after the home
position is turned OFF.

the reverse drive of the staple
2/F.
4-54

Staple motor 2
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
FS-113
F77-12
Stapler /R drive abnormality
operation
The main
body stops
Staple motor 1
passed through in the speci-
immediately,
fied period of time after the
and the RL1
start of the staple1/R drive.
(Main) turn
While in the staple1/F drive,
OFF.
the home position cannot be

period of time after the home
position is turned OFF.

the reverse drive of the
FS-114
F77-12
staple1/F.
Stapler drive failure
Staple motor
Staple motor does not move

from home position within
staple driving.
Staple motor does not reach

the home position within
staple reverse driving.
F77-13
Saddle staple 1 drive failure

During driving of saddle sta-
PWB-C SK (Control board)

Saddle staple motor 1
IV DIAGRAMS
FNS
code
ple motor 1, saddle staple

does not move from home
position within specified time.
During reverse driving of saddle staple motor 1, it does not

reach the home position
F77-14
within specified time.

Saddle staple 2 drive failure
Saddle staple motor 2
During saddle staple motor 2

driving, it does not move from
home position.
During reverse driving of saddle staple motor 2, it does not
reach the home position
within specified time.
4-55
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
FNS
code
FS-112
F77-16
M703 (Alignment motor/R) abnor-
operation
The main
M703 (Alignment motor/R)
mality
body stops
PS709 (Alignment HP sensor/R)
The PS709 (Alignment HP
immediately,
sensor/R) cannot be attained
and the RL1
(Main) turn
after the start of the alignment
OFF.
plate HP search.
The PS709 cannot be passed

through in the specified
period of time after the alignment plate starts to move to
the size position.
F77-18
FM701 (Cooling fan) drive abnormality
FM701 (Cooling fan)

The 701 detects lock for more

than the specified period of time
from the start of operation to the

close of operation.
FS-114
F77-22
M13-SK (In & out guide motor)

failure

M13-SK (In & out guide motor)
PC23-SK (In & out guide

home position sensor)
During M13-SK driving (protrudes), PC23-SK (In & out

guide home position sensor)
does not OFF within specified
IV DIAGRAMS
time.
During M13-SK driving (moving aside), PC23-SK does not
ON within specified time.ve to
F77-23
the size position.

M14-SK (Layable guide motor)
failure
After M14-SK (Layable guide
M14-SK (Layable guide motor)

PC26-SK (Layable guide
motor) starts moving to the

home position, PC26-SK
(Layable guide home position
sensor) does not ON within
specified time from M14-SK
ON.
After starting of movable

guide, PC26-SK (Layable
guide home sensor) does not
OFF within specified time
from M14-SK ON.
4-56
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
FS-114
F77-24
Saddle exit roller drive failure
operation
The main
PC18-SK (Saddle exit open/
body stops
M9-SK (Saddle exit open/
close motor) does not ON
immediately,
close motor)
and the RL1
PC18-SK (Saddle exit roller
press-operation starting of
(Main) turn
M9-SK (Saddle exit open/
OFF.
close motor) .
PC18-SK does not OFF

within specified time from M9SK separation operation start-
F77-25
F77-26
ing.
M10-SK (Crease motor ) drive
failure
During M10-SK driving, PC22-SK
M10-SK (Crease motor)

PC22-SK (Crease roller home
(Crease roller home position sensor) does not ON within specified
position sensor)
time.
M8-SK (Saddle exit motor) drive
failure
Lock signal ON is continu-

M8-SK (Saddle exit motor)
ously detected for the specified period within specified
time from M8-SK drive start.

Lock signal OFF is continuously detected for the specified period within specified
time from stopping of M8-SK
drive signal.
F77-27
Shutter drive failure

During M6-FN (Exit open/
close motor) driving (closing
shutter), PC16-FN (Shutter
6-FN (Exit open/close motor)

PC16-FN (Shutter home position sensor)
home position sensor) does

not ON within specified time.
During M6-FN driving (opening shutter) PC16-FN does

not OFF within specified time.
4-57
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
FNS
code
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
FNS
code
FS-114
F77-28
M5-FN (Alignment motor 2) driv-
operation
The main
M5-FN (Alignment motor 2)
ing failure
body stops
immediately,
position sensor 2) does not
and the RL1
position sensor 2)
ON within specified time from
(Main) turn
starting of alignment plate
OFF.
home position search.

specified time from starting of
alignment plate HP search.
F77-29
SL2-FN (Exit paddle solenoid)

driving failure
L2-FN (Exit paddle solenoid)

PC11-FN (Exit paddle home

position sensor)
PC11-FN (Exit paddle home

position sensor) does not ON
SL2-FN ON (paddle move
aside).
specified time from SL2-FN
ON (during pressing paper).
FS-113
F77-53
M11 (Punch motor) drive abnormality
M11 (Punch motor)
The PC15 (Punch motor pulse
PC15 (Punch motor pulse sensor)
sensor) does not turn OFF the

specified period of time after the
M11 turns on.
manuals4you.comIV DIAGRAMS
F77-54
M14 (Punch movement motor)
drive abnormality (inch system

only)
Punch motor
When starting the punch 2hole position switch drive, the

S4 (punch hole position
switch) is not turned ON in the
When starting the punch 3hole position switch drive, the

S4 is not turned OFF in the
FS-114
F77-55

Punch motor drive failure
During driving punch motor,

punch position sensor 1,2 do not
OFF within specified time.
4-58
M14 (Punch movement motor)

S4 (Punch hole position switch)
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Nonvolatile
F80-1
operation
Nonvolatile memory abnormality
Stop immedi-
memory
*1
ately
abnormalities F80-2

*1
F80-3

*1
F80-4
F80-5

*1
Flash ROM F81-1

abnormalities
Flash ROM abnormality

Detected checksum error in SCB
*1
Engine power
supply OFF
SCB program
(System control board)s

FlashROM.
F81-2
Software abnormality
CB (Main body control board) and
CB program
SCB program
SCB (System control board) have

non-matching software device
F81-4
types.
An OS error occurs in the image
error
control unit in the SCB (System

control board).
HDD initiali- F82-1

zation abnor-
A physical abnormality occurs in

the HDD and a checksum abnor-
mality
mality in the DRAM occur.
HDD abnor-
Document manager initialization
HDD (Hard disk)
F82-3
abnormality
I-FAX report initializing error
Reformatting of the HDD

HDD (Hard disk)
error
Main body

HDD (Hard disk)
F82-2
malities
HDD
IV DIAGRAMS
HDD
OS
HDD reformat
CB (Main control board)
Access
E82-10
abnormalities
Document manager access

abnormality (overall)
The count of E82-11 to E82-17 is

an overall count for E82-10.
E82-11
E82-12

abnormality
VxWorks error
abnormality
Job control access error
E82-13

abnormality
Image conversion job access
error
4-59
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
Access
E82-14
abnormalities
operation
Engine power
abnormality
supply OFF

Fax communication job access

error
E82-15

abnormality
Net communication job access
error
E82-16

abnormality
E82-17
File storage job access error

abnormality
Print job access error
E82-18
Document manager access error

FaxFile document conversion job
HDD
E82-50
access error
I-FAX report initializing error
error
Access
E82-51
I-FAX report access error (overall)
error
Job control access error 1.

* In the count, E82-52 count is
E82-52
also included.
I-FAX report access error
IV DIAGRAMS
Network
Job control access error 2

Network
F85-1
abnormalities
Network device abnormality
Stop the Net-
NetworkDriver has not been registered for some reason (includ-
work I/O
NetWork section
Stop the
IEEE1284

IEEE1284 (Parallel) section
ing hardware factors).

Copier/Fax can be used.
F85-2
IEEE1284 device abnormality

IEEE1284 (Parallel) Driver has
not been registered for some rea- (Parallel) I/O

sons (including hardware factors).
F85-3

USB device abnormality
USBDriver has not been registered for some reasons (including
Stop the
USBI/O
USB section
Stop the Network function

NetWork section
hardware factors).
E85-11
Network protocol stack initialization abnormality

The resetting of the Network protocol stack has been failed.
4-60
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Network
code
Network
E85-12
abnormalities
operation
Network reset abnormality
Stop the Net-
The resetting of the Network pro-
work function
NetWork section
Network print operation abnormality
Stop the Net-
Software abnormality in the Net-
work print
JOB, NetWork section
work print JOB sequence.
function
tocol stack has been failed.

E85-13
E85-14

Software abnormality when
E85-15
receiving a Network print signal.

Software abnormality when
receiving a Network print (Apple-
E85-18
Talk) signal.
Network scan operation abnormality
Stop the Net-
Software abnormality in the Network scan JOB sequence.
work scan
function

NetWork section
Software abnormality when sendE85-20
ing a Network scan signal.

MIB module abnormality
Stop the MIB
E85-21
MIB software abnormality

IPP module abnormality
function
Stop the IPP
E85-22
IPP software abnormality

FTP server module abnormality
function
Stop the FTP
server function
E85-23
FTP server software abnormality

WebTool module abnormality
WebTool software abnormality
function
Network
E85-24
E85-25
E85-30
eKRDS transmission operation
Stop the WebTool
abnormality
Software abnormality while in
eKRDS Send-
transmission operation
eKRDS reception operation
stop
Network
abnormality
Software abnormality while in
eKRDS
Receiving
reception operation
LDAP module abnormality
function stop
stop
IV DIAGRAMS
E85-17
ing function
LDAP function
No memory obtainable.
Improper operation on MIO
HDD
LDAP.
HDD abnor-
E86-6
mality
(7145)
FAX file initialization abnormality
4-61
manuals4you.com
Stop the HDD
HDD (Hard disk)
function
Reformatting of the HDD
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
IP
code
Printer board
F87-1
abnormalities
operation
Printer controller not identified.
Printer cannot
Printer controller did not respond.
be used.
Printer controller

F87-2
Printer controller abnormality
Engine power
Error F87-1 occurred 3 times in
supply OFF
succession.
F87-3
Printer controller HDD abnormality
Main body
HDD cannot be accessed.

System control
E88-1
Image abnormality
If any copying
communication
Abnormality detected in image
operation is
abnormalities
processing at system control

side.
being made,
stop the main
body after
completion of
paper exit.
Turn the RL1
E89-1
Copy sequence abnormality

Abnormality in job object pointer.
(Could not get page-control
E89-2
(Main) off.
Engine power
supply OFF
Engine section
Engine power
object for some reason.)

Abnormality in memory copy
sequence. (Cause unknown)
IV DIAGRAMS
E89-3

Abnormality in through copy
sequence (FCOT). (Cause
unknown)
E89-4

Memory scanner did not complete stop. (Notification of stop
completion not received from
E89-5
engine.)
Memory printer did not complete
stop. (Notification of stop comple-
E89-6
tion not received from engine.)

SW2 (Sub power switch) OFF
processing wait timeout
supply OFF
All indicators
on the operation panel
light.
4-62
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
System control
E89-11
communication
abnormalities
operation
Carriage return not possible error
Engine power
Abnormality when setting a timer
supply OFF
(Count is made at E89-6.)

E89-12

Abnormality when canceling a
timer
E89-21

Operation abnormality when
copying interrupt.
(Printer user job)
E89-22

copying interrupt.
(Printer job 0)
E89-23

copying interrupt.
(Printer job 1)
E89-24

copying interrupt.
(FCOT printer user job)
E89-25

copying interrupt.
(FCOT user job)
E89-26

copying interrupt.
(Copy print job)
E89-27

copying interrupt.
(Copy print job 0)
4-63
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Main body
code
operation
Engine power
communication
supply OFF
abnormalities
copying interrupt.
System control
E89-28
(Copy print job 1)

E89-31
Abnormality when deleting task 0

due to the generation of queue 1
not possible.
E89-32
Abnormality when deleting queue

0 due to the generation of queue
E89-33
1 not possible.
n due to the generation of task n
not possible.
E89-34
E89-35
Abnormality when deleting task 0

due to the generation of task 1
not possible.
0 due to the generation of task 1
not possible.
E89-36
E89-37
Abnormality when starting task n

Abnormality when deleting task n
E89-38
Abnormality when deleting queue n
IV DIAGRAMS
E89-41
Scheduling abnormality (queue

operation abnormality) when FAX
print cannot be started due to
E89-42
memory shortage.
Scheduling abnormality (message transmission error) when
FAX print cannot be started due
E89-43
to memory shortage.
Printer scheduling abnormality
(message transmission error) due
to memory being full.
E89-51
E89-52

copying interrupt (scanner scan
user job)
copying interrupt (scanner mixed
scan job 0)
E89-53

copying interrupt (scanner Z-folding scan job 0)
4-64

ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
System control
E89-54
communication
abnormalities
operation
Engine power
copying interrupt (scanner normal
supply OFF
scan job 0)
E89-55

copying interrupt (scanner scan
job 1)
E89-56

copying interrupt (FAX scan user
job)
E89-57
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FAX mixed scan job

0)
E89-58
E89-59
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FAX Z-folding scan

job 0)
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FAX normal scan job
0)
E89-60
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FAX scan job 1)
E89-61
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FCOT scan user job)
E89-62
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (FCOT scan job)
E89-63
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (copy scan user job)
E89-64
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (copy mixed scan job
E89-65
0)
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (copy Z-folding scan
job 0)
E89-66
Operation abnormality when copying interrupt (copy normal scan job
E89-67
0)
Operation abnormality when copy-
E89-80
ing interrupt (copy scan job 1)

Suspend occurence
E89-81
CPU hang up due to software bug

Exception occurence
CPU hang up due to software bug
4-65
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
Main body
code
ERROR CODE LIST
*1
Parameter memory board abnormality display priority. For these error codes, the priority for display has
been specified. When two or more errors occur at the same time, they are displayed in the following
order:
1.F80-4
2.F80-5
3.F80-3
4.F80-1
5.F80-2
IV DIAGRAMS
Note:
For FAX related error codes, see FK/FL Service Manual.
4-66
ERROR CODE LIST
Causes
Resulting
Network
N14
abnormalities
operation
I-FAX reception abnormality
An attached file other than
Stop the I-FAX

function
JOB
TIFF has been received.

Network section
An attached file has been

received in a wrong format. Or,
an attached file in a coding format that is not supported has
been received.
The number of attached files

has been in excess of the
upper limit of 10 files.

The number of pages of the
mails received has been in
excess of the upper limit of
1000 pages.
N14-00 eKRDS reception abnormality
Do not stop the
When an time-out condition occurs functions

while an E-Mail is being received.
(In this case, the mail is deleted
from the mail box.)
When the format of an E-Mail
received is found illegal due to the
cause other than the number of
attached files being in excess of its
upper limit.
IV DIAGRAMS
Network
code

When the number of attached files
in the E-Mail received is in excess
of the upper limit of 255.
(Since a wrong mail has been
received, the mail is deleted from
the mail box.)
N24
N25
DNS error
The LDAP server address was
Stop the LDAP SCB (System control board)

function
Network section
specified incorrectly.
Connection error
The connection from the LDAP
server was rejected.
N26
Connection error
The LDAP server is corresponding to any version other than 3.0.
4-67
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Network
code
Network
N27
abnormalities
Connection error
The LDAP server does not support function

the SASL authorization system.
N28
LDAP connection error

The MIO does not support the
SASL authorization system which
has been supported by the server.
N29
N30
Stop the Net-
The log-in name or password is
work scan
incorrect.
(SMB) function

The protocol is not initialized.
N31

The connection has been cut off
N32
while in authorization.
N33
The host name is incorrect.

The user name or user password
is incorrect.
N34

The folder name is incorrect.
N35

The log-in failed due to the SMB
IV DIAGRAMS
protocol error other than N30 to

N34.
N36

The file name is incorrect.
N37

The file or folder attribute is erro-
N38
neous.
The medium of the transfer
address is erroneous.
N39

Resetting was made while in trans-
N40
fer.
N41
Shortage of the buffer.

N42
The MIO is busy.

The server has no free space.
operation
4-68
Network section
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Network
N43
abnormalities
Stop the Net-
The connection was cut off while in work scan

transfer.
N44
operation
Network section
(SMB) function

The server has run out of free
space while in transfer.
N45

An error occurred with the file sys-
N50
tem of the server while in transfer.

Stop the NetThe SMTP server address is not
set.
N52
work scan function (E-Mail)

The protocol has not been initial-
N53
N54
ized.
The Network connection route is

abnormal.
Network cable

Network section
The server is not started.
The port number is wrong.

An erroneous POP server
authentication has been made
for POP before SMTP.
N55
The SMTP server connection

is abnormal.
There is not sufficient free

space left in the SMTP server.

The connection is abnormal.
N56
IV DIAGRAMS
Network
code

Network cable

The communication time has run
N57
N58
out.
The POP reception is being

made in the same account.


The network connection route is

Network section
JOB

Network cable
abnormal.
TCP/IP setting is disable.
N59

The SMTP server connection is

Network section
abnormal.
4-69
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Network
code
Network
N60
abnormalities
operation
Stop the Net-
The SMTP server connection
work scan func- Network section
is abnormal.
tion (E-Mail)
The length of time set for POP
before SMTP is longer than

the retention time approved for
the POP server.
N61
An attached file in excess of

the maximum size for the
SMTP server has been sent.

The SMTP server was down
while an attached file was
being sent.
N62
JOB
A reset operation has been

made while in the network
scan operation.
N63

Network section
The size of an attached file is

in excess of the maximum size
for the SMTP server.
N64

IV DIAGRAMS

N65

The EPNET Mail has been in contention with other mails for sending.
N66

The From address has been
specified in the domain that is not
allowed for the SMTP server.
N70
N71

The MIO has not completed the
preceding transaction.
LDAP connection/search error
A request for cancel has been
issued by the client.
N72
LDAP search error

The route of retrieval has been
incorrectly specified.
4-70
Stop the LDAP

function
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Network
N73
abnormalities
operation
LDAP search error
The results of retrieval are in
function
Network section
excess of the maximum number.

N74
LDAP search error

The LDAP server has been set the
Referral setting and cannot access
to the reference data.
N75
LDAP connection/search error

A time-out occurred due to the
LDAP server being not found.
N76
N77

Cannot connect to the LDAP
server. (At serch operation)
LDAP parameter abnormality
No bind can be made successfully
due to parameter abnormality.
N80
Stop the Network scan func-
The IP address of the FTP
tion (FTP)
parameter is abnormal.
The length of the file name is in
excess of the upper limit of 32
bytes.
N81
The descriptor is illegal.
The server is not started.

The port number is wrong.
Network section
Network cable
The IP address is wrong.

The proxy server connection is
IV DIAGRAMS
Network
code
abnormal.
N82
N83
Network section
The FTP server was down

while data was being sent.

Network section
The network connection route is

N84
N86
abnormal.
Network cable
The log-in name and the password

are illegal.
Network section
The network connection route
is abnormal.
The server supporting the
Stop the NetSCB (System control board)

tion (FTP)
Network cable
Passive mode has not been

set to Passive.
4-71
manuals4you.com
ERROR CODE LIST

Causes
Resulting
Network
code
Network
N87
abnormalities
The FTP server directory is
abnormal.
tion (FTP)
The same file as the sending

file has been open on the FTP
server.
N88

The reset operation was made
while in the network scan operation.
N89

There is not sufficient free space
N91
left in the FTP server.

N92

IV DIAGRAMS
The network is in the busy condition.
om
ou.c
y
4
s
l
a
nu
ma
3
operation
Stop the Net-
4-72
ERROR CODE LIST
4.2
About Abnormal Units Isolation
As for the abnormalities listed below, the device can be used temporarily by separating the defective unit.
Pressing the auto reset key while an error code appears and turning ON/OFF the SW2 (Sub power switch)
allows you to detach the defective unit as a software and use other functions. However, when the SW2 is
turned ON or OFF without removing the cause of trouble, the abnormality will be detected again with an
error code displayed. (Function effective for once only)
Error code
18-1
Error
Error in main body upper
Unit to be cut off

Main body upper tray
Remarks
Tray can not be selected.
Main body lower tray
tray up
18-2
Error in main body lower
18-3
Error in DB upper tray up
DB upper tray
18-4
Error in DB lower tray/LCT

tray up
DB lower tray/LCT tray
18-5
70-1, 70-9
Error in LT tray up
FNS abnormality
LT tray
FNS

FNS can not be used; FNS
70-11
FNS abnormality
FNS
must be removed.
FNS
must be removed. (FS-112)

FNS

FNS

77-2
Tray up/down drive abnor-
77-5
mality
Pressure motor drive
77-17
abnormality
Fan motor drive abnormal-
77-3, 77-16
ity
Error in FNS alignment
FNS stack section
must be removed.
Only straight exit remains avail-
77-6, 77-11
plate
FNS stapler error
FNS stack section
able. (FS-112)
Only straight exit remains avail-
77-3, 77-6,
Staple drive abnormality
FNS
able. (FS-112)
The selection of the staple, sort
77-12, 77-28
77-13, 77-14,
77-22, 77-23,
or saddle mode (stitch-and-fold)

is not available. (FS-114)
Saddle drive abnormality
77-26
82-2
Document manager initial-
82-3
ization abnormality
I-FAX report initialization
85-1
abnormality
Network device abnormal-
85-2
ity
IEEE1284 device abnor-
85-3
mality
USB device abnormality
SK
The selection of the saddle

mode (stitch-and-fold) is not
HDD
available. (SK-114)
Copying, printing (except a per-
HDD
sonal letter) remain enabled.

Copying, printing (except a per-
Network
sonal letter) remain enabled.

Copying and faxing remain
IEEE1284
enabled.
USB
enabled.
enabled.
4-73
manuals4you.com
IV DIAGRAMS
tray up
ERROR CODE LIST

Error code
Error
Unit to be cut off
Remarks
86-2, 86-3
FAX board error
FAX
Copying and printing remain
86-6
FAX file initialization

abnormality
HDD
Copying, printing (except a personal letter) remain enabled.
86-7, 86-8
FL-102/FL-103 board
FL-102/FL-103
Copy, FAX (1 line) and printer
enabled.
error
87-2, 87-3
can be used.
Printer board abnormali-
Printer
ties
4.3
enabled.
L Detection Error Code List
Code
0003
Cause
The TDS (Toner density sensor) output
Clearance method
SW2 (Sub power
ripple at the end of L detection was 0.5V

or less.
switch)
OFF/ON
Suspected defective part

Developing unit connector
TDS
0004
The TDS output ripple while the developer is being agitated during L detection
SW2
OFF/ON
adjustment was 0.02V or less (there is

almost no change in output).
M1 (Main motor)
Developing agitator
screw
Developing unit connector
TDS
IV DIAGRAMS
0005
0006
4.4
CB
Developer
TDS control voltage cannot be adjusted
SW2
to within the range 5.76~7.46V.
OFF/ON2
TDS
CB
TCSB (Toner control sensor board) output signal D/A conversion error
SW2
OFF/ON
CB
TSCB
Network Section Status Indication
For the SCB (System control board), there are two orange and green status indicator LEDs. The table
below shows the status indicated by these two LEDs.
ON/OFF of LED
Green LED flashin
Status of network section

Data being sent and received
Orange LED on
Orange LED off
Network speed at 100 Mb/s

Network speed at 10 Mb/s
4-74
4-75
manuals4you.com
HV (Transfer corona section)
M11 (Fixing motor)

M1 (Main motor)
IV DIAGRAMS
START button ON
: Does not come ON for some copy counts.
10
5.1
Time (sec)
Item
SD1 (1st paper feed solenoid /U)
V-Valid
PS21 (Timing sensor /U)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
PS23 (IT exit sensor /U)
TIMING CHART
5. TIMING CHART
7145 Timing Chart
A. 8.5x11, life size, 2 copies, feed from tray 1
Time (sec)
4-76


HV (Transfer corona section)
M11 (Fixing motor)

M1 (Main motor)
START button ON
: Does not come ON for some copy counts.
10
5.2

V-Valid
MC2 (Loop clutch)
PS23 (IT exit sensor /U)
Item
IV DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
7235/7228/7222 Timing Chart

Note:
This timing chart shows the case of 7235.
7322fs4009
4-77
manuals4you.com
R
R 230mm/s
230mm/s
230mm/s
230mm/s
M1 (Main motor)
M6 (ADU motor)
FF 600mm/s
600mm/s
PS24 (IT exit sensor /L)
PS4 (ADU sensor)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
V-Valid
Time (sec)
START button ON
IV DIAGRAMS
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
5.3
Item
TIMING CHART
7145 ADU Timing Chart
Time (sec)
4-78
R 165mm/s*
165mm/s*
140mm/s (7228/7222)
* 165mm/s (7235)
M1 (Main motor)
M6
(ADU motor)
F 600mm/s
PS24 (IT exit sensor /L)
PS4 (ADU sensor)
SD5
(ADU gate solenoid)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
PS21
(Timing sensor /U)
V-Valid
START button ON
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
5.4
Item
IV DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
7235/7228/7222 ADU Timing Chart

Note:
7322fs4010
4-79
manuals4you.com
230mm/s
R 460mm/s
460mm/s
F 230mm/s
(Original reversal motor)
M303
M302 (Original con- F 460mm/s

veyance motor)
230mm/s
230mm/s
R 460mm/s
F 100mm/s
M301
250mm/s
Valid (Scan)
PS301 (No original sensor)
Time (sec)
0
IV DIAGRAMS
START button ON
5.5
Item
TIMING CHART
DF-318/DF-320 Timing Chart
A. 8.5x11, life size, single side original, 3 sheets
Time (sec)
230mm/s
460mm/s
4-80
230mm/s
R 460mm/s
460mm/s
F 230mm/s
(Original reversal motor)
M303
M302 (Original con- F 460mm/s

veyance motor)
230mm/s
F 100mm/s
M301
250mm/s
Valid (Scan)
PS301 (No original sensor)
Item
0
START button ON
IV DIAGRAMS
10
11
12
TIMING CHART
B. 8.5x11, life size, double side originals, 3 sheets
4-81
manuals4you.com
PS104 (Paper feed sensor /U)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
V-Valid
M100 (DB Paper feed motor)
Time (sec)
START button ON
IV DIAGRAMS
5.6
Item
TIMING CHART
DB-211/DB-411 Timing Chart
A. 8.5x11, single side, 3 copies, feed from tray 3

Note:
Time (sec)
4-82
PS104 (Paper feed sensor /U)
PS155 (Paper feed sensor)
MC2 (Loop clutch)
V-Valid
SD151 (LT paper feed solenoid)
M150 (LT paper feed motor)
M100 (DB Paper feed motor)
START button ON
5.7
Item
IV DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
LT-203 Timing Chart
A. 8.5x1, single side, 3 copies

Note:
Time (sec)
230mm/s
600mm/s
4-83
manuals4you.com
Shift/Open
Alignment
M706
(Tray up/down motor)
Lower
Raise
Pressure
M707
(Paper pressure motor)
Release
M705
(Stapler movement motor)
(Alignment motor /F)
M704
M703
Alignment/Shift
(Alignment motor /R)
Open
F 600mm/s
M702
(Paper exit motor)
230mm/s
(FNS conveyance motor)
M701
IV DIAGRAMS
5.8
PS2(Main body fixing exit sensor)
Item
TIMING CHART
FS-112 Timing Chart
A. 8.5x11, sort mode, 2 originals, 2 sets setting
Time (sec)
230mm/s
600mm/s
4-84
M706
(Tray up/down motor)
Lower
Raise
Pressure
M707
(Paper pressure motor)
Release
M705
(Stapler movement motor)
M704
Alignment
(Alignment motor /F)
Shift/Open
M703
Alignment/Shift
(Alignment motor /R)
Open
F 600mm/s
M702
(Paper exit motor)
230mm/s
M701
(FNS conveyance motor)
PS2(Main body fixing exit sensor)
Item
0
IV DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
B. 8.5x11, staple mode, 2 originals, 1 position, 2 sets setting
4-85
manuals4you.com
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
M4 (Upper entrance motor)
SL1 (Upper/lower entrance

switching solenoid)
SL2 (1st tray entrance

selecting solenoid)
L
H
ON
OFF
M1 (Entrance motor)
PC1 (1st tray exit sensor)
L
H
IV DIAGRAMS
FNS movement starting signal ON
5.9
Item
TIMING CHART
FS-113 Timing Chart
A. Non-sort, 1 original, 1 copy setting
M1 (Entrance motor)
4-86
M3 (Exit motor)
PC10 (Shift home position sensor)
M8 (Shift motor)
Forward
rotation
Stop
Backward
rotation
H
L
ON
OFF
L
H
ON
OFF
PC3 (Storage sensor)
L
H
Item
2
IV DIAGRAMS
Shift position
TIMING CHART
B. Sort, 2 originals, 2 sets setting
L
H
PC3 (Storage sensor)
4-87
manuals4you.com
ON
OFF
M9 (Lower paddle motor)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
M13 (Exit roller/rolls spacing motor)
M12 (Storage roller/

rolls spacing motor)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Stapling motor1
M8 (Shift motor)
ON
OFF
M6 (Stapling unit moving motor)
M3 (Exit motor)
ON
OFF
SL3 (Upper paddle solenoid)
Forward
rotation
Stop
Backward
rotation
ON
OFF
M15 (Upper paddle motor)
M5 (CD aligning motor)
H
L
PC2 (Lower entrance sensor)
Forward
rotation
Stop
Backward
rotation
L
H
ON
OFF
Forward
rotation
Stop
Backward
rotation
ON
OFF
L
H
Spacing
IV DIAGRAMS
PC4 (Upper entrance sensor)
M2 (Lower entrance motor)
M1 (Entrance motor)
Item
Stapling
Transport to finisher tray
Aligning
Switchback
Spacing
Shift
Aligning
Shift
Pressure
Stapling
Transport to finisher tray
Pressure Spacing
TIMING CHART
C. Rear corner stapling, 8.5x11R, 2 originals, 2 sets setting
4-88
L
H
ON
OFF
Punch clutch
PC1 (1st tray exit sensor)
ON
OFF
M11 (Punch motor)
ON
OFF
SL2 (1st tray entrance

selecting solenoid)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
M1 (Entrance motor)
SL1 (Upper/lower entrance

switching solenoid)
L
H
Item
IV DIAGRAMS
Punching movement
TIMING CHART
D. Non-sort, hole punch, 1 original, 1 copy setting
4-89
manuals4you.com
Exit motor
(M1-FN)
IV DIAGRAMS
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
High
Low
Stop
Entrance motor
(M3-FN)
Transport motor
(M2-FN)
ON
OFF
Transport sensor
(PC5-FN)
TIMING CHART
5.10 FS-114 Timing Chart

A. Non-sort, 8.5x11, 1 copy setting
4349T506BA
High
Low
Stop
Transport motor
(M2-FN)
4-90
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
Stapler motor
Backward
Forward
Stop
Backward
Forward
Stop
ON
OFF

(M7-FN)
Alignment motor 2
(M5-FN)
Alignment motor 1
(M4-FN)
(SL1-FN)
(M6-FN)
Forward (Retraction)
Stop
Backward (Pressure)
Forward
Stop
Punch drive motor
ON
OFF
Backward
Registration clutch
(CL1-FN)
Exit motor
(M1-FN)
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
Entrance motor
(M3-FN)
(PC8-FN)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Storage tray detecting sensor
Punch sensor
IV DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
B. 1 staple, 2 holes, 8.5x11, 2 originals, 2 sets setting
4349T505BA
Forward
Stop
ON
OFF
Forward
Stop
Backward
High
Low
Stop
4-91
manuals4you.com
Saddle exit motor

(M8-SK)
Stapler motor 2
Stapler motor 1
Alignment motor 1
(M4-FN)
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
Forward
Stop
Backward
Forward
Alignment motor 2
Stop
(M4-FN)
Backward
Saddle exit open/close motor Forward
Stop
(M9-SK)
Backward
Exit open/close motor Forward

Stop
(M6-FN)
Backward
Storage paddle solenoid ON
OFF
(SL1-FN)
Exit motor
(M1-FN)
Registration clutch
(CL1-FN)
Crease motor
(M10-SK)
Transport motor
(M2-FN)
ON
Punch sensor
OFF
Storage tray detecting sensor ON
OFF
(PC8-FN)
High
Entrance motor
Low
(M3-FN)
Stop
IV DIAGRAMS
1st Document
2nd Document
TIMING CHART
5.11 SK-114 Timing Chart

A. Booklet-binding, 2-point stapling, 8.5x11R, 2 originals, 1 set setting
4511T504BA
TIMING CHART
IV DIAGRAMS
Blank page
4-92
I
1
2
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 24V
2 24V
3 PGND
4 PGND
5 5V
6 SGND
3
4
5
6
CN213- 1 5V
CN213- 2 VR
CN213- 3 SGND
CN216- 3 5V
CN216- 2 PS
CN216- 1 SGND
CN202-1
CN202-2
CN202-3
CN253-1
CN253-2
CN253-3
CN245-1
CN245-2
CN245-3
CN246-1
CN246-2
CN246-3
CN249-3
CN249-2
CN249-1
CN248-1
CN248-2
CN248-3
CN244-1
CN244-2
CN244-3
CN243-1
CN243-2
CN243-3
CN242-1
CN242-2
CN242-3
CN241-1
CN241-2
CN241-3
Cover open/close
sensor
Original registration
sensor
Original conveyance
sensor
Original size
sensor/1
Original size
sensor/2
PS304
PS308
PS309
PS306
PS305
VR301 Original size VR
DF open/close
sensor
PS303
PS302 Original exit sensor
PS301 No original sensor
FM301 Cooling fan
Original reverse motor

M303
CN216- 6 5V
CN216- 5 PS
CN216- 4 SGND
CN202-3
CN202-2
CN202-1
CN215- 16 5V
CN215- 17 PS
CN215- 18 SGND
CN215- 15 5V
CN215- 14 PS
CN215- 13 SGND
CN224-3
CN224-2
CN224-1
CN223-2
CN223-5
CN223-1
CN223-3
CN223-6
CN223-4
Original conveyance
motor
M302
CN215- 12 5V
CN215- 11 PS
CN215- 10 SGND
CN215- 9 5V
CN215- 8 PS
CN215- 7 SGND
CN215- 6 5V
CN215- 5 PS
CN215- 4 SGND
CN215- 3 5V
CN215- 2 PS
CN215- 1 SGND
N.C
CN214-B12 DRIVE
CN214-B13 LOCK
CN214-B14 PGND
CN214-B 9 24V
CN214-B10 24V
CN214-A 7 B
CN214-A 8 B
CN214-A 9 A
CN214-A10 A
Original feed motor
Stamp solenoid
Exit solenoid
Roller pressure
solenoid
M301
SD303
SD301
SD302
CN212- 7 FG ND
CN212CN212CN212CN212CN212CN212-
CN222-2
CN222-5
CN222-1
CN222-3
CN222-6
CN222-4
CN221-2
CN221-5
CN221-1
CN221-3
CN221-6
CN221-4
CN233-2
CN233-1
CN231-1
CN231-2
CN232-1
CN232-2
CN214-B 7 24V
CN214-B 8 24V
CN214-A11 B
CN214-A12 B
CN214-A13 A
CN214-A14 A
CN214-B 5 24V
CN214-B 6 24V
CN214-B 1 B
CN214-B 2 B
CN214-B 3 A
CN214-B 4 A
CN214-A 1 24V
CN214-A 4 DRIVE
CN214-A 3 24V
CN214-A 6 DRIVE
CN214-A 2 24V
CN214-A 5 DRIVE
CN200CN200CN200CN200CN200CN200-
E
CN211-A 1 5V
CN211-A 2 FM301 LOCK
CN211-A 3 FM301 ON
CN211-A 4 SD303
CN211-A 5 VR301
CN211-A 6 PS305
CN211-A 7 PS304
CN211-A 8 PS303
CN211-A 9 PS302
CN211-A10 PS301
CN211-A11 SD301 CONT
CN211-A12 SGND
CN211-A13 M301 RTN
CN211-A14 M301 RST
CN211-A15 M301 LOCK
CN211-A16 M301 F/R
CN211-A17 SGND
CN211-A18 M301 CLOCK
CN211-B 1 SGND
CN211-B 2 M302 CLOCK
CN211-B 3 SGND
CN211-B 4 M302 LOCK
CN211-B 5 M303 LOCK
CN211-B 6 M303 F/R
CN211-B 7 SGND
CN211-B 8 M303 CLOCK
CN211-B 9 SGND
CN211-B10 SD302 DRIVE
CN211-B11 PS309
CN211-B12 PS308
CN211-B13 PS306
CN211-B14 M303 V1
CN211-B15 M303 V0
CN211-B16 M302 V1
CN211-B17 M302 V0
CN211-B18 M301 V0
CN201-A18
CN201-A17
CN201-A16
CN201-A15
CN201-A14
CN201-A13
CN201-A12
CN201-A11
CN201-A10
CN201-A 9
CN201-A 8
CN201-A 7
CN201-A 6
CN201-A 5
CN201-A 4
CN201-A 3
CN201-A 2
CN201-A 1
CN201-B18
CN201-B17
CN201-B16
CN201-B15
CN201-B14
CN201-B13
CN201-B12
CN201-B11
CN201-B10
CN201-B 9
CN201-B 8
CN201-B 7
CN201-B 6
CN201-B 5
CN201-B 4
CN201-B 3
CN201-B 2
CN201-B 1
CN65- 6 24V
CN65- 5 24V
CN65- 4 PGND
CN65- 3 PGND
CN65- 2 5V
CN65- 1 SGND
CN201-A 1
CN201-A 2
CN201-A 3
CN201-A 4
CN201-A 5
CN201-A 6
CN201-A 7
CN201-A 8
CN201-A 9
CN201-A10
CN201-A11
CN201-A12
CN201-A13
CN201-A14
CN201-A15
CN201-A16
CN201-A17
CN201-A18
CN201-B 1
CN201-B 2
CN201-B 3
CN201-B 4
CN201-B 5
CN201-B 6
CN201-B 7
CN201-B 8
CN201-B 9
CN201-B10
CN201-B11
CN201-B12
CN201-B13
CN201-B14
CN201-B15
CN201-B16
CN201-B17
CN201-B18
6.1
CN17-A18 5V
CN17-A17 FM301
CN17-A16 FM301
CN17-A15 SD303
CN17-A14 VR301
CN17-A13 PS305
CN17-A12 PS304
CN17-A11 PS303
CN17-A10 PS302
CN17-A 9 PS301
CN17-A 8 SD301 CONT
CN17-A 7 SGND
CN17-A 6 M301 RTN
CN17-A 5 M301 RST
CN17-A 4 M301 LOCK
CN17-A 3 M301 F/R
CN17-A 2 SGND
CN17-A 1 M301 CLOCK
CN17-B18 SGND
CN17-B17 M302 CLOCK
CN17-B16 SGND
CN17-B15 M302 LOCK
CN17-B14 M303 LOCK
CN17-B13 M303 F/R
CN17-B12 SGND
CN17-B11 M303 CLOCK
CN17-B10 SGND
CN17-B 9 SD302 DRIVE
CN17-B 8 PS309
CN17-B 7 PS308
CN17-B 6 PS306
CN17-B 5 M303 V1
CN17-B 4 M303 V0
CN17-B 3 M302 V1
CN17-B 2 M302 V0
CN17-B 1 M301 V0
OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
6. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM

DF-318/320 Overall Wiring Diagram
6
7
Symbol
CB(MAIN BODY)
manuals4you.com
4-93
Part name
Location
DFDB
DF drive board
1-D
M301
Original feed motor
2-B
M302
Original conveyance motor
3-B
M303
Original reverse motor
3-B
FM301
Cooling fan
4-B
SD301
Exit solenoid
1-A
SD302
Roller pressure solenoid
1-A
SD303
Stamp solenoid
2-A
PS301
No original sensor
4-B
PS302
Original exit sensor
5-B
PS303
DF open/close sensor
5-B
PS304
Cover open/close sensor
5-B
PS305
6-B
PS306
6-B
PS308
Original registration sensor
5-B
PS309
Original conveyance sensor 6-B
VR301
Original size VR
7-B
Symbol
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
DFDB
9
3
DB-211/411 Overall Wiring Diagram

4
103-B4 SGND
103-B5 PS
103-B6 5V
103-B7 SGND
103-B8 PS
103-B9 5V
MAIN BODY
24V2 7-5
24V2 7-6
PGND 7-7
PGND 7-8
5V2 7-10
SGND 7-14
RL PW 7-25
RL PG 7-26
19- 1
19- 2
19- 3
19- 4
19- 5
19- 6
19- 7
19- 8
19- 9
24V1 7-1
PGND 7-3
3
4
7
8
9
10
5
6
J61: 9 J61: 8 J61: 7 J61: 6 J61: 5 J61: 4 J61: 3 J61: 2 J61: 1 -
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J60:1 -
J60:2 -
100-1
100-2
100-3
100-4
100-5
100-6
103-B10 SGND
103-B11 PS
103-B12 5V
24V2
24V2
PGND
PGND
5V
SGND
101- 9
101- 8
101- 7
101- 6
101- 5
101- 4
101- 3
101- 2
101- 1
4
5
6
J69: 3J69: 2J69: 1-
J68: 3J68: 2J68: 1J66: 3J66: 2J66: 1-
1
2
3
114- 3
-2
-1
4
5
6
115- 3
-2
-1
1
2
3
116- 3
-2
-1
1
2
3
112- 3
-2
-1
1
2
121- 2
121- 1
104-10 SGND
104-11 PS
104-12 5V
103-13 SGND
104-14 PS
104-15 5V
SD
101
M101
Paper size detection board
DB paper feed motor
5-A
M101
Tray up drive motor /3
5-B
M102
Tray up drive motor /4
5-E
SD101
Paper feed solenoid /U
5-B
SD102
Paper feed solenoid /L
5-E
5-E
Paper feed sensor/L

No paper sensor/3
Paper feed sensor/U
Tray sensor/3
PS107
Tray upper limit sensor /4 5-F
Paper feed solenoid/L
PS108
No paper sensor /4
5-G
Tray up drive motor/4
PS109
Remaining paper sensor
3-H
HTR100
Internal heater
3-I
1
2
3
4
5
J65: 6J65: 5J65: 4-
6
7
8
J70: 6J70: 5J70: 4-
1
2
3
124- 3
-2
-1
J65: 3J65: 2J65: 1-
9
10
11
J70: 3J70: 2J70: 1-
4
5
6
125- 3
-2
-1
No paper sensor/4
J67: 3J67: 2J67: 1-
1
2
3
122- 3
-2
-1
Tray sensor/4
PSDTB/4
PS101
Tray sensor /3
PS102
Tray upper limit sensor /3 5-D
PS103
No paper sensor /3
5-D
PS104
Paper feed sensor /U
5-D
PS105
Paper feed sensor /L
5-C
PS106
Tray sensor /4
5-G
DB-211
only
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
PTC
Symbol
HTR 100
J120-2
Paper size detection board
Internal heater
J120-1
5-F
M100
PS
109
J80:1- 1
J80:2- 2
104-16 SGND
104-17 PS
104-18 5V
Tray up drive motor/3
J65:11J65:10J65: 9J65: 8J65: 7-
126- 5
-4
-3
-2
-1
5-C
board /4
TRAY3
J63: 3J63: 2J63: 1-
119-3
-2
-1
Remaining
paper sensor
J69: 6J69: 5J69: 4-
123: 2 123: 1 -
104-5 SIZE.D
104-6 SIZE.C
104-7 SIZE.B
104-8 SIZE.A
104-9 SELECT
DB.RTS
GND
DB.RXD
DB.CTS
GND
DB.TXD
DB.EXIT
LCT.EXIT
DB.RST
1
2
3
104-3 DRIVE
104-4 24V2
DB-411
Only
J63: 6J63: 5J63: 4-
Paper feed solenoid/U
PSDTB/3
117- 3
-2
-1
104-1 24V2
104-2 DRIVE
105-1 SGND
105-2 SET
105-3 5V
J60:3 J60:4 J60:7 J60:8 J60:9 J60:10J60:5 J60:6 -
6
7
8
PSDTB/3
TRAY4
J64: 3J64: 2J64: 1-
118- 5
-4
-3
-2
-1
1-B
PS
105
103-B1 SGND
103-B2 PS
103-B3 5V
1
2
3
4
5
LT-203
PS
102
103-A10 SGND
103-A11 PS
103-A12 5V
J64: 8J64: 7J64: 6J64: 5J64: 4-
Location
LT-203
PSDTB/4
111- 2
111- 1
103-A5 SIZE.D
103-A6 SIZE.C
103-A7 SIZE.B
103-A8 SIZE.A
103-A9 SELECT
Part name
board /3
1
2
103-A3 DRIVE
103-A4 24V2
PS
103
106- 1 24V2
106- 2 24V2
106- 3 24V2
106- 4 PGND
106- 5 PGND
106- 6 M151 DRIVE
106- 7 LT CLOSE
106- 8 M150 F/R
106- 9 M150 CLOCK
106-10 M150 CONT
106-11 SD151 DRIVE
106-12 PS155
106-13 PS152
106-14 PS153
106-15 PS154
106-16 PS151
106-17 LCT_TYPE
106-18 5V
106-19 SGND
DB paper feed motor
PS
107
24V2 110-19
24V2 110-18
24V2 110-17
PGND 110-16
PGND 110-15
M151 DRIVE 110-14
LT CLOSE 110-13
M150 F/R 110-12
M150 CLOCK 110-11
M150 CONT 110-10
SD151 DRIVE 110- 9
PS155 110- 8
PS152 110- 7
PS153 110- 6
PS154 110- 5
PS151 110- 4
LCT_TYPE 110- 3
106-18 5V 110- 2
SGND 110- 1
113: 2 113: 1 -
103-A1 24V2
103-A2 DRIVE
8
Symbol
PS
108
LT-203
PS
104
DBDB
110-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
102-1 24V2
102-2 24V2
102-3 PGND
102-4 PGND
102-5 NC
102-6 NC
102-7 F/R
102-8 CLOCK
102-9 ON2
102-10 SGND
102-11 5V
PS
101
SD
102
M102
PS
106
M100
6.2
4-94
6.3
LT-203 Overall Wiring Diagram

1
8
Symbol
NC (2pin)
FT102(4pin)
FT101(1pin)
114-2 PGND
114-3 24V2
114-1 24V
MS151
A
Interlock switch
113- 9 SGND
113-10 PS
113-11 5V
113-12 SGND
113-13 PS
113-14 5V
113-15 SGND
113-16 PS
113-17 5V
M150
LT paper feed motor 6-C
M151
Tray up drive motor
6-B
SD151
LT paper feed sole-
6-D
Remaining paper
1
2
LT paper feed solenoid
J82: 3J82: 2J82: 1-
3
4
5
127- 3
-2
-1
Paper feed sensor
J83: 6J83: 5J83: 4-
1
2
3
125- 3
-2
-1
J83: 3J83: 2J83: 1-
4
5
6
124- 3
-2
-1
No paper sensor
126- 3
-2
-1
Remaining paper sensor/1
122- 3
-2
-1
Remaining paper sensor/2
1
2
6-F
Tray upper limit
6-E
PS153
No paper sensor
6-E
PS154
Remaining paper
6-F
sensor /1
J82: 5J82: 4-
J84: 2 J84: 1 -
sensor
SD
151
113- 6 SGND
113- 7 PS
113- 8 5V
1-B
LT paper feed motor
PS
155
113- 3 SGND
113- 4 PS
113- 5 5V
DB-411
PS152
PS
152
113- 1 24V2
113- 2 DRIVE
DB-411
sensor /2
PS
153
(CN113:miniCT)
1-B
noid
PS
154
110-19 24V2
110-18 24V2
110-17 24V2
110-16 PGND
110-15 PGND
110-14 M151 DRIVE
110-13 LT CLOSE
110-12 M150 F/R
110-11 M150 CLOCK
110-10 M150 CONT
110- 9 SD151 DRIVE
110- 8 PS155
110- 7 PS152
110- 6 PS153
110- 5 PS154
110- 4 PS151
110- 3 SGND
110- 2 5V
110- 1 SGND
106- 1 24V2
106- 2 24V2
106- 3 24V2
106- 4 PGND
106- 5 PGND
106- 6 M151 DRIVE
106- 7 LT CLOSE
106- 8 M150 F/R
106- 9 M150 CLOCK
106-10 M150 CONT
106-11 SD151 DRIVE
106-12 PS155
106-13 PS152
106-14 PS153
106-15 PS154
106-16 PS151
106-17 SGND
106-18 5V
106-19 SGND
Location
DB-211
Tray up drive motor
PS
151
LTDB
Part name
DB-211
PS151
120-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
112-4 24V2
112-5 24V2
112-6 PGND
112-7 PGND
(H/L)
(LD)
112-8 F/R
112-9 CLOCK
112-10 CONT
112-11 SGND
112-12 5V
M150
DBDB
121- 1
121- 2
112-1 24V
112-2 DRIVE
112-3 PGND
DB-211
DB-411
M151
PS155
Paper feed sensor
6-D
MS151
Interlock switch
6-A
HTR150 Internal heater
4-G
G
Internal heater
MAIN BODY
DCPS
H
DB
PTC HEATER
J120 :1 -
J120 :2 -
J80 :1 -
J80 :2 -
PTC
J121-1
HTR 150
J121-2
Symbol
Connetcor
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
I
1
manuals4you.com
4-95
Blank page
4-96
I
1
2
3
M705
M706
Tray up/down
motor
1
2
G
CN300-A10 24V
CN300-A9 24V
CN300-A8 24V
CN300-A11 NC
CN300-A4 5V
CN300-A3 5V
4
5
MAIN BODY
165
164
166
CN708-1 DRIVE1
CN754-1
CN754-2
CN752-1
CN752-2
CN752-3
CN753-1
CN753-2
3
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
CN708-2 DRIVE2
CN708-4 5V
CN708-5
PS712 PS
CN702-11 SGND
CN708-6 PS713 PS
CN702-10 SGND
CN702-9 MACK/FSCTS CN708-7 PS714 PS
CN708-8 SGND
CN702-8 SGND
CN708-3 NC
CN702-7 SREQ/NC
CN702-6 MRXD/FSSIN
CN702-5 SGND
CN702-4 SACK/FSRTS
CN702-3 MREQ/NC
CN702-2 SGND
CN702-1 MTXD/FSOUT
CN701-8 PGND
CN701-9 PGND
CN701-10 PGND
CN701-6 SGND
CN701-7 SGND
CN701-4 5V
CN701-5 5V
CN707-B3 5V
CN707-B2 PS
CN707-B1 SGND
CN751-1
CN751-2
CN761-1
CN761-2
CN761-3
CN761-4
CN745-5
CN745-4
CN745-2
CN745-3
CN745-1
VCC
HD
LS
READY
GND
MTR+
MTR+
MTRMTR-
CN756-13
CN756-14
CN756-15
CN756-10
CN756-11
CN756-12
CN756-7
CN756-8
CN756-9
CN756-4
CN756-5
CN756-6
CN756-1
CN756-2
CN756-3

Tray count sensor
PS704
PS716
PS706
Alignment HP sensor/F
PS710
Stapler HP sensor
Stapler detection sensor
PS713
PS714
5V
PS
SGND
5V
PS
SGND
Stapler motor
Alignment HP sensor/R
No paper sensor
PS709
PS707
Paper exit sensor

PS703
PS708

PS711
PS712
M708
CN741-1
CN741-2
CN741-3
CN740-1
CN740-2
CN740-3
CN738-1
CN738-2
CN738-3
CN739-1
CN739-2
CN739-3
CN737-1
CN737-2
CN737-3
CN744-1
CN744-2
CN744-3
CN735-1
CN735-2
CN735-3
CN734-1
CN734-2
CN734-3
CN736-1
CN736-2
CN736-3
Pressure motor
FNS entrance sensor

PS702
M707
Pressure sensor
PS701
5V
PS
SGND
CN730-1
CN730-2
Shutter sensor
PS705
CN300-B1 SGND
CN300-B2 SGND
CN300-B3 MACK/FSCTS
CN300-B4 SGND
CN300-B5 SREQ/NC
CN300-B6 MRXD/FSSIN
CN300-B7 SGND
CN300-B8 SACK/FSRTS
CN300-B9 MREQ/NC
CN300-B10 SGND
CN300-B11 MTXD/FSOUT
FNSCB
CN701-1 24V
CN701-2 24V
CN701-3 24V
CN707-B6 5V
CN707-B5 PS
CN707-B4 SGND
CN707-B9 5V
CN707-B8 PS
CN707-B7 SGND
CN707-B12 5V
CN707-B11 PS
CN707-B10 SGND
CN707-B15 NC
CN707-B14 NC
CN707-B13 NC
CN707-A3 5V
CN707-A2 PS
CN707-A1 SGND
CN707-A6 5V
CN707-A5 PS
CN707-A4 SGND
CN707-A9 5V
CN707-A8 PS
CN707-A7 SGND
CN707-A12 5V
CN707-A11 PS
CN707-A10 SGND
CN707-A15 5V
CN707-A14 PS
CN707-A13 SGND
CN706-1 DRIVE1
CN706-2 DRIVE2
CN709-3 NC
CN709-2 PSNC
CN709-1 NC
CN733-1
CN733-2
CN733-3
CN732-1
CN732-2
CN732-3
CN734-1
CN734-2
CN734-3
CN300-A7 PGND
CN300-A6 PGND
CN300-A5 PGND
A
24V4
A
B
24V4
B
CN710-1 DRIVE1
CN710-2 DRIVE2
CN705-3
CN705-2
CN705-4
CN705-5
CN705-1
CN705-6
CN703-9 A
CN703-4 24V4
CN703-10 A
CN703-11 B
CN703-3 24V4
CN703-12 B
A
24V3
A
B
24V3
B
CN709-6 5V
CN709-5 PS
CN709-4 SGND
CN709-9 5V
CN709-8 PS
CN709-7 SGND
CN709-12 5V
CN709-11 PS
CN709-10 SGND
Front door switch

MS701
CN300-A2 SGND
CN300-A1 SGND
CN726-1
CN726-2
CN725-1
CN725-5
CN725-3
CN725-2
CN725-6
CN725-4
CN724-1
CN724-5
CN724-3
CN724-2
CN724-6
CN724-4
CN703-5
CN703-2
CN703-6
CN703-7
CN703-1
CN703-8
CN716-1 DRIVE
CN716-2 PGND
CN713-1 LOCK
CN713-2 24V
CN713-3 PGND
Shutter switch
MS702
Stapler
movement
motor
M704
M703
CN723-1
CN723-5
CN723-3
CN723-2
CN723-6
CN723-4
CN762-1
CN762-2
CN746-3
CN746-2
CN746-1
CN712-1 24V IN
CN712-2 24V OUT
Alignment
motor/F
Alignment
motor/R
SD701
FM701
CN711-1 24V IN2

CN711-2 24V OUT2
Roller
release
solenoid
Cooling motor
M702
H
CN704-9 A
CN704-3 24V2
CN704-10 A
CN704-11 B
CN704-4 24V2
CN704-12 B
A
24V1
A
B
24V1
B
CN722-1
CN722-3
CN722-5
CN722-7
CN722-9
CN722-11
CN704-5
CN704-1
CN704-6
CN704-7
CN704-2
CN704-8
Paper exit
motor
M701
CN721-1
CN721-3
CN721-5
CN721-7
CN721-9
CN721-11
6.4
FNS
conveyance
motor
FS-112 Overall Wiring Diagram

6
7
manuals4you.com
4-97
9
A
F
F
Symbol
Connetcor
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
manuals4you.com
Symbol
Part name
Location
FNSCB
FNS control board
1-D
M701
FNS conveyance motor
1-H
M702
Paper exit motor
1-H
M703
Alignment motor /R
2-I
M704
Alignment motor /F
3-I
M705
Stapler movement motor
3-I
M706
Tray up/down motor
4-I
M707
Pressure motor
3-B
M708
Stapler motor
6-C
FM701
Cooling motor
2-I
SD701
Roller release solenoid
2-H
MS701
Front door switch
1-B
MS702
Shutter switch
1-B
PS701
Pressure sensor
2-B
PS702
FNS entrance sensor
2-B
PS703
Paper exit sensor
3-B
PS704
4-B
PS705
Shutter sensor
2-B
PS706
4-B
PS707
No paper sensor
5-B
PS708
5-B
PS709
Alighnment HP sensor /R
5-B
PS710
Alighnment HP sensor /F
5-B
PS711
3-B
PS712
Stapler HP sensor
6-B
PS713
Staple detection sensor
6-B
PS714
7-B
PS716
Tray count sensor
4-B
4-98
6.5
RU-101 Overall Wiring Diagram

1
9
A
CN300-B3
CN200B-5
CN300-B4
CN200B-3
CN300-B6
CN200B-4
CN300-B8
CN200B-2
CN300-B10
CN200B-6
CN300-B11
CN200B-7
MRTS
GND
MRXD
MRTS
GND
MTXD
C
GND
GND
GND
DC24V
DC24V
DC24V
CN300-A5
CN3-6
CN4-1
CN200C-3
CN300-A6
CN3-5
CN4-2
CN200C-2
CN300-A7
CN3-4
CN300-A8
CN3-3
CN300-A9
CN3-2
CN300-A10
CN3-1
DC24V
GND
FUB
MAIN BODY
F
Passage sensor
PS2
CN1-1
CN200A-7
CN1-2
CN200A-6
CN1-3
CN200A-5
Front door sensor
PS1
H
Symbol
Part name
CN200A-4
CN2-2
CN200A-3
CN2-3
CN200A-2
DC5V
PS2 ON
GND
DC5V
PS1 ON
GND
Symbol
Location
FUB
Fuse board
PS1
Front door sensor 4-F
PS2
Passage sensor
CN2-1
4-C
CN200C-1
Connetcor
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
FS-113
4-G
manuals4you.com
4-99
Blank page
4-100
6.6

1
7
W
W
B
W
W
Hole Punch Position Switch

Hole Punch
Selector Motor
Only for inch

destination
B
PS2
Passage Sensor (RU-101)
PS1
Front Door Sensor (RU-101)
E
PWB-E_GL
PWB-E_GL
PWB-C
CN200C
RU-101
CN201B
G
PWD-F
PWD-F_GL
Exit Roll Home

Position Sensor
PWD-F
Connetcor
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
PWB-D
PWD-F_GL
I
1
Symbol
manuals4you.com
4-101
Symbol
Part name
Location
RU-101
RU-101
1-F
M1
Transport motor
3-B
M2
Lower entrance motor
3-A
M3
Exit motor
2-A
M4
Upper entrance motor
3-B
M5
CD aligning motor
5-B
M6
Stapling unit moving sensor
3-A
M7
Elevator motor
1-D
M8
Shift motor
1-C
M9
Lower paddle motor
5-A
M11
Punch motor
1-C
M12
Storage roller/rolls spacing motor
2-A
M13
Exit roller/rolls spacing motor
7-D
M14
Hole punch selector motor
7-A
M15
Upper paddle motor
7-D
CL
Punch clutch
6-A
SL1
Upper/Lower entrance switching solenoid
7-E
SL2
1st entrance switching solenoid
7-E
SL3
Upper paddle solenoid
7-D
S1
Set switch
1-E
S2
Elevator tray upper limit switch
1-E
S3
Elevator tray lower limit switch
1-D
S4
Hole punch position switch
7-A
PC1
1st tray exit sensor
7-G
PC2
Lower entrance sensor
7-G
PC3
Storage sensor
5-H
PC4
Upper entrance sensor
5-H
PC5
Finisher tray paper detecting sensor
2-I
PC6
1st tray full detecting sensor
7-F
PC7
Elevator tray full detecting sensor
7-H
PC8
Elevator tray paper detecting sensor
2-H
PC9
CD aligning home position sensor
2-I
PC10
Shift home position sensor
2-H
PC11
Shift motor pulse sensor
2-H
PC12
Storage roller home position sensor
5-H
PC13
Exit roll home position sensor
7-H
PC14
6-I
PC15
6-B
PC17
Front door detecting sensor
7-F
PC18
Upper cover detecting sensor
7-F
PS1
Front door sensor (RU-101)
7-B
PS2
Passage sensor (RU-101)
7-B
PWB-C
Elevator tray upper limit sensor LED
7-E
PWB-D
Elevator tray upper limit sensor PQ
5-I
4-102
6.7
SK-114 Overall Wiring Diagram

1
A
Staple Home Position Sensor 2
B
Staple Home Position Sensor 1
D
Saddle Stapler 1 Needle Empty Detect Sensor
Saddle Stapler 1 Self Priming Detect Sensor
Saddle Stapler 2 Needle Empty Detect Sensor

Saddle Stapler 2 Self Priming Detect Sensor
FS-114
FS-114
Symbol
Connector Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
FS-114
FS-114
I
1
manuals4you.com
4-103
Symbol
Part name
Location
FS-114
FS-114
4-H, 7-E
M8-SK
Saddle exit motor
3-I
M9-SK
Saddle exit open/close motor
3-H
M10-SK
Crease motor
7-G
M13-SK
In & out guide motor
3-H
M14-SK
Layable guide motor
3-G
PC18-SK
Saddle exit roller home position sensor
7-A
PC20-SK
Saddle exit sensor
7-B
PC21-SK
Saddle tray empty sensor
7-A
PC22-SK
Crease roller home position sensor
7-H
PC23-SK
In & out guide home position sensor
7-B
PC25-SK
Transport pulse sensor
7-C
PC26-SK
Layable guide home sensor
7-C
S4-SK
Saddle interlock switch
2-D
PWB-C SK
Main control board
3-A
4-104
APPENDIX
7. APPENDIX
7.1
7145 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/4)

1
RL1 POWER
AC(H)
FT20
J13-2
CN9-1
BT1
CN9-2
L2 DRIVE
CN9-3
BT4
BT2
AC(N)
CBR 2
7-2 24V
7-4 PGND
7-12 5V
7-16 SGND
7-20 SGND
7-18 12V
7-22 SGND
Main power switch

FT9
SW1
FT10
DC PSY
BT7
AC(H)
AC(N)
24V
5V
+12V
-12V
N.C
5V
24V
NMI
12V
SGND
-12V
5-3 PGND
5-4 PGND
for SCDB
DF-318
E
for
BIAS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
6-2 24V
6-4 24V
6-6 24V
6-8 PGND
6-10 PGND
6-12 PGND
6-14 5V
6-16 5V
6-18 SGND
6-20 SGND
11
12
8-1 24V
8-3 PGND
DCPS
for FNS
10-1 DRIVE
10-2 EM
10-3 PGND
RL CONT
L2 CONT
L3 CONT
24V EM
FM1 EM
7-1 24V
7-3 PGND
7-5 24V
7-6 24V
7-7 PGND
7-8 PGND
7-10 5V
7-14 SGND
7-25 RL PWR
7-26 RL PGND
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
for OPTION
6-1 24V
6-3 24V
6-5 24V
6-7 PGND
6-9 PGND
6-11 PGND
6-13 5V
6-15 5V
6-17 SGND
6-19 SGND
1-1
1-2
1-3
25 1-4
26 1-5
23
24
5V
5V
N.C
SGND
SGND
5V
5V
SGND
SGND
12V
SGND
-12V
SGND
7-9
7-11
7-13
7-15
7-17
7-21
7-23
7-24
12V
7-19
5-1
24V
5-2
J60: 1 - 1
J60: 2 - 2
J60: 3 - 3
J60: 4 - 4
J60: 7 - 7
J60: 8 - 8
J60: 9 - 9
J60:10 - 10
- 5
- 6
72
73
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
FCB
EUROPE Only
26 25 24 23
SWD24V
J23-1
J24-1A #250
J24-1B #250
J23-3
J23-2
J24-2A #250
J24-2B #250
J23-4
SWD24V
30
31
PTC heater
PTC
935-1
935-2
83- 1 X2
- 2 Y2
- 3 X1
- 4 Y1
86-14 VLCD
-13 VEE
-12 D3
-11 D2
-10 D1
- 9 D0
- 8 VEE(24V)
- 7 VSS(GND)
- 6 VDD(5V)
- 5 XSCL
- 4 LP
- 3 DIN
- 2 N.C
- 1 DISPOFF
84-3 5V
84-4 SGND
84-5 INV ON(PWM)
for CB
BL
106- 1 24V2
106- 2 24V2
106- 3 24V2
106- 4 PGND
106- 5 PGND
106- 6 M151 DRIVE
106- 7 LT CLOSE
106- 8 M150 F/R
106- 9 M150 CLOCK
106-10 M150 CONT
106-11 SD151 DRIVE
106-12 PS155
106-13 PS152
106-14 PS153
106-15 PS154
106-16 PS151
106-17 LCT_TYPE
106-18 5V
106-19 SGND
71
75
J24: 1 - 1
8-2
LCDB
DCPS cooling fan
J24: 2 - 2
BT1
for DCPS
Interlock switch
FM1
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
BT2
PGND 8-4
DB-211
DB-411
J21-03
SGND
SGND
L3 CONT
5V
SW3
24V
24V
INV2
OB
80-A12
80-A11
80-A10
80- A9
80- A8
80- A7
80- A6
80- A5
80- A4
80- A3
80- A2
80- A1
J38-A1 -A12
J38-A2 -A11
J38-A3 -A10
J38-A4 -A9
J38-A5 -A8
J38-A6 -A7
J38-A7 -A6
J38-A8 -A5
J38-A9 -A4
J38-A10 -A3
J38-A11 -A2
J38-A12 -A1
34-A1 UD3
34-A2 SGND
34-A3 UD1
34-A4 XSCL
34-A5 SGND
34-A6 YD
34-A7 OPTXD
34-A8 SGND
34-A9 OPRTS
34-A10 OPRXD
34-A11 SGND
34-A12 OPCTS
80-B12
80-B11
80-B10
80- B9
80- B8
80- B7
80- B6
80- B5
80- B4
80- B3
80- B2
80- B1
J38-B1 -B12
J38-B2 -B11
J38-B3 -B10
J38-B4 -B9
J38-B5 -B8
J38-B6 -B7
J38-B7 -B6
J38-B8 -B5
J38-B9 -B4
J38-B10 -B3
J38-B11 -B2
J38-B12 -B1
34-B1 UD2
34-B2 SGND
34-B3 UD0
34-B4 LP
34-B5 SGND
34-B6 LCDENB
34-B7 OPRST
34-B8 SGND
34-B9 OPINT
34-B10 MONIT
34-B11 5V
34-B12 5V
88- 3
-2
-1
SCB 1/3
H
Symbol
Speaker
PSW2B
/SW2
89-1 FL HOT
-4 FL GND
102
Fixing heater
lamp/2
2-7
2-6
2-5
2-4
2-3
2-2
2-1
PAKB
CN99-4
CN99-3
CN99-2
CN99-1
50
51
52
53
BT6
CN9-3
BT5
L3
FT27
500- 4
500- 3
500- 2
500- 1
FT4
FT28
J13-4
J21-03
L3 DRIVE
CR002
SGND
SGND
5V
5V
FT6
31- 7
31- 6
31- 5
31- 4
31- 3
31- 2
31- 1
Circuit breaker/2
-12V
SGND
12V
NMI
24V
5VV
N.C
FT2
L2
FT25
42- 9
42- 8
42- 7
42- 6
42- 5
42- 4
42- 3
42- 2
42- 1
CR001
12V
SGND
-12V
SGND
12V
SGND
SGND
5V
5V
AC DRIVE
NF
Fixing heater
lamp/1
FT26
J13-3
J21-02
84-1 SGND
84-2 MONIT
INLET
AC(H)
Circuit breaker/1
FT1
EUROPE 200-240V 50Hz

USA 120V 60Hz
MAIN RL
RT3
RT4
FT8
84-6 VR L
84-7 VR SIG
84-8 VR H
84-9 SCAN6
84-10 RTN3
84-11 5V
84-12 SGND
84-13 SW2
PLUG
FT7
BT3
FT23
Noise filter
FT5
CBR 1
74
FT22
J13-1
FT3
FT21
Thermostat
JAPAN AC100V 50/60Hz
85 - 8
85 - 7
85 - 6
85 - 5
85 - 4
85 - 3
85 - 2
85 - 1
J21-01
RL1 CNT
FT24
PLUG
J:40LA8861
24V(C)
TS
Connector
Faston
Relay connector
Crimp
514: 1 - 2
514: 2 - 1
8
manuals4you.com
Appendix-1
Battery
CN47
103
1
2
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
3
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
400-A 1 SGND
-A 2 BCLOCK12
-A 3 SGND
-A 4 DRAM_D31
-A 5 DRAM_D30
-A 6 DRAM_D29
-A 7 DRAM_D28
-A 8 DRAM_D27
-A 9 DRAM_D26
-A10 DRAM_D25
-A11 DRAM_D24
-A12 DRAM_D23
-A13 DRAM_D22
-A14 DRAM_D21
-A15 DRAM_D20
-A16 DRAM_D19
-A17 DRAM_D18
-A18 DRAM_D17
-A19 DRAM_D16
-A20 5V
-A21 DRAM_D15
-A22 DRAM_D14
-A23 DRAM_D13
-A24 DRAM_D12
-A25 DRAM_D11
-A26 DRAM_D10
-A27 DRAM_D9
-A28 DRAM_D8
-A29 DRAM_D7
-A30 DRAM_D6
-A31 DRAM_D5
-A32 DRAM_D4
-A33 DRAM_D3
-A34 DRAM_D2
-A35 DRAM_D1
-A36 DRAM_D0
-A37 5V
-A38 SGND
-A39 VBAT
-A40 XWAIT
-A41 5V
-A42 5V
-A43 DR_CKE
-A44 XFAX_RST
-A45 XIRST
-A46 XICS5
-A47 XICS7
-A48 XIRD
-A49 XMWR
-A50 XIOSEL2
-A51 L_A20
-A52 L_A19
-A53 L_A18
-A54 L_A17
-A55 L_A16
-A56 L_A15
-A57 L_A14
-A58 L_A13
-A59 L_A12
-A60 L_A11
-B 1 SGND
-B 2 BCLOCK5
-B 3 SGND
-B 4 XFAX_CIACK
-B 5 XFAX_COACK
-B 6 XFAX_DIACK
-B 7 XFAX_DOACK
-B 8 XAHA1_INT
-B 9 XEXIN_ACK
-B10 XEXOUT_ACK
-B11 -12V
-B12 EXOUT_D7
-B13 EXOUT_D6
-B14 EXOUT_D5
-B15 EXOUT_D4
-B16 EXOUT_D3
-B17 EXOUT_D2
-B18 EXOUT_D1
-B19 EXOUT_D0
-B20 5V
-B21 EXIN_D0
-B22 EXIN_D1
-B23 EXIN_D2
-B24 EXIN_D3
-B25 EXIN_D4
-B26 EXIN_D5
-B27 EXIN_D6
-B28 EXIN_D7
-B29 XFAX_DRIVE
-B30 XEXOUT_REQ
-B31 XEXIN_REQ
-B32 XICS6
-B33 XFAX_DOREQ
-B34 XFAX_DIREQ
-B35 XFAX_COREQ
-B36 XFAX_CIREQ
-B37 5V
-B38 SGND
-B39 MONITOR
-B40 XRC_INT
-B41 12V
-B42 PDA7
-B43 PDA6
-B44 PDA5
-B45 PDA4
-B46 PDA3
-B47 PDA2
-B48 PDA1
-B49 PDA0
-B50 L_A0
-B51 L_A1
-B52 L_A2
-B53 L_A3
-B54 L_A4
-B55 L_A5
-B56 L_A6
-B57 L_A7
-B58 L_A8
-B59 L_A9
-B60 L_A10
CN501
126
127
4
128
129
130
40- 1 STROBE
- 2 DATA0
- 3 DATA1
- 4 DATA2
- 5 DATA3
- 6 DATA4
- 7 DATA5
- 8 DATA6
- 9 DATA7
-10 ACK
-11 BUSY
-12 PE
-13 SLCT
-14 AUTOFD
-15 N.C
-16 SGND
-17 SGND
-18 N.C
-19 SGND
-20 SGND
-19 SGND
-22 SGND
-23 SGND
-24 SGND
-25 SGND
-26 SGND
-27 SGND
-28 SGND
-29 SGND
-30 HLOGIC
-31 INT
-32 FAULT
-33 SGND
-34 N.C
-35 N.C
-36 SELECTIN
HD-103 Type A
5V
SGND
/INDEX
SGND
/INDPR
G
3
431- 5
431- 4
431- 3
431- 2
431- 1
432-B1 LOAD
432-B2 DACLK
432-B3 DI
432-B4 SGND
432-B5 /ALM2
432-B6 /S/H2
432-B7 /ALM_RST
432-B8 SGND
432-B9 SGND
432-B10 -VIDEO1
432-B11 +VIDEO1
432-B12 SGND
D
2
J52: 5 - 1
J52: 4 - 2
J52: 3 - 3
J52: 2 - 4
J52: 1 - 5
H
432-A1 /ENB1
432-A2 /ALM1
432-A3 /BIAS
432-A4 /S/H1
432-A5 SGND
432-A6 LD+5V
432-A7 LD+5V
432-A8 +5VRN
432-A9 SGND
432-A10 -VIDEO2
432-A11 +VIDEO2
432-A12 SGND
J53: B1 - B12
J53: B2 - B11
J53: B3 - B10
J53: B4 - B9
J53: B5 - B8
J53: B6 - B7
J53: B7 - B6
J53: B8 - B5
J53: B9 - B4
J53:B10 - B3
J53:B11 - B2
J53:B12 - B1
J53: A1 - A12
J53: A2 - A11
J53: A3 - A10
J53: A4 - A9
J53: A5 - A8
J53: A6 - A7
J53: A7 - A6
J53: A8 - A5
J53: A9 - A4
J53:A10 - A3
J53:A11 - A2
J53:A12 - A1
ADB
60- 1 SGND
- 2 TG
- 3 CLAMP
- 4 ACLAMP
- 5 BCLAMP
- 6 SGND
- 7 SGND
- 8 +TCK
- 9 -TCK
-10 SGND
-11 SGND
-12 +RCK
-13 -RCK
-14 SGND
-15 SGND
-16 +IN_CLOCK
-17 -IN_CLOCK
-18 SGND
-19 SCLOCK
-20 SCLOCK
-21 *SEN
-22 SDI
-23 SDO
-24 SGND
-25 SGND
-26 -AD_D0
-27 +AD_D0
-28 SGND
-29 SGND
-30 -AD_D1
-31 +AD_D1
-32 SGND
-33 SGND
-34 -OUT_CLOCK
-35 +OUT_CLOCK
-36 SGND
-37 SGND
-38 ADRST
-39 APR
-40 SGND
-41 5V
-42 5V
-43 5V
-44 5V
-45 SGND
-46 12V
-47 12V
-48 12V
-49 12V
-50 SGND
7.2
46- 1
46- 2
46- 3
46- 4
46- 5
46- 6
46- 7
46- 8
46- 9
46-10
46-11
46-12
46-13
46-14
46-15
46-16
46-17
46-18
46-19
46-20
46-21
46-22
46-23
46-24
46-25
46-26
46-27
46-28
46-29
46-30
46-31
46-32
46-33
46-34
46-35
46-36
46-37
46-38
46-39
46-40
46-41
46-42
46-43
46-44
46-45
46-46
46-47
46-48
46-49
46-50
APPENDIX

5
DIMM
CN35
7
8
I
7
8
Appendix-2
A
A
B
B
FK-102/FL-102
C
C
CN37 Board to Board Connector
F
F
PRMB
CN32,33
FAN
CN502
SCB 2/3
Symbol
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
131
1
COPY VENDER
2
-6
H/L -7
3
-1
-6
H/L -7
M1
M9
M11
Main motor
Paper feed motor
Fixing motor
P.G -9
24V -10
4
SD9
FM2
Toner
solenoid
J06:3 - 1
J06:2 - 2
J06:1 - 3
954-1
-2
-3
TLD
Toner level
sensor
PS 5
TC
Toner bottle
sensor
Total counter
ADU gate
solenoid
SD5
M4
M10
Toner supply
motor/1
Toner supply
motor/2
Fixing cooling fan
SD4
MC1 Cleaning web

solenoid
Registration clutch
FM6
Internal
dehumidifying
fan/2
FM3
Internal
dehumidifying
fan/1
Tray
motor/L
M8
M7
Tray
motor/U
5V
-1
S.G -2
manuals4you.com
Appendix-3
CLK -4
-6
H/L -7
LD
Developing motor
913: 3 - 1
913: 2 - 2
913: 1 - 3
910: 3 - 1
910: 2 - 2
910: 1 - 3
24V -11
24V -10
P.G -9
P.G -8
Developing
suction fan
26-A3 PGND
26-A2 EM
26-A1 DRIVE
26-A6 PGND
26-A5 EM
26-A4 DRIVE
SGND 17-B18
M302 CLOCK 17-B17
SGND 17-B16
M302 EM 17-B15
M303 EM 17-B14
M303 F/R 17-B13
SGND 17-B12
M303 CLOCK 17-B11
SGND 17-B10
SD302 DRIVE 17-B9
PS309 17-B8
PS308 17-B7
PS306 17-B6
M303 V1 17-B5
M303 V0 17-B4
M302 V1 17-B3
M302 V0 17-B2
M301 V0 17-B1
201:B1 - B18
201:B2 - B17
201:B3 - B16
201:B4 - B15
201:B5 - B14
201:B6 - B13
201:B7 - B12
201:B8 - B11
201:B9 - B10
201:B10- B9
201:B11- B8
201:B12- B7
201:B13- B6
201:B14- B5
201:B15- B4
201:B16- B3
201:B17- B2
201:B18- B1
68-B1
68-B2
68-B3
68-B4
68-B5
68-B6
68-B7
68-B8
68-B9
68-B10
68-B11
68-B12
68-B13
68-B14
68-B15
68-B16
68-B17
68-B18
68-A1
68-A2
68-A3
68-A4
68-A5
68-A6
68-A7
68-A8
68-A9
68-A10
68-A11
68-A12
68-A13
68-A14
68-A15
68-A16
68-A17
68-A18
24V
24V
24V
PGND
PGND
PGND
5V
5V
SGND
SGND
CW/CCW-5
26-A17 5V
26-A16 SGND
26-A15 CONT
26-A14 CLOCK
26-A13 N.C
26-A12 LD
26-A11 N.C
26-A10 PGND
26-A9 PGND
26-A8 24V
26-A7 24V
201:A1 - A18
201:A2 - A17
201:A3 - A16
201:A4 - A15
201:A5 - A14
201:A6 - A13
201:A7 - A12
201:A8 - A11
201:A9 - A10
201:A10- A9
201:A11- A8
201:A12- A7
201:A13- A6
201:A14- A5
201:A15- A4
201:A16- A3
201:A17- A2
201:A18- A1
904-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
CONT -3
26-B2 24V
26-B1 DRIVE
J51:1 - 5
J51:2 - 4
J51:3 - 3
J51:4 - 2
J51:5 - 1
Polygon motor
906-1
-2
J54:1 - 5
J54:2 - 4
J54:3 - 3
J54:4 - 2
J54:5 - 1
Humidity sensor
5V 17-A18
FM301 EM 17-A17
FM301 CONT 17-A16
SD303 CONT 17-A15
VR301 17-A14
PS305 17-A13
PS304 17-A12
PS303 17-A11
PS302 17-A10
PS301 17-A9
SD301 DRIVE 17-A8
SGND 17-A7
M301 RTN 17-A6
M301 RST 17-A5
M301 EM 17-A4
M301 F/R 17-A3
SGND 17-A2
M301 CLOCK 17-A1
22-5
22-4
22-3
22-2
22-1
932:2 - 1
932:1 - 2
J16-12
J16-18
PreSeparation charging
claw
lamp
solenoid
26-B4 24V
26-B3 DRIVE
CLOCK
LOCK
DRIVE
PGND
24V
J15: 2 - 12
J15: 1 - 13
HUM1
29-A3 PGND
29-A2 EM
29-A1 DRIVE
24V 26-B16
DRIVE 26-B17
907-1
-2
J38: 3 - 4
J38: 2 - 5
J38: 1 - 6
912: 3 - 1
912: 2 - 2
912: 1 - 3
29-A6 PGND
29-A5 EM
29-A4 DRIVE
928:2 - 1
928:1 - 2
J16-15
J16-16
SD7
J38: 6 - 1
J38: 5 - 2
J38: 4 - 3
J15: 4 - 10
J15: 3 - 11
TCSB
914: 3 - 1
914: 2 - 2
914: 1 - 3
DRIVE 26-B14
24V 26-B15
Toner control
sensor board
29-A8 24V
29-A7 DRIVE
DEV UNIT
29-A10 DRIVE
29-A9 24V
92-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
FS SOUT
SGND
N.C
FS RTS
SGND
FS SIN
N.C
SGND
FS CTS
SGND
SGND
925:2J29:2
-1 -1
925:1J29:1
-2 -2
920: 2 - 1
920: 1 - 2
J11: 7 - 1
J11: 6 - 2
J11: 5 - 3
J11: 4 - 4
J11: 3 - 5
J11: 2 - 6
J11: 1 - 7
102
J16-4
J16-5
J16-6
J16-7
J16-8
TDS
J16-2
J16-3
Toner density sensor
J15:11 - 3
J15:10 - 4
J15: 9 - 5
J15: 8 - 6
J15: 7 - 7
J15: 6 - 8
J15: 5 - 9
J16-13
J16-14
983-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
5V 26-B7
DRUM.TH 26-B8
12V 26-B9
TNRIF 26-B10
TNOUT1 26-B11
TNOUT2 26-B12
SGND 26-B13
J15:13 - 1
J15:12 - 2
J17-2
J17-3
J17-9
J17-5
PS 2
N.C 26-B5
N.C 26-B6
1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
29-A16 24V
29-A15 24V
29-A14 B
29-A13 B
29-A12 A
29-A11 A
J14: 6 J14: 5 J14: 4 J14: 3 J14: 2

J14: 1
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
915:6 - 1
915:5 - 2
915:4 - 3
915:3 - 4
915:2 - 5
915:1 - 6
25-A1
25-A2
25-A3
25-A4
25-A5
25-A6
CONT
12V
TDS ANG
SGND
N.C
N.C
Fixing exit sensor
24V
24V
B
B
A
A
951-1
-2
-3
300:A10- A10
300:A9 - A9
300:A8 - A8
300:A7 - A7
300:A6 - A6
300:A5 - A5
300:A4 - A4
300:A3 - A3
300:A2 - A2
300:A1 - A1
300:A11- A11
29-B6
29-B5
29-B4
29-B3
29-B2
29-B1
J18: 3 - 1
J18: 2 - 2
J18: 1 - 3
300:B11- B11
300:B10- B10
300:B9 - B9
300:B8 - B8
300:B7 - B7
300:B6 - B6
300:B5 - B5
300:B4 - B4
300:B3 - B3
300:B2 - B2
300:B1 - B1
903:6 - 1
903:5 - 2
903:4 - 3
903:3 - 4
903:2 - 5
903:1 - 6
J13:B4 - B1
J13:B3 - B2
J13:B2 - B3
HV
29-B8 24V
29-B7 DRIVE
J12: 5 - 5
J12: 4 - 6
J12: 3 - 7
J12: 2 - 8
J12: 1 - 9
980:3 - 3
980:4 - 4
J13:A2 - A3
J13:A1 - A4
73- 3
73- 2
73- 1
FT37
FUSING UNIT
Fixing
Fixing
temperature temperature
sensor/1
sensor/2
TH2
18-10
18-11
18-12
18-13
18-14
J12: 7 - 3
J12: 6 - 4
TH2 ANG 18- 8

SGND 18- 9
980:1 - 1
980:2 - 2
J13:A4 - A1
J13:A3 - A2
70- 3
70- 2
70- 1
FT36
FT39
FS-112
FS-113
FS-114
SGND
PS
5V
N.C
N.C
J12: 9 - 1
J12: 8 - 2
TH1 ANG 18- 6

SGND 18- 7
J09-7
J09-8
J09-9
J17-12
J25-5
70- 5
70- 4
FT38
TH1
29-B10 DRIVE
29-B9 24V
29-B13 5V
29-B12 PS
29-B11 SGND
29-B16 5V
29-B15 TLD ANG
29-B14 SGND
27- 5
27- 6
27- 7
27- 8
J17-7
J09-5
J09-6
70- 9
70- 8
70- 7
70- 6
926:2 - 1
1-2
J05:3 - 1
J05:2 - 2
J05:1 - 3
984-1
-2
-3
N.C
SGND
HUM1 ANG
5V
J25-1
J17-11
PGND 27- 3
24V 27- 4
B.CONT 27- 1
B.SIG 27- 2
J09-1
J09-2
J09-3
J09-4
FT30
LT-203
18- 2 24V
18- 1 DRIVE
18- 5 PGND
18- 4 LOCK
18- 3 DRIVE
CB 1/2
986-1
986-2
H
J28: 3 - 1
J28: 2 - 2
J28: 1 - 3
J25-4
J16-11
FT33
929:2 - 1
929:1 - 2
911: 3 - 1
911: 2 - 2
911: 1 - 3
J17-8
24V -11
72- 1
FT32
to GUIDE
PLATE
P.G -8
24V J25-2
11
PGND
12
LD
CW/CCW-5
CLK -4
41-11 5V
41-10 SGND
41-9 CONT
41-8 CLOCK
41-7 N.C
41-6 LOCK
41-5 N.C
41-4 PGND
41-3 PGND
41-2 24V
41-1 24V
for
DCPS
5V
FT31
to BIAS
100
S.G -2
J16-20
99
101
CONT -3
72- 5
97
24V -11
23-B8 PGND
23-B9 PGND
23-B10 24V
23-B11 24V
98
24V -10
P.G -9
95
P.G -8
FT40
CHARGER
94
-6
93
96
LD
FT35
92
CW/CCW-5
GRID
S.G -2
FT34
90
CLK -4
71-12
71-11
71-10
71- 9
71- 8
71- 7
71- 6
71- 5
71- 4
71- 3
71- 2
71- 1
110-19
110-18
110-17
110-16
110-15
110-14
110-13
110-12
110-11
110-10
110- 9
110- 8
110- 7
110- 6
110- 5
110- 4
110- 3
110- 2
110- 1
89
CONT -3
5V
SGND
CONT
CLOCK
F/R
SGND
23-B1
23-B2
23-B3
23-B4
23-B5
23-B6
50 51 52 53
88
91
-1
F
J10:12 - 1
J10:11 - 2
J10:10 - 3
J10: 9 - 4
J10: 8 - 5
J10: 7 - 6
J10: 6 - 7
J10: 5 - 8
J10: 4 - 9
J10: 3 - 10
J10: 2 - 11
J10: 1 - 12
30 31
87
5V
S.FB 15-A1
SDC.SIG 15-A2
SAC.SIG 15-A3
S.CONT 15-A4
T.FB 15-A5
T.SIG 15-A6
T.CONT 15-A7
G.CONT 15-A8
C.FB 15-A9
GRID.SIG 15-A10
CHG.SIG 15-A11
C.CONT 15-A12
P.G -9
24V -10
EUROPE only
for FCB
86
24V -11
PGND
PGND
24V
24V
for SW3
85
23-A4
23-A3
23-A2
23-A1
40- 1
40- 2
40- 3
40- 4
83
P.G -8
SGND
SGND
L3 CONT
5V
84
H/L -7
LD
CW/CCW-5
CLK -4
81
23-A11 5V
23-A10 SGND
23-A9 CONT
23-A8 CLOCK
23-A7 SGND
23-A6 LOCK
80
-1
79
82
S.G -2
G
78
5V
I
74
77
RL CONT 25-A11
L2 CONT 25-A10
L3 CONT 25-A9
24V EM 25-A8
FM1 EM 25-A7
73
PGND 20- 3
PGND 20- 4
72
76
CONT -3
21- 6
21- 5
21- 4
21- 3
21- 2
21- 1
A
71
75
24V 20- 1
24V 20- 2
24V
PGND
5V
SGND
SGND
12V
-2
-3
37-1 VEN.TXD
-2 PGND
-3 VEN.CTS
-4 VEN.RXD
-5 N.C
-6 VEN.RTS
-7 PGND
-8 5V
36-1 /M1
-2 /PF
-3 /PS0
-4 /PS1
-5 /PS2
-6 /PS3
-7 /SIDE
-8 /CPF0
-9 /CPF1
-10 PGND
7.3
982-1
35-1
35-2
35-3
35-4
35-5
APPENDIX

8
9
Symbol
for ENGINE
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
24V
24V
PGND
PGND
5V
SGND
for DCPS
DF-318
DRUM CARTRIGE
M3
FM5
FM4
Internal cooling
fan/1
132
133
134
135
136
137
Separation Transfer
M5
PCL
I
PS 9
Tray set
sensor/U
PS 12
Tray set
sensor/L
1
PS 1
Registration
sensor
PS 8
PS 7
No paper Upper limit

sensor
sensor
PS21
Timing
sensor/U
SD2
SD1
PS22
1st paper 1st paper

feed
Timing feed
sensor/L solenoid/L solenoid/U
SD3
3
PS20
VR1
PS13
PS 4
By-pass
By-pass
By-pass ADU sensor
By-pass
paper feed tray paper tray paper no paper
size sensor size VR
sensor
solenoid
BYPASS TRAY
4
M6
ADU motor
PFDB/U
TSL
Transfer
synchronization
lamp
5
PS 10
Upper limit
sensor/L
PS 11
No paper
sensor/U
PFDB/L
973-1
-2
-3
(CE1)
IT door
sensor
(CE1)
(CE1)
PS25
PS23
PS24
IT exit
sensor/U
IT exit
sensor/L
IT-101
Loop clutch
Gate solenoid
7
8
Appendix-4
SGND
H/L
EM
DRIVE
39-4
39-3
39-2
39-1
70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
for DB UNIT
910: 4 - 1
910: 3 - 2
910: 2 - 3
910: 1 - 4
For Finisher
DB_RTS
SGND
DB_RXD
DB_CTS
SGND
DB_TXD
DB_EXIT
LCT_EXIT
DB_RST
19- 1
19- 2
19- 3
19- 4
19- 5
19- 6
19- 7
19- 8
19- 9
KRDS I/F
131
J61 : 1 - 9
J61 : 2 - 8
J61 : 3 - 7
J61 : 4 - 6
J61 : 5 - 5
J61 : 6 - 4
J61 : 7 - 3
J61 : 8 - 2
J61 : 9 - 1
CN985A
38- 6 24V
38- 7 DRIVE
CN985B
38-A 1 XFAN_LK
-A 2 SGND
-A 3 NC
-A 4 SGND
-A 5 /RST
-A 6 SGND
-A 7 SGND
-A 8 SGND
-A 9 /GNT2
-A10 NC
-A11 PCI_AD30
-A12 PCI_AD28
-A13 SGND
-A14 26/ISEL6
-A15 PCI_AD24
-A16 PCI_AD23
-A17 PCI_AD21
-A18 SGND
-A19 PCI_AD19
-A20 PCI_AD17
-A21 PCI_C_BE2
-A22 PCI_IRDY
-A23 SGND
-A24 XPCI_DEVSEL
-A25 PAR
-A26 PCI_AD15
-A27 SGND
-A28 PCI_AD13
-A29 PCI_AD11
-A30 PCI_AD9
-A31 PCI_AD7
-A32 SGND
-A33 PCI_AD6
-A34 PCI_AD4
-A35 PCI_AD2
-A36 PCI_AD0
-A37 SGND
-A38 SGND
-A39 5V
-A40 5V
-A41 5V
-A42 5V
-A43 5V
-A44 SGND
-A45 -12V
-A46 SGND
-A47 12V
-A48 SGND
-A49 SGND
-A50 12V
38-B 1 XFAN
-B 2 FANHI
-B 3 N.C
-B 4 SGND
-B 5 SGND
-B 6 SGND
-B 7 BCLOCK3
-B 8 SGND
-B 9 XPCI_REQ0
-B10 N.C
-B11 PCI_AD31
-B12 PCI_AD29
-B13 SGND
-B14 PCI_AD27
-B15 PCI_AD25
-B16 PCI_C_BE3
-B17 PCI_AD22
-B18 SGND
-B19 PCI_AD20
-B20 PCI_AD18
-B21 PCI_AD16
-B22 XPCI_FRAME
-B23 SGND
-B24 XPCI_TRDY
-B25 XPCI_STOP
-B26 PCI_C_BE1
-B27 SGND
-B28 PCI_AD14
-B29 PCI_AD12
-B30 PCI_AD10
-B31 PCI_AD8
-B32 SGND
-B33 PCI_C_BE0
-B34 PCI_AD5
-B35 PCI_AD3
-B36 PCI_AD1
-B37 SGND
-B38 SGND
-B39 5V
-B40 5V
-B41 5V
-B42 5V
-B43 5V
-B44 SGND
-B45 -12V
-B46 SGND
-B47 12V
-B48 SGND
-B49 SGND
-B50 12V
J42:8 - 8
J42:9 - 9
SCB 3/3
38- 1 PS
38- 2 SGND
38- 3 5V
38- 4 PS
38- 5 SGND
44-B1
44-B2
44-B3
44-B4
44-B5
44-B6
44-B7
44-B8
44-B9
44-B10
44-B11
DDF VV 28-B11
N.C 28-B10
FIX OK 28-B9
SGND 28-B8
APS TIM 28-B7
PS301 28-B6
EG INT 28-B5
EG RST 28-B4
SGND 28-B3
5V SYS 28-B2
SGND 28-B1
SCDB
J42:2 - 2
J42:3 - 3
J42:4 - 4
J42:5 - 5
J42:6 - 6
38- 8 SGND
38- 9 IT.SET
USB
939: 1 - 2
939: 2 - 1
972-1
-2
-3
MC2
974-1
-2
-3
J42:10- 10
J42:11- 11
24-A2 DRIVE
24-A1 24V
LAN
921: 2 - 1
921: 1 - 2
44-A1
44-A2
44-A3
44-A4
44-A5
44-A6
44-A7
44-A8
44-A9
44-A10
44-A11
CB 2/2
SGND 28-A11
EG RXD 28-A10
EG CTS 28-A9
EG TXD 28-A8
EG TRS 28-A7
SGND 28-A6
EE VV 28-A5
S VV 28-A4
P VV 28-A3
TONYY 28-A2
B VV 28-A1
L1
SGND
SIZE.LOW.A
SIZE.LOW.B
SIZE.LOW.C
SIZE.LOW.D
41-1 TX+
41-2 TX41-3 RX+
41-4 N.C
41-5 N.C
41-6 RX41-7 N.C
41-8 N.C
41-9 FG
41-10 FG
41-11 VDD1
41-11 LED1
41-11 VDD2
41-11 LED2
24-A7
24-A6
24-A5
24-A4
24-A3
VDD
-Data
+Data
SGND
J03: 5 - 7
J03: 4 - 8
J03: 3 - 9
J03: 2 - 10
J03: 1 - 11
39- 1 DCD
- 2 RXD
- 3 TXD
- 4 DTR
- 5 GND
- 6 DSR
- 7 RTS
- 8 CTS
- 9 RI
91-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
Key counter
KC
(Option)
24-A10 5V
24-A9 PS
24-A8 SGND
45-1
45-2
45-3
45-4
J03: 8 - 4
J03: 7 - 5
J03: 6 - 6
24-A13 5V
24-A12 PS
24-A11 SGND
1
4
-2
-3
J03:11 - 1
J03:10 - 2
J03: 9 - 3
INDEX
960-1
-2
-3
for KC
959-1
24-A15 SGND
24-A15 DRIVE
APS sensor APS timing Scanner home

sensor
position sensor
(J03:CT)
7
9
J02: 2 - 6
J02: 1 - 7
J20: 4 - 7
J20: 2 - 9
24-A20 SGND
24-A19 SIZE.UP.A
24-A18 SIZE.UP.B
24-A17 SIZE.UP.C
24-A16 SIZE.UP.D
933:2 - 1
1-2
J02: 7 - 1
J02: 6 - 2
J02: 5 - 3
J02: 4 - 4
J02: 3 - 5
N.C 15-B12
SGND 15-B11
SGND 15-B10
FS CTS 15-B9
SGND 15-B8
N.C 15-B7
FS RXD 15-B6
SGND 15-B5
FS RTS 15-B4
N.C 15-B3
SGND 15-B2
FS TXD 15-B1
J20:10 - 1
J20: 7 - 4
90-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
24V
24V
B
B
A
A
60- 1
60- 2
60- 3
60- 4
60- 5
24-B6
24-B5
24-B4
24-B3
24-B2
24-B1
985B-1
985B-2
905: 6 - 1
905: 5 - 2
905: 4 - 3
905: 3 - 4
905: 2 - 5
905: 1 - 6
-4
-2
-1
985A-3
INV1
24-B9 5V
24-B8 PS
24-B7 SGND
1
3
4
2
24V
PGND
N.C
5V
SGND
J30:3 - 1
J30:2 - 2
J30:1 - 3
J26: 4 J26: 2 J26: 1 J26: 3 -
Exposure lamp
129
953-1
-2
-3
35- 1
35- 2
35- 3
35- 4
35- 5
128
24-B12 5V
24-B11 PS
24-B10 SGND
24V
SIG
SGND
DRIVE
SGND
127
130
J04: 3 - 9
J04: 2 - 10
J04: 1 - 11
51-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
126
962-1
-2
-3
PS14
24-B15 SGND
24-B14 VR
24-B13 5V
PS15
J04: 6 - 6
J04: 5 - 7
J04: 4 - 8
PS17
J08: 3 - 4
J08: 2 - 5
J08: 1 - 6
LDB
98 -3
-2
-1
124
(CN51
123
64-7 SGND
64-8 PS
64-9 5V
122
125
24-B18 5V
24-B17 PS
24-B16 SGND
963-3
-2
-1
J50: B1 - B12
J50: B2 - B11
J50: B3 - B10
J50: B4 - B9
J50: B5 - B8
J50: B6 - B7
J50: B7 - B6
J50: B8 - B5
J50: B9 - B4
J50:B10 - B3
J50:B11 - B2
J50:B12 - B1
119
121
J04: 9 - 3
J04: 8 - 4
J04: 7 - 5
Scanner motor
118
120
24-B20 24V
24-B19 DRIVE
L1INVB
116
64-4 SGND
64-5 PS
64-6 5V
50-B12
-B11
-B10
- B9
- B8
- B7
- B6
- B5
- B4
- B3
- B2
- B1
969-1 J08: 6 - 1
-2
J08: 5 - 2
-3
J08: 4 - 3
J04:11 - 1
J04:10 - 2
M2
964-3
-2
-1
RT3
64-1 5V
64-2 PS
64-3 SGND
63-1 24V
63-2 L1 CONT
63-3 L1 EM
63-4 PGND
117
924: 2 - 1
924: 1 - 2
F
112
115
25-A13 24V
25-A12 DRIVE
931-4
-3
-2
-1
C
111
114
966-3
-2
-1
930-1 L.V.
-3 H.V.
110
113
25-A15 DRIVE
25-A14 24V
96-1
96-3
107
109
922: 2 - 1
922: 1 - 2
923: 2 - 1
923: 1 - 2
97-3
97-1
J50: A1 - A12
J50: A2 - A11
J50: A3 - A10
J50: A4 - A9
J50: A5 - A8
J50: A6 - A7
J50: A7 - A6
J50: A8 - A5
J50: A9 - A4
J50:A10 - A3
J50:A11 - A2
J50:A12 - A1
106
25-A16 5V
25-A17 PS
25-A18 SGND
50-A12
-A11
-A10
- A9
- A8
- A7
- A6
- A5
- A4
- A3
- A2
- A1
105
108
J41:1 - 3
J41:2 - 2
J41:3 - 1
25-B1 5V
25-B2 PS
25-B3 SGND
62-1 U
-2 V
-3 W
104
971-1
-2
-3
J40:1 - 3
J40:2 - 2
J40:3 - 1
25-B6 5V
25-B5 PS
25-B4 SGND
25-B9 5V
25-B8 PS
25-B7 SGND
25-B12 5V
25-B11 PS
25-B10 SGND
970-1
-2
-3
J01: 3 - 7
J01: 2 - 8
J01: 1 - 9
J01: 6 - 4
J01: 5 - 5
J01: 4 - 6
J01:9 - 1
J01:8 - 2
J01:7 - 3
2
3
5
6
8
10
956-1
-2
-3
J33:3 - 1
J33:2 - 2
J33:1 - 3
61- 1
61- 2
61- 3
61- 4
61- 5
61- 6
61- 7
61- 8
61- 9
61-10
61-11
61-12
61-13
61-14
61-15
20: 9 - 2
20: 8 - 3
20: 6 - 5
20: 5 - 6
20: 3 - 8
20: 1 - 10
957-1
-2
-3
950-1
-2
-3
5V 16-15
PS14 16-14
PS15 16-13
PS17 16-12
5V 16-11
SGND 16-10
L1 EM 16- 9
L1 CONT 16- 8
M2 V1 16- 7
M2 V0 16- 6
M2 DRIVE 16- 5
M2 EM2 16- 4
M2 EM1 16- 3
SGND 16- 2
M2 CLOCK 16- 1
103
CN38 Board to Board Connector(100pin)
G
25-B15 5V
25-B14 PS
25-B13 SGND
J32:3 - 1
J32:2 - 2
J32:1 - 3
for DCPS
H
RT3
961-1
-2
-3
B
132
133
134
135
136
137
200: 6 - 6
200: 5 - 5
200: 4 - 4
200: 3 - 3
200: 2 - 2
200: 1 - 1
for DCPS
25-B18 5V
25-B17 PS
25-B16 SGND
J31:3 - 1
J31:2 - 2
J31:1 - 3
7.4
958-1
-2
-3
APPENDIX

9
Symbol
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
IP-432
C
SD8
FM7
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
Symbol
Part name
Location
Symbol
Part name
Location
COPY VENDER
COPY VENDER
Appendix-3 1-I
M2
Scanner motor
Appendix-4 2-E
PS24
IT exit sensor /L
DB-211
DB-211
Appendix-1 2-G
M3
Developing motor
Appendix-3 8-I
PS25
IT door sensor
Appendix-4 7-I
Appendix-4 7-I
DB-411
DB-411
Appendix-1 2-G
M4
Toner supply motor /1
Appendix-3 5-I
TH1
Fixing temperature sensor /1
Appendix-3 5-E
DIMM
DIMM
Appendix-2 3-F
M5
Polygon motor
Appendix-3 7-D
TH2
Appendix-3 5-E
FK-102/FL-102
FK-102/FL-102
Appendix-2 4-A
M6
ADU motor
Appendix-4 4-I
HUM1
Humidity sensor
Appendix-3 4-D
FS-112
FS-112
Appendix-3 4-A
M7
Tray motor /U
Appendix-3 8-I
TDS
Appendix-3 5-E
FS-113
FS-113
Appendix-3 4-A
M8
Tray motor /L
Appendix-3 7-I
TLD
Toner level sensor
Appendix-3 5-I
HD-103 Type A
HD-105
Appendix-2 2-F
M9
Paper feed motor
Appendix-3 3-I
TS
Thermostat
Appendix-1 8-A
IP-432
IP-432
Appendix-4 7-A
M10
Appendix-3 6-I
SW1
Main power switch
Appendix-1 4-C
IT-101
IT-101
Appendix-4 6-H
M11
Fixing motor
Appendix-3 3-I
SW2
Sub power switch
Appendix-1 6-I
KC
Key counter
Appendix-4 3-E
FM1
DCPS cooling fan
Appendix-1 4-F
SW3
Interlock switch
Appendix-1 5-E
LT-203
LT-203
Appendix-3 2-A
FM2
Fixing cooling fan
Appendix-3 4-I
VR1
By-pass tray paper size VR
Appendix-4 3-I
TC
Total counter
Appendix-3 5-I
FM3
Internal dehumidifying fan /1
Appendix-3 7-I
PTC
PTC heater
Appendix-1 6-E
DF-318
DF-318
Appendix-3 7-A
FM4
Internal cooling fan /1
Appendix-3 9-I
BATTERY
Battery
Appendix-2 2-G
ADB
A/D conversion board
Appendix-2 1-C
FM5
Appendix-3 9-I
CB
Main control board
Appendix-3 1-F
FM6
Appendix-3 7-I
FCB
Appendix-1 6-B
FM7
Appendix-4 9-I
INDEX
Index sensor board
Appendix-4 3-B
MC1
Registration clutch
Appendix-3 6-I
L1INVB
Exposure lamp power supply board
Appendix-4 2-E
MC2
Loop clutch
Appendix-4 6-I
LCDB
Display board
Appendix-1 4-F
SD1
1st paper feed solenoid /U
Appendix-4 3-I
LDB
LD drive board
Appendix-4 2-B
SD2
1st paper feed solenoid /L
Appendix-4 2-I
OB
Operation board
Appendix-1 5-F
SD3
By-pass paper feed solenoid
Appendix-4 3-I
PAKB
Panel key board
Appendix-1 4-F
SD4
Appendix-3 6-I
PFDB/L
Paper feed detection board /L
Appendix-4 5-I
SD5
ADU gate solenoid
Appendix-3 5-I
PFDB/U
Paper feed detection board /U
Appendix-4 4-I
SD7
Appendix-3 6-E
PRMB
Appendix-2 5-F
SD8
Gate solenoid
Appendix-4 7-I
PSW2B
Power SW2 board
Appendix-1 6-I
SD9
Toner solenoid
Appendix-3 4-I
SCB
Appendix-1 8-E
PS1
Registration sensor
Appendix-4 1-I
SCDB
Scanner drive board
Appendix-4 1-B
PS2
Fixing exit sensor
Appendix-3 5-E
TCSB
Appendix-3 6-D
PS4
ADU sensor
Appendix-4 4-I
DCPS
DC power supply unit
Appendix-1 1-A
PS5
Toner bottle sensor
Appendix-3 5-I
HV
High voltage unit
Appendix-3 2-E
PS7
Upper limit sensor /U
Appendix-4 2-I
INV1
Appendix-4 2-D
PS8
No paper sensor /U
Appendix-4 1-I
INV2
Display inverter
Appendix-1 4-H
PS9
Tray set sensor /U
Appendix-4 1-I
CBR1
Circuit breaker /1
Appendix-1 2-A
PS10
Upper limit sensor /L
Appendix-4 5-I
CBR2
Circuit breaker /2
Appendix-1 2-B
PS11
No paper sensor /L
Appendix-4 5-I
NF
Noise filter
Appendix-1 3-A
PS12
Tray set sensor /L
Appendix-4 1-I
L1
Exposure lamp
Appendix-4 2-F
PS13
By-pass no paper sensor
Appendix-4 4-I
L2
Fixing heater lamp /1
Appendix-1 8-B
PS14
Appendix-4 3-E
L3
Appendix-1 8-B
PS15
APS timing sensor
Appendix-4 3-E
PCL
Pre-charging lamp
Appendix-3 7-D
PS17
APS sensor
Appendix-4 3-E
TSL
Appendix-4 5-I
PS20
By-pass tray paper size sensor
Appendix-4 3-I
LCD
LCD
Appendix-1 4-F
PS21
Timing sensor /U
Appendix-4 2-I
BL
Back light
Appendix-1 4-H
PS22
Timing sensor /L
Appendix-4 2-I
M1
Main motor
Appendix-3 2-I
PS23
IT exit sensor /U
Appendix-4 7-I
manuals4you.com
Appendix-5
APPENDIX
7235/7228/7222 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/4)

2
PLUG
CN9-1
JAPAN AC100V 50/60Hz
J13-1
Noise filter
FT5
FT3
FT7
BT3
BT1
RT4
4
FT8
MAIN RL
RT3
4
FT1
AC DRIVE
NF
CN9-2
CR001
Circuit breaker/2
FT6
CN9-3
CR002
BT2
CN11-2
for
BIAS
N.C
5V EM
24V EM
NMI
12V
SGND
6-14 N.C
6-18 N.C
6-4 24V
6-6 24V
6-10 PGND
6-12 PGND
6-16 5V
6-20 SGND
11
12
8-1 24V
8-3 PGND
25
26
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
5V
5V
N.C
SGND
SGND
for FNS
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
J24: 2 - 2
BT1
J24: 1 - 1
EUROPE Only
2-6
2-5
2-4
2-3
2-2
2-1
6-1 24V
6-3 24V
6-5 24V
6-7 PGND
6-9 PGND
6-11 PGND
6-13 5V
6-15 5V
6-17 SGND
6-19 SGND
D
for DCPS
SW3
24V 5-1
24V 5-2
26 25 24 23
J23-1
J24-1A
J24-1B
J23-3
J23-2
J24-2A
J24-2B
J23-4
Interlock switch
SWD24V
30
SWD24V
31
OPTIONAL
PTC heater
24V 8-2
PTC
935-1
935-2
- 5
- 6
J60: 1 - 1
J60: 2 - 2
J60: 3 - 3
J60: 4 - 4
J60: 7 - 7
J60: 8 - 8
J60: 9 - 9
J60:10 - 10
80-A14
80-A13
80-A12
80-A11
80-A10
80- A9
80- A8
80- A7
80- A6
80- A5
80- A4
80- A3
80- A2
80- A1
83- 1 X2
- 2 Y2
- 3 X1
- 4 Y1
PAKB
FM1
DCPS cooling fan
I
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
BL
INV2
104
89-1 FL HOT
-4 FL GND
OB
80-B14
80-B13
80-B12
80-B11
80-B10
80- B9
80- B8
80- B7
80- B6
80- B5
80- B4
80- B3
80- B2
80- B1
J38-A1 -A14
J38-A2 -A13
J38-A3 -A12
J38-A4 -A11
J38-A5 -A10
J38-A6 -A9
J38-A7 -A8
J38-A8 -A7
J38-A9 -A6
J38-A10 -A5
J38-A11 -A4
J38-A12 -A3
J38-A13 -A2
J38-A14 -A1
J38-B1 -B14
J38-B2 -B13
J38-B3 -B12
J38-B4 -B11
J38-B5 -B10
J38-B6 -B9
J38-B7 -B8
J38-B8 -B7
J38-B9 -B6
J38-B10 -B5
J38-B11 -B4
J38-B12 -B3
J38-B13 -B2
J38-B14 -B1
52-A1 UD3
52-A2 SGND
52-A3 UD1
52-A4 XSCL
52-A5 SGND
52-A6 YD
52-A7 OPTXD
52-A8 SGND
52-A9 OPRTS
52-A10 OPRXD
52-A11 SGND
52-A12 OPCTS
52-A13 DF INT
52-A14 APS INT
SCB 1/3
52-B1 UD2
52-B2 SGND
52-B3 UD0
52-B4 LP
52-B5 SGND
52-B6 LCDENB
52-B7 POWER DOWN
52-B8 SGND
52-B9 OPINT
52-B10 MONIT
52-B11 5V
52-B12 5V
52-B13 SYS STOP
52-B14 MODE
88- 3
-2
-1
105
84-1 SGND
84-2 MONIT
LCDB
for CB
84-6 VR L
84-7 VR SIG
84-8 VR H
84-9 SCAN6
84-10 RTN3
84-11 5V
84-12 SGND
84-13 SW2
106- 1 24V
106- 2 24V
106- 3 24V
106- 4 PGND
106- 5 PGND
106- 6 M151 DRIVE
106- 7 LT CLOSE
106- 8 M150 F/R
106- 9 M150 CLOCK
106-10 M150 CONT
106-11 SD151 DRIVE
106-12 PS155
106-13 PS152
106-14 PS153
106-15 PS154
106-16 PS151
106-17 LCT TYPE
106-18 5V
106-19 SGND
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
86-14 VLCD
-13 VEE
-12 D3
-11 D2
-10 D1
- 9 D0
- 8 VEE(24V)
- 7 VSS(GND)
- 6 VDD(5V)
- 5 XSCL
- 4 LP
- 3 DIN
- 2 N.C
- 1 DISPOFF
84-3 5V
84-4 SGND
84-5 INV ON(PWM)
DB-211
DB-411
PGND 8-4
L3
Fixing heater
lamp/2
N.C 7-9
5V 7-11
SGND 7-13
SGND 7-15
12V 7-17
SGND 7-21
N.C 7-23
SGND 7-24
12V 7-19
10-1 DRIVE
10-2 EM
10-3 PGND
2
3
5
6
8
10
for OPTION
23
24
BT2
FCB
DCPS
RL CONT
L2 CONT
L3 CONT
24V EM
FM1 EM
7-1 24V
7-3 PGND
7-5 24V
7-6 24V
7-7 PGND
7-8 PGND
7-10 5V
7-14 SGND
7-25 RL PWR
7-26 RL PGND
for
DF320
AC(N)
SGND
SGND
L3 CONT
5V
DC PSY
24V
5V
+12V
-12V
BT8
CN11-1
CN11-3
5-3 PGND
5-4 PGND
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
FT10
SW1
BT7
6-2 24V
6-8 PGND
FT9
AC(H)
J21-03
CN99-4
CN99-3
CN99-2
CN99-1
50
51
52
53
Main power switch
BT6
CN9-3
FT28
J13-4
FT27
BT5
7-2 24V
7-4 PGND
7-12 5V
7-16 SGND
7-20 SGND
7-18 12V
7-22 SGND
J21-03
L3 DRIVE
AC(N)
CBR 2
L2
FT25
BT4
FT4
FT26
J13-3
J21-02
L2 DRIVE
FT2
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
Fixing heater
lamp/1
12V 42- 9
SGND 42- 8
N.C 42- 7
SGND 42- 6
12V 42- 5
SGND 42- 4
SGND 42- 3
5V 42- 2
5V 42- 1
INLET
EUROPE 200-240V 50Hz

USA 120V 60Hz
AC(H)
CBR 1
Circuit breaker/1
PLUG
Symbol
FT22
FT21
Thermostat
FT23
RL1 POWER
AC(H)
FT20
J13-2
J21-01
RL1 CNT
FT24
24V(C)
TS
SGND 500- 1
SGND 500- 2
5V 500- 3
5V 500- 4
SGND 43- 6
12V 43- 5
NMI 43- 4
24V EM 43- 3
5V EM 43- 2
N.C 43- 1
7.5
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
Appendix-6
HD-103 Type A
CN501
Battery
CN47
LDB
2
3
DIMM
CN53
FAN
CN502
57- 1 DCD
- 2 RXD
- 3 TXD
- 4 DTR
- 5 GND
- 6 DSR
- 7 RTS
- 8 CTS
- 9 RI
INDEX
48-1
48-2
48-3
48-4
4
VDD
-Data
+Data
GND
KRDS I/F
400-A 1 SGND
-A 2 BCLK12
-A 3 SGND
-A 4 DRAM_D31
-A 5 DRAM_D30
-A 6 DRAM_D29
-A 7 DRAM_D28
-A 8 DRAM_D27
-A 9 DRAM_D26
-A10 DRAM_D25
-A11 DRAM_D24
-A12 DRAM_D23
-A13 DRAM_D22
-A14 DRAM_D21
-A15 DRAM_D20
-A16 DRAM_D19
-A17 DRAM_D18
-A18 DRAM_D17
-A19 DRAM_D16
-A20 5V
-A21 DRAM_D15
-A22 DRAM_D14
-A23 DRAM_D13
-A24 DRAM_D12
-A25 DRAM_D11
-A26 DRAM_D10
-A27 DRAM_D9
-A28 DRAM_D8
-A29 DRAM_D7
-A30 DRAM_D6
-A31 DRAM_D5
-A32 DRAM_D4
-A33 DRAM_D3
-A34 DRAM_D2
-A35 DRAM_D1
-A36 DRAM_D0
-A37 5V
-A38 SGND
-A39 VBAT
-A40 XWAIT
-A41 5V
-A42 5V
-A43 DR_CKE
-A44 XFAX_RST
-A45 XIRST
-A46 XICS5
-A47 XICS7
-A48 XIRD
-A49 XMWR
-A50 XIOSEL2
-A51 L_A20
-A52 L_A19
-A53 L_A18
-A54 L_A17
-A55 L_A16
-A56 L_A15
-A57 L_A14
-A58 L_A13
-A59 L_A12
-A60 L_A11
-B 1 SGND
-B 2 BCLK5
-B 3 GND
-B 4 XFAX_CIACK
-B 5 XFAX_COACK
-B 6 XFAX_DIACK
-B 7 XFAX_DOACK
-B 8 XAHA1_INT
-B 9 XEXIN_ACK
-B10 XEXOUT_ACK
-B11 -12V
-B12 EXOUT_D7
-B13 EXOUT_D6
-B14 EXOUT_D5
-B15 EXOUT_D4
-B16 EXOUT_D3
-B17 EXOUT_D2
-B18 EXOUT_D1
-B19 EXOUT_D0
-B20 5V
-B21 EXIN_D0
-B22 EXIN_D1
-B23 EXIN_D2
-B24 EXIN_D3
-B25 EXIN_D4
-B26 EXIN_D5
-B27 EXIN_D6
-B28 EXIN_D7
-B29 XFAX_DRIVE
-B30 XEXOUT_REQ
-B31 XEXIN_REQ
-B32 XICS6
-B33 XFAX_DOREQ
-B34 XFAX_DIREQ
-B35 XFAX_COREQ
-B36 XFAX_CIREQ
-B37 5V
-B38 SGND
-B39 MONITOR
-B40 XRC_INT
-B41 12V
-B42 PDA7
-B43 PDA6
-B44 PDA5
-B45 PDA4
-B46 PDA3
-B47 PDA2
-B48 PDA1
-B49 PDA0
-B50 L_A0
-B51 L_A1
-B52 L_A2
-B53 L_A3
-B54 L_A4
-B55 L_A5
-B56 L_A6
-B57 L_A7
-B58 L_A8
-B59 L_A9
-B60 L_A10
60- 1 SGND
- 2 TG
- 3 CLAMP
- 4 ACLAMP
- 5 BCLAMP
- 6 SGND
- 7 SGMD
- 8 +TCK
- 9 -TCK
-10 SGND
-11 SGND
-12 +RCK
-13 -RCK
-14 SGND
-15 SGND
-16 +IN CLOCK
-17 -IN CLOCK
-18 SGND
-19 SCLOCK
-20 SCLOCK
-21 *SEN
-22 SDI
-23 SDO
-24 SGND
-25 SGND
-26 -AD_D0
-27 +AD_D0
-28 SGND
-29 SGND
-30 -AD_D1
-31 +AD_D1
-32 SGND
-33 SGND
-34 -OUT_CLOCK
-35 +OUT_CLOCK
-36 SGND
-37 SGND
-38 ADRST
-39 APR
-40 SGND
-41 5V
-42 5V
-43 5V
-44 5V
-45 SGND
-46 12V
-47 12V
-48 12V
-49 12V
-50 SGND
40- 1 STROBE
- 2 DATA0
- 3 DATA1
- 4 DATA2
- 5 DATA3
- 6 DATA4
- 7 DATA5
- 8 DATA6
- 9 DATA7
-10 ACK
-11 BUSY
-12 PE
-13 SLCT
-14 AUTOFD
-15 N.C
-16 SGND
-17 SGND
-18 N.C
-19 SGND
-20 SGND
-19 SGND
-22 SGND
-23 SGND
-24 SGND
-25 SGND
-26 SGND
-27 SGND
-28 SGND
-29 SGND
-30 HLOGIC
-31 INT
-32 FAULT
-33 SGND
-34 N.C
-35 N.C
-36 SELECTIN
5V
SGND
/INDEX
SGND
/INDPR
46- 1
46- 2
46- 3
46- 4
46- 5
46- 6
46- 7
46- 8
46- 9
46-10
46-11
46-12
46-13
46-14
46-15
46-16
46-17
46-18
46-19
46-20
46-21
46-22
46-23
46-24
46-25
46-26
46-27
46-28
46-29
46-30
46-31
46-32
46-33
46-34
46-35
46-36
46-37
46-38
46-39
46-40
46-41
46-42
46-43
46-44
46-45
46-46
46-47
46-48
46-49
46-50
2
5
D
PRMB
CN58,59
SCB 2/3
56-A 1 XFAN_LK
-A 2 SGND
-A 3 N.C
-A 4 SGND
-A 5 /RST
-A 6 SGND
-A 7 SGND
-A 8 SGND
-A 9 /GNT2
-A10 N.C
-A11 PCI_AD30
-A12 PCI_AD28
-A13 SGND
-A14 26/ISEL6
-A15 PCI_AD24
-A16 PCI_AD23
-A17 PCI_AD21
-A18 SGND
-A19 PCI_AD19
-A20 PCI_AD17
-A21 PCI_C_BE2
-A22 PCI_IRDY
-A23 SGND
-A24 XPCI_DEVSEL
-A25 PAR
-A26 PCI_AD15
-A27 SGND
-A28 PCI_AD13
-A29 PCI_AD11
-A30 PCI_AD9
-A31 PCI_AD7
-A32 SGND
-A33 PCI_AD6
-A34 PCI_AD4
-A35 PCI_AD2
-A36 PCI_AD0
-A37 SGND
-A38 SGND
-A39 5V
-A40 5V
-A41 5V
-A42 5V
-A43 5V
-A44 SGND
-A45 -12V
-A46 SGND
-A47 12V
-A48 SGND
-A49 SGND
-A50 12V
56-B 1 XFAN
-B 2 FANHI
-B 3 N.C
-B 4 SGND
-B 5 SGND
-B 6 SGND
-B 7 BCLK3
-B 8 SGND
-B 9 XPCI_REQ0
-B10 N.C
-B11 PCI_AD31
-B12 PCI_AD29
-B13 SGND
-B14 PCI_AD27
-B15 PCI_AD25
-B16 PCI_C_BE3
-B17 PCI_AD22
-B18 SGND
-B19 PCI_AD20
-B20 PCI_AD18
-B21 PCI_AD16
-B22 XPCI_FRAME
-B23 SGND
-B24 XPCI_TRDY
-B25 XPCI_STOP
-B26 PCI_C_BE1
-B27 SGND
-B28 PCI_AD14
-B29 PCI_AD12
-B30 PCI_AD10
-B31 PCI_AD8
-B32 SGND
-B33 PCI_C_BE0
-B34 PCI_AD5
-B35 PCI_AD3
-B36 PCI_AD1
-B37 SGND
-B38 SGND
-B39 5V
-B40 5V
-B41 5V
-B42 5V
-B43 5V
-B44 SGND
-B45 -12V
-B46 SGND
-B47 12V
-B48 SGND
-B49 SGND
-B50 12V
6
7
CN56 Board to Board Connector(100pin)
1
431- 5
431- 4
431- 3
431- 2
431- 1
G
LD 5V
SGND
/S/H
/ENB
VIDEO+
VIDEO/ALM
/RESET
DACLK
DI
LOAD
LPR 5V
432-12
432-11
432-10
432- 9
432- 8
432- 7
432- 6
432- 5
432- 4
432- 3
432- 2
432- 1
J52: 5 - 1
J52: 4 - 2
J52: 3 - 3
J52: 2 - 4
J52: 1 - 5
J53: 1 - 12
J53: 2 - 11
J53: 3 - 10
J53: 4 - 9
J53: 5 - 8
J53: 6 - 7
J53: 7 - 6
J53: 8 - 5
J53: 9 - 4
J53:10 - 3
J53:11 - 2
J53:12 - 1
USB
H
J50: 1 - 12
J50: 2 - 11
J50: 3 - 10
J50: 4 - 9
J50: 5 - 8
J50: 6 - 7
J50: 7 - 6
J50: 8 - 5
J50: 9 - 4
J50:10 - 3
J50:11 - 2
J50:12 - 1
7.6
51-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
50-12
-11
-10
-9
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
APPENDIX

7
8
FK-103/FL-103
manuals4you.com
Appendix-7
Symbol
ADB
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
CN55 Board to Board Connector
IP-424
G
I
I
1
COPY VENDER
2
M1
Main motor
5V
-1
CLK -4
P.G -9
M9
Paper feed motor
3
-1
H/L -7
24V -10
M11
I
4
TLD
TC
Fixing motor
Toner level Toner bottle Total counter
sensor
sensor
5
M4
Toner supply
motor/1
M10
SD4
Cleaning
Toner supply
web
motor/2
Registration solenoid
clutch
Internal
dehumidifying
fan/2
Internal
dehumidifying
fan/1
FM6
FM3
FM2
Fixing
cooling
fan
7235 only
7
8
Appendix-8
J42:8 - 8
J42:9 - 9
38- 6 24V
38- 7 DRIVE
PS15
PS14
-1
-2
964-3
-1
-2
963-3
97-3
97-1
APS sensor
PS25
PS23
PS24
IT door
sensor
IT exit
sensor/U
IT exit
sensor/L
5V 16-3
PS 16-2
SGND 16-1
5V 16-6
PS 16-5
SGND 16-4
PS17
-1
-2
966-3
L1INVB
939: 1 - 2
939: 2 - 1
973-1
-2
-3
Toner
solenoid
SGND 16-9
PS 16-8
5V 16-7
INV1
38- 1 PS
38- 2 SGND
M2
J42:2 - 2
J42:3 - 3
Scanner motor
96-3
96-1
PCL
972-1
-2
-3
-3 H.V.
930-1 L.V.
PreSeparation charging
claw
lamp
solenoid
-1
-2
-3
931-4
DRUM CARTRIGE
PGND 33-4
L1 EM 33-3
L1 CONT 33-2
24V 33-1
Speaker
38- 3 5V
38- 4 PS
38- 5 SGND
114
J42:4 - 4
J42:5 - 5
J42:6 - 6
974-1
-2
-3
PSW2B
/SW2
38- 8 SGND
38- 9 IT.SET
SD7
113
J42:10- 10
J42:11- 11
110
112
W 32-3
V 32-2
U 32-1
109
111
18-2 24V
18-1 DRIVE
932:2 - 1
932:1 - 2
107
18-5 PGND
18-4 LOCK
18-3 DRIVE
J16-14
J16-18
TCSB
J15: 2 - 12
J15: 1 - 13
24V 26-B16
DRIVE 26-B17
N.C 26-B18
928:2 - 1
928:1 - 2
108
29-A3 PGND
29-A2 EM
29-A1 DRIVE
J16-15
J16-16
Toner control
sensor board
J15: 4 - 10
J15: 3 - 11
105
106
DRIVE 26-B14
24V 26-B15
for ENGINE
FS SOUT
SGND
N.C
FS RTS
SGND
FS SIN
N.C
SGND
FS CTS
SGND
SGND
for DCPS
24V
24V
24V
PGND
PGND
PGND
5V
5V
SGND
SGND
85 - 8
85 - 7
85 - 6
85 - 5
85 - 4
85 - 3
85 - 2
85 - 1
104
927:2 - 1
927:1 - 2
J28: 3 - 1
J28: 2 - 2
J28: 1 - 3
911: 3 - 1
911: 2 - 2
911: 1 - 3
SD9
J38: 3 - 4
J38: 2 - 5
J38: 1 - 6
MC1
912: 3 - 1
912: 2 - 2
912: 1 - 3
92-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
TDS
29-A6 PGND
29-A5 EM
29-A4 DRIVE
J11: 7 - 1
J11: 6 - 2
J11: 5 - 3
J11: 4 - 4
J11: 3 - 5
J11: 2 - 6
J11: 1 - 7
J16-4
J16-5
J16-6
J16-7
J16-8
J16-12
J16-14
J16-2
J16-3
DEV UNIT
J38: 6 - 1
J38: 5 - 2
J38: 4 - 3
J15:13 - 1
J15:12 - 2
J15:11 - 3
J15:10 - 4
J15: 9 - 5
J15: 8 - 6
J15: 7 - 7
J15: 6 - 8
J15: 5 - 9
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
N.C 26-B5
N.C 26-B6
5V 26-B7
DRUM.TH 26-B8
12V 26-B9
TNRIF 26-B10
TNOUT1 26-B11
TNOUT2 26-B12
SGND 26-B13
300:A10- A10
300:A9 - A9
300:A8 - A8
300:A7 - A7
300:A6 - A6
300:A5 - A5
300:A4 - A4
300:A3 - A3
300:A2 - A2
300:A1 - A1
300:A11- A11
29-A8 24V
29-A7 DRIVE
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
914: 3 - 1
914: 2 - 2
914: 1 - 3
J29:2 - 1
J29:1 - 2
PS 2
983-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
Fixing exit sensor
J17-2
J17-3
J17-9
J17-5
951-1
-2
-3
FUSING UNIT
Fixing
Fixing
temperature temperature
sensor/1
sensor/2
29-A10 DRIVE
29-A9 24V
1
2
3
4
J18: 3 - 1
J18: 2 - 2
J18: 1 - 3
Humidity sensor
J14: 6 J14: 5 J14: 4 J14: 3 J14: 2

J14: 1
J13:B4 - B1
J13:B3 - B2
J13:B2 - B3
Separation Transfer
CONT 25-A1
12V 25-A2
TDS ANG 25-A3
SGND 25-A4
N.C 25-A5
N.C 25-A6
J12: 5 - 5
J12: 4 - 6
J12: 3 - 7
J12: 2 - 8
J12: 1 - 9
TH2
SGND 18-10
PS 18-11
5V 18-12
N.C 18-13
N.C 18-14
to GUIDE
PLATE
300:B11- B11
300:B10- B10
300:B9 - B9
300:B8 - B8
300:B7 - B7
300:B6 - B6
300:B5 - B5
300:B4 - B4
300:B3 - B3
300:B2 - B2
300:B1 - B1
925:2 - 1
925:1 - 2
24V
24V
B
B
A
A
980:3 - 3
980:4 - 4
980:1 - 1
980:2 - 2
FS-113
FS-114
29-A16 24V
29-A15 24V
29-A14 B
29-A13 B
29-A12 A
29-A11 A
29-B6
29-B5
29-B4
29-B3
29-B2
29-B1
J13:A2 - A3
J13:A1 - A4
J13:A4 - A1
J13:A3 - A2
FT37
920: 2 - 1
920: 1 - 2
PS 5
J12: 7 - 3
J12: 6 - 4
J12: 9 - 1
J12: 8 - 2
73- 3
73- 2
73- 1
TH1
TH2 ANG 18- 8

SGND 18- 9
TH1 ANG 18- 6

SGND 18- 7
70- 3
70- 2
70- 1
FT36
FT39
FT30
FT33
LT-203
29-B10 DRIVE
29-B9 24V
29-B13 5V
29-B12 PS
29-B11 SGND
J09-7
J09-8
J09-9
J25-5
70- 5
70- 4
FT38
J16-11
FT32
915:6 - 1
915:5 - 2
915:4 - 3
915:3 - 4
915:2 - 5
915:1 - 6
CB 1/2
Perdita/Pongo:
Discovery:
J25-1
J17-11
N.C 27- 5
SGND 27- 6
HUM1 ANG 27- 7
5V 27- 8
J17-8
29-B16 5V
29-B15 TLD ANG
29-B14 SGND
24V J25-2
11
PGND
12
J09-5
J09-6
70- 9
70- 8
70- 7
70- 6
HV
J06:3 - 1
J06:2 - 2
J06:1 - 3
J05:3 - 1
J05:2 - 2
J05:1 - 3
J17-12
50 51 52 53
J17-7
EUROPE only
for FCB
J09-1
J09-2
J09-3
J09-4
PGND 27- 3
24V 27- 4
B.CONT 27- 1
B.SIG 27- 2
J25-4
72- 1
FT31
903:6 - 1
903:5 - 2
903:4 - 3
903:3 - 4
903:2 - 5
903:1 - 6
24V -11
for
DCPS
P.G -9
J16-20
to BIAS
P.G -8
72- 5
102
-6
101
103
LD
100
CLK -4
FT40
99
CW/CCW-5
31-11 5V
31-10 SGND
31-9 CONT
31-8 CLOCK
31-7 N.C
31-6 SGND
31-5 N.C
31-4 PGND
31-3 PGND
31-2 24V
31-1 24V
FT35
97
5V
GRID
CHARGER
96
98
S.G -2
FT34
94
CONT -3
71-12
71-11
71-10
71- 9
71- 8
71- 7
71- 6
71- 5
71- 4
71- 3
71- 2
71- 1
95
24V -11
J10:12 - 1
J10:11 - 2
J10:10 - 3
J10: 9 - 4
J10: 8 - 5
J10: 7 - 6
J10: 6 - 7
J10: 5 - 8
J10: 4 - 9
J10: 3 - 10
J10: 2 - 11
J10: 1 - 12
92
93
24V -10
S.FB 15-A1
SDC.SIG 15-A2
SAC.SIG 15-A3
S.CONT 15-A4
T.FB 15-A5
T.SIG 15-A6
T.CONT 15-A7
G.CONT 15-A8
C.FB 15-A9
GRID.SIG 15-A10
CHG.SIG 15-A11
C.CONT 15-A12
23-B8 PGND
23-B9 PGND
23-B10 24V
23-B11 24V
-6
91
H/L -7
90
LD
89
P.G -8
CONT -3
110-19
110-18
110-17
110-16
110-15
110-14
110-13
110-12
110-11
110-10
110- 9
110- 8
110- 7
110- 6
110- 5
110- 4
110- 3
110- 2
110- 1
87
88
CW/CCW-5
5V
SGND
CONT
CLOCK
F/R
SGND
23-B1
23-B2
23-B3
23-B4
23-B5
23-B6
86
S.G -2
SGND 14- 1
SGND 14- 2
L3 CONT 14- 3
5V 14- 4
85
986-1
986-2
P.G -9
24V -10
24V -11
PGND
PGND
24V
24V
23-A4
23-A3
23-A2
23-A1
954-1
-2
-3
-6
H/L -7
30 31
LD
for SW3
P.G -8
83
CW/CCW-5
82
S.G -2
81
84
984-1
-2
-3
H
80
CLK -4
CONT -3
79
RL CONT 25-A11
L2 CONT 25-A10
L3 CONT 25-A9
24V EM 25-A8
FM1 EM 25-A7
78
23-A11 5V
23-A10 SGND
23-A9 CONT
23-A8 CLOCK
23-A7 SGND
23-A6 LOCK
77
PGND 20- 3
PGND 20- 4
74
76
24V 20- 1
24V 20- 2
73
75
24V 19- 1
PGND 19- 2
PGND 19- 3
72
-1
G
71
5V
F
24V 21- 6
PGND 21- 5
5V 21- 4
SGND 21- 3
SGND 21- 2
12V 21- 1
37-1 VEN.TXD
-2 PGND
-3 VEN.CTS
-4 VEN.RXD
-5 N.C
-6 VEN.RTS
-7 PGND
-8 5V
36-1 /M1
-2 /PF
-3 /PS0
-4 /PS1
-5 /PS2
-6 /PS3
-7 /SIDE
-8 /CPF0
-9 /CPF1
-10 PGND
7.7
982-1
-2
-3
35-1
35-2
35-3
35-4
35-5
APPENDIX

8
9
Symbol
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
514: 1 - 2
514: 2 - 1
HUM1
Exposure lamp
L1
APS timing Scanner home

sensor
position sensor
Gate
solenoid
IT-101
9
SD8
I
Tray set
sensor/U
PS 9
Tray set
sensor/L
1
Registration
sensor
PS 1
PS 8
PS 7
SD2
2
SD1
PS22
No paper Upper limit 1st paper 1st paper Timming

feed
feed
sensor/L
sensor
sensor
solenoid/L solenoid/U
7235/7228 only
SD3
PS20
3
VR1
PS13
By-pass
By-pass
By-pass
By-pass
paper feed tray paper tray paper no paper
size sensor size VR
sensor
solenoid
FM5
Developing
suction fan
FM4
Internal cooling
fan/1
BYPASS TRAY
4
MC2
Loop clutch
PFDB/U
TSL
5
Transfer Upper limit
synchro- sensor/L
nization
lamp
PS 10
PS 11
No paper
sensor/U
PFDB/L
For Finisher
Timming
sensor/U
907-1
-2
PS21
J61 : 9 - 1
J61 : 8 - 2
J61 : 7 - 3
J61 : 6 - 4
J61 : 5 - 5
J61 : 4 - 6
J61 : 3 - 7
J61 : 2 - 8
J61 : 1 - 9
M7
M8
Tray
motor/U
Tray
motor/L
DB_RST
LCT_EXIT
DB_EXIT
DB_TXD
SGND
DB_CTS
DB_RXD
SGND
DB_RTS
manuals4you.com
Appendix-9
44-B1
44-B2
44-B3
44-B4
44-B5
44-B6
44-B7
44-B8
44-B9
44-B10
44-B11
44-A1
44-A2
44-A3
44-A4
44-A5
44-A6
44-A7
44-A8
44-A9
44-A10
44-A11
DDF VV 28-B11
N.C 28-B10
FIX OK 28-B9
SGND 28-B8
APS TIM 28-B7
PS301 28-B6
EG INT 28-B5
EG RST 28-B4
SGND 28-B3
5V SYS 28-B2
SGND 28-B1
SGND 28-A11
EG RXD 28-A10
EG CTS 28-A9
EG TXD 28-A8
EG RTS 28-A7
SGND 28-A6
EE VV 28-A5
S VV 28-A4
P VV 28-A3
TONYY 28-A2
B VV 28-A1
26-A9
26-A8
26-A7
26-A6
26-A5
26-A4
26-A3
26-A2
26-A1
26-B2 24V
26-B1 DRIVE
26-B4 24V
26-B3 DRIVE
24V
24V
B
B
A
A
906-1
-2
71-6
71-5
71-4
71-3
71-2
71-1
15-B3 SGND
15-B2 PS
15-B1 5V
905: 6 - 1
905: 5 - 2
905: 4 - 3
905: 3 - 4
905: 2 - 5
905: 1 - 6
J40:3 - 1
J40:2 - 2
J40:1 - 3
PS 4
70-1
70-2
70-3
70-4
70-5
70-6
70-7
70-8
70-9
41-1 TX+
41-2 TX41-3 RX+
41-4 N.C
41-5 N.C
41-6 RX41-7 N.C
41-8 N.C
41-9 FG
41-10 FG
41-11 VDD1
41-11 LED1
41-11 VDD2
41-11 LED2
LAN
970-3
-2
-1
953-1
-2
-3
SD5
24V 26-A18
24V 26-A17
M6 CONT 26-A16
M6 F/R 26-A15
M6 CLOCK 26-A14
5V 26-A13
SGND 26-A12
SGND 26-A11
SGND 26-A10
J30:3 - 1
J30:2 - 2
J30:1 - 3
904-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
15-B15 N.C
15-B14 SGND
15-B13 SGND
15-B12 FS CTS
15-B11 SGND
15-B10 N.C
15-B9 FS RXD
15-B8 SGND
15-B7 FS RTS
15-B6 N.C
15-B5 SGND
15-B4 FS TXD
5V 15-A15
PS 15-A14
SGND 15-A13
ADU gate
solenoid
SGND
SIZE.LOW.A
SIZE.LOW.B
SIZE.LOW.C
SIZE.LOW.D
926:2 - 1
1-2
M6
24-A5
24-A4
24-A3
24-A2
24-A1
24-A8 5V
24-A7 PS
24-A6 SGND
24V 29-B8
DRIVE 29-B7
ADU motor
J03: 5 - 7
J03: 4 - 8
J03: 3 - 9
J03: 2 - 10
J03: 1 - 11
J03: 8 - 4
J03: 7 - 5
J03: 6 - 6
AD-307
(JAPAN ONLY)
91-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
960-1
-2
-3
FM7
24-A11 5V
24-A10 PS
24-A9 SGND
CN985B
J03:11 - 1
J03:10 - 2
J03: 9 - 3
Polygon cooling fan
959-1
-2
-3
24-A13 SGND
24-A12 DRIVE
RT3
3
J02: 2 - 6
J02: 1 - 7
CB 2/2
24-A19 N.C
24-A18 SGND
24-A17 SIZE.UP.A
24-A16 SIZE.UP.B
24-A15 SIZE.UP.C
24-A14 SIZE.UP.D
CN985A
J51:1 - 5
J51:2 - 4
J51:3 - 3
J51:4 - 2
J51:5 - 1
933:2 - 1
1-2
J02: 7 - 1
J02: 6 - 2
J02: 5 - 3
J02: 4 - 4
J02: 3 - 5
7235 only
J54:1 - 5
J54:2 - 4
J54:3 - 3
J54:4 - 2
J54:5 - 1
90-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
Key counter
KC
(Option)
CLOCK 22-5
LCCK 22-4
DRIVE 22-3
PGND 22-2
24V 22-1
RT3
3
2
3
5
6
8
10
24-B2 DRIVE
24-B1 24V
J54:1 - 4
J54:2 - 3
J54:3 - 2
J54:4 - 1
200: 6 - 6
200: 5 - 5
200: 4 - 4
200: 3 - 3
200: 2 - 2
200: 1 - 1
24-B5 PGND
24-B4 EM
24-B3 DRIVE
SGND 39-4
N.C 39-3
EM 39-2
DRIVE 39-1
68-B1
68-B2
68-B3
68-B4
68-B5
68-B6
68-B7
68-B8
68-B9
68-B10
68-B11
68-B12
68-B13
68-B14
68-B15
68-B16
68-B17
68-B18
24V
24V
PGND
PGND
5V
SGND
24-B8 PGND
24-B7 EM
24-B6 DRIVE
24-B11 5V
24-B10 PS
24-B9 SGND
24-B14 SGND
24-B13 VR
24-B12 5V
201:B1 - B18
201:B2 - B17
201:B3 - B16
201:B4 - B15
201:B5 - B14
201:B6 - B13
201:B7 - B12
201:B8 - B11
201:B9 - B10
201:B10- B9
201:B11- B8
201:B12- B7
201:B13- B6
201:B14- B5
201:B15- B4
201:B16- B3
201:B17- B2
201:B18- B1
910: 3 - 1
910: 2 - 2
910: 1 - 3
913: 3 - 1
913: 2 - 2
913: 1 - 3
J04: 3 - 9
J04: 2 - 10
J04: 1 - 11
J04: 6 - 6
J04: 5 - 7
J04: 4 - 8
24-B17 5V
24-B16 PS
24-B15 SGND
SGND 17-B18
M302 CLOCK 17-B17
SGND 17-B16
M302 EM 17-B15
M303 EM 17-B14
M303 F/R 17-B13
SGND 17-B12
M303 CLOCK 17-B11
SGND 17-B10
SD302 DRIVE 17-B9
PS309 17-B8
PS308 17-B7
PS306 17-B6
M303 V1 17-B5
M303 V0 17-B4
M302 V1 17-B3
M302 V0 17-B2
M301 V0 17-B1
921: 2 - 1
921: 1 - 2
962-1
-2
-3
J08: 3 - 4
J08: 2 - 5
J08: 1 - 6
J04: 9 - 3
J04: 8 - 4
J04: 7 - 5
24-B19 24V
24-B18 DRIVE
25-A14 SGND
25-A13 PS
25-A12 5V
68-A1
68-A2
68-A3
68-A4
68-A5
68-A6
68-A7
68-A8
68-A9
68-A10
68-A11
68-A12
68-A13
68-A14
68-A15
68-A16
68-A17
68-A18
DF-320
98 -3
-2
-1
J08: 6 - 1
J08: 5 - 2
J08: 4 - 3
J04:11 - 1
J04:10 - 2
J41:3 - 1
J41:2 - 2
J41:1 - 3
201:A1 - A18
201:A2 - A17
201:A3 - A16
201:A4 - A15
201:A5 - A14
201:A6 - A13
201:A7 - A12
201:A8 - A11
201:A9 - A10
201:A10- A9
201:A11- A8
201:A12- A7
201:A13- A6
201:A14- A5
201:A15- A4
201:A16- A3
201:A17- A2
201:A18- A1
969-1
-2
-3
924: 2 - 1
924: 1 - 2
971-3
-2
-1
25-A17 N.C
25-A16 24V
25-A15 DRIVE
25-B2 DRIVE
25-B1 24V
25-B5 5V
25-B4 PS
25-B3 SGND
5V 17-A18
FM301 EM 17-A17
FM301 CONT 17-A16
SD303 CONT 17-A15
VR301 17-A14
PS305 17-A13
PS304 17-A12
PS303 17-A11
PS302 17-A10
PS301 17-A9
SD301 DRIVE 17-A8
SGND 17-A7
M301 RTN 17-A6
M301 RST 17-A5
M301 EM 17-A4
M301 F/R 17-A3
SGND 17-A2
M301 CLOCK 17-A1
985B-1
985B-2
922: 2 - 1
922: 1 - 2
J01: 3 - 7
J01: 2 - 8
J01: 1 - 9
25-B8 5V
25-B7 PS
25-B6 SGND
25-B11 5V
25-B10 PS
25-B9 SGND
for KC
J01: 6 - 4
J01: 5 - 5
J01: 4 - 6
J01:9 - 1
J01:8 - 2
J01:7 - 3
-4
-2
-1
985A-3
923: 2 - 1
923: 1 - 2
956-1
-2
-3
PS 12
957-1
-2
-3
H
J33:3 - 1
J33:2 - 2
J33:1 - 3
25-B14 5V
25-B13 PS
25-B12 SGND
950-1
-2
-3
J32:3 - 1
J32:2 - 2
J32:1 - 3
G
24V 35- 1
SIG 35- 2
SGND 35- 3
DRIVE 35- 4
N.C 35- 5
25-B17 5V
25-B16 PS
25-B15 SGND
961-1
-2
-3
J31:3 - 1
J31:2 - 2
J31:1 - 3
7.8
for DCPS
958-1
-2
-3
APPENDIX
Polygon motor
M5
SCB 3/3
ADU is standard equipment for 7235/7228/7222
ADUDB
ADU sensor
for DB UNIT
Symbol
Connector
Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
7235/7228 only
40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
Symbol
Part name
Location
Symbol
Part name
Location
COPY VENDER
COPY VENDER
Appendix-3 1-I
M1
Main motor
Appendix-3 2-H
PS24
IT exit sensor /L
Appendix-3 9-H
AD-307
AD-307
Appendix-4 5-C
M2
Scanner motor
Appendix-3 8-D
PS25
IT door sensor
Appendix-3 8-H
DB-211
DB-211
Appendix-1 2-G
M4
Appendix-3 5-H
TH1
Appendix-3 5-D
DB-411
DB-411
Appendix-1 2-G
M5
Polygon motor
Appendix-4 4-A
TH2
Appendix-3 5-D
DF-320
DF-320
Appendix-4 1-B
M6
ADU motor
Appendix-4 5-D
HUM1
Humidity sensor
Appendix-3 5-C
DIMM
DIMM
Appendix-2 3-D
M7
Tray motor /U
Appendix-4 7-I
TDS
Appendix-3 6-D
FK-103/FL-103
FK-103/FL-103
Appendix-2 4-A
M8
Tray motor /L
Appendix-4 8-I
TLD
Toner level sensor
Appendix-3 5-H
FS-113
FS-113
Appendix-3 5-A
M9
Paper feed motor
Appendix-3 3-H
TS
Thermostat
Appendix-1 7-A
FS-114
FS-114
Appendix-3 5-A
M10
Appendix-3 6-H
SW1
Main power switch
Appendix-1 4-C
HD-103 Type A
HD-103
Appendix-2 1-D
M11
Fixing motor
Appendix-4 7-I
SW2
Sub power switch
Appendix-3 7-A
IP-424
IP-424
Appendix-2 8-D
FM1
DCPS cooling fan
Appendix-1 4-F
SW3
Interlock switch
Appendix-1 5-E
IT-101
IT-101
Appendix-3 8-G
FM2
Fixing cooling fan
Appendix-3 7-H
VR1
By-pass tray paper size VR
Appendix-4 3-I
KC
Key counter
Appendix-4 1-D
FM3
Appendix-3 7-H
PTC
PTC heater
Appendix-1 6-E
BATTERY
Battery
Appendix-2 1-E
LT-203
LT-203
Appendix-3 2-A
FM4
Appendix-4 4-I
TC
Total counter
Appendix-3 5-H
FM5
Appendix-4 4-I
ADB
A/D conversion board
Appendix-2 1-A
FM6
Appendix-3 7-H
ADUDB
ADU drive board
Appendix-4 6-C
FM7
Polygon cooling fan
Appendix-4 4-D
CB
Main control board
Appendix-3 1-F
MC1
Registration clutch
Appendix-3 6-H
FCB
Appendix-1 5-B
MC2
Loop clutch
Appendix-4 4-I
INDEX
Index sensor board
Appendix-2 2-H
SD1
1st paper feed solenoid /U
Appendix-4 2-I
L1INVB
Exposure lamp power supply board
Appendix-3 8-D
SD2
1st paper feed solenoid /L
Appendix-4 2-I
LCDB
Display board
Appendix-1 5-G
SD3
By-pass paper feed solenoid
Appendix-4 3-I
LDB
LD drive board
Appendix-2 1-H
SD4
Appendix-3 6-H
OB
Operation board
Appendix-1 6-F
SD5
ADU gate solenoid
Appendix-4 5-D
PAKB
Panel key board
Appendix-1 4-F
SD7
Appendix-3 7-D
PFDB/L
Paper feed detection board /L
Appendix-4 6-H
SD8
Gate solenoid
Appendix-3 9-H
PFDB/U
Paper feed detection board /U
Appendix-4 5-H
SD9
Toner solenoid
Appendix-3 8-H
PRMB
Appendix-2 4-D
PS1
Registration sensor
Appendix-4 1-I
PSW2B
Power SW2 board
Appendix-3 7-A
PS2
Fixing exit sensor
Appendix-3 6-D
SCB
Appendix-1 8-E
PS4
ADU sensor
Appendix-4 6-D
TCSB
Appendix-3 6-D
PS5
Toner bottle sensor
Appendix-3 5-H
DCPS
DC power supply unit
Appendix-1 1-A
PS7
Upper limit sensor /U
Appendix-4 2-I
HV
High voltage unit
Appendix-3 3-D
PS8
No paper sensor /L
Appendix-4 2-I
INV1
Appendix-3 8-E
PS9
Tray set sensor /U
Appendix-4 1-I
INV2
Display inverter
Appendix-1 4-I
PS10
Upper limit sensor /L
Appendix-4 5-I
CBR1
Circuit breaker /1
Appendix-1 2-A
PS11
No paper sensor /U
Appendix-4 5-I
CBR2
Circuit breaker /2
Appendix-1 2-B
PS12
Tray set sensor /L
Appendix-4 1-I
NF
Noise filter
Appendix-1 3-A
PS13
By-pass no paper sensor
Appendix-4 3-I
L1
Exposure lamp
Appendix-3 8-C
PS14
Appendix-3 9-D
L2
Appendix-1 7-B
PS15
APS timing sensor
Appendix-3 9-D
L3
Appendix-1 7-B
PS17
APS sensor
Appendix-3 8-D
PCL
Pre-charging lamp
Appendix-3 7-D
PS20
By-pass tray paper size sensor
Appendix-4 3-I
TSL
Appendix-4 5-I
PS21
Timing sensor /U
Appendix-4 7-I
LCD
LCD
Appendix-1 5-G
PS22
Timing sensor /L
Appendix-4 2-I
BL
Back light
Appendix-1 4-H
PS23
IT exit sensor /U
Appendix-3 8-H
Appendix-10
APPENDIX
7.9

1
9
A
SK-114
Punch Unit Setting 1st Detection

GND
Punch Unit Setting 2nd Detection
GND
Punch Unit Setting 3rd Detection
GND
D
SK-114
SK-114
Staple Needle Empty Detect Sensor

Staple Selfpriming Detect Sensor
Staple Home Detect Sensor
Chopper Unit Setting Detection

GND
PK-114
Symbol
Connector Faston
Crimp
Relay connector
I
1
manuals4you.com
Appendix-11
APPENDIX
Symbol
Part name
Location
PK-114
PK-114
1-E
SK-114
SK-114
1-A, 1-D
CL1-FN
Registration clutch
7-B
M1-FN
Exit motor
7-E
M2-FN
Transport motor
7-C
M3-FN
Entrance motor
7-C
M4-FN
Allignment motor 1
7-G
M5-FN
Allignment motor 2
7-F
M6-FN
7-B
M7-FN
7-E
M11-FN
Elevator motor
7-G
M12-FN
Shutter opening motor
7-G
PC3-FN
Elevator tray home position sensor
7-I
PC4-FN
Entrance sensor
7-B
PC5-FN
Transport sensor
7-A
PC6-FN
7-F
PC7-FN
7-F
PC8-FN
Storage tray detecting sensor
7-E
PC10-FN
7-D
PC11-FN
Exit paddle home position sensor
7-D
PC12-FN
Exit roller home position sensor
7-A
PC14-FN
Elevator tray lower limit sensor
7-H
PC15-FN
Top face detection sensor
7-I
PC16-FN
Shutter home position sensor
7-H
S1-FN
Front cover open/close detection SW
2-C
S2-FN
Shutter detection SW
7-H
S3-FN
Elevate tray upper/lower limit SW
7-G
S4-FN
Transport jam detection SW
7-A
SL1-FN
7-B
SL2-FN
Exit paddle solenoid
7-C
M1-PK
Punch motor
2-G
PC1-PK
Punch trash full sensor
2-E
PC2-PK
2-F
PC3-PK
Punch positioning sensor 1
2-F
PC4-PK
Punch positioning sensor 2
2-F
PWB-A FN
Main control board
3-B
PWB-B FN
Elevator board
5-H
Appendix-12
PARTS CATALOG
Models
7222/7228/7235
MARCH 2004
CMPC-7222/7228/7235
manuals4you.com
manuals4you.com
HOW TO USE THIS CATALOG
This parts catalog includes illustrations and part numbers for all replacement parts and assemblies used in this model.
Model-specific parts are identified in the illustrations with reference
numbers. Use the reference number to locate the corresponding part
number on the facing page.
Common hardware items, such as screws, nuts, washers, and pins, are
identified in the illustrations with reference letters. Use the reference letter to locate the corresponding part number on the hardware listing in the
lower right hand corner of the facing page.
If you know a part number, but dont know where the part is used, use
the numerical index to determine the page number and reference number for that part. Because some common parts are used in several
places, there may be more than one entry. Refer to the illustrations to see
where the part may be used.
If you know a parts description, but dont know where to look to find
the part number, use the alphabetical index to determine likely page and
reference numbers. Then look at the illustrations to determine that you
have identified the correct part. Locate the part number using the listing
on the opposite page.
Retail pricing that appears with the numerical index, while valid when
this catalog was printed, is subject to change without notice. The prices
are only suggested prices and are provided only for reference. Dealers
may determine their own selling prices. For up-to-date pricing, refer to
current Konica price lists or contact the Konica Parts Distribution Center.
How to order parts
Use standard Konica parts ordering procedures to obtain these parts. For
ordering options, contact Konicas Parts Distribution Center.
When ordering parts, be sure to specify part numbers exactly as listed in
this catalog.
NOTE: Electrical parts may include previously used components.
Models 7222/7228/7235
Konica Minolta Business Solutions U.S.A., Inc.
1st Edition
Page iii
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
This page left blank intentionally.
Page iv
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
CONTENTS
How to Use This Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Main Frame
. . . . . . . .
External Parts
. . . . . . . .
Operation Unit
. . . . . . . .
Optics Unit
. . . . . . . .
Driving Unit
. . . . . . . .
Drum Cartridge . . . . . . . .
Charging Corona Unit . . . . .
Transfer/Separator Corona Unit
Developing Unit . . . . . . . .
Toner Supply Unit . . . . . . . .
Paper Feed Unit (Upper) . . . .
Suction Unit
. . . . . . . .
Paper Feed Unit (Lower) . . . .
Conveyance Unit . . . . . . . .
Fixing Unit
. . . . . . . .
Registration Unit . . . . . . . .
Manual Feed Unit . . . . . . . .
Paper Exit Unit
. . . . . . . .
ADU
. . . . . . . .
Upper Cassette . . . . . . . .
Lower Cassette . . . . . . . .
Electric Parts
. . . . . . . .
Writing Unit
. . . . . . . .
Wiring
. . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.2
.4
.8
10
14
20
26
28
30
34
38
42
44
48
50
58
60
66
68
74
76
78
82
84
Alphabetical Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Numerical Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
Page v
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
Page vi
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
1. Main Frame
2. External Parts
3. Operation Unit
4. Optics Unit
5. Driving Section
6. Drum Cartridge
7. Charging Corona Unit
8. Transfer/Separator Corona Unit
9. Developing Unit
10. Toner Supply Unit
11. Paper Feed Unit/Upper
12. Suction Unit
13. Paper Feed Unit/Lower
14. Conveyance Unit
15. Fixing Unit
16. Registration Unit
17. Manual Feed Unit
18. Paper Exit Unit
19. ADU
20. Cassette
21. Electric Parts
22. Writing Unit
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
Page 1
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
MAIN FRAME
Page 2
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
40LA12342
27LA80510
26NA10442
26NA73731
26NA47350
26NA10310
26NA10071
26NA-1060
26NA-1070
25HA10292
26NA10181
26NA10062
40LA10350
27LA10360
26NA73680
26WA90330
56AA85510
DESCRIPTION
Lifting handle
Main body fan motor
Shaft support plate
Dust proof seal/5
Cassette stopper
Lift up cover
Cassette rail/left
Lift up shaft/front assembly
Lift up shaft/rear assembly
Main setting rubber
Lock part
Cassette rail/right
Rail/left
Rail/right
Dust proof filter
Wiring/3
Photosensor
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
00Z283061
00Z193061
00Z183061
00Z163061
00Z183082
00Z253121
00Z193101
Page 3
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
EXTERNAL PARTS
Page 4
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
25
25
26
27
26TA12022
40LA12042
26NA12121
40LA48190
083020140
26NE97185
26NA12401
40LA12081
40LA12011
26NE97820
26NA73731
26NA12430
26NA12033
40LA-1310
40LA12131
40LA12561
40LA12061
26NE88310
26NA97830
26NA97040
26NE97141
40LA12571
27LA80510
26NA12111
27LB97120
27MA97120
27NA97120
27LA97130
27LA97110
DESCRIPTION
Main cover/upper
Side cover/rear
Main auxiliary cover
Neurtalizing plate
Stopper part
Laser caution label/3
Magnet pressure plate
Front door/right
Main cover/front
Toner supply caution label
Dust proof seal/5
External fixed screw
Rear cover/right
Paper exit cover assembly
Front cover/upper
Main body cover/left
Paper exit guide cover
Total counter
Toner supply label/2
Toner supply label
High voltage caution label
Fan cover/upper
Main fan motor
Paper exit tray
Name plate/2 (7222)
Name plate/2 (7228)
Name plate/2 (7235)
Name plate/3
Name plate/1
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
00Z253081
00Z193061
00Z193062
00Z243081
00Z283061
00Z183061
Page 5
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
EXTERNAL PARTS
Page 6
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
40LA12161
40LA12241
26NA61820
40LA12051
26NA12420
26NA12211
26NA12550
40LA-1320
40LA12540
40LA12232
26NA62130
40LA-1260
27LA12450
26NA12181
26NA97083
40LA10170
40LA13071
26NA12190
DESCRIPTION
Rear cover/left
Reading cover/left
ADF detecting actuator
Side cover/left
Shaft guide cover
Reading cover/front
Spring regulating sheet
Rear cover assembly
Accessories holding panel
Reading cover/rear
Detecting spring
Reading/right external assembly
Cord cover/B
Cord cover/A
Laser indication label
Ozone filter
Read cover/front
Cord cover/B
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
00Z193061
00Z193062
Page 7
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
OPERATION UNIT
Page 8
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27LE-7000
40LE70040
40LA70021
40LA70031
27LA83520
27LA90160
40LA70230
40LA70911
40LA70011
40LA-9040
40LA70240
27LA-9030
27LA70210
40LA70200
40LA70180
27LA87520
55VA87542
40LA70161
40LA70170
40LA70140
40LA70111
40LA70121
40LA70130
40LA70191
40LA70150
DESCRIPTION
Operation unit
Operation unit sheet
Operation unit cover/lower
Operation unit cover
Indication starter
Operation wiring
Operation unit button/L
Operation unit insulating sheet/1
Operation unit cover/upper
Operation board/2 assembly
Operation unit button/M
Operation board/1assembly
Operation unit button/K
Operation unit button/J
Operation unit button/H
Touch key board
Indication board
Operation unit button/F
Operation unit button/G
Operation unit button/D
Operation unit button/A
Operation unit button/B
Operation unit button/C
Operation unit button/I
Operation unit button/E
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
00Z193061
00Z253081
00Z921931
00Z920013
00Z926257
00Z926285
Page 9
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
OPTICS UNIT
Page 10
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
40LA-6270
26NA62451
56AA85530
26NA61812
26NA61732
26NA61300
40LA-6280
26NA61150
56AA85510
26NA62050
40LA61140
26NA61840
26NE97141
40LA61121
40LA61830
27LA-6260
40LA62010
40LA70550
DESCRIPTION
Platen glass assembly

Ground spring/3
APS sensor/2
Wiring guide plate/1
Lens cover
Glass holder plate/front
Platen glass assembly/2
Glass holder plate/rear
Photosensor
ADF guide block
Mounting plate
Optics slide sheet/2
ADF mount plate/right
Optics slide sheet/1
CCD unit
Wiring guide part/3
Operation unit rocking shaft holder
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
00Z193061
00Z283061
00Z183101
00Z183201
00Z163031
00Z193043
00Z163081
00Z926257
00Z163061
Page 11
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
OPTICS UNIT
Page 12
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
26NA-6192
26NA61940
26NA61380
26NA61560
40LA61920
26NA61610
26NA61540
26NA61600
26NA61551
40LA61930
26NA61370
40LA83010
40LA62460
56QA75070
26NA61410
26NA61340
26TA80021
26NA-9511
40LA61221
40LA61211
26NA61200
DESCRIPTION
Mirror mount plate/2 assembly

Wire pulley
Slide part
Optics slide plate/front
Driving pulley (Z=55)
Mirror pressure spring/4
Optics mirror/2
Mirror pressure spring/3
Optics slide plate/rear
Motor belt (L=160.5)
Reflect mirror
Exposure lamp
Motor tension spring/1
Driving shaft holder/8
Mirror pressure spring
Optics mirror/1
Scanner driving motor
Powering board assembly
Optics wire/front
Optics wire/rear
Wire driving pulley
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
j
k
m
n
s
t
00Z670406
00Z670606
00Z713186
00Z474063
00Z193041
00Z183101
00Z163061
00Z163081
00Z660306
00Z253061
00Z183031
00Z610421
00Z193061
00Z194043
Page 13
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
DRIVING UNIT
Page 14
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
466076020
26NA16120
26NA15690
26NA17280
26NA-1540
56AA17320
26NA-1531
56QA75070
26NA16150
26NA17270
27LA80030
26NA17610
27LA17140
26NA15550
26NA15680
190041410
26TA15750
27LA15520
26NA15200
27LA15540
26NA17250
26NA15730
26NA15740
26NA-1560
26NA15600
27LA15500
27LA15510
26NA15760
26NA15560
27LA15630
26NA15580
26NA16140
26NA30870
26TA15080
26NA17580
40LA-1570
27LA15530
27LA80010
27LA15770
190041420
Models 7222/7228/7235
DESCRIPTION
Paper feeding shaft holder

Idler gear/B (Z=43)
Collecting gear (Z=54)
Developing drive shaft holder
Collecting shaft assembly
Pin/A
Drum input shaft assembly
Driving shaft holder/8
Idler gear/D (Z=27/45)
Tension spring
DC brushless motor/30
Tension roller
Belt (L=380)
Gear/F (Z=32/34)
Gear/Q (Z=23/23)
Spacer/6
Agitator gear/A
Gear/A (Z=53)
Coupling spring
Gear/E (Z=32/38)
Gear/X (Z=45)
Gear/J (Z=35)
Paper exit gear (Z=26)
Drive plate assembly
Drum driving gear (Z=108)
Gear/C (Z=23/98)
Gear/B (Z=99)
Gear/R (Z=21/50)
Gear/G (Z=24/49)
Gear/M (Z=32/50)
Gear/H (Z=55)
Idler gear/C (Z=35)
Spring spacer
Gear/D (Z=26)
Agitating coupling/B
Dumper plate assembly
Gear/D (Z=37/50)
Developing drive gear (Z=37)
Spacer/8
1st Edition
HARDWARE
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
d
e
f
g
h
j
n
p
q
r
s
t
u
00Z670406
00Z670606
00Z193043
00Z680806
00Z163061
00Z193041
00Z253081
00Z193042
00Z921302
00Z921941
00Z600306
00Z670306
00Z184081
00Z620401
00Z610401
Page 15
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
DRIVING UNIT
Page 16
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
26NA17560
26NA17590
26NA40820
56AA17320
190041410
26NA16270
40LA17040
26NA76010
26NA17600
26NA16260
40LA17480
26NA16301
26NA16211
26NA16200
26NA-1681
40LA17490
26NA16160
26NA80041
26NA16170
40LA16190
684276031
26NA82020
26NA16310
40LA17030
066079020
40LA90340
26NA17570
322076010
27LA17550
27LA17540
40LA-1030
Models 7222/7228/7235
DESCRIPTION
Developing input coupling

Spacer/B
Paper feed slide shaft holder
Pin/A
Spacer/6
Idler gear/L (Z=16)
Developing drive gear/1 (Z=33/24)
Paper feed shaft holder
Manual feed driving gear/2
Driving gear (Z=15)
Paper feed coupling gear/A (Z=25)
Idler gear/O (Z=35)
Idler gear/G (Z=21/35)
Idler gear/F (Z=41)
Paper feed gear/2 assembly
Paper feed coupling gear/B (Z=20)
Manual feed driving gear/1 (Z=25)
Cassette driving motor
Idler gear/E(Z=45)
Gear (Z=25)
Paper exit shaft holder
Paper feed clutch
Paper feed gear (Z=20)
Developing idling gear (Z=45)
Drawer
Developing relay wiring
Developing input coupling/B
Paper lift up lever shaft hold
Developing driving gear/7 (Z=38)
Developing driving gear/6 (Z=42)
Driving auxiliary panel/B assembly
1st Edition
HARDWARE
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
d
e
f
g
h
j
k
m
n
00Z670406
00Z670606
00Z283061
00Z193043
00Z193061
00Z670306
00Z921322
00Z193181
00Z193121
00Z193201
00Z600406
Page 17
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
DRIVING UNIT
Page 18
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
27LA80010
26NA16250
26NA16270
40LA17490
26NA16260
40LA17480
26NA-1691
26NA16241
26NA16231
26NA16310
27LA82010
40LA16120
26NA16130
26NA16220
26NA16110
40LA17260
190041410
40LA17010
40LA-1040
DESCRIPTION
Idler gear/K (Z=20)
Idler gear/L (Z=16)
Paper feed coupling gear/B (Z=20)
Driving gear (Z=15)
Paper feed coupling gear/A (Z=25)
Idler gear/J (Z=25)
Idler gear/I (Z=15/25)
Paper feed gear (Z=20)
Regist clutch
Idler gear/B (Z=48)
Clutch gear/1(Z=27)
Idler gear/H (Z=33)
Idler gear/A (Z=27/54)
Paper feed driving gear (Z=56/37)
Spacer/6
Drive idling gear (Z=51)
Driving auxiliary panel/C assembly
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
00Z670406
00Z283061
00Z670506
00Z193061
00Z921322
00Z193041
00Z670306
Page 19
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
DRUM CARTRIDGE
Page 20
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
392045260
27LA90070
40AA73191
26NA21340
27LA-2110
26NA20140
27LA-2000
26NA20420
27LA-2290
26NA20380
26NA20920
26NA20570
26NA21360
26NA20580
40LA20940
40LA-2140
26NA21440
26NA20170
26NA20710
26NA20160
DESCRIPTION
Electrode connecting spring (B)

Drum wiring
Charging input spring
Drum rotary part
Blade seal block/F assembly
Screw shaft holder
Drum unit assembly
Idler gear (Z=25)
Blade seal block/1 assembly
Rocking shaft holder
Shaft fixed part
Separation rocking gear (Z=18)
Drum support shaft holder
Separation rocking cam
Drum support part
Drum shaft assembly
Cartridge screw
Agitating gear (Z=19/30)
Felt/A
Screw gear (Z=24)
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
j
k
00Z670306
00Z670406
00Z193043
00Z193061
00Z263081
00Z253081
00Z253121
00Z183061
00Z920107
00Z193081
Page 21
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
DRUM CARTRIDGE
Page 22
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
26NA20270
26NA20310
26NA20300
26NA20242
40AA20230
26TA20320
26NA20290
26NA21330
26NA-9181
26TA-2090
26NA-2260
26NA21380
26NA21400
26TA20190
26NA21420
26NA21430
26NA20200
26NA-2180
40AA20170
DESCRIPTION
Separate release lever

Separate rocking screw
Separate rocking collar
Separate guide plate
Separate release spring
Separate auxiliary roller
Separate rocking spring
Mounting sheet/B
Toner detecting board assembly
Separate solenoid assembly
Solenoid seal
Paper guide sheet/A
Blade pressure spring
Paper guide sheet/C
Paper guide sheet/D
Toner guide sheet
Separation claw assembly
Separation fulcrum shaft
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
00Z193043
00Z193061
00Z253081
00Z193041
00Z242061
00Z183061
Page 23
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
DRUM CARTRIDGE
Page 24
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
26TA21470
26TA21480
26NA20220
26NA20140
26NA20560
26NA21160
26NA21280
26NA20250
26NA20480
26TA21611
26TA-2271
26NA20870
26TA21540
26TA21490
26TA21460
26TA21510
26TA-2050
26NA-2120
26NA-2300
26NA20071
26NA20553
DESCRIPTION
Toner conveyance gear/2 (Z=18)

Cleaner collect seal
Screw shaft holder
Toner collect coupling
Shaft holder spacer
Screw shaft holder/B
Shaft holder fulcrum part
Drum shaft holder/F
Spewing PV sheet/B
Collect cover/C assembly
Cleaner auxiliary part
Recycling shaft holder
Agitator plate/A
Screw guide/rear assembly
Blade seal block/R assembly
Toner collect screw
Toner agitate shaft
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
j
k
m
n
00Z670306
00Z670206
00Z112021
00Z193061
00Z163061
00Z253101
00Z253121
00Z253081
00Z600306
00Z670256
00Z196043
Page 25
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
CHARGING CORONA UNIT
Page 26
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
26NA25180
26NA25160
25HA25091
26NA25020
26NA25040
26NA25070
26NA25170
26NA25060
26NA25012
26NA25051
25HA25100
26NA-2520
26NA-2510
26WA-2501
DESCRIPTION
Charging spring
Charging control plate
Charge cleaning knob
Charging block/front
Spark arrester preventive plate/front
Charging electrode plate
Wire tension spring
Charging wire
Charging block/rear
Spark arrester preventive plate/rear
Shaft stopper part
Charging cleaning assembly
Charging discharge plate assembly
Charging corona unit
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
00Z253061
00Z660306
Page 27
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
TRANSFER/SEPARATOR CORONA UNIT
Page 28
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
26NA26190
26NA26080
40LA-2600
26NA26230
26NA25130
26NA26271
26NA26151
26NA26070
26NA26041
26NA26060
26NA26250
26NA26260
26NA73251
26NA26141
26NA-2620
26NA-2640
26NA-2630
56AA17830
DESCRIPTION
Separate bridge
Discharge wire
Transfer separator corona unit
Wire tension spring
Cleaner pressure spring
Transfer cleaning part/E
Transfer cleaning part/B
Spark arrester preventive plate/rear
Transfer separator block/rear
Spark arrester preventive plate/front
Electrode plate
Electrode spring
Electrode connecting spring/A
Transfer cleaning part/A
Transfer separator block/front
Cleaner cover assembly
Cleaner shaft assembly
Transfer holding rubber
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
00Z253081
00Z600406
00Z24B061
00Z112031
Page 29
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
DEVELOPING UNIT
Page 30
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
27LA-3000
466078010
26NA30950
40LA90250
26NA30170
26NA30850
26NA30810
26NA30770
26NA30660
26NA30730
26NA21360
26NA30700
26NA31010
26NA30940
26NA30150
26NA30140
26NA30490
26NA30630
26NA30650
56AA17320
DESCRIPTION
Developing unit
Pin A
Agitate coupling/A
Development wiring
Idler gear (Z=19)
Shaft holder spacer
Developing gear/C (Z=27)
Developing shaft holder
Developing guide shaft holder
Agitate coupling
Developing gear
Positioning screw
Developing seal/S
Agitate gear/B (Z=27)
Agitate gear/A (Z=27)
Developing electrode cover
Developing shaft holder/front
Developing shaft holder/rear
Pin/A
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
j
k
00Z670406
00Z670506
00Z163061
00Z183061
00Z253061
00Z193061
00Z253081
00Z670606
00Z163081
00Z670306
Page 31
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
DEVELOPING UNIT
Page 32
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
26TA-3062
26NA-3040
26NA88040
26NA30741
26NA-3050
26NA-3020
26NA30930
26NA30440
029420640
DESCRIPTION
Developing cover assembly

Developing rail/left
Developing cover part/A assembly
Developing cover part/C assembly
Developing support stopper
Spewing preventive sheet/2
L detecting seal
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
00Z253061
00Z193061
Page 33
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
Page 34
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
40LA-3202
40LA-3350
26NA32960
25HA32152
26NA32930
26WA-3250
26WA32530
26NA32040
26NA32970
26NA32540
26NA32280
26NA32550
26NA32200
40LA-3220
26WA32520
26NA32660
26NA80060
26NA32590
26NA32680
26NA32920
26NA32090
40AA88030
26NA32910
26NA32940
26TA33010
40LA32270
26NA32560
26NA82512
27LA32720
DESCRIPTION
Toner supply unit

Toner supply gear assembly
Felt/C
Toner conveyance shaft holder/A
Toner supply seal/3
Agitate screw assembly
Toner supply screw
Pin
Toner agitate shaft holder
Screw seal part/upper
Toner agitate shaft holder/right
Screw seal part/lower
Toner supply base/upper assembly
Toner conveyance gear/3 (Z=17/23)
Toner supply shaft holder
Toner supply motor
Toner supply regulating gear (Z=42)
Toner conveyance gear/5 (Z=16/23)
Toner supply seal/2
Toner supply open/close spring
Remained detecting sensor
Toner supply seal/1
Toner supply seal/4
Toner agitate sheet/front
Screw seal part/middle
Toner agitate shaft holder/left
Paper feed solenoid
Locking spring
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
c
d
e
f
g
h
00Z670406
00Z283061
00Z253081
00Z193041
00Z143041
00Z670506
00Z921941
Page 35
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
TONER SUPPLY UNIT
Page 36
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
10
11
40LA-3231
26TA32580
26TA32640
26TA32610
40LA10350
56AA85510
26NA32230
26TA-3330
26WE-3340
26YE-3340
40LA-3320
26WA90330
DESCRIPTION
Toner supply driving assembly

Toner supply regulating gear (Z=18)
Toner supply gear/2 (Z=16/51)
Toner supply gear/1(Z=23/51)
Rail/left
Photosensor
Detecting actuator/A
Pressure assembly
Toner supply guide part assembly (7222/7228)
Toner supply guide part assembly (7235)
Toner cartridge pressure assembly
Wiring/3
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
00Z283061
00Z670406
00Z194061
00Z253081
00Z253141
Page 37
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED UNIT (UPPER)
Page 38
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
26NA40820
26PA-4141
26NA40101
26NA82512
26NA40810
26NA40760
56AA85510
26WA90120
26XA90120
26NA40110
26WA40230
26NA40830
26NA40700
540076010
26NA40161
40LA40090
26NA40080
40AA40150
40AA76040
26NA40510
26NA40170
26NA40180
26NA40790
27LA41030
26XA40920
26XA-4050
08AA85510
DESCRIPTION

Toner cover assembly
Double feed preventive roller/upper
Paper feed solenoid
Paper feeding spring
Lever hold spring
Photosensor
Paper feed wiring/upper(7222)
Paper feed wiring/upper(7228/7235)
Double feed preventive rubber/upper
Paper feed connecting roller/1
Positioning arm
Shaft positioning part
Driving coupling
Paper feeding rubber
Feeding roller
Feeding shaft holder
Paper feed idler gear (Z=17)
Shaft positioning plate/front
Shaft positioning plate/rear
Shaft positioning plate/middle
Solenoid protection cushion
Paper detecting actuator (7228/7235)
Sensor mounting plate/upper assembly (7228/7235)
Photosensor (7228/7235)
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
h
j
k
m
n
00Z670306
00Z670406
00Z670606
00Z712106
00Z193061
00Z193101
00Z163051
00Z283061
00Z921302
00Z921942
00Z670206
Page 39
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED UNIT (UPPER)
Page 40
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
40AA40181
26NA40120
26NA40500
40AA40450
27LA40280
066079020
26NA40631
26PA40033
27LA40750
26NA40641
26NA40911
26NA40261
40LA97430
25AA75530
26NA42560
26NA40224
DESCRIPTION
Lever click shaft

Double feed preventive rubber/lower
Double feed preventive roller
Double feed pressure spring
Paper detecting actuator
Drawer
Paper feed pressure spring/front
Paper feed guide plate/upper
Paper detecting actuator/2
Paper feed pressure spring/rear
Paper feed guide sheet/A
Conveyance pressure spring
Lever indication label/1
Slide shaft holder
Manual feed driven roller
Paper feed auxiliary part
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
00Z670306
00Z670406
00Z193061
00Z253081
Page 41
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
SUCTION UNIT
Page 42
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
40LA-3160
40LA-3111
40LA-3121
40LA-3130
40LA-3150
40LA-3170
27LA80510
40LA-3180
40LA-3141
26NA73731
DESCRIPTION
Suction cover sticking assembly

Suction cover/2 assembly
Fan cover/2 assembly
Suction cover/5 sticking assembly
Main fan motor
Suction filter/A assembly
Dust proof seal/5
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
00Z193061
00Z253081
00Z193062
Page 43
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED UNIT (LOWER)
Page 44
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
26XA90130
26WA90130
56AA85510
26NA40281
26NA40751
26NA40110
26NA40700
540076010
26NA40101
26NA40810
26NA82512
26NA40830
26NA40760
26NA40161
40LA40090
26NA40080
40AA40150
40AA76040
26NA40510
40LA40990
26NA40170
26NA40180
26NA40790
27LA41030
DESCRIPTION
Paper feed wiring/lower (7228/7235)

Paper feed wiring/lower (7222)
Photosensor
Paper detecting actuator/2
Double feed preventive rubber/upper
Double feed preventive roller/upper
Paper feeding spring
Paper feed solenoid
Positioning arm
Lever hold spring
Driving coupling
Feeding roller
Feeding shaft holder
Paper feed dust proof sheet
Shaft positioning plate/rear
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
00Z670306
00Z670406
00Z283061
00Z712106
00Z193061
00Z193101
00Z921942
00Z163051
Page 45
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
PAPER FEED UNIT (LOWER)
Page 46
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
27LA-4010
40LA-4011
26NA40120
26NA40500
40AA40181
40AA40450
26PA40743
26NA40820
26NA40671
26NA40681
26NA40192
26NA40271
26NA50352
26NA-4160
26NA40880
26NA40720
26NA40890
40LA40970
DESCRIPTION
Paper feed lower assembly (7222)

Paper feed lower assembly (7228/7235)
Double feed preventive rubber/lower
Lever click shaft
Paper feed guide plate/lower
Paper feed connecting roller/2
Paper feed driven roller/lower
Paper feed plate/right
Side guide plate
Guide sheet
Paper feed enter plate assembly
Cam release part/rear
Paper feed conveyance spring
Slide shaft holder
Paper feed auxiliary sheet/middle
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
00Z193061
00Z670606
00Z183061
00Z193141
00Z163121
Page 47
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
CONVEYANCE UNIT
Page 48
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
27LA-4500
40LA45410
26NA45490
26NA45071
26YA-4580
40LA97380
26NA45330
26NA45220
26NA45341
26NA97491
40LA45350
26NA45290
40LA97480
26NA45401
26NA45430
26NA45320
26NA45310
DESCRIPTION
Conveyance unit
Electrode cleaning knob
Lifting spring/2
Liftup spring
PTL light shield assembly
Open/close label/lower
Lock spring/2
Open/close lever
Conveyance guide part
Drum caution label
Conveyance knob
Ground spring
Guide part
Conveyance stopper
Lock spring/1
Open/close lever/2
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
00Z243061
00Z670606
00Z253081
00Z113041
00Z193061
Page 49
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
FIXING UNIT
Page 50
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
11
27LE-5300
27NE-5300
40LA54430
26NA53770
26NA53740
26NA54230
26NA53780
26NA53931
26NA54280
40AA53470
26NA54053
27LA-5460
26TA-5460
DESCRIPTION
Fixing unit (7222/7228)

Fixing unit (7235)
Terminal fixing screw/2
Terminal plate/A
Terminal plate/A
Terminal fixing screw
Terminal plate/B
Fixed screw
Terminal plate
Terminal plate/1
Wiring guide part/B
Pressure spring assembly (7222/7228)
Pressure spring assembly (7235)
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
00Z163061
00Z920091
00Z193041
00Z183031
00Z153061
00Z600406
00Z610301
Page 51
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
FIXING UNIT
Page 52
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
26WA-5341
26NA53035
40LE83020
40LE83030
26NA53403
40LA53890
26NA53620
26NA53211
26NA53720
26NA53710
27LA53900
26NA54030
40LA90050
26TA90040
SP00-0110
26NA54060
26NA53730
26NA53413
DESCRIPTION
Fixing sensor assembly

Fixing roller/upper
Fixing heater/1
Fixing heater/2
Fixing cover/front
Lamp support part/front
Fixing fixed part
Wiring guide part/A
Fixing shaft holder/upper
Lamp support part/rear
Mount screw
Fixing powering wiring
Fuse cord/1
Fuse mount plate assembly
Fixing gear (Z=40)
Fixing cover/rear
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
00Z193041
00Z163101
00Z921330
00Z164061
00Z163061
00Z193061
00Z193251
00Z113041
Page 53
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
FIXING UNIT
Page 54
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
40LA53510
27LA53270
26NA54160
27LA54270
27LA-5400
26NA53790
26NA-5430
40LA-5410
40LA-5420
26NA53650
26NA53610
26NA53490
27LA53830
26NA-5482
26NA54300
56AA17320
27LA53470
26NA53432
26NA53680
26NA53250
26NA53360
26NA54010
DESCRIPTION
Fixing cleaning bearing

Separation support plate
Separate spring
Fixing claw
Cleaner assembly
Heat insulating part
Cleaner driving shaft assembly
Regulating plate/front assembly
Regulating plate/rear assembly
Fixing entrance plate
Cleaner pressure spring
Fixing cleaner shaft holder/A
Fixing cleaner roller
Fixing entrance plate/2 assembly
Pin/A
Cleaner gear/B (Z=34)
Web
Pressure part/A
Fixing heat insulate sheet/B
Fixing heat insulate sheet/C
Pressure part/B
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
00Z670306
00Z670406
00Z193041
00Z193061
00Z253061
00Z163061
Page 55
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
FIXING UNIT
Page 56
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
55VA85520
26TA90490
26TA53171
26NA53700
27LA53070
26NA-5281
26NA54070
26NA53884
40LA54110
26NA54120
26NA54080
27LA53040
26NA54100
26NA53021
192141710
26NA-5440
26NA53931
26NA53131
466078010
27LA53080
26NA53460
26NA-5470
26NA53840
26NA53290
26NA54040
26NA54290
27LA53941
26NA53440
26NA53450
40LA54310
26NA-4890
26NA90410
26NA53660
26NA53670
26NA53590
27LA54460
27LA54290
Models 7222/7228/7235
DESCRIPTION
Photosensor
Fixing relay wiring/2
Fixing paper exit actuator
Pressure spring
Pressure arm/front
Conveyance guide sheet/2 assembly
Lock part/front
Fixing guide part/2
Open/close lever
Open/close spring
Lock part/rear
Fixing roller/lower
Lever shaft holder
Fixing guide part
Paper push up lever shaft holder
Rotary shaft/A assembly
Fixed screw
Conveyance roller
Pin A
Pressure arm/rear
Cleaner gear/A
Auxiliary part assembly
Fixing cleaner shaft holder/C
Lever spring
Fixing cleaner lever
Fixing driving gear/D (Z=18/44)
Fixing idler gear/B (Z=21)
Fixing idler gear/A (Z=21/21)
Conveyance drive gear (Z=21)
Paper guide part
ADU Solenoid shaft assembly
Web relay wiring
Solenoid actuator
Solenoid spring
Fixing shaft holder/lower
Solenoid stopper
Fixing driving gear/D (Z=14/44
1st Edition
HARDWARE
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
j
k
m
n
p
00Z670206
00Z670406
00Z670606
00Z163061
00Z193041
00Z163081
00Z193061
00Z253101
00Z600406
00Z670306
00Z610601
00Z670506
00Z253081
Page 57
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
REGISTRATION UNIT
Page 58
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
26NA45371
26NA45141
26NA45360
27LA82010
26WA90440
56AA85510
26NA45170
26NA45160
26NA45150
26NA45450
26NA45440
26NA45130
26NA45120
26NA-4520
26NA-4540
DESCRIPTION
Registration unit shaft holder

Registration unit spring
Registration unit clutch
Registration unit relay wiring
Photosensor
Pressure spring
Registration unit actuator
Support part
Dust proof seal
Registration unit fixed screw
Registration unit roller/B
Registration unit roller/A
Conveyance support plate assembly
Registration unit cleaner assembly
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
00Z253141
00Z253081
00Z193061
00Z670406
00Z670506
00Z670606
Page 59
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
MANUAL FEED UNIT
Page 60
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
40LA-4440
26NA42241
26NA42011
26NA40820
25AA75530
26NA40240
40AA42310
26NA42061
26NA42050
26NA42071
26NA42220
26NA42021
304078040
26NA42200
26NA-4221
540042350
26NA42253
26NA-4311
26NA42570
40AA-4060
DESCRIPTION
Manual feed paper guide assembly

Manual feed conveyance spring
Manual feed guide part
Slide shaft holder
Paper feed driven roller
Manual feed pressure rubber
Manual feed conveyance gear (Z=21)
Manual feed idler gear/upper (Z=28/30)
Cam pressure gear (Z=25)
Manual feed pressure spring
Manual feed conveyance roller
Pin B
Manual feed liftup shaft
Manual feed liftup plate assembly
Double feed preventive plate
Manual feed guide plate
Manual feed cover assembly
Manual feed guide spacer
Manual feed reverse roller
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
j
k
00Z670306
00Z670406
00Z670606
00Z193061
00Z183063
00Z253081
00Z183041
00Z610301
00Z680306
00Z660306
Page 61
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
MANUAL FEED UNIT
Page 62
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
26NA42480
26NA42040
26NA42030
26NA-4280
26NA-5090
26NA42210
466076020
40AA42270
26NA42600
56AA85510
26NA42351
26NA42280
40AA40150
540040562
40AA42100
540076010
26NA42081
26NA42580
25BA40320
26NA42630
26NA42590
26NA42610
DESCRIPTION
Bypass feed guide plate/upper

Manual feed idler gear/lower (Z=22)
Manual feed driving cam
Manual feed pick up assembly/2
Manual feed solenoid assembly
Cam spring
Manual feed clutch
Manual feed roller
Photosensor
Support part
Manual feed detecting part
Paper supply rubber
Manual feed part
Gear(D) (Z=16)
Clutch lock gear (Z=10)
Cover
Clutch standard gear
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
00Z193061
00Z670406
00Z253141
00Z610401
00Z660406
00Z193041
Page 63
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
MANUAL FEED UNIT
Page 64
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26NA42330
26NA42340
26NA42392
26NA42401
26NA42172
396040611
466077130
26NA42440
540042120
26NA90452
55VA85520
40LA97350
26NA42450
13QA-9011
26NA42321
26NA42301
26NA-4291
26NA42490
26NA42380
26NA42182
26NA97270
26NA42550
26NA42620
26NA-4330
DESCRIPTION
Paper guide plate/front

Paper guide plate/rear
Paper regulating part/front
Paper regulating part/rear
Manual feed tray/upper
Rack
Pinion
Rack/A
Slide holder/1
Bypass feed detecting wiring
Photosensor
Manual feed label/2
Pinion/A (Z=124)
Size detecting board assembly
Manual feed auxiliary tray
Manual feed cover
Manual feed fulcrum plate assembly
Wiring plate
Manual feed open/close spring/rear
Manual feed tray/lower
Manual feed label/1
Magnet pressure plate
Manual feed sticking part/3
Paper detecting actuator assembly
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
00Z253081
00Z253082
00Z193061
00Z253181
00Z660306
00Z610301
00Z670206
Page 65
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
PAPER EXIT UNIT
Page 66
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
26NA-4801
26NA90470
26NA45440
26NA-4870
26NA48110
26NA48250
40LA48190
26NA48210
26NA48020
26NA15740
508053460
26NA48120
26NA48130
26NA48070
26NA48081
26NA48140
26NA48100
26NA48011
DESCRIPTION
Paper exit unit

Paper exit ground wiring
ADU change solenoid assembly
Tension spring
Paper exit guide part
Neutralizing plate
Neutralizing brush/A
Paper exit roller
Paper exit gear (Z=26)
Paper exit slide shaft holder
Paper exit driven spring
Paper exit driven shaft
Paper exit driven part
Paper exit spring
Paper exit stay
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
c
d
e
f
j
00Z670206
00Z670406
00Z253081
00Z610301
00Z660306
00Z193061
Page 67
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
ADU
Page 68
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40LA50640
059010620
26NA51070
26NA50760
26NA50793
26NA50013
26NA50290
26NA51060
552012250
26NA50900
26NA50780
26NA50812
26NA50991
26NA51020
26NA51090
26NA-5024
26NA50522
26NA51110
26NA51720
26NA50971
26NA50963
26NA50330
26NA50630
466078010
26NA50890
26NA50721
26NA50871
26NA50841
40LE97880
26NA-5281
26NA53131
26NA53450
27LB50880
27LB51120
26NA50231
40LA51210
40LA51220
Models 7222/7228/7235
DESCRIPTION
Shaft holder part/lower

Magnet catch
Pressure roller/upper
Conveyance lock spring/lower
ADU guide plate/upper
ADU cover
Pressure roller
Driven shaft holder
Roller/B
Reversing spring
ADU open/close belt
Conveyance guide plate/lower
Conveyance sheet
Conveyance sheet/front
Driven shaft holder/lower
High voltage casing/B assembly
High voltage casing/A
Open/close knob
Insulating sheet/2
Insulating sheet
ADU lock claw
Conveyance lock spring
Shaft holder part/upper
Pin A
ADU positioning pin/front
ADU open/close actuator
ADU reinforce stay/front
High temperature caution label
Conveyance guide sheet/2 assembly
Conveyance roller
Conveyance driving gear (Z=21)
Fixing cover sheet
Conveyance guide part
Conveyance guide part/lower
ADU guide part/1
ADU guide part/2
1st Edition
HARDWARE
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
h
i
j
00Z670306
00Z670406
00Z254081
00Z193061
00Z253081
00Z610401
00Z711146
00Z283061
Page 69
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
ADU
Page 70
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
26NA50450
26NA50430
26NA50370
466076020
26NA50420
26NA50340
508053460
26TA50150
26TA50170
40LA50160
26NA80041
26WA90330
56AA17320
56GA80061
26NA50240
26NA50031
26NA50710
26NA50400
26NA50110
26NA51030
26NA50022
56AA85510
26NA50920
26NA50071
26NA50360
40LA97450
56GA73430
26NA45030
DESCRIPTION
Driving belt (L=300)

Conveyance pulley (Z=28)
Idler pulley (Z=18)
Conveyance pulley/A (Z=28)
Reversal sheet
Reversal gear (Z=26)
ADU idler gear (Z=26/31)
Motor gear (Z=31)
Cassette driving motor
Wiring/3
Pin/A
HB motor/40
ADU guide roller
Guide part/lower
Liftup spring/front
Liftup spring
Reversal roller
Tension spring
Guide part/middle
Photosensor
Reversal spacer
Reversal actuator
Conveyance guide spring
Motor fixing part/1
Conveyance roller
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
00Z670406
00Z253081
00Z193061
00Z163061
00Z193201
00Z193101
00Z283061
Page 71
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
ADU
Page 72
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
40LA97370
552012250
26NA50290
26NA50550
26NA50890
26NA50672
26NA42021
26NA40820
26NA42061
304078040
26NA51060
26NA50910
26NA50540
26NA50061
27LA51130
DESCRIPTION
Open/close label/upper
Roller/B
Pressure roller
Open/close spring/rear
Paper guide part/upper
Manual feed conveyance gear (Z=21)
Pin B
Driven shaft holder
Slide sheet
Open/close spring/front
Paper guide part/lower
Paper guide sheet
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
00Z670306
00Z670606
00Z193061
Page 73
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
manuals4you.com
UPPER CASSETTE
Page 74
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26NA-4730
40LA47040
27LA-4740
40LA47011
40LA97390
40AA47130
40AA77290
40LA-4720
26NA47381
26NA10062
26NA10071
26NE97280
26NA97312
26NA47390
25BA47461
26NA47291
26NA47350
26WA47212
40LA97300
40LA47260
26NA47240
26NA47251
26NA-9200
26NA47280
DESCRIPTION
Side regulating/rear assembly

Paper regulating plate/left
Liftup bottom plate assembly
Cassette base/upper
Cassette indication label/1
Adjusting plate
Pinion (Z=16)
Side regulating/front assembly
Fixing seal
Cassette rail/right
Cassette rail/left
Cassette indication label/upper
Paper supply label
Cassette fixed spring
Cassette positioning catch/U
Cassette remained detecting actuator
Cassette stopper
Cassette stay/upper
Cassette click label
Paper feed indication plate/front
Cassette detecting connector
Cassette detecting base
Spring lock plate
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
g
h
i
j
k
m
n
00Z670406
00Z670606
00Z193061
00Z254081
00Z254121
00Z283061
00Z253081
00Z183061
00Z620301
00Z463103
00Z610301
00Z254101
Page 75
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
LOWER CASSETTE
Page 76
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26NA-4730
40LA47040
26NA-4740
40LA47021
26NA97312
40AA47130
40AA77290
26NA10062
26NA10071
26NE97290
26NA47381
40LA-4720
40LA97400
26NA47390
25BA47461
26NA47291
26NA47350
26WA47222
40LA97300
40LA47260
26NA47240
26NA47251
26NA-9200
26NA47280
DESCRIPTION

Paper regulating plate/left
Liftup bottom plate assembly
Cassette base/lower
Paper supply label
Adjusting plate
Pinion (Z=16)
Cassette rail/right
Cassette rail/left
Cassette indication label/lower
Fixing seal
Side regulating/front assembly
Cassette indication label/2
Cassette fixed spring
Cassette remained detecting actuator
Cassette stopper
Cassette stay/lower
Cassette click label
Paper feed indication plate/front
Cassette detecting base
Spring lock plate
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
g
h
i
j
k
m
n
00Z670406
00Z670606
00Z193061
00Z254081
00Z254121
00Z283061
00Z253081
00Z183061
00Z620301
00Z463103
00Z610301
00Z254101
Page 77
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
ELECTRIC PARTS
Page 78
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
40AA85010
25HA73200
25HA73210
26NA73251
26NA73201
40LA73331
26NA73070
26NA73061
25HA73131
25HA73121
26NA90060
26NA73500
26NA73131
26NA73471
26NA73152
27LA84010
27LA88030
27LA90320
26NA90360
26NA90370
26NA90280
26NA90380
27LA90080
27LA80510
26NA-7510
26NA73510
066079020
56AA80540
26NA73731
DESCRIPTION
Door switch
Switch guide shaft
Switch guide roller
Electrode connecting spring/A
Wiring support part
Fan cover
Switch pressure plate
Cord cover
Switch spring/B
Switch spring/A
Fixing relay wiring
High voltage cover plate/A
Connecting plate/A
Connecting plate/C
Contact support plate
High voltage power source
Process sensor
Relay wiring/2
High voltage wiring/1
High voltage relay wiring
Drum relay wiring
Main fan motor
High voltage connecting plate/b assembly
Contact support plate/B
Drawer
Fan motor/1
Dust proof seal/5
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
00Z670206
00Z713206
00Z193041
00Z253081
00Z283061
00Z193061
00Z193062
00Z194081
Page 79
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
ELECTRIC PARTS
Page 80
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
55GA86010
27LA-9020
27NA-9300
27LA-9300
27LA80510
27LA-9070
26NA73610
40LA97361
40LA73380
26NA73421
40LA73261
40LA83510
26NA73461
26NA73411
26NA-7520
27LA84510
26NE88610
26NA88460
26NA73570
40LA-9110
40LA73281
26NA90110
DESCRIPTION
Power source switch

Main driving board assembly
System control board unit (7235)
System control board unit (7222/7228)
Main fan motor
Fixing control board assembly
Fan spacer
Cord caution label
Board mount plate/B
Board mount plate/C
Board cover plate/C
Lamp starter
Power source cover plate
Cord mount plate
Power socket assembly
DC power source/1
Power source cord
Circuit breaker
Contact fixing screw/A
Parameter memory board assembly
Board cover/D
AC power source wiring
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
j
k
00Z193041
00Z193061
00Z193351
00Z283061
00Z630406
00Z184065
00Z164081
00Z183043
00Z926285
Page 81
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
WRITING UNIT
Page 82
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
1
27LA-6500
27NA-6500
DESCRIPTION
Writing unit (7222/7228)

Writing unit (7235)
HARDWARE
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
REF.
LTR.
PART
NUMBER
a
b
00Z163101
00Z193061
Page 83
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
WIRING
Page 84
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
27LA90010
40LA90040
26TA90040
27LA90080
Models 7222/7228/7235
DESCRIPTION
Main body wiring/upper (7222/7235)

Heater relay wiring
Fuse cord/1
Drum relay wiring
1st Edition
Page 85
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
WIRING
Page 86
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
27LA90030
27NA90030
26NA90310
26NA90110
40LA90050
26NA90190
26NA90270
26NA90300
Models 7222/7228/7235
DESCRIPTION
DC power source wiring(7222/7228)

DC power source wiring (7235)
Sensor relay wiring/1
AC power source wiring
Fixing powering wiring
Toner supply wiring/1
DC interlock wiring
Relay wiring (7235)
1st Edition
Page 87
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
WIRING
Page 88
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
27LA90070
27LA90090
26NA90060
27LA90400
Models 7222/7228/7235
DESCRIPTION
Drum wiring
Optics wiring
Fixing relay wiring
System power source wiring
1st Edition
Page 89
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
WIRING
Page 90
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
40LA90540
26XA90120
27LA90320
40LA90340
40LA90250
26NA90260
26NA90280
Models 7222/7228/7235
DESCRIPTION
Internal cooling wiring

Paper feed wiring/upper
Relay wiring/2
Developing relay wiring
Development wiring
Lamp relay wiring
High voltage relay wiring
1st Edition
Page 91
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
WIRING
Page 92
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
26NA90360
26NA90370
26NA90380
26NA90410
26WA90330
26WA90440
26TA90490
40LA90520
27LA90520
26NA90452
27LA90160
26NA90470
Models 7222/7228/7235
DESCRIPTION

Web relay wiring
Sensor relay wiring/3
Registration relay wiring
Fixing relay wiring/2
Paper exit driving wiring
Motor relay wiring
Operation unit wiring/2
Paper exit ground wiring
1st Edition
Page 93
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
WIRING
Page 94
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
3
3
27MA90010
26XA90130
26WA90130
Models 7222/7228/7235
DESCRIPTION
Main body wiring/upper(7228)

Paper feed wiring/lower(7228/7235)
Paper feed wiring/lower
1st Edition
Page 95
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
WIRING
Page 96
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
REF.
NO.
PART NUMBER
1
2
27LA90020
40LA90220
Models 7222/7228/7235
DESCRIPTION
Main body wiring/lower

Polygon relay wiring
1st Edition
Page 97
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
Page 98
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PART
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
NO.
REF.
NO.
A
AC power source wiring . .
AC power source wiring . .
ADF detecting actuator . .
ADF guide block . . . . . .
ADF mount plate/right . . .
ADU Solenoid shaft assembly
ADU change solenoid
assembly . . . . . . . .
ADU cover . . . . . . . . .
ADU guide part/1 . . . . .
ADU guide part/2 . . . . .
ADU guide plate/upper . . .
ADU guide roller . . . . . .
ADU idler gear (Z=26/31) .
ADU lock claw . . . . . . .
ADU open/close actuator .
ADU open/close belt . . . .
ADU positioning pin/front .
ADU reinforce stay/front . .
APS sensor/2 . . . . . . .
Accessories holding panel .
Adjusting plate . . . . . . .
Adjusting plate . . . . . . .
Agitate coupling . . . . . .
Agitate coupling/A . . . . .
Agitate gear/A (Z=27) . . .
Agitate gear/B (Z=27) . . .
Agitate screw assembly . .
Agitating coupling/B . . . .
Agitating gear (Z=19/30) . .
Agitator gear/A . . . . . . .
Agitator plate/A . . . . . . .
Auxiliary part assembly . .
81
87
7
11
11
57
21
3
3
10
14
31
67
69
69
69
69
71
71
69
69
69
69
69
11
7
75
77
31
31
31
31
35
15
21
15
25
57
4
6
36
37
5
15
9
21
27
11
26
28
3
9
6
6
10
3
16
15
6
35
18
17
16
22
15
23
21
25
21
25
81
81
81
81
65
93
13
14
9
19
5
18
10
20
8
9
10
10
63
B
Belt (L=380) . . . . . . . .
Blade pressure spring . . .
Blade seal block/F assembly
Blade seal block/R assembly
Board cover plate/C . . . .
Board cover/D . . . . . . .
Board mount plate/B . . . .
Board mount plate/C . . . .
Bypass feed guide
plate/upper . . . . . . .
C
CCD unit . . . . . . . . .
Cam pressure gear (Z=25)
Cam release part/rear . .
Cam spring . . . . . . . .
Cartridge screw . . . . .
Cassette base/lower . . .
Cassette base/upper . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Models 7222/7228/7235
11
61
47
63
21
77
75
16
10
14
6
17
4
4
PART
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
NO.
Cassette click label . . . . .

Cassette click label . . . . .
Cassette detecting base . .
Cassette detecting base . .
Cassette driving motor . . .
Cassette driving motor . . .
Cassette fixed spring . . . .
Cassette fixed spring . . . .
Cassette indication label/1 .
Cassette indication label/2 .
Cassette indication
label/lower . . . . . . .
Cassette indication
label/upper . . . . . . .
Cassette rail/left . . . . . .
Cassette rail/right . . . . . .
Cassette remained detecting
actuator . . . . . . . .
Cassette remained detecting
actuator . . . . . . . .
Cassette stay/lower . . . .
Cassette stay/upper . . . .
Cassette stopper . . . . . .
Charge cleaning knob . . .
Charging block/front . . . .
Charging block/rear . . . .
Charging cleaning assembly
Charging control plate . . .
Charging corona unit . . . .
Charging discharge plate
assembly . . . . . . . .
Charging electrode plate . .
Charging input spring . . .
Charging spring . . . . . .
Charging wire . . . . . . .
Circuit breaker . . . . . . .
Cleaner assembly . . . . .
Cleaner auxiliary part . . .
Cleaner collect seal . . . .
Cleaner cover assembly . .
Cleaner driving shaft
assembly . . . . . . . .
Cleaner gear/A . . . . . . .
Cleaner gear/B (Z=34) . . .
Cleaner pressure spring . .
Cleaner pressure spring . .
Cleaner shaft assembly . .
Cleaning blade assembly . .
Clutch gear/1 (Z=27) . . . .
Clutch lock gear (Z=10) . .
Clutch standard gear . . . .
Collect cover/C assembly .
Collecting gear (Z=54) . . .
Collecting shaft assembly .
REF.
NO.
75
77
75
77
75
77
17
71
75
77
75
77
19
19
22
22
21
21
18
11
14
14
5
13
77
10
75
75
77
3
75
77
3
75
77
12
15
15
7
11
9
12
10
8
75
16
77
77
75
3
75
77
27
27
27
27
27
27
16
18
18
5
17
17
3
4
9
12
2
14
27
27
21
27
27
81
55
25
25
29
13
6
3
1
8
17
5
12
3
16
55
57
55
29
55
29
23
19
63
63
25
15
15
7
21
17
5
11
17
10
13
20
22
11
3
5
PART
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
NO.
Connecting plate/A . . . . .
Connecting plate/C . . . . .
Contact fixing screw/A . . .
Contact support plate . . . .
Contact support plate/B . .
Conveyance drive gear
(Z=21) . . . . . . . . .
Conveyance driving gear
(Z=21) . . . . . . . . .
Conveyance guide part . . .
Conveyance guide part . . .
Conveyance guide part/lower
Conveyance guide
plate/lower . . . . . . .
Conveyance guide sheet/2
assembly . . . . . . . .
Conveyance guide sheet/2
assembly . . . . . . . .
Conveyance guide spring . .
Conveyance knob . . . . . .
Conveyance lock spring . .
Conveyance lock spring/lower
Conveyance pulley (Z=28) .
Conveyance pulley/A (Z=28)
Conveyance roller . . . . .
Conveyance sheet . . . . .
Conveyance sheet/front . .
Conveyance stopper . . . .
Conveyance support plate
assembly . . . . . . . .
Conveyance unit . . . . . .
Cord caution label . . . . .
Cord cover . . . . . . . . .
Cord cover/A . . . . . . . .
Cord cover/B . . . . . . . .
Cord cover/B . . . . . . . .
Cord mount plate . . . . . .
Coupling spring . . . . . . .
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
79
81
79
79
13
14
18
15
26
57
29
69
49
69
69
32
9
34
35
69
12
57
69
71
49
69
69
41
69
73
71
71
57
69
71
69
69
49
30
25
11
22
4
12
25
5
2
5
18
31
28
13
14
15
59
49
81
79
7
7
7
81
15
63
14
1
7
8
14
13
18
13
19
21
.
.
.
.
15
19
15
87
38
1
11
6
87
.
.
.
.
.
.
87
81
37
7
33
33
1
15
7
11
1
2
33
D
DC brushless motor/20 . .
DC interlock wiring . . . .
DC power source wiring
(7235) . . . . . . . .
DC power source wiring
(7222/7228) . . . . .
DC power source/1 . . . .
Detecting actuator/A . . .
Detecting spring . . . . .
Developing cover part/A
assembly . . . . . . .
1st Edition
REF.
NO.
Page 99
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
PART
DESCRIPTION
Developing cover part/C
assembly . . . . . . . .
Developing drive gear (Z=37)
Developing drive gear/1
(Z=33/24) . . . . . . . .
Developing drive shaft holder
Developing driving gear/6
(Z=42) . . . . . . . . .
Developing driving gear/7
(Z=38) . . . . . . . . .
Developing electrode cover .
Developing gear . . . . . .
Developing gear/C (Z=27) .
Developing guide shaft holder
Developing idling gear (Z=45)
Developing input coupling .
Developing input coupling/B
Developing rail/left . . . . .
Developing relay wiring . . .
Developing relay wiring . . .
Developing seal/S . . . . . .
Developing shaft holder . . .
Developing shaft holder/front
Developing shaft holder/rear
Developing support stopper
Developing unit . . . . . . .
Development wiring . . . . .
Development wiring . . . . .
Discharge wire . . . . . . .
Door switch . . . . . . . . .
Double feed preventive plate
Double feed preventive
roller/upper . . . . . . .
roller/upper . . . . . . .
rubber/upper . . . . . .
rubber/lower . . . . . .
rubber/upper . . . . . .
rubber/lower . . . . . .
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawer . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive idling gear (Z=51) . . .
Drive plate assembly . . . .
Driven shaft holder . . . . .
Driven shaft holder . . . . .
Driven shaft holder/lower . .
Driving auxiliary panel/B
assembly . . . . . . . .
Driving auxiliary panel/C
assembly . . . . . . . .
Driving belt (L=300) . . . . .
Driving coupling . . . . . . .
Driving coupling . . . . . . .
Driving gear (Z=15) . . . . .
Driving gear (Z=15) . . . . .
Driving pulley (Z=55) . . . .
Driving shaft holder/8 . . . .
Driving shaft holder/8 . . . .
Drum caution label . . . . .
Drum driving gear (Z=108) .
Page 100
PAGE
NO.
REF.
NO.
PART
DESCRIPTION
Drum input shaft assembly
Drum relay wiring . . . . .
Drum relay wiring . . . . .
Drum rotary part . . . . .
Drum shaft assembly . . .
Drum shaft holder/F . . . .
Drum support part . . . .
Drum unit assembly . . . .
Drum wiring . . . . . . . .
Drum wiring . . . . . . . .
Dumper plate assembly . .
Dust proof filter . . . . . .
Dust proof seal . . . . . .
Dust proof seal/5 . . . . .
33
15
6
39
17
15
7
4
17
30
17
31
31
31
31
17
17
17
33
17
91
31
31
31
31
33
31
31
91
29
79
41
47
61
41
47
29
17
12
7
9
24
1
27
4
26
4
14
8
18
19
7
1
4
5
2
1
4
5
16
3
3
39
45
39
41
45
47
17
41
79
19
15
69
73
69
2
25
6
27
18
24
8
11
15
17
31
19
71
39
45
17
19
13
13
15
49
15
19
1
14
13
10
5
5
14
8
10
25
Fan cover . . . . . . . . .
Fan cover/2 assembly . . .
Fan cover/upper . . . . . .
Fan motor/1 . . . . . . . .
Fan spacer . . . . . . . .
Feeding roller . . . . . . .
Feeding roller . . . . . . .
Feeding shaft holder . . .
Feeding shaft holder . . .
Felt/A . . . . . . . . . . .
Felt/C . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter cover assembly . . .
Fixed screw . . . . . . . .
Fixed screw . . . . . . . .
Fixing claw . . . . . . . .
Fixing cleaner lever . . . .
Fixing cleaner roller . . . .
Fixing cleaner shaft holder/C
Fixing cleaning bearing . .
assembly . . . . . . .
Fixing cover sheet . . . . .
Fixing cover/front . . . . .
Fixing cover/rear . . . . .
Fixing driving gear/D
(Z=14/44) . . . . . . .
Fixing driving gear/D
(Z=18/44) . . . . . . .
Fixing entrance plate . . .
Electrode cleaning knob . .

Electrode connecting spring
(B) . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrode connecting
spring/A . . . . . . . .
Electrode connecting
spring/A . . . . . . . .
Electrode plate . . . . . .
Electrode spring . . . . . .
Exposure lamp . . . . . .
External fixed screw . . . .
PAGE
NO.
REF.
NO.
15
79
85
21
21
25
21
21
31
21
21
89
15
3
59
3
5
43
79
7
23
4
4
16
9
15
13
11
7
2
1
36
15
10
4
11
10
29
49
21
29
13
79
29
29
13
5
4
11
12
12
12
PART
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
NO.
Fixing entrance plate/2

assembly . . . . . . .
Fixing fixed part . . . . . .
Fixing gear (Z=40) . . . . .
Fixing guide part . . . . . .
Fixing guide part/2 . . . . .
Fixing heat insulate sheet/B
Fixing heat insulate sheet/C
Fixing heater/1 . . . . . . .
Fixing heater/2 . . . . . . .
Fixing idler gear/A (Z=21/21)
Fixing idler gear/B (Z=21) .
Fixing paper exit actuator .
Fixing powering wiring . . .
Fixing powering wiring . . .
Fixing relay wiring . . . . .
Fixing relay wiring . . . . .
Fixing relay wiring/2 . . . .
Fixing relay wiring/2 . . . .
Fixing roller/lower . . . . .
Fixing roller/upper . . . . .
Fixing seal . . . . . . . . .
Fixing seal . . . . . . . . .
Fixing sensor assembly . .
Fixing shaft holder/lower .
Fixing shaft holder/upper .
Fixing unit (7222/7228) . .
Fixing unit (7235) . . . . .
Front cover/upper . . . . .
Front door/right . . . . . .
Fuse cord/1 . . . . . . . .
Fuse cord/1 . . . . . . . .
Fuse mount plate assembly
REF.
NO.
55
53
53
57
57
55
55
53
53
57
57
57
53
87
79
89
57
93
57
53
75
77
53
57
53
51
51
5
5
53
85
53
14
7
16
14
8
20
21
3
4
28
27
3
13
4
11
3
2
7
12
2
9
11
1
35
10
1
1
15
8
14
3
15
G
79
43
5
79
81
39
45
39
45
21
35
43
51
57
55
57
55
55
55
57
55
6
5
22
28
6
16
15
18
17
19
3
9
7
17
4
25
13
12
15
23
1
81
69
53
53
5
33
5
18
57
37
57
55
26
10
Gear (Z=25) . . . . . .
Gear (D) (Z=16) . . . .
Gear/A (Z=53) . . . . .
Gear/B (Z=99) . . . . .
Gear/C (Z=23/98) . . .
Gear/D (Z=26) . . . . .
Gear/D (Z=37/50) . . .
Gear/E (Z=32/38) . . .
Gear/F (Z=32/34) . . .
Gear/G (Z=24/49) . . .
Gear/H (Z=55) . . . . .
Gear/J (Z=35) . . . . .
Gear/M (Z=32/50) . . .
Gear/Q (Z=23/23) . . .
Gear/R (Z=21/50) . . .
Gear/X (Z=45) . . . . .
Glass holder plate/front
Glass holder plate/rear
Ground spring . . . . .
Ground spring/3 . . . .
Guide part . . . . . . .
Guide part/lower . . . .
Guide part/middle . . .
Guide sheet . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
63
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
11
11
49
11
49
71
71
47
20
18
18
27
26
34
37
20
14
29
31
22
30
15
28
21
6
8
12
2
14
16
21
12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
71
55
53
53
14
6
9
17
H
HB motor/40 . . . . . .
Heat insulating part . .
March, 2004
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
PART
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
NO.
Heater relay wiring . . . .

High temperature caution
label . . . . . . . . .
High voltage casing/A . .
High voltage casing/B
assembly . . . . . . .
High voltage connecting
plate/B assembly . .
High voltage cover plate/A
High voltage power source
High voltage relay wiring .
High voltage relay wiring .
High voltage wiring/1 . . .
REF.
NO.
85
.
.
69
69
29
17
.
.
.
69
5
11
16
21
13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
79
79
79
79
91
79
93
79
93
79
93
25
12
16
21
7
19
1
20
2
22
3
I
Idler gear (Z=19) . . .
Idler gear (Z=25) . . .
Idler gear/A (Z=27/54)
Idler gear/B (Z=43) . .
Idler gear/B (Z=48) . .
Idler gear/C (Z=35) . .
Idler gear/D (Z=27/45)
Idler gear/E (Z=45) . .
Idler gear/F (Z=41) . .
Idler gear/G (Z=21/35)
Idler gear/H (Z=33) . .
Idler gear/I (Z=15/25)
Idler gear/J (Z=25) . .
Idler gear/K (Z=20) . .
Idler gear/L (Z=16) . .
Idler gear/L (Z=16) . .
Idler gear/O (Z=35) .
Idler pulley (Z=18) . .
Indication board . . .
Indication starter . . .
Insulating sheet . . .
Insulating sheet/2 . .
Internal cooling wiring
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
21
19
15
19
15
15
17
17
17
19
19
19
19
17
19
17
71
9
9
69
69
91
5
8
15
2
12
32
9
19
14
13
14
9
8
2
6
3
12
3
17
5
20
19
1
L
L detecting seal . . . . . .
Lamp relay wiring . . . . .
Lamp starter . . . . . . . .
Lamp support part/front . .
Lamp support part/rear . .
Laser caution label/3 . . . .
Laser indication label . . .
Lens cover . . . . . . . . .
Lever click shaft . . . . . .
Lever click shaft . . . . . .
Lever hold spring . . . . . .
Lever hold spring . . . . . .
Lever indication label/1 . . .
Lever shaft holder . . . . .
Lever spring . . . . . . . .
Lift up shaft/front assembly
Models 7222/7228/7235
33
91
81
53
53
5
7
11
41
47
39
45
41
71
49
57
57
3
9
6
11
6
11
6
15
5
1
4
6
12
13
26
13
13
24
8
PART
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
NO.
Lift up shaft/rear assembly .

Lifting handle . . . . . . . .
Lifting spring/2 . . . . . . .
Lift up bottom plate assembly
Lift up bottom plate assembly
Lift up cover . . . . . . . .
Lift up spring . . . . . . . .
Lift up spring . . . . . . . .
Lift up spring/front . . . . .
Lock part . . . . . . . . . .
Lock part/front . . . . . . .
Lock part/rear . . . . . . .
Lock spring/1 . . . . . . . .
Lock spring/2 . . . . . . . .
Locking spring . . . . . . .
3
3
49
75
77
3
49
71
71
3
57
57
49
49
35
REF.
NO.
9
1
3
3
3
6
4
18
17
11
7
11
16
7
30
M
Magnet catch . . . . . . . .
Magnet pressure plate . . .
Magnet pressure plate . . .
Main auxiliary cover . . . .
Main body cover/left . . . .
Main body fan motor . . . .
Main body wiring/lower . . .
Main body wiring/upper
(7222/7235) . . . . . .
Main body wiring/upper
(7228) . . . . . . . . .
Main cover/front . . . . . .
Main cover/upper . . . . . .
Main driving board assembly
Main fan motor . . . . . . .
Main setting rubber . . . . .
Manual feed auxiliary tray .
Manual feed clutch . . . . .
Manual feed conveyance
gear (Z=21) . . . . . .
gear (Z=21) . . . . . .
roller . . . . . . . . . .
roller . . . . . . . . . .
roller . . . . . . . . . .
spring . . . . . . . . .
Manual feed cover . . . . .
Manual feed cover assembly
Manual feed detecting part .
Manual feed driven roller . .
Manual feed driving cam . .
Manual feed driving gear/1
(Z=25) . . . . . . . . .
Manual feed driving gear/2 .
Manual feed fulcrum plate
assembly . . . . . . . .
Manual feed guide part . . .
Manual feed guide plate . .
Manual feed guide spacer .
Manual feed idler gear/lower
(Z=22) . . . . . . . . .
Manual feed idler gear/upper
(Z=28/30) . . . . . . .
69
5
65
5
5
3
97
2
7
22
3
16
2
1
85
95
5
5
81
5
43
79
81
3
65
63
1
9
1
2
23
7
24
4
10
15
8
61
73
61
12
63
15
73
61
65
61
63
41
63
2
16
18
12
15
3
17
17
17
9
65
61
61
61
17
3
17
19
63
61
PART
DESCRIPTION
Manual feed label/1 . . . . .
Manual feed label/2 . . . . .
Manual feed lift up plate
assembly . . . . . . . .
Manual feed lift up shaft . .
Manual feed open/close
spring/rear . . . . . . .
Manual feed paper guide
assembly . . . . . . . .
Manual feed part . . . . . .
Manual feed pick up
assembly/2 . . . . . . .
Manual feed pressure rubber
Manual feed pressure spring
Manual feed reverse roller .
Manual feed roller . . . . .
Manual feed solenoid
assembly . . . . . . . .
Manual feed sticking part/3 .
Manual feed tray/lower . . .
Manual feed tray/upper . . .
Mirror mount plate/2
assembly . . . . . . . .
Mirror pressure spring . . .
Mirror pressure spring/3 . .
Mirror pressure spring/4 . .
Motor belt (L=160.5) . . . .
Motor fixing part/1 . . . . .
Motor gear (Z=31) . . . . .
Motor relay wiring . . . . . .
Motor tension spring/1 . . .
Mount screw . . . . . . . .
Mounting plate . . . . . . .
Mounting sheet/B . . . . . .
REF.
NO.
65
65
21
12
61
61
15
14
65
19
61
63
1
17
63
61
61
61
63
4
7
11
20
9
63
65
65
65
5
23
20
5
13
13
13
13
13
71
71
93
13
53
11
23
1
15
8
6
10
27
10
9
13
12
11
8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5
5
5
5
5
5
67
67
27
25
25
25
26
4
8
7
Open/close knob . . . . . .
Open/close label/lower . . .
Open/close label/upper . . .
Open/close lever . . . . . .
Open/close lever . . . . . .
Open/close lever/2 . . . . .
Open/close spring . . . . .
Open/close spring/front . . .
Open/close spring/rear . . .
Operation unit . . . . . . . .
Operation unit button/A . . .
Operation unit button/B . . .
Operation unit button/C . . .
Operation unit button/D . . .
Operation unit button/E . . .
Operation unit button/F . . .
Operation unit button/G . . .
69
49
73
49
57
49
57
73
73
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
18
6
1
8
9
17
10
13
4
12
10
1
21
22
23
20
25
18
19
N
Name plate/1 . . . .
Name plate/2 (7222)
Name plate/2 (7228)
Name plate/2 (7235)
Name plate/3 . . . .
Neurtalizing plate . .
Neutralizing brush/A
Neutralizing plate . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1st Edition
PAGE
NO.
Page 101
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
PART
DESCRIPTION
Operation unit button/H . . .
Operation unit button/I . . .
Operation unit button/J . . .
Operation unit button/K . . .
Operation unit button/L . . .
Operation unit button/M . . .
Operation unit cover . . . .
Operation unit cover/lower .
Operation unit cover/upper .
Operation unit insulating
sheet/1 . . . . . . . . .
Operation unit rocking shaft
holder . . . . . . . . . .
Operation unit sheet . . . .
Operation unit wiring/2 . . .
Operation wiring . . . . . .
Optics mirror/1 . . . . . . .
Optics mirror/2 . . . . . . .
Optics slide plate/front . . .
Optics slide plate/rear . . . .
Optics slide sheet/1 . . . . .
Optics slide sheet/2 . . . . .
Optics wire/front . . . . . .
Optics wire/rear . . . . . . .
Optics wiring . . . . . . . .
Ozone filter . . . . . . . . .
PAGE
NO.
REF.
NO.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
15
24
14
13
7
11
4
3
9
11
9
93
9
13
13
13
13
11
11
13
13
89
7
18
2
11
6
16
7
4
9
15
12
19
20
2
16
P
PTL light shield assembly . .
Paper detecting actuator . .
Paper detecting actuator . .
(7228/7235) . . . . . .
assembly . . . . . . . .
Paper detecting actuator/2 .
Paper detecting actuator/2 .
Paper exit cover assembly .
Paper exit driven part . . . .
Paper exit driven roller . . .
Paper exit driven roller . . .
Paper exit driven shaft . . .
Paper exit driven spring . . .
Paper exit driving wiring . .
Paper exit gear (Z=26) . . .
Paper exit gear (Z=26) . . .
Paper exit ground wiring . .
Paper exit ground wiring . .
Paper exit guide cover . . .
Paper exit guide part . . . .
Paper exit roller . . . . . . .
Paper exit shaft holder . . .
Paper exit spring . . . . . .
Paper exit stay . . . . . . .
Paper exit tray . . . . . . . .
Paper exit unit . . . . . . . .
Paper feed auxiliary part . .
Paper feed auxiliary
sheet/middle . . . . . .
Paper feed clutch . . . . . .
Paper feed connecting
roller/1 . . . . . . . . .
Paper feed connecting
roller/2 . . . . . . . . .
Page 102
49
41
45
5
5
3
39
24
65
41
45
5
67
67
67
67
67
93
15
67
67
93
5
67
67
17
67
71
67
67
5
67
41
24
9
4
14
16
12
14
15
13
8
23
10
2
12
17
6
9
21
11
7
17
18
24
1
16
47
17
17
22
39
10
47
PART
DESCRIPTION
Paper feed conveyance
spring . . . . . . . . .
Paper feed coupling gear/A
(Z=25) . . . . . . . . .
Paper feed coupling gear/A
(Z=25) . . . . . . . . .
Paper feed coupling gear/B
(Z=20) . . . . . . . . .
Paper feed coupling gear/B
(Z=20) . . . . . . . . .
Paper feed driven roller . .
Paper feed driven roller/lower
Paper feed driving gear
(Z=56/37) . . . . . . .
Paper feed dust proof sheet
Paper feed enter plate
assembly . . . . . . .
Paper feed gear (Z=20) . .
Paper feed gear (Z=20) . .
Paper feed guide plate/lower
Paper feed guide plate/upper
Paper feed guide sheet/A .
Paper feed indication
plate/front . . . . . . .
Paper feed indication
plate/front . . . . . . .
Paper feed lower assembly
(7222) . . . . . . . . .
Paper feed lower assembly
(7228/7235) . . . . . .
Paper feed plate/right . . .
Paper feed pressure
spring/front . . . . . .
Paper feed pressure
spring/rear . . . . . .
Paper feed shaft holder . .
Paper feed solenoid . . . .
Paper feed wiring/lower . .
(7222) . . . . . . . . .
(7228/7235) . . . . . .
(7228/7235) . . . . . .
Paper feed wiring/upper . .
(7222) . . . . . . . . .
(7228/7235) . . . . . .
Paper feeding rubber . . .
PAGE
NO.
REF.
NO.
47
15
17
11
19
17
16
19
61
47
4
6
9
19
45
16
19
47
17
19
17
19
47
41
41
39
45
13
23
10
15
7
6
8
11
19
18
75
20
77
20
47
47
47
2
10
41
41
17
39
45
63
17
39
47
61
73
35
39
45
95
10
8
13
7
16
3
1
7
4
8
29
4
10
3
45
45
95
91
3
2
39
39
39
45
63
15
63
71
8
15
14
19
1
7
4
PART
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
NO.
Paper feeding spring . . .

Paper feeding spring . . .
Paper guide part . . . . . .
Paper guide part/lower . .
Paper guide part/upper . .
Paper guide plate/front . .
Paper guide plate/rear . . .
Paper guide sheet . . . . .
Paper guide sheet/A . . . .
Paper guide sheet/C . . . .
Paper guide sheet/D . . . .
Paper lift up lever shaft holder
Paper push up lever shaft
holder . . . . . . . . .
Paper regulating part/front .
Paper regulating part/rear .
Paper regulating plate/left .
Paper regulating plate/left .
Paper supply label . . . . .
Paper supply label . . . . .
Paper supply rubber . . . .
assembly . . . . . . .
Photosensor . . . . . . . .
Photosensor (7228/7235) .
Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin A . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin A . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin A . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin B . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin B . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin/A . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin/A . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin/A . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin/A . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pin/A . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinion . . . . . . . . . . .
Pinion (Z=16) . . . . . . .
Pinion (Z=16) . . . . . . .
Pinion/A (Z=124) . . . . .
Platen glass assembly . . .
Platen glass assembly/2 . .
Polygon relay wiring . . . .
Positioning arm . . . . . .
Positioning arm . . . . . .
Positioning screw . . . . .
Power socket assembly . .
Power source cord . . . . .
Power source cover plate .
Power source switch . . . .
Powering board assembly .
Pressure arm/front . . . .
Pressure arm/rear . . . . .
Pressure assembly . . . .
Pressure part/A . . . . . .
Pressure part/B . . . . . .
Pressure roller . . . . . . .
Pressure roller . . . . . . .
Pressure roller/upper . . .
Pressure spring . . . . . .
39
45
57
73
73
65
65
73
23
23
23
17
5
9
30
14
6
1
2
15
13
15
16
28
57
65
65
75
77
75
77
63
15
3
4
2
2
13
5
14
81
3
11
37
39
45
57
59
63
65
71
39
35
31
57
69
61
73
15
17
31
55
71
65
75
77
65
11
11
97
39
45
31
81
81
81
81
13
57
57
37
55
55
69
73
69
57
19
17
9
6
7
2
1
6
10
11
22
26
9
2
19
24
13
10
6
4
20
16
13
7
7
7
13
1
7
2
11
11
13
14
16
12
1
18
5
20
8
19
22
7
3
3
4
March, 2004
REF.
NO.
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
PART
DESCRIPTION
Pressure spring . . . . .
Pressure spring assembly
(7222/7228) . . . . .
Pressure spring assembly
(7235) . . . . . . . .
Process sensor . . . . .
PAGE
NO.
REF.
NO.
59
51
11
.
.
51
79
11
17
R
Rack . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack/A . . . . . . . . . . .
Rail/left . . . . . . . . . . .
Rail/left . . . . . . . . . . .
Rail/right . . . . . . . . . .
Read cover/front . . . . . .
Reading cover/front . . . .
Reading cover/left . . . . .
Reading cover/rear . . . . .
Reading/right external
assembly . . . . . . . .
Rear cover assembly . . . .
Rear cover/left . . . . . . .
Rear cover/right . . . . . .
Recycling shaft holder . . .
Reflect mirror . . . . . . . .
Regist clutch . . . . . . . .
Registration relay wiring . .
Registration unit actuator .
Registration unit cleaner
assembly . . . . . . . .
Registration unit clutch . . .
Registration unit relay wiring
Registration unit roller/A . .
Registration unit roller/B . .
Registration unit spring . .
Regulating plate/front
assembly . . . . . . . .
Regulating plate/rear
assembly . . . . . . . .
Relay wiring (7235) . . . .
Relay wiring/2 . . . . . . .
Relay wiring/2 . . . . . . .
Remained detecting sensor
Reversal actuator . . . . .
Reversal gear (Z=26) . . .
Reversal roller . . . . . . .
Reversal sheet . . . . . . .
Reversal spacer . . . . . .
Reversing spring . . . . . .
Rocking shaft holder . . . .
Roller/B . . . . . . . . . .
Roller/B . . . . . . . . . .
Rotary shaft/A assembly . .
65
65
3
37
3
7
7
7
7
6
8
13
5
14
17
6
2
10
7
7
7
5
25
13
19
93
59
12
8
1
13
13
11
11
6
8
59
59
59
67
59
59
59
59
59
59
15
4
11
3
5
13
12
1
3
2
55
55
87
79
91
35
71
71
71
71
71
69
21
69
73
57
9
7
18
3
22
24
8
19
6
23
10
10
9
2
16
S
Scanner driving motor . . .
Screw gear (Z=24) . . . . .
Screw guide/rear assembly
Screw seal part/lower . . .
Screw seal part/middle . . .
Screw seal part/upper . . .
Screw shaft holder . . . . .
Models 7222/7228/7235
13
21
25
35
35
35
21
17
20
17
13
26
11
6
PART
DESCRIPTION
PAGE
NO.
REF.
NO.
Screw shaft holder . . . . .

Screw shaft holder/B . . . .
Sensor mounting plate/upper
assembly . . . . . . . .
Sensor relay wiring/1 . . . .
Sensor relay wiring/3 . . . .
Separate auxiliary roller . .
Separate bridge . . . . . .
Separate guide plate . . . .
Separate release lever . . .
Separate release spring . .
Separate rocking collar . . .
Separate rocking screw . .
Separate rocking spring . .
Separate solenoid assembly
Separate spring . . . . . .
Separation claw assembly .
Separation fulcrum shaft . .
Separation rocking cam . .
Separation rocking gear
(Z=18) . . . . . . . . .
Separation support plate . .
Shaft fixed part . . . . . . .
Shaft guide cover . . . . . .
Shaft holder fulcrum part . .
Shaft holder part/lower . . .
Shaft holder part/upper . . .
Shaft holder spacer . . . .
Shaft holder spacer . . . .
Shaft positioning part . . . .
Shaft positioning plate/rear .
Shaft positioning plate/rear .
Shaft stopper part . . . . .
Shaft support plate . . . . .
Side cover/left . . . . . . .
Side cover/rear . . . . . . .
Side guide plate . . . . . .
Side regulating/front
assembly . . . . . . . .
Side regulating/front
assembly . . . . . . . .
Size detecting board
assembly . . . . . . . .
assembly . . . . . . . .
assembly . . . . . . . .
Slide holder/1 . . . . . . . .
Slide part . . . . . . . . . .
Slide shaft holder . . . . . .
Slide sheet . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid actuator . . . . . .
Solenoid seal . . . . . . . .
Solenoid spring . . . . . . .
Solenoid stopper . . . . . .
25
25
4
7
39
87
93
23
29
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
55
23
23
21
25
2
5
6
1
4
1
5
3
2
7
11
3
18
19
14
21
55
21
7
25
35
69
25
31
39
39
45
45
63
39
45
39
45
39
45
27
3
7
5
47
12
2
11
5
8
1
23
6
6
12
17
6
16
13
20
20
22
22
21
21
11
3
4
2
11
75
77
75
77
12
1
1
65
14
75
23
77
65
13
41
47
61
73
57
39
45
23
57
57
23
9
3
14
16
5
12
33
23
23
12
34
36
PART
DESCRIPTION
Spacer/6 . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer/6 . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer/6 . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer/8 . . . . . . . . . .
Spacer/B . . . . . . . . . .
Spark arrester preventive
plate/front . . . . . . . .
plate/rear . . . . . . . .
plate/rear . . . . . . . .
plate/front . . . . . . . .
Spewing PV sheet/B . . . .
Spewing preventive sheet/2
Spring lock plate . . . . . .
Spring lock plate . . . . . .
Spring regulating sheet . . .
Spring spacer . . . . . . . .
Stopper part . . . . . . . .
Suction cover sticking
assembly . . . . . . . .
Suction cover/2 assembly .
Suction cover/5 sticking
assembly . . . . . . . .
Suction filter/A assembly . .
Support part . . . . . . . .
Support part . . . . . . . .
Switch guide roller . . . . .
Switch guide shaft . . . . .
Switch pressure plate . . . .
Switch spring/A . . . . . . .
Switch spring/B . . . . . . .
System control board unit
(7222/7228) . . . . . .
System control board unit
(7235) . . . . . . . . .
System power source wiring
REF.
NO.
15
17
19
15
17
16
5
17
40
2
27
27
10
29
29
25
33
75
77
7
15
5
10
10
8
24
24
7
33
5
43
43
43
1
2
3
43
43
43
59
63
79
79
79
79
79
6
4
8
9
11
3
2
7
10
9
81
81
89
3
4
15
15
67
71
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
25
35
35
12
10
5
20
5
2
8
9
3
4
6
21
10
27
35
35
12
25
37
25
25
10
5
20
25
15
25
T
Tension roller . . . . . . . .
Tension spring . . . . . . .
Terminal fixing screw . . . .
Terminal fixing screw/2 . . .
Terminal plate . . . . . . . .
Terminal plate/1 . . . . . . .
Terminal plate/A . . . . . .
Terminal plate/A . . . . . .
Terminal plate/B . . . . . .
Toner agitate shaft . . . . .
Toner agitate shaft holder . .
Toner agitate shaft holder/left
Toner agitate shaft
holder/right . . . . . . .
Toner agitate sheet/front . .
Toner cartridge pressure
assembly . . . . . . . .
Toner collect coupling . . . .
Toner collect screw . . . . .
Toner conveyance gear/1
(Z=19) . . . . . . . . .
(Z=18) . . . . . . . . .
1st Edition
PAGE
NO.
Page 103
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
PART
DESCRIPTION
(Z=16) . . . . . . . . .
(Z=17/23) . . . . . . . .
(Z=13) . . . . . . . . .
(Z=30) . . . . . . . . .
(Z=16/23) . . . . . . . .
Toner conveyance shaft
holder/A . . . . . . . .
Toner cover assembly . . . .
Toner density sensor . . . .
Toner detecting board
assembly . . . . . . . .
Toner guide sheet . . . . . .
Toner supply base/upper
assembly . . . . . . . .
Toner supply caution label .
Toner supply driving
assembly . . . . . . . .
Toner supply gear assembly
Toner supply gear/1
(Z=23/51) . . . . . . . .
Toner supply gear/2
(Z=16/51) . . . . . . . .
Page 104
PAGE
NO.
REF.
NO.
25
35
15
25
14
35
35
19
35
39
33
4
2
3
23
23
9
17
35
5
14
10
37
35
1
2
35
37
PART
DESCRIPTION
Toner supply guide part
assembly (7222/7228)
Toner supply guide part
assembly (7235) . . .
Toner supply label . . . . .
Toner supply label/2 . . . .
Toner supply motor . . . .
Toner supply open/close
spring . . . . . . . . .
Toner supply regulating gear
(Z=42) . . . . . . . . .
Toner supply regulating gear
(Z=18) . . . . . . . . .
Toner supply screw . . . .
Toner supply seal/1 . . . .
Toner supply shaft holder .
Toner supply unit . . . . .
Toner supply wiring/1 . . .
Total counter . . . . . . .
Touch key board . . . . . .
Transfer cleaning part/A . .
Transfer cleaning part/B . .
Transfer cleaning part/E . .
Transfer holding rubber . .
PAGE
NO.
REF.
NO.
37
37
5
5
35
9
20
19
17
35
21
35
18
37
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
87
5
9
29
29
29
29
2
8
23
20
5
24
16
1
5
18
16
14
7
6
18
PART
DESCRIPTION
Transfer separator block/front
Transfer separator block/rear
Transfer separator corona
unit . . . . . . . . . .
REF.
NO.
29
29
15
9
29
55
57
93
13
13
27
29
11
53
51
11
65
79
3
37
71
83
83
18
32
4
21
2
7
4
17
8
10
4
18
5
16
11
12
1
1
W
Web . . . . . . . . . .
Web relay wiring . . . .
Web relay wiring . . . .
Wire driving pulley . . .
Wire pulley . . . . . . .
Wire tension spring . .
Wire tension spring . .
Wiring guide part/3 . .
Wiring guide part/A . .
Wiring guide part/B . .
Wiring guide plate/1 . .
Wiring plate . . . . . .
Wiring support part . .
Wiring/3 . . . . . . . .
Wiring/3 . . . . . . . .
Wiring/3 . . . . . . . .
Writing unit (7222/7228)
Writing unit (7235) . . .
March, 2004
PAGE
NO.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
NUMERICAL INDEX
PART
NUMBER
029420640
059010620
066079020
066079020
066079020
083020140
08AA85510
13QA-9011
190041410
190041410
190041410
190041420
192141710
25AA75530
25AA75530
25BA40320
25BA47461
25BA47461
25HA10292
25HA25091
25HA25100
25HA32152
25HA73121
25HA73131
25HA73200
25HA73210
26NA-1060
26NA-1070
26NA-1531
26NA-1540
26NA-1560
26NA-1681
26NA-1691
26NA-2120
26NA-2180
26NA-2260
26NA-2300
26NA-2510
26NA-2520
26NA-2620
26NA-2630
26NA-2640
26NA-3020
26NA-3040
26NA-3050
26NA-4160
26NA-4221
26NA-4280
26NA-4291
26NA-4311
26NA-4330
26NA-4520
26NA-4540
26NA-4730
26NA-4730
26NA-4740
26NA-4801
26NA-4870
26NA-4890
26NA-5024
26NA-5090
26NA-5281
26NA-5281
26NA-5430
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
33
69
17
41
79
5
39
65
15
17
19
15
57
41
61
63
75
77
3
27
27
35
79
79
79
79
3
3
15
15
15
17
19
25
23
23
25
27
27
29
29
29
33
33
33
47
61
63
65
61
65
59
59
75
77
77
67
67
57
69
63
57
69
55
9
2
25
6
27
5
26
14
16
5
17
40
15
14
5
19
15
15
10
3
11
4
10
9
2
3
8
9
7
5
24
15
7
18
18
11
19
13
12
15
17
16
6
2
5
13
15
4
17
18
24
14
15
1
1
3
1
4
31
16
5
6
30
7
Models 7222/7228/7235
PART
NUMBER
26NA-5440
26NA-5470
26NA-5482
26NA-6192
26NA-7510
26NA-7520
26NA-9181
26NA-9200
26NA-9200
26NA-9511
26NA10062
26NA10062
26NA10062
26NA10071
26NA10071
26NA10071
26NA10181
26NA10310
26NA10442
26NA12033
26NA12111
26NA12121
26NA12181
26NA12190
26NA12211
26NA12401
26NA12420
26NA12430
26NA12550
26NA15200
26NA15550
26NA15560
26NA15580
26NA15600
26NA15680
26NA15690
26NA15730
26NA15740
26NA15740
26NA15760
26NA16110
26NA16120
26NA16130
26NA16140
26NA16150
26NA16160
26NA16170
26NA16200
26NA16211
26NA16220
26NA16231
26NA16241
26NA16250
26NA16260
26NA16260
26NA16270
26NA16270
26NA16301
26NA16310
26NA16310
26NA17250
26NA17270
26NA17280
26NA17560
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
57
57
55
13
79
81
23
75
77
13
3
75
77
3
75
77
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
5
7
5
7
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
67
15
17
15
19
15
15
17
17
17
17
19
19
19
19
17
19
17
19
17
17
19
15
15
15
17
16
22
14
1
25
14
9
23
23
18
12
10
8
7
11
9
11
6
3
13
24
3
14
18
6
7
5
12
7
19
14
29
31
25
15
3
22
23
10
28
15
2
13
32
9
17
19
14
13
14
9
8
2
10
5
6
3
12
23
10
21
10
4
1
PART
NUMBER
26NA17570
26NA17580
26NA17590
26NA17600
26NA17610
26NA20071
26NA20140
26NA20140
26NA20160
26NA20170
26NA20200
26NA20220
26NA20242
26NA20250
26NA20270
26NA20290
26NA20300
26NA20310
26NA20380
26NA20420
26NA20480
26NA20553
26NA20560
26NA20570
26NA20580
26NA20710
26NA20870
26NA20920
26NA21160
26NA21280
26NA21330
26NA21340
26NA21360
26NA21360
26NA21380
26NA21400
26NA21420
26NA21430
26NA21440
26NA25012
26NA25020
26NA25040
26NA25051
26NA25060
26NA25070
26NA25130
26NA25160
26NA25170
26NA25180
26NA26041
26NA26060
26NA26070
26NA26080
26NA26141
26NA26151
26NA26190
26NA26230
26NA26250
26NA26260
26NA26271
26NA30140
26NA30150
26NA30170
26NA30440
1st Edition
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
17
15
17
17
15
25
21
25
23
23
23
25
23
25
23
23
23
23
21
21
25
25
25
21
21
21
25
21
25
25
23
21
21
31
23
23
23
23
21
27
27
27
27
27
27
29
27
27
27
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
29
31
31
31
33
27
35
2
9
12
20
6
4
20
18
17
3
4
8
1
7
3
2
10
8
9
21
5
12
14
19
12
11
6
7
8
4
13
11
12
13
15
16
17
9
4
5
10
8
6
5
2
7
1
9
10
8
2
14
7
1
4
11
12
6
16
15
5
8
Page 105
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
manuals4you.com
PART
NUMBER
26NA30490
26NA30630
26NA30650
26NA30660
26NA30700
26NA30730
26NA30741
26NA30770
26NA30810
26NA30850
26NA30870
26NA30930
26NA30940
26NA30950
26NA31010
26NA32040
26NA32090
26NA32200
26NA32230
26NA32280
26NA32540
26NA32550
26NA32560
26NA32590
26NA32660
26NA32680
26NA32910
26NA32920
26NA32930
26NA32940
26NA32960
26NA32970
26NA40080
26NA40080
26NA40101
26NA40101
26NA40110
26NA40110
26NA40120
26NA40120
26NA40161
26NA40161
26NA40170
26NA40170
26NA40180
26NA40180
26NA40192
26NA40224
26NA40240
26NA40261
26NA40271
26NA40281
26NA40500
26NA40500
26NA40510
26NA40510
26NA40631
26NA40641
26NA40671
26NA40681
26NA40700
26NA40700
26NA40720
26NA40751
26NA40760
26NA40760
26NA40790
26NA40790
26NA40810
Page 106
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
31
31
31
31
31
31
33
31
31
31
15
33
31
31
31
35
35
35
37
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
39
45
39
45
39
45
41
47
39
45
39
45
39
45
47
41
61
41
47
45
41
47
39
45
41
41
47
47
39
45
47
45
39
45
39
45
39
17
18
19
9
12
10
4
8
7
6
33
7
14
3
13
8
21
13
7
11
10
12
27
18
16
19
23
20
5
24
3
9
16
15
3
8
9
5
2
2
14
13
20
20
21
21
10
16
6
12
11
3
3
3
19
18
7
10
8
9
12
6
15
4
6
12
22
22
5
PART
NUMBER
26NA40810
26NA40820
26NA40820
26NA40820
26NA40820
26NA40820
26NA40830
26NA40830
26NA40880
26NA40890
26NA40911
26NA42011
26NA42021
26NA42021
26NA42030
26NA42040
26NA42050
26NA42061
26NA42061
26NA42071
26NA42081
26NA42172
26NA42182
26NA42200
26NA42210
26NA42220
26NA42241
26NA42253
26NA42280
26NA42301
26NA42321
26NA42330
26NA42340
26NA42351
26NA42380
26NA42392
26NA42401
26NA42440
26NA42450
26NA42480
26NA42490
26NA42550
26NA42560
26NA42570
26NA42580
26NA42590
26NA42600
26NA42610
26NA42620
26NA42630
26NA45030
26NA45071
26NA45120
26NA45130
26NA45141
26NA45150
26NA45160
26NA45170
26NA45220
26NA45290
26NA45310
26NA45320
26NA45330
26NA45341
26NA45360
26NA45371
26NA45401
26NA45430
26NA45440
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
45
17
39
47
61
73
39
45
47
47
41
61
61
73
63
63
61
61
73
61
63
65
65
61
63
61
61
61
63
65
65
65
65
63
65
65
65
65
65
63
65
65
41
61
63
63
63
63
65
63
71
49
59
59
59
59
59
59
49
49
49
49
49
49
59
59
49
49
59
9
3
1
7
4
8
11
11
14
16
11
3
12
7
3
2
9
8
9
10
17
5
20
14
6
11
2
17
12
16
15
1
2
11
19
3
4
8
13
1
18
22
15
19
18
21
9
22
23
20
28
4
13
12
2
9
8
7
8
12
17
16
7
9
3
1
14
15
11
PART
NUMBER
26NA45440
26NA45450
26NA45490
26NA47240
26NA47240
26NA47251
26NA47251
26NA47280
26NA47280
26NA47291
26NA47291
26NA47350
26NA47350
26NA47350
26NA47381
26NA47381
26NA47390
26NA47390
26NA48011
26NA48020
26NA48070
26NA48081
26NA48100
26NA48110
26NA48120
26NA48130
26NA48140
26NA48210
26NA48250
26NA50013
26NA50022
26NA50031
26NA50061
26NA50071
26NA50110
26NA50231
26NA50240
26NA50290
26NA50290
26NA50330
26NA50340
26NA50352
26NA50360
26NA50370
26NA50400
26NA50420
26NA50430
26NA50450
26NA50522
26NA50540
26NA50550
26NA50630
26NA50672
26NA50710
26NA50721
26NA50760
26NA50780
26NA50793
26NA50812
26NA50841
26NA50871
26NA50890
26NA50890
26NA50900
26NA50910
26NA50920
26NA50963
26NA50971
26NA50991
March, 2004
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
67
59
49
75
77
75
77
75
77
75
77
3
75
77
75
77
75
77
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
71
71
73
71
71
69
71
69
73
69
71
47
71
71
71
71
71
71
69
73
73
69
73
71
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
69
73
69
73
71
69
69
69
3
10
3
21
21
22
22
24
24
16
16
5
17
17
9
11
14
14
18
9
14
15
17
5
12
13
16
8
6
6
21
16
14
24
19
35
15
7
3
22
6
12
25
3
18
5
2
1
17
13
4
23
6
17
26
4
11
5
12
28
27
25
5
10
12
23
21
20
13
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
PART
NUMBER
26NA51020
26NA51030
26NA51060
26NA51060
26NA51070
26NA51090
26NA51110
26NA51720
26NA53021
26NA53035
26NA53131
26NA53131
26NA53211
26NA53250
26NA53290
26NA53360
26NA53403
26NA53413
26NA53432
26NA53440
26NA53450
26NA53450
26NA53460
26NA53490
26NA53590
26NA53610
26NA53620
26NA53650
26NA53660
26NA53670
26NA53680
26NA53700
26NA53710
26NA53720
26NA53730
26NA53740
26NA53770
26NA53780
26NA53790
26NA53840
26NA53884
26NA53931
26NA53931
26NA54010
26NA54030
26NA54040
26NA54053
26NA54060
26NA54070
26NA54080
26NA54100
26NA54120
26NA54160
26NA54230
26NA54280
26NA54290
26NA54300
26NA61150
26NA61200
26NA61300
26NA61340
26NA61370
26NA61380
26NA61410
26NA61540
26NA61551
26NA61560
26NA61600
26NA61610
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
69
71
69
73
69
69
69
69
57
53
57
69
53
55
57
55
53
53
55
57
57
69
57
55
57
55
53
55
57
57
55
57
53
53
53
51
51
51
55
57
57
51
57
55
53
57
51
53
57
57
57
57
55
51
51
57
55
11
13
10
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
14
20
8
11
3
15
18
19
14
2
18
31
8
20
24
21
5
18
18
28
29
32
21
12
35
11
7
10
33
34
19
4
10
9
17
4
3
6
6
23
8
7
17
22
12
25
10
16
7
11
13
10
3
5
8
26
15
8
21
6
16
11
3
15
7
9
4
8
6
Models 7222/7228/7235
PART
NUMBER
26NA61732
26NA61812
26NA61820
26NA61840
26NA61940
26NA62050
26NA62130
26NA62451
26NA73061
26NA73070
26NA73131
26NA73152
26NA73201
26NA73251
26NA73251
26NA73411
26NA73421
26NA73461
26NA73471
26NA73500
26NA73510
26NA73570
26NA73610
26NA73680
26NA73731
26NA73731
26NA73731
26NA73731
26NA76010
26NA80041
26NA80041
26NA80060
26NA82020
26NA82512
26NA82512
26NA82512
26NA88040
26NA88460
26NA90060
26NA90060
26NA90110
26NA90110
26NA90190
26NA90260
26NA90270
26NA90280
26NA90280
26NA90300
26NA90310
26NA90360
26NA90360
26NA90370
26NA90370
26NA90380
26NA90380
26NA90410
26NA90410
26NA90452
26NA90452
26NA90470
26NA90470
26NA97040
26NA97083
26NA97270
26NA97312
26NA97312
26NA97491
26NA97830
26NE88310
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
11
11
7
11
13
11
7
11
79
79
79
79
79
29
79
81
81
81
79
79
79
81
81
3
3
5
43
79
17
17
71
35
17
35
39
45
33
81
79
89
81
87
87
91
87
79
91
87
87
79
93
79
93
79
93
57
93
65
93
67
93
5
7
65
75
77
49
5
5
5
4
3
12
2
10
11
2
8
7
13
15
5
13
4
13
9
12
14
12
26
18
6
15
4
11
10
29
8
18
11
17
22
29
4
10
3
17
11
3
21
3
5
6
6
21
7
7
2
19
1
20
2
22
3
32
4
10
10
2
12
20
15
21
13
5
10
19
18
PART
NUMBER
26NE88610
26NE97141
26NE97141
26NE97185
26NE97280
26NE97290
26NE97820
26PA-4141
26PA40033
26PA40743
26TA-2050
26TA-2090
26TA-2271
26TA-3062
26TA-3330
26TA-5460
26TA12022
26TA15080
26TA15750
26TA20190
26TA20320
26TA21460
26TA21470
26TA21480
26TA21490
26TA21510
26TA21540
26TA21611
26TA32580
26TA32610
26TA32640
26TA33010
26TA50150
26TA50170
26TA53171
26TA80021
26TA90040
26TA90040
26TA90490
26TA90490
26WA-2501
26WA-3250
26WA-5341
26WA32520
26WA32530
26WA40230
26WA47212
26WA47222
26WA90120
26WA90130
26WA90130
26WA90330
26WA90330
26WA90330
26WA90330
26WA90440
26WA90440
26WE-3340
26XA-4050
26XA40920
26XA90120
26XA90120
26XA90130
26XA90130
26YA-4580
26YE-3340
27LA-2000
27LA-2110
27LA-2290
1st Edition
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
81
5
11
5
75
77
5
39
41
47
25
23
25
33
37
51
5
15
15
23
23
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
37
37
37
35
71
71
57
13
53
85
57
93
27
35
53
35
35
39
75
77
39
45
95
3
37
71
93
59
93
37
39
39
39
91
45
95
49
36
21
21
21
16
21
13
6
12
10
10
2
8
6
17
10
11
1
8
11
1
34
17
14
6
15
1
2
14
16
13
10
2
4
3
25
8
9
3
17
14
3
2
7
14
6
1
15
7
10
18
18
8
1
3
16
11
12
5
5
6
9
25
24
8
2
1
3
5
9
7
5
9
Page 107
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
PART
NUMBER
27LA-3000
27LA-4010
27LA-4500
27LA-4740
27LA-5400
27LA-5460
27LA-6260
27LA-6500
27LA-9020
27LA-9030
27LA-9070
27LA-9300
27LA10360
27LA12450
27LA15500
27LA15510
27LA15520
27LA15530
27LA15540
27LA15630
27LA15770
27LA17140
27LA17540
27LA17550
27LA32720
27LA40280
27LA40750
27LA41030
27LA41030
27LA51130
27LA53040
27LA53070
27LA53080
27LA53270
27LA53470
27LA53830
27LA53900
27LA53941
27LA54270
27LA54290
27LA54460
27LA70210
27LA80010
27LA80010
27LA80030
27LA80510
27LA80510
27LA80510
27LA80510
27LA80510
27LA82010
27LA82010
27LA83520
27LA84010
27LA84510
27LA87520
27LA88030
27LA90010
27LA90020
27LA90030
27LA90070
27LA90070
27LA90080
27LA90080
27LA90090
27LA90160
27LA90160
27LA90320
27LA90320
Page 108
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
31
47
49
75
55
51
11
83
81
9
81
81
3
7
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
17
17
35
41
41
39
45
73
57
57
57
55
55
55
52
57
55
57
57
9
15
19
15
3
5
43
79
81
19
59
9
79
81
9
79
85
97
87
21
89
79
85
89
9
93
79
91
1
1
1
3
5
11
16
1
2
12
5
3
14
13
26
27
18
37
20
30
39
13
30
29
30
5
9
23
23
15
12
5
20
2
17
13
11
27
4
37
36
13
38
1
11
2
23
7
24
4
11
4
5
16
15
16
17
1
1
1
2
1
23
4
2
6
11
18
3
PART
NUMBER
27LA90400
27LA90520
27LA97110
27LA97130
27LB50880
27LB51120
27LB97120
27LE-5300
27LE-7000
27MA90010
27MA97120
27NA-6500
27NA-9300
27NA90030
27NA97120
27NE-5300
304078040
304078040
322076010
392045260
396040611
40AA-4060
40AA20170
40AA20230
40AA40150
40AA40150
40AA40150
40AA40181
40AA40181
40AA40450
40AA40450
40AA42100
40AA42270
40AA42310
40AA47130
40AA47130
40AA53470
40AA73191
40AA76040
40AA76040
40AA77290
40AA77290
40AA85010
40AA88030
40LA-1030
40LA-1040
40LA-1260
40LA-1310
40LA-1320
40LA-1570
40LA-2140
40LA-2600
40LA-3111
40LA-3121
40LA-3130
40LA-3141
40LA-3150
40LA-3160
40LA-3170
40LA-3180
40LA-3202
40LA-3220
40LA-3231
40LA-3320
40LA-3350
40LA-4011
40LA-4440
40LA-4720
40LA-4720
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
89
93
5
5
69
69
5
51
9
95
5
83
81
87
5
51
61
73
17
11
65
61
23
23
39
45
63
41
47
41
47
63
63
61
75
77
51
21
39
45
75
77
79
35
17
19
7
5
6
15
21
29
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
35
35
37
37
35
47
61
75
77
4
9
27
26
33
34
25
1
1
1
25
1
3
1
25
1
13
10
28
1
6
20
19
5
17
16
13
1
4
4
5
15
8
7
6
6
9
3
18
17
7
7
1
22
31
19
12
14
8
36
16
3
2
3
4
9
5
1
6
8
1
14
1
11
3
3
1
9
13
PART
NUMBER
40LA-5410
40LA-5420
40LA-6270
40LA-6280
40LA-9040
40LA-9110
40LA10170
40LA10350
40LA10350
40LA12011
40LA12042
40LA12051
40LA12061
40LA12081
40LA12131
40LA12161
40LA12232
40LA12241
40LA12342
40LA12540
40LA12561
40LA12571
40LA13071
40LA16120
40LA16190
40LA17010
40LA17030
40LA17040
40LA17260
40LA17480
40LA17480
40LA17490
40LA17490
40LA20940
40LA32270
40LA40090
40LA40090
40LA40970
40LA40990
40LA45350
40LA45410
40LA47011
40LA47021
40LA47040
40LA47040
40LA47260
40LA47260
40LA48190
40LA48190
40LA50160
40LA50640
40LA51210
40LA51220
40LA53510
40LA53890
40LA54110
40LA54310
40LA54430
40LA61121
40LA61140
40LA61211
40LA61221
40LA61830
40LA61920
40LA61930
40LA62010
40LA62460
40LA70011
40LA70021
March, 2004
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
55
55
11
11
9
81
7
3
37
5
5
7
5
5
5
7
7
7
3
7
5
5
6
19
17
19
17
17
19
17
19
17
19
21
35
39
45
46
45
49
49
75
77
75
77
75
77
5
67
71
35
69
69
55
53
57
57
51
11
11
13
13
11
13
13
11
13
9
9
8
9
1
7
10
19
16
13
5
9
2
4
17
8
15
1
10
2
1
9
16
22
17
12
20
18
24
7
16
11
6
16
4
15
26
15
14
17
19
11
2
4
4
2
2
20
20
4
7
10
1
36
37
1
6
9
30
2
14
11
20
19
15
5
10
17
13
9
3
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com
PART
NUMBER
40LA70031
40LA70111
40LA70121
40LA70130
40LA70140
40LA70150
40LA70161
40LA70170
40LA70180
40LA70191
40LA70200
40LA70230
40LA70240
40LA70550
40LA70911
40LA73261
40LA73281
40LA73331
40LA73380
40LA83010
40LA83510
40LA90040
40LA90050
40LA90050
40LA90220
40LA90250
40LA90250
40LA90340
40LA90340
40LA90520
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
11
9
81
81
79
81
13
81
85
53
87
97
31
91
17
91
93
4
21
22
23
20
25
18
19
15
24
14
7
11
18
8
10
20
6
8
12
11
2
13
4
2
4
5
26
4
8
Models 7222/7228/7235
PART
NUMBER
40LA90540
40LA97300
40LA97300
40LA97350
40LA97361
40LA97370
40LA97380
40LA97390
40LA97400
40LA97430
40LA97450
40LA97480
40LE70040
40LE83020
40LE83030
40LE97880
466076020
466076020
466076020
466077130
466078010
466078010
466078010
508053460
508053460
540040562
540042120
540042350
540076010
540076010
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
91
75
77
65
81
73
49
75
77
41
70
49
9
53
53
69
15
63
71
65
31
57
69
66
71
63
65
61
39
45
1
19
19
12
7
1
6
5
13
13
26
13
2
3
4
29
1
7
4
7
2
19
24
11
7
14
9
16
13
7
PART
NUMBER
540076010
552012250
552012250
55GA86010
55VA85520
55VA85520
55VA87542
56AA17320
56AA17320
56AA17320
56AA17320
56AA17320
56AA17830
56AA80540
56AA85510
56AA85510
56AA85510
56AA85510
56AA85510
56AA85510
56AA85510
56AA85510
56AA85530
56GA73430
56GA80061
56QA75070
56QA75070
684276031
SP00-0110
1st Edition
PAGE REF.
NO. NO.
63
69
73
81
57
65
9
15
17
31
55
71
29
79
3
11
37
39
45
59
63
71
11
71
71
13
15
17
53
16
9
2
1
1
11
17
6
4
20
16
13
18
28
17
9
6
7
2
6
10
22
3
27
14
14
8
21
15
Page 109
March, 2004
manuals4you.com
Page 110
March, 2004
Models 7222/7228/7235
1st Edition
manuals4you.com

Konica Copier 7145-7222-7228-7235 Parts &amp; Service

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Konica Copier 7145-7222-7228-7235 Parts &amp; Service

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SERVICE MANUAL

KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS SOLUTIONS U.S.A., INC.

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2

IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

1. OUTLINE OF SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

3. CENTER CROSS SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Drum drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Fixing/Paper exit section/IT-101/RU-101 drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Paper feed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Drive from paper feed motor to loop clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Tray 2 drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

4.5.5 Registration clutch drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Scanner drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

1. SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Original reading mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Original read control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

APS control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Image processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2. WRITE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2.2.2 Write control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

3.2.1 Image formation timing (when copying two sheets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Developing control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

5. TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Tray up drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Remaining paper detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

7. FIXING UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

7.2.2 Cleaning web control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Switching control of the paper exit/ADU conveyance path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Paper reverse control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

10.1 Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

10. NETWORK SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

11.2 Components operated when the power switch is on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

11.3.2 Fan operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Replacing the loop clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

2.5 Reinstalling the ribbon cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Removing the operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

3.9 Installing the optics wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Removing and reinstalling the drum unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Removing and reinstalling the charge control plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

11.3.1 Composition of the cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Replacing the transfer and separation wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

6. DEVELOPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Removing and reinstalling the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

7. TONER SUPPLY/CLEANING/RECYCLE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Removing and reinstalling the toner bottle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Removing and reinstalling the toner supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Removing and reinstalling the cleaning blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

8. PAPER FEED UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Replacing the double feed prevention rubber (tray 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52

Removing and reinstalling the fixing claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64

8.7 Cleaning the paper dust removing brush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Konica Copier 7145-7222-7228-7235 Parts & Service

Konica Copier 7145-7222-7228-7235 Parts & Service